BH03 Vol III Employers Requirements

Madhya Pradesh Metro Rail Corporation Limited
(MPMRCL)
(A Joint Venture of Government of India and Government of Madhya Pradesh)
Tender Package: BH-03

“Part Design and Construction of Elevated Viaduct, Six (6)
Elevated Metro Rail Stations viz Pul Bogda (a Passenger
Interchange station between Orange and Blue line),
Aishbagh, Sindhi Colony, DIG Bungalow, Krishi Upaj Mandi
and Karond and Two ramps between Chainages 27+000 &
28+375 and 31+765 & 36+139” for Bhopal Metro Rail
Project”.
VOLUME III
Employer’s Requirements (ER)
Bhopal Metro Rail Project
Package BH-03
Volume III – Employer’s Requirements
Table of Content
Table of Content ............................................................................................................. 1
1 Contractor’s Organisation and Superintendence .............................................. 13
1.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 13
1.2 Organisation chart ............................................................................................................ 13
1.3 Key Personnel................................................................................................................... 13
1.4 Design (DDC)Team Key Persons .................................................................................. 25
1.5 Subcontractors and Suppliers ........................................................................................ 29
1.6 Health and Safety Staff ................................................................................................... 29
1.7 Records of Contractor's Personnel ................................................................................ 39
1.8 Responsibility Matrix ........................................................................................................ 39
1.9 Festivals and Religious Customs................................................................................... 39
1.10 Burial/Cremation of the Dead ......................................................................................... 39
1.11 Disorderly Conduct........................................................................................................... 39
1.12 Housing of Labour ............................................................................................................ 39
2 Commercial, Cost, Risk & Change Management ............................................... 41
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 41
2.2 Change Management ...................................................................................................... 41
2.3 Commercial Management ............................................................................................... 41
2.4 Risk Management ............................................................................................................ 42
2.5 Commercial, Contractual and Cost Management Reporting ..................................... 42
3 Planning, Programming and Progress Management ......................................... 43
3.1 Project Management ........................................................................................................ 43
3.2 Software ............................................................................................................................. 43
3.3 Programmes...................................................................................................................... 43
3.4 Baseline Programme ....................................................................................................... 44
3.5 Programme Submissions ................................................................................................ 45
3.6 Construction Update Programme .................................................................................. 46
3.7 Supplementary Programmes List .................................................................................. 47
3.8 Effects on Programme of Delays and Change ............................................................ 47
4 Record Keeping and Progress Reporting ........................................................... 48
4.1 Record Keeping ................................................................................................................ 48
Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 1 of 398

Package BH-03
4.2 Progress Reporting .......................................................................................................... 48

4.3 Exception Reporting......................................................................................................... 49
4.4 Visuals Reporting ............................................................................................................. 49
5 Health and Safety Management ........................................................................... 51
5.1 Compliance ....................................................................................................................... 51
5.2 Legislation, Codes of Practice ........................................................................................ 52
5.3 Management Responsibility............................................................................................ 52
5.4 Subcontractors.................................................................................................................. 52
5.5 Breach of Health and Safety Obligations...................................................................... 53
5.6 Contractor’s Documentation ........................................................................................... 54
5.7 Job Hazard Assessments (JHA’s) ................................................................................. 56
5.8 Contractor’s Safety Arrangements ................................................................................ 56
6 Quality Management ............................................................................................ 61
6.1 Compliance ....................................................................................................................... 61
6.2 Contractor’s Documentation ........................................................................................... 62
6.3 Quality Management System Information .................................................................... 64
6.4 Audits ................................................................................................................................. 64
6.5 Quality Control Requirements ........................................................................................ 65
6.6 Notice of Place of Manufacture and/or Source of Supply .......................................... 65
6.7 Quality Training................................................................................................................. 66
7 Design Management............................................................................................. 67
7.1 Contractors Compliance and Obligations ..................................................................... 67
7.2 Design Submittal .............................................................................................................. 67
7.3 Design Plan ....................................................................................................................... 68
7.4 Design Submission Programme .................................................................................... 69
7.5 Design Quality Checking Plan ........................................................................................ 69
7.6 Design Submission Stages ............................................................................................. 70
7.7 Detailed Design Stage 1 {DS1 - Preliminary}............................................................... 70
7.8 Detailed Design Stage 2 {DS2 - Final} .......................................................................... 71
7.9 Design Submission Requirements ................................................................................ 73
7.10 Format of Calculations..................................................................................................... 73
7.11 BIM 3D and CAD Data .................................................................................................... 74

Package BH-03
7.12 Manufacture, Construction and Installation .................................................................. 74

7.13 Working (Shop) Drawings (Structural Architectural) ................................................... 74
7.14 As-Built Drawings and Calculations .............................................................................. 74
7.15 As Built Survey ................................................................................................................. 75
8 Information Management ..................................................................................... 76
8.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 76
8.2 Project Management Information System (PMIS) ....................................................... 76
8.3 Electronic Document Management System (EDMS) .................................................. 76
8.4 Records.............................................................................................................................. 77
8.5 Document Submittal Register ......................................................................................... 78
8.6 Document Submissions................................................................................................... 79
8.7 Electronic Submissions and Software to be provided ................................................ 79
9 Stakeholder and Communication Management ................................................. 80
9.1 Stakeholder and Communication Management Plan {SCMP} .................................. 80
9.2 External Communications ............................................................................................... 80
10 Construction, Manufacturing, Installation and Logistics .................................. 81
10.1 Method Statements .......................................................................................................... 81
10.2 Survey ................................................................................................................................ 82
10.3 Contractor’s Equipment ................................................................................................... 83
10.4 Removal of Temporary Works and Facilities ............................................................... 83
10.5 Temporary Traffic Management ..................................................................................... 83
10.6 Demolition of Structures .................................................................................................. 85
10.7 Disposal of Excavated and Contaminated Materials .................................................. 85
10.8 Restoration of Areas Disturbed by Construction ......................................................... 86
10.9 Manufacturing ................................................................................................................... 86
10.10 Equipment Installation ..................................................................................................... 87
10.11 Storage, Shipping and Delivery...................................................................................... 88
10.12 Logistics ............................................................................................................................. 88
10.13 Key Materials Stocks and Supplies ............................................................................... 89
11 Site Management .................................................................................................. 90
11.1 Access to the Site............................................................................................................. 90
11.2 Site Installation ................................................................................................................. 90

Package BH-03
11.3 Site Conditions, Maintenance and Clearance.............................................................. 91

11.4 Site Utilities ........................................................................................................................ 92
11.5 Site Traffic Management and Transport Safety ........................................................... 92
11.6 Contractors Responsibilities ........................................................................................... 93
11.7 Services and Facilities for the Employer and Engineer .............................................. 94
11.8 Office Equipment and Services for the Engineer ........................................................ 97
12 Interface Management .......................................................................................... 98
12.1 Interfaces ........................................................................................................................... 98
12.2 Interfacing Parties ............................................................................................................ 98
12.3 Interface Management Plan............................................................................................ 99
12.4 Interface Management Plan & Programme (IMPP) .................................................... 99
12.5 Responsibilities of the Contractor ................................................................................ 100
12.6 Interface Management System .................................................................................... 100
12.7 Responsibility Interface Matrix and Interface Sheets ............................................... 101
12.8 Interface Register ........................................................................................................... 101
12.9 Coordinated Design Interface Programme (CDIP) and Report............................... 101
12.10 Interface Management Software (IMS) and Reporting ............................................. 102
13 Testing and Commissioning ...............................................................................103
13.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 103
13.2 Test Plan & Procedure .................................................................................................. 103
13.3 Test Instrumentation ...................................................................................................... 104
13.4 Testing and Commissioning Stages ............................................................................ 104
13.5 General Testing .............................................................................................................. 106
13.6 Architecture and Plumbing Testing and Commissioning ......................................... 106
13.7 Test Reports.................................................................................................................... 106
13.8 Commissioning Co-ordination ...................................................................................... 106
14 Operating and Maintenance Manuals, Record Drawings..................................106
14.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 106
14.2 Record Drawings and As-Built Records ..................................................................... 107
14.3 Maintenance Drawings .................................................................................................. 107
15 Employer Training ...............................................................................................109
15.1 Operations and Maintenance Training Requirement ................................................ 109

Package BH-03
15.2 Operations and Maintenance Training Objectives .................................................... 109

15.3 Selection of Operations and Maintenance Trainees ................................................. 109
15.4 Operations and Maintenance Training Methods ....................................................... 109
15.5 Contractor’s Operations and Maintenance Training Staff ........................................ 110
15.6 Operations and Maintenance Training Locations ...................................................... 110
15.7 Operations and Maintenance Training Equipment .................................................... 110
15.8 Administration ................................................................................................................. 111
17 Environmental and Sustainability Management ................................................112
17.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 112
17.2 Personnel......................................................................................................................... 112
17.3 Breach of Environmental Obligations .......................................................................... 113
17.4 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) ................................................................... 113
17.5 Risk Assessments .......................................................................................................... 114
17.6 Environmental Inspections and Monitoring by the Contractor ................................. 114
17.7 Environmental Audits by the Contractor ..................................................................... 114
17.8 Reporting of Environmental Incidents ......................................................................... 115
17.9 Monthly Reports ............................................................................................................. 115
17.10 Sustainability ................................................................................................................... 116
18 Scope of Work .....................................................................................................120
18.1 Brief Scope of Work ....................................................................................................... 120
18.2 General ............................................................................................................................ 120
18.3 Clearances, Investigations and Reinstatement ......................................................... 124
18.4 Detailed Scope of Works............................................................................................... 125
18.5 Design .............................................................................................................................. 133
18.6 3D BIM requirements ..................................................................................................... 134
18.7 Interface and Coordination............................................................................................ 138
18.8 Utility Diversions ............................................................................................................. 139
18.9 Project Time Requirements .......................................................................................... 142
APPENDIX I – HEALTH AND SAFETY MANUAL........................................................143
19 Purpose ................................................................................................................143
20 Scope ...................................................................................................................143
21 Definitions............................................................................................................143

Package BH-03
22 Responsibilities ...................................................................................................144
22.1 Project Directors ............................................................................................................. 144
22.2 Senior Managers ............................................................................................................ 144
22.3 Designers......................................................................................................................... 146
22.4 Health and Safety Managers, Engineers and Officers ............................................. 146
22.5 Section, Site, Discipline Engineers and Foremen ..................................................... 147
22.6 Supervisors ..................................................................................................................... 148
22.7 All Employees ................................................................................................................. 149
23 Legal and Other Requirements...........................................................................150
24 Zero Harm ............................................................................................................150
24.1 Health and Safety Principles ........................................................................................ 150
24.2 Health and Safety Objectives and Key Performance Indicators (KPI’s) ................ 151
25 Health and Safety Management System (HSMS) ...............................................151
25.1 Health and Safety Policy ............................................................................................... 152
25.2 Construction Health & Safety Standards .................................................................... 152
25.3 Health and Safety Plan .................................................................................................. 153
25.4 Health and Safety Procedures ..................................................................................... 153
25.5 Guidance, Forms and Work Instructions .................................................................... 153
26 Management of Subcontractors .........................................................................154
27 Drugs and Alcohol...............................................................................................154
28 Risk Assessment and Controls ..........................................................................155
28.1 Risk Assessment ............................................................................................................ 155
28.2 Controls............................................................................................................................ 156
29 Construction Design Management (CDM) .........................................................156
29.1 Temporary Works ........................................................................................................... 157
30 Lone Working ......................................................................................................158
31 Method Statements and Task Briefings .............................................................158
31.1 Method Statements ........................................................................................................ 158
31.2 Task Briefings/Safety Task Analysis Risk Reduction Talk (STARRT) ................... 159
32 Competency and Training...................................................................................160
32.1 Competency .................................................................................................................... 160
32.2 Training ............................................................................................................................ 161

Package BH-03
33 Communication and Consultation .....................................................................162

33.1 Communication ............................................................................................................... 162
33.2 Consultation .................................................................................................................... 163
33.3 Third Party Consultation ................................................................................................ 163
33.4 Safety stand-down meeting .......................................................................................... 164
34 Health and Safety Meetings ................................................................................164
34.1 Health and Safety Committee ...................................................................................... 164
34.2 H&S Leadership Forum ................................................................................................. 164
35 Reporting & Statistics .........................................................................................164
35.1 Weekly H&S Flash Report ............................................................................................ 165
35.2 Monthly Health and Safety Report ............................................................................... 165
35.3 H&S Dashboard .............................................................................................................. 165
36 Health and Safety Culture, Award and Recognition Schemes and Initiatives .165
36.1 Health and Safety Culture ............................................................................................. 165
36.2 Health and Safety Awards and Recognition Schemes ............................................. 166
36.3 Health and Safety initiative ........................................................................................... 166
37 Monitoring, Inspections and Audits ...................................................................166
37.1 Monitoring ........................................................................................................................ 166
37.2 Inspections (Surveillances) ........................................................................................... 166
37.3 Audits and Assessments ............................................................................................... 167
37.4 H&S Leadership Tours .................................................................................................. 167
37.5 Statutory Inspection ....................................................................................................... 168
38 Health and Safety Enforcement ..........................................................................168
39 Accident, Incident and Near Miss Reporting and Investigation .......................169
39.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 169
39.2 Process ............................................................................................................................ 170
40 Operational Controls ...........................................................................................172
40.1 First Aid Provisions ........................................................................................................ 172
40.2 Medical Requirements ................................................................................................... 173
40.3 Emergency Preparedness ............................................................................................ 174
40.4 Fire.................................................................................................................................... 176
40.5 Compressed Gas Cylinders .......................................................................................... 178

Package BH-03
40.6 Welding ............................................................................................................................ 179

40.7 Electricity ......................................................................................................................... 180
40.8 Underground Services ................................................................................................... 181
40.9 Overhead Power Lines .................................................................................................. 182
40.10 Excavations ..................................................................................................................... 183
40.11 Tunnelling ........................................................................................................................ 184
40.12 Confined Spaces ............................................................................................................ 184
40.13 Demolition ........................................................................................................................ 186
40.14 Working at Height ........................................................................................................... 187
40.15 Lifting Equipment and Lifting Operations.................................................................... 194
40.16 Steelwork ......................................................................................................................... 199
40.17 Plant and Vehicles ......................................................................................................... 200
40.18 Machinery and Equipment ............................................................................................ 202
40.19 Hand and Power Tools .................................................................................................. 202
40.20 Safe Movement of Plant and Vehicles on Site .......................................................... 206
40.21 Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO) ............................................................................................ 208
40.22 Asbestos .......................................................................................................................... 208
40.23 Permit to Work ................................................................................................................ 209
40.24 Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) ............................................ 210
40.25 Storage and Handling of Materials .............................................................................. 212
40.26 Housekeeping ................................................................................................................. 213
40.27 Night Work ....................................................................................................................... 213
40.28 Climatic Conditions ........................................................................................................ 215
40.29 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and Work Clothing ...................................... 215
40.30 Safety Signs and Signals .............................................................................................. 217
40.31 Working Over or Adjacent to Water ............................................................................. 217
40.32 Welfare Facilities ............................................................................................................ 218
40.33 Worker Welfare Accommodation ................................................................................. 221
40.34 Noise and Vibration ........................................................................................................ 221
40.35 Manual Handling............................................................................................................. 222
40.36 Security ............................................................................................................................ 222
40.37 Health and Safety File ................................................................................................... 224

Package BH-03
40.38 Health and Safety Penalty & Awards .......................................................................... 225

40.39 Undermining nearby structures .................................................................................... 225
40.40 Drilling & Blasting Operations ....................................................................................... 225
40.41 Work Adjacent to Live Railways ................................................................................... 227
40.42 Work Adjacent to Live Roadways ................................................................................ 227
40.43 Medical Staff ................................................................................................................... 227
40.44 Ambulance....................................................................................................................... 227
40.45 Launching Operation & Segment Casting .................................................................. 227
APPENDIX II – QUALITY MANUAL .............................................................................240
1 Purpose ................................................................................................................240
2 Scope ...................................................................................................................240
3 Definitions............................................................................................................240
4.2 Senior Managers ............................................................................................................ 241
4.3 Designers......................................................................................................................... 242
4.4 Quality Managers and Officers..................................................................................... 242
4.6 Supervisors ..................................................................................................................... 243
4.7 All Employees ................................................................................................................. 243
6 Quality Objectives ...............................................................................................244
7 Quality Standards, Codes and Specifications ...................................................244
8 Tender and Procurement ....................................................................................244
9 Design and Engineering......................................................................................245
10 Construction ........................................................................................................246
11 Commissioning and Handover ...........................................................................248
12 Operations and Maintenance ..............................................................................249
13 Training ................................................................................................................250
14 Closing .................................................................................................................250
15 Quality Surveillance, Non-Conformities and Improvement ..............................251
16 Quality Monitoring and Reporting ......................................................................252

Package BH-03
APPENDIX III – ENVIRONMENT MANUAL .................................................................253

1 Purpose ................................................................................................................253
2 Scope ...................................................................................................................253
3 Definitions............................................................................................................253
4.2 Senior Managers ............................................................................................................ 256
4.3 Designers......................................................................................................................... 257
4.4 Environmental Managers and Officers........................................................................ 258
4.6 Supervisors ..................................................................................................................... 259
4.7 All Employees ................................................................................................................. 260
6 Environmental Objectives and Key Performance Indicators (KPI’s) ...............262
7 Environmental Management System (EMS) ......................................................262
7.1 Environmental Policy ..................................................................................................... 263
7.2 Construction Environmental Standards ...................................................................... 264
7.3 Environmental Management Plan................................................................................ 264
7.4 Environmental Procedures............................................................................................ 265
7.5 Guidance, Forms and Work Instructions .................................................................... 265
8 Management of Subcontractors .........................................................................265
9 Environmental Risk Assessment and Controls ................................................266
9.1 Risk Assessment ............................................................................................................ 266
9.2 Controls............................................................................................................................ 266
10 Method Statements .............................................................................................267
11 Competency and Training...................................................................................267
11.1 Competency .................................................................................................................... 267
11.2 Training ............................................................................................................................ 268
12 Communication and Consultation .....................................................................269
12.1 Communication ............................................................................................................... 269
12.2 Consultation .................................................................................................................... 270
13 Environmental Meetings .....................................................................................270

Package BH-03
14 Reporting .............................................................................................................270
14.1 Monthly Environmental Report ..................................................................................... 270
15 Inspections and Audits .......................................................................................271
15.1 Inspections (Surveillances) ........................................................................................... 271
15.2 Audits and Assessments ............................................................................................... 271
16 Environmental Enforcement Notices .................................................................272
17 Incident Reporting and Investigation .................................................................272
17.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 272
18 Environmentally Friendly Construction Practices ............................................274
18.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 274
18.2 Containment of Air Pollutant ......................................................................................... 274
18.3 Containment of water Pollution .................................................................................... 276
18.4 Containment of Noise and Vibration............................................................................ 277
Table 12 Permitted Values of PPV .....................................................................282
18.5 Containment of Waste ................................................................................................... 284
19 Housekeeping ......................................................................................................289
19.1 Prevention of Mosquito Breeding ................................................................................. 290
20 Welfare Facilities .................................................................................................290
20.1 Toilets ............................................................................................................................... 290
21 Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) .....................................291
22 Landscape and Aesthetics .................................................................................292
23 Archaeological and Historic Resources ............................................................293
24 Environmental Monitoring ..................................................................................294
24.1 General: ........................................................................................................................... 294
24.2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring:.................................................................................... 295
24.3 Noise and Vibration ........................................................................................................ 296
25 Sustainable Development & Environmental Considerations ...........................302
25.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 302
25.2 Environmental Certification ........................................................................................... 303
25.3 Energy Efficiency ............................................................................................................ 303
25.4 Material and Resource Conservation .......................................................................... 305
25.5 Indoor Environmental Quality ....................................................................................... 307

Package BH-03
25.6 Operations and Maintenance ....................................................................................... 309

26 Environmental – Penalties ..................................................................................310
APPENDIX IV - PROJECT INTERFACE MATRIX ........................................................316

Package BH-03
1 Contractor’s Organisation and Superintendence

1.1 General
1.1.1 The Contractor shall staff the Project with manpower sufficient to achieve the Time
for Completion date stated in the Key Dates.
1.1.2 Throughout the design and execution of the Works, and as long thereafter as is
necessary to fulfil the Contractor's obligations, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary superintendence to plan, arrange, direct, manage, inspect and test the
work.
1.1.3 Superintendence shall be given by a sufficient number of persons having adequate
knowledge of Hindi and the English language, and any other language as may be
appropriate, of the operations to be carried out (including the methods and
techniques required and the hazards likely to be encountered and methods of
preventing accidents), for the satisfactory and safe execution of the Works.
1.1.4 The Contractor's Personnel shall be appropriately qualified, skilled and experienced
in their respective trades or occupations.
1.2 Organisation chart
1.2.1 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for review and approval a mobilisation plan and organisation chart
detailing the proposed management, design and technical staff organisation for the
Contract.
1.2.2 This organisation chart shall cover all aspects of the Contract and define the
functions, responsibilities and authorities of each person represented.
1.2.3 Lines of reporting and responsibility of subordinates shall be included in the chart.
1.3 Key Personnel
1.3.1 Key Personnel shall be directly employed by the Contractor.
1.3.2 After the Commencement Date the Contractor shall submit names, qualifications
and experience of all Key Personnel, as detailed in clause 1.3.6, for approval by the
Engineer.
1.3.3 he Contractor shall not remove or replace any Key Personnel without the prior
approval of the Engineer. Any substitute Key Personnel shall be suitably qualified
and experienced for the duties of the position to which the Contractor intends to
appoint them. Any changes or additions to either the organisation or Key Personnel
shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer. The contractor will also not
demobilise any key personal without approval of the Engineer
1.3.4 The Contractor shall ensure that there is a minimum handover period of two weeks
for new Key Personnel.

Package BH-03
1.3.5 Contractor Key Personnel shall have the minimum qualifications and experience as described in the table below;
Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

Numbers Qualification Experience post total
(1) Position
qualification in experience
(3) (4)
(2) metro/ rail post
/high/semi high qualificatio
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(refer Column 2) (6)
(Years)
(5)
C1.1 * Project Manager of the Contractor with 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 20

experience in Elevated Metro construction, major
infrastructure design and build projects including
design management, project management and
construction supervision.
C1.2(a) ** Dy Project Manager (Station), with experience in 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 15

major multi-disciplinary infrastructure design and
build projects, including Metro elevated stations .
C1.2(b) * Dy Project Manager (Viaduct & Launching), with 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 15

experience in major multi-disciplinary
infrastructure projects, including elevated
Metro/Rail project

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
C1.2(c) * Dy Project Manager (Casting Yard), with 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 15

experience in major multi-disciplinary
infrastructure projects, including elevated
Metro/rail/ Elevated roads/ Bridges and casting
yard .
C1.3 * Planning Manager, with experience in major 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

infrastructure design-build projects, , construction
management and reporting.
C1.4** Civil Construction Manager (Viaduct & 2 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

Launching), experienced in major infrastructure
or
project, experience in viaduct construction and/or
Launching Operation in Metro Viaduct/ Elevated Diploma (Civil) 5 15
Road/ Bridge construction
C1.5 Civil Construction Manager (Stations), 2 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
experienced in major infrastructure and experience or
in Metro Station construction
Diploma (Civil) 5 15
C1.6** Civil Construction Manager (Casting Yard), 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

experienced in major infrastructure and experience
in managing Casting Yard
C1.7 Civil Construction Engineer (Viaduct & 4 BE (Civil) 3 5

Launching), experienced in major infrastructure
or
project, experience in viaduct construction and/or
Launching Operation in Metro Viaduct/ Elevated
Road / Bridge Diploma (Civil) 3 10
C1.8 Civil construction Engineer (Station) having 6 BE (Civil) 3 5

experience in construction of Metro Stations /
or
Airports

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
C1.9 Civil construction Engineer having experience in 2 BE (Civil) 3 5

construction of precast structural elements in
or
Casting Yard of Metro / Rail Projects.
C1.10 ** Interface Manager will manage and document 1 B.E. (Electrical or 5 10

design interface between all disciplines and Mechanical or Civil)
stakeholders
C1.11 ** Planning Engineer having experienced in civils, / 1 B.E (Civil) 3 8

structures on large infrastructure /rail/Metro
projects with knowledge of MS Office & Primavera.

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
C1.12 * Geotechnical Manager, with experience in 1 M. Tech (Geotech) or 5 10

geotechnical site investigation and reporting M.Sc. (Geology)
C1.13 * Plant & Machinery Manager having experience in 1 B.E. (Mechanical) 5 15

managing the workshop along with plant and
or
machinery in civils, / structures on large
infrastructure /rail/Metro projects. Diploma (Mechanical)
5 20
C1.14 ** Design Coordinator experienced in civils, / 1 M (Tech) (Structure) 5 10

structures on large infrastructure /rail/Metro
or
projects for design coordination with DDC.
B Tech (Civil)
5 12
C1.15 ** Design Architect, experienced in the planning 1 B. Arch. 5 10

and design of Metro Railway elevated or

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
Underground stations
C1.16 Architectural Construction Manager, experienced 1 B. Arch. 5 10

in major infrastructure project and experience of fit-
out of Metro Stations
C1.17 * QA Manager, experienced in management of 1 B.E. (Civil) 3 10

Quality Assurance systems on large transport
infrastructure projects.
C1.18 QA Engineer, experienced in management of 2 BE(Civil) 3 5

Quality Assurance systems on large transport
C1.19* QC Manager, experienced in management of 1 B.E. (Civil) 3 10

Quality Control systems on large transport

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
C1.20** QC Engineer, experienced in management of 2 B E (Civil) 3 5

Quality Control systems on large transport
infrastructure project
C1.21** Chief Health and Safety Manager, experienced in 1 i. B.E/B. Tech in Civil/ 5 For (i) and
management of Health & Safety Assurance Mech with Degree / (ii) 15 years
systems on large transport infrastructure projects, Diploma in Safety
from recognized
institution For (iii) 18
years
ii. Two years duration
Full time regular M.
E/M Tech. in
Industrial Safety from
recognised institution
or

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
iii. B.E. in Fire and
Safety Engg.
recognized
institution
C1.20** Environmental Manager, experienced in 1 B.E./B.Tech with Post 5 12

management of Environmental Assurance Graduation/ Diploma in
systems on large transport infrastructure projects Environment from a
recognized institution or
B.E/B.Tech in
Environmental
Engineering from a
recognized institution
Or
M.Sc in Environment

Package BH-03

(1) Position
(3) (4)
speed metro rail n
project with
(Years)
specified Field
(Years)
(5)
Science from a
recognized institution
C1.27* Utility Engineer 1 B.E. / B Tech 3 8

(Civil/Elect/Mech)
C1.28** Commercial Manager 1 B.E/BTech 5 10

(Civil/Mechanical).
C1.29 BIM Manager, will provide oversight on all building 1 Diploma/Graduate in 3 10

information management and Clash detection Engineering/
Architecture
C1.31 Traffic Manager with experience of Police Service 1 Graduation in any 0 10

preferably in traffic management. discipline
Note:

Package BH-03
a. * - To be available continuously within 30 days from Commencement date.

b. ** - To be available within 60 Days from the Commencement Date (wherever 2 positions are required at least 1 should be deployed). Other
Key Personnel to be deployed as per the approved mobilization plan.
c. In case of non-deployment of Key Personnel, the penalty shall be imposed at the rates stated below and deducted from the contractor’s
interim payment applications. In case of non-deployment, for the part of the month, penalty shall be imposed on pro-rata basis. The decision
of the Engineer in this regard, shall be final and binding.
i. Penalty at the rate of Rs.5,00,000/- (Five lakh) per month for each Key personnel having experience of 20 years or more.
ii. Penalty at the rate of Rs.2,00,000/- (Two lakh) per month for each Key personnel having experience more than 10 years but upto
20 years.
iii. Penalty at the rate of Rs.1,00,000/- (One lakh) per month for each Key personnel having experience upto 10 years.

Package BH-03
1.3.6 The Engineer may designate other positions as Key Personnel or reduce the number
of such positions at any time during the Contract.
1.3.7 The mobilisation plan shall show the qualifications and experience of all staff, and
shall show the Contractor’s management structure and state clearly the duties,
responsibilities and authority of each member of staff.
1.3.8 The mobilisation plan shall be updated and resubmitted to the Engineer for review
whenever there are changes to the Contractor’s staff.
1.3.9 The Contractor’s Representative and personnel shall have experience appropriate to
the type and magnitude of the work under the Contract and shall possess relevant
university degrees or equivalent qualifications appropriate to their individual duties.
The decision of engineer will be final and binding in this regard.
1.3.10 The Contractor shall employ engineers, foreman and supervisors in connection with
each trade who are suitably experienced in that trade. The engineers, foreman and
supervisors shall be present at all times when that trade is being undertaken and shall
directly supervise the personnel carrying out the tasks
The Contractor shall submit details of the qualifications and experience of any
specialist staff identified in addition to those listed above that it proposes to use in the
major disciplines required to construct the work under the Contract.
1.3.11 Shift In-charge should be Engineer having B.E/B.Tech in Civil Engineering with 5
years of relevant field experience in Metro rail activities or Diploma with 8 years in
relevant field experience
1.3.12 “Minimum total experience post qualification (years)” means total experience of work
in any Infrastructure construction related to predominantly Civil engineering projects
etc.
1.3.13 “Minimum Experience in the specified field” means the experience of work mentioned
in the Column (2) of table 1.3.5.

Package BH-03
1.4 Design (DDC)Team Key Persons

1.4.1 The Contractor’s key functional Designer team discipline leads for Civil, Structural, Architectural shall be located and based full-time on
site in Bhopal, hence ensuring the timely daily management of the design activity.
1.4.2 The Contractor shall submit details of proposed key Designer team members to the Engineer for approval.
1.4.3 The minimum requirements for the Designer and lead team members shall be;
Category Specialisation Position Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

Numbers Qualification Experience post Total
(1) (2)
qualification in Experience
(3) (4)
metro rail project post
with specified field qualification
(refer Column 2)
(Years)
(Years)
(6)
(5)
D1.1 Design Project Manager, with experience in major 1 M. Tech (Structures) 5 20

multi-disciplinary infrastructure design build
projects, elevated structures, buildings, Metro OR
Station MEP and Architecture
B. E. / B. Tech (Civil) 10 20
D1.2 Lead Design Structural Engineer, experienced in 2 M. Tech (Structures) 5

the design of Metro Viaduct Guideway and Station
Or 15
structures
B. Tech / B.E (Civil) 8
D1.3 Lead Design Electrical Engineer with experience 1 B.E (Electrical) 5 10

in design of Metro Station Electrical Systems,

Package BH-03

(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(refer Column 2)
(Years)
(Years)
(6)
(5)
including Interface with other systems/3rd parties
(i.e., disciplines, Sub-systems or entities)
D1.4 Lead Design Mechanical Engineer, with 1 B.E (Mechanical) 5 10

experience in the design of Metro Station
Mechanical Systems, Fire Life Safety installations
and ventilation and air-conditioning systems
including Plumbing works, interface with other
systems/3rd Parties (i.e., disciplines, sub-systems
or entities)
D1.5 Lead Design Architect, experienced in the 2 B. Arch. 5 15

architectural design of Metro Railway elevated
Stations
D 1.6 BIM Manager, will provide oversight on all building 1 Diploma/Graduate in 3 05

information management and Clash detection Engineering/Architect
ure

Package BH-03

(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(refer Column 2)
(Years)
(Years)
(6)
(5)
D 1.7 Senior Geotechnical Engineer, with experience in 1 M. Tech (Geotech) 5 10

Geotechnical designs, site investigation and
reporting
Key Personnel to be deployed as per the approved mobilization plan.

Note:
a. All the above design Key Personnel shall be mobilised at Bhopal within 15days from the Commencement date and shall be available
at Bhopal till completion of Construction work.
b. In case of non-deployment of Key Personnel, the penalty shall be imposed at the rates stated below and deducted from the contractor’s
interim payment applications. In case of non-deployment, for the part of the month, penalty shall be imposed on pro-rata basis. The
decision of the Engineer in this regard, shall be final and binding.
i. Penalty at the rate of Rs.3,00,000/- (Three lakh) per month for each Key personnel having experience of 20 years or more.
ii. Penalty at the rate of Rs.2,00,000/- (Two lakh) per month for each Key personnel having experience more than 10 years but upto
20 years.
iii. Penalty at the rate of Rs.1,00,000/- (One lakh) per month for each Key personnel having experience upto 10 years.
c. One competent Design Coordinator from each discipline of Structural, Architectural & Geotechnical shall be mobilised at Bhopal within
30 days from the Commencement date and shall be available at Bhopal till completion of Construction works.

Package BH-03
d. Above Key Personnel shall be available at Bhopal for discussions/ workshops on design issues, as required by the Engineer/ Employer.
Each discipline Design Coordinator shall have minimum qualification of Bachelor Degree (in respective disciplines, that is B. Arch., B.
Tech Electrical/ Mechanical, B. Tech Geography respectively). Design Coordinators shall have relevant experience of minimum 3 years
and overall experience of minimum 7 years.

Package BH-03
1.5 Subcontractors and Suppliers

1.5.1 For all Subcontractors and Suppliers, the Engineer's approval shall be obtained
prior to mobilisation unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer as per Volume II
(GC & PC) Clause 4.4.
1.5.2 The Engineer's prior written approval of any subcontractor or supplier shall be
obtained on a case by case basis and as required by the Engineer.
In the first instance the Contractor shall submit the following information to the
Engineer for review;
a. Name of Subcontractor or Supplier;
b. Registered, Corporate and Site office details as applicable;
c. Scope of work or supply;
d. Approximate value of the subcontract or material/equipment purchase;
e. Relationships in the supply chain if not direct, i.e. purchase through a 3rd
party;
f. Relevant work experience details of subcontractor including documentary
proof;
g. Proof material/equipment from a supplier has been used on a Metro rail /
railways project in India.
1.5.3 The Contractor shall provide full details of all Subcontractors, vendors and sub-
vendors, including as a minimum those chosen for:
a. Utility diversions
b. Piling and Foundations
c. Civil works
d. Pre-Engineered Building works
e. Architecture works
1.6 Health and Safety Staff
1.6.1 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall as a minimum
appoint at least the following number of full-time health and safety staff and at all
times comply fully with Indian Law. The Contractor shall confirm monthly the
strength of their Health and Safety team on the Contract.
1.6.2 As a minimum the Contractor shall comply with the following;
a. The Contractor shall appoint at least one (1) full-time Chief Health and Safety
Manager (Key Personnel) or Senior safety Manager within 30 days of
commencement of work.
b. The Contractor shall appoint one (1) full-time Senior Health and Safety
Manager who is capable of performing all of the duties of the health and safety
manager during their absence.

Package BH-03
c. The Contractor shall ensure that each Subcontractor employed on the Site
appoints suitably qualified health and safety staff to ensure the effective
function of the health and safety discipline within the Subcontractor’s
organisation. However main contractor will remain responsible for overall
safety standard of his sub contractor.
d. Health and safety officers shall have no other duties, either on-Site or off-Site,
other than health and safety duties, and shall be exclusive to one Site.
e. The contractor will submit SHE organisation as per contract requirement for
engineer approval within 30 days of commencement of work and deployment
will be done as deployment plan approved by Engineer
1.6.3 Minimum Requirements of Safety & Health Monitoring and Audio-Visual Equipment
a. For the purpose of minimum requirements of Audio-visual and Other
equipment the contracts are categorized into the following groups:
Contract Value (Initial awarded value of contract) Group
More than 500 Cr (Civil) A
Between 100 to 500 Cr (Civil) B
Less than 100 Cr (Civil) C
Track Contracts D
Pre-Engineered Building (PEB), E&M , Plumbing

E
and Systems Contracts
b. Every contractor falling into the above groups shall provide the minimum
required audio-visual aids for conducting weekly review as indicated above,
monthly safety committee and other post review meeting of all fatal and major
incidences effectively. These audio-visual equipment’s are a must for
conducting periodical in-house safety presentations in the training
programmes.

Package BH-03
Volume III – Employers Requirements
1.6.4 Minimum Manpower Requirements of Safety Organization Based on Contract Value
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Chief Senior Junior Safety Senior Junior *Junior Occupational Traffic Labour
Category Safety Safety Safety Steward Safety Safety Safety Health Manager Welfare
Manager Manager Manager (Electrical) (Electrical) (Fire) officer with (Refer Officer
Engineer Engineer Manager/ Necessary Note 4)
**Senior Nursing
Safety (Fire) Assistants
Manager (Refer Note3)
1 for
Every
Refer 500
Category Note 1 & Refer Note
1 1@ 1 1** 1 (FT)# Workmen
A 2&
Note 5 with
for Refer Note 6 for Support
1
Category Note 1 Category E Staff
E contract
1 1 for
Category contract only
(For Every
B, C, 1 only - 1* 1 {PT)
Category 500
D&E
B only) Workmen
@ One each for Station & Viaduct and Launching/Tunnelling activity

# Tunnelling contracts of value above 500 crore, 2 Full time Doctor shall be required to be mobilized for ensuring round
the clock presence.
Volume III – Employers Requirements Page 31 of 398

Package BH-03
Note 1: One in each shift at every active Site, as per following scale:
a. Two adjoining Stations and Viaduct in between
b. Each Tunneling activity including cross passage/ Launching work
c. Casting Yard
Note 2: Adequate, qualified and trained Electrical Engineers / supervisors to be

deployed at each worksite at each shift.
Note 3: (FT) means Full-time and (PT) means Part Time. The frequency and duration
of visit of occupational Health officer shall be decided by MPMRCL.
Note 4: Requirement of Traffic Manager is applicable to contracts where the work has
to be executed either below or over the right-of-way like Viaduct, Tunnel
Contracts.
Note 5: One (1) number or as decided by the Engineer as adequate Junior Safety
Manager is required for Electrical Contracts which fall under category "E"
Note 6: Junior safety (Electrical) Engineer is required as per the work program
submitted by the Contractor subject to approval by engineer.
1.6.5 Mobilization schedule of Chief and Senior Safety Manager

i. After award of contract, at least one senior safety manager shall be mobilized
within 4 weeks and remain on the project till taking over by MPMRCL.
ii. Chief Safety Manager shall be required to be mobilized by 8 weeks after
award of Contract and shall remain on the project till completion of work
/ROD.

Package BH-03
1.6.6 Minimum Manpower Requirement of Environmental Personnel Based on Contract Category and Contract Value
Category of Contract value (in Chief Environment Senior Environment Environment Housekeeping
Contract Cr. Rs.) Officer (L-1) Officer (L-2) Officer (L-3) Manager
(Refer Note 1)
Category A More than 500 01 01 01 01
Category B 100-500 00 01 01 01
Category C Up to 100 00 00 01 01
Category D More than 500 00 01 01 01
Up to 500 00 01 00
Category E - 00 00 00 01
Note 1: Housekeeping Manager supported by required supervisors and workmen

The Environmental Personnel shall be deployed till the issuing of taking over certificate by the Employer.

Package BH-03
1.6.7 Roles & Responsibilities
S. Designation
Duties
No
1. Senior Safety Sr. Safety Manager/Engineer will head it's SH&E Organization.
Manager He will be discharging the role of a guide and adviser to the
contractor's management for achieving compliance to
contractual and statutory obligation on Safety, Health and
Environmental provisions. He will coordinate and conduct
Internal SH&E Inspection, SH&E Report and other submissions
to MPMRCL like Method Statements etc, SH&E Orientation and
other Training and Communication, External SH&E Audit by
MPMRCL approved agency, Monthly SH&E Committee
meetings, closure of MPMRCL SH&E Non-conformance
observations, Accident/Incident Reporting and Investigation,
devising Emergency Preparedness plans and their executions
etc.
2. Jr. Safety Manager The Jr. Safety Manager will assist Sr. Safety Manager in
discharging his responsibilities as mentioned at SI. no-1.
3. Safety Steward Safety Steward shall be responsible for all site related safety
issues for the site assigned to him. He shall ensure that all the
work is carried out in line of prescribed method statements, work
permit and other required safety, health and Environment
compliances. He shall be responsible for taking dust control
measures etc at site to ensure check on environmental
degradation.
4. Jr. Safety Electrical Coordinating and conducting all Electrical Safety functions at
Engineer work site including provisioning of safe worthy Electrical Power
Generation, distribution and consumption appliances and fittings
of appropriate IP ratings along with in-built safety arrangement
like circuit breaker as per contract clause and monitoring their
regular upkeep and maintenance, Electrical safety training,
Electrical work permit etc.
5. Jr. Safety (Fire) Coordinating and conducting all Fire Safety and Fire Fighting
Manager functions at work site including provisioning of adequate Fire
Fighting Equipment’s and monitoring their maintenance,
firefighting training, hot work permit etc
6. Occupational Coordinating and conducting all Health and Occupational Safety

Health Officer functions at work site including Pre-employment Medical
Examination, regular Medical examination during the currency of
contract, Medical First aid facilities at work site, regular
monitoring of work environment from the health risk to workforce,

Package BH-03
S. Designation
Duties
No
Medical First Aid and Emergency management training etc.
7. Sr. Safety (Traffic) He shall ensure that all traffic related compliances are met out at
Engineer site.
8. Barricade Manager He shall ensure that all barricading related compliances are met
out at site.
9. Housekeeping He shall ensure that all construction material, equipment’s etc

Manager are properly stacked and arranged and all sites remains clean in
all respects.
10. Labour welfare Coordinating and ensuring all statutory and contractual
officer compliances related to labour laws and basic amenities at
worksite and labour camps, payment of wages, issue of identity
cards, post-accident relief and compensation etc as well as
training on labour laws to management staff and workers.

Package BH-03
1.6.8 Minimum Qualification and Experience for Safety, Electrical, Traffic Manager and
Occupational Health Professionals
S. Experience
No. Designation Qualification
(In years)
1. Senior Safety (a) As stated in C1.21 of 1.3.6 of - 7 years for

Manager Employer’s Requirement category (a)
(b) Any of the following categories: - 10 years for
category (b)
i. B.Sc. (with Physics / Chemistry /
Maths stream) with one-year Full
Time Safety diploma from a
recognized institution/body
ii. Full time regular Three Years
duration Diploma in Engg* with
one-year Full Time Safety
diploma from a recognized
institution/body
*Preferably from Civil / Mechanical /
Electrical Engineering Discipline
2. Junior Safety (a) As stated in category (i) of C1.21 of - 2years for

Manager 1.3.6 of Employer’s Requirement category (a)
(b) As stated in category (ii) of C1.21 of - 5 years for
1.3.6 of Employer’s Requirement category (b)
(c) Any Graduate along with one-year
- 7 years for
Full Time Safety diploma from a
category (c)
recognized institution/body
3. Safety Senior Secondary School qualified with 1 year in construction

Steward minimum Six Months duration Certificate sector
Course in Safety.
4. Senior Safety Degree in Electrical Engineering + Govt. 7 years in

(Electrical) recognized Electrical License holder construction sector
Manager
5. Junior Safety Full Time regular Three years duration 3 years in

(Electrical) Diploma in Electrical Engineering + Govt. construction sector
Manager recognized Electrical License holder

Package BH-03
S. Experience
No. Designation Qualification
(In years)
6. Senior Safety Shall have qualified in any of the 7 years for category
(Fire) following: (i) and 10 years for
Manager category (ii) in
i) B.E. (Fire) from Recognized
construction sector
University/Institution
ii) Graduate with any Govt. recognized
diploma in Fire Safety
7. Junior Safety Any Diploma holder with any Govt. 3 years in

(Fire) recognized diploma in Fire Safety. construction sector
Manager
8. Occupational MBBS with Govt. recognized 1 years in

Health Officer degree/diploma in Industrial/ construction sector
occupational health
9. Traffic Govt. recognized qualification in Traffic 2 years in

Manager Planning/ Management construction sector
OR
Experienced Police/Para-Military Retired
Officer
10. Labour Graduate with Govt. Recognized Degree I 2 years in

Welfare Diploma / P G Course in Labour Welfare construction sector
Officer related fields like Law, Personnel /
Industrial Relations etc.
1.6.9 Minimum Qualification and Experience for Environmental Professionals

S. Designation Minimum Qualification Relevant
No Experience (in
years)
1. Senior Environment i) B.E./ B. Tech with Post Graduation 5 years in
Officer Diploma in Environment from a construction
recognized institution/body or B.E / B. sector
Tech in Environmental Engineering
from a recognized institution/body.
Or
ii) B.Sc with M.Sc in Environment 7 years in

Science from a recognized construction s
institution/body sector
2. Environment Officer i) B.E. / B. Tech with Post Graduation/ 2 years in
Diploma in Environment from a construction
recognized institution/body or B.E / B. sector

Package BH-03
S. Designation Minimum Qualification Relevant

No Experience (in
years)
Tech in Environmental Engineering
from a recognized institution/body.
Or
ii) B.Sc with M.Sc in Environment 4 years in
Science from a recognized construction
institution/body sector
3. Housekeeping Diploma in any branch of Engineering 2 years in
Manager or any Graduate construction
sector
4. Environment Plus 2 or equivalent With or without
Warden experience
5. Document Any graduate 2 years in
Controller construction
sector
1.6.10 Minimum Requirements of Safety & Health Monitoring and Audio-Visual
Equipment. In addition to the above portable handheld digital sound level
meter (SLM) and portable handheld digital lux meter are also to be provided.
Safety & Health monitoring Safety & Health monitoring and

S. No and Audio- Visual equipment required for
Audio-Visual Equipment Group D Group C Group B Group A
details &E Contract Contract Contract
Contract
1. Portable handheld Digital Sound 1 1 1 1
Level Meter (SLM)
2. Portable handheld Digital Lux Meter 1 1 1 1
3. ELCB/RCCB Tester (Digital) 1 1 1 1
4. Earth Resistance Tester (Digital) 1 1 1 1
5. Portable Gas Monitor 1 1 2 2
6. Breath Analyzer 1 1 2 2
7. Portable loudspeaker (for toolbox talk 1 1 2 6
and emergency purpose)
8. Lamination Machine 1 1 1 1
9. Machine for Spiral Binding 1 1 1 1
10. Accident investigation Kit containing 1 1 1 2
the following:
a) Chalk piece for marking
b) Measuring tape for measuring
• Flexible tape - 2m length
• Metal Foot long scale and
Metal tape - 30m

Package BH-03
Safety & Health monitoring Safety & Health monitoring and

S. No and Audio- Visual equipment required for
Audio-Visual Equipment Group D Group C Group B Group A
details &E Contract Contract Contract
Contract
c) Equipment tags
d) Multipurpose Flashlight
e) Barrier tape of 20m length
f) Accident investigation Forms and
checklists
g) Enough Paper for witness recording
and other noting
h) Emergency Phone Numbers list
1.7 Records of Contractor's Personnel

1.7.1 The Contractor shall submit monthly to the Engineer details showing the number of
each class of Contractor's Personnel, in a form approved by the Engineer, until the
Contractor has completed all work which is known to be outstanding at the
completion date stated in the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works.
1.7.2 The Contractor shall submit monthly to the Engineer a certified payroll for their direct
employees and for their subcontractors.
1.8 Responsibility Matrix
1.8.1 The Contractor shall submit within 60 days of the Commencement Date a
Management and Supervision Responsibility Matrix (RACI) confirming roles and
responsibilities in a format to be agreed with the Engineer.
1.9 Festivals and Religious Customs
1.9.1 The Contractor shall in all dealings with his staff and labour have due regard to all
recognised festivals, days of rest and religious or other local customs.
1.10 Burial/Cremation of the Dead
1.10.1 The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for the transportation to any
place as required for the burial and death rituals or cremation of a body, of any of
his employees who dies whilst working on the Contract.
1.11 Disorderly Conduct
1.11.1 The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable precautions to prevent any
unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct by or amongst the Contractor's Personnel,
and to preserve peace and protection of persons and property on and near the Site.
1.12 Housing of Labour
1.12.1 The Contractor, shall, at his own expense, make adequate arrangement for the
housing, supply of drinking water and provision of bathrooms, latrines and urinals,
with adequate water supply, for his staff and workmen directly or through Sub-

Package BH-03
Contractor’s employed on the works at the location authorised by the Employer.

1.12.2 No labour camp shall be allowed at any work site provided by the Employer or any
unauthorised place.
1.12.3 The Contractor at his own cost shall maintain all sites and welfare facilities in a
clean and sanitary condition. The Contractor shall obey all health and sanitary rules
and regulation, and carry out at his cost all health and sanitary measures that may
from time to time be prescribed by the Local/Medical Authorities and permit
inspection of all health and sanitary arrangements at all times by the Employer,
Engineer and the staff of the local municipality or other Authorities concerned.
Should the Contractor fail to provide adequate health and sanitary arrangements,
these may be provided by the Employer and the cost recovered from the Contractor.
1.12.4 The Contractor shall at his own cost, provide First Aid and Medical facilities at the
Labour Camp and at work sites on the advice of the Medical Authority in relation to
the experience, and number of the Contractor’s staff and workmen, employed
directly.
1.12.5 The Contractor shall at his own cost, provide the following minimum requirement
for fire precautions:
a. Portable Fire Extinguishers.
b. Manual Fire Alarms
c. Water Supply for use by the Fire Service.
The Contractor at his own cost shall provide necessary arrangements for keeping
the camp area sufficiently illuminated to avoid accidents to the Workers. He should
also ensure that electrical installations are carried out by Trained Electricians.
These installations shall be maintained and daily maintenance records must be
made available for inspection of the Engineer.
1.12.6 On completion of the Contract, unless otherwise agreed with the Employer, the
temporary camps, housing provided by the Contractor shall be removed and the
site accommodation reinstated to its original condition, all to the approval of the
Engineer.

Package BH-03
2 Commercial, Cost, Risk & Change Management

2.1 General
2.1.1 The Contractor’s organisation shall include commercial resources to undertake the
Contractor’s commercial and contractual administration for the work under the
Contract. The Contractor’s commercial duties and obligations shall include, but are
not limited to the following items.
2.2 Change Management
2.2.1 Change Management Plan
a. Within 45 days of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall issue to the
Engineer for review, a Change Management Plan {CMP} and documented
processes for change management demonstrating compliance with the
change management requirements of the Contract.
b. Within 60 days of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall implement a
comprehensive and robust system and processes for change management.
2.2.2 Variation Proposals
All variations will be dealt in accordance with Clause 13 GCC & PCC.
2.2.3 Variation Reporting
a. the Contractor shall submit a Monthly Variation Report in a form approved by
the Engineer.
b. the Variation Report shall:
i. detail all Variations instructed to date with appropriate referencing and
descriptions,
ii. record actual and anticipated costs incurred and an estimate of the
amount of such work completed, expressed as a percentage; and
iii. contain details of cost proposals in preparation and those which have
been submitted to the Engineer for consideration in advance of a
variation being instructed.
2.3 Commercial Management
2.3.1 Cash Flow Reporting
a. the Contractor shall submit a projected monthly cash flow analysis for the
work under the Contract to the Engineer, within 30 days of the
Commencement Date.
b. accompanying the Baseline Programme the Contractor shall submit for the
approval of the Engineer, a cash flow analysis to support the Programme.
c. the cash flow analysis shall detail the anticipated amounts to which the
Contractor considers he will be entitled to have certified monthly as the work
under the Contract is progressed. It shall be aligned with the Programme,
work and cost breakdown structures. It shall be for the Engineer’s information
only and shall not form the basis for certification assessment.

Package BH-03
d. an updated cash flow report shall be included in the Monthly Progress report.
This report shall align with and be adjusted according to the actual progress
of the work under the Contract, the proposals to undertake remaining work
under the Contract, and any Variations instructed by the Engineer.
2.3.2 All invoices shall be submitted with substantiation and certification to permit the
Engineer to process payment. Certification of work shall include the Quality
Manager’s written confirmation, as required by Self-Certification, that the work in
question is in full compliance with the Employer’s requirements and the Contractors
design.
2.4 Risk Management
2.4.1 The Contractor shall ensure that:
a. a risk management system is established, compliant with ISO 31000,
implemented and maintained;
b. the performance of the risk management system is to be reported to the
Contractor’s management for review and as a basis for improvement
identified;
c. the performance of the risk management system is reported to the Engineer
for review, and
d. a risk management plan {RMP} shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval within 60 days of the Commencement Date.
2.5 Commercial, Contractual and Cost Management Reporting
2.5.1 The Contractor shall submit a monthly Contract Price assessment in a format
approved by the Engineer. The assessments shall show the Contract Price adjusted
to incorporate the effects of instructed variations and cost proposals in preparation
or submitted to the Engineer in respect of potential Variations.
2.5.2 The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer, the Employer's Personnel, and their
respective consultants in accordance with Volume II (GC & PC).
2.5.3 The Contractor shall report cost in WBS and CBS format as mandated by the
Engineer.
2.5.4 Monthly Reports shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
a. change control;
b. project controls;
c. cost management.
2.5.5 All reporting shall be in a format compatible with the Employer’s Project
Management Information System PMIS.

Package BH-03
3 Planning, Programming and Progress Management

3.1 Project Management
3.1.1 The Contractor shall provide effective project management of all Contract activities
for the work under the Contract. It is a prime responsibility of the Contractor to
manage the work under the Contract to achieve the requirements of the Contract,
meeting all the timelines without delays.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Engineer in coordination with all parties
involved with the project, not only limited to the designer(s) of interfacing works,
other Project Partners (Contractors and Designers), private developers and
concerned local statutory authorities.
3.2 Software
3.2.1 The Contractor shall implement and use a computerised system to plan, execute,
maintain and manage the planning, design, pre-construction, construction, testing
and commissioning of the work under the Contract throughout the Contract period.
3.2.2 The Contractor shall use Primavera Project P6, the version is to be confirmed and
approved by the Engineer, software for Programme management or as directed
otherwise by the Engineer.
3.2.3 The Contractor shall comply with all the protocols related to the access to and the
security of the Employer and Engineer’s computer networks and intranet. The
Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, manuals and training as necessary for
the Employer and Engineer to use, maintain and re-configure all of the software
provided under the Contract. All software used by the Contractor shall be original
and licenced by the supplier.
3.3 Programmes
3.3.1 The Key Dates are defined in Contract Data of Volume II.
3.3.2 The Key dates are mentioned in terms of the time period in number of days
reckoned from the commencement date of the Work, and the deliverables for each
Key Date shall be achieved by the midnight of the Key Date mentioned. If the Key
Date is not achieved as per Contract data, delay damages shall be applicable.
Each Key date includes number of stages for completing the activities these stages
are interrelated with flow of activities which may be required in a sequential order,
few of the activities/sub-works may be independent to other activities/sub-works
which can be programmed for simultaneous or parallel execution. For the purpose
of effective monitoring and implementation, certain intermediate stages have to be
identified for each Key date.
3.3.3 Interfacing with relevant Project Partners and other agencies for achievement of
Key Dates shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
3.3.4 The Contractor shall develop a detailed, logical method of executing the work under
the Contract and shall provide programmes which shall reflect the detailed planning
of works to be undertaken. In compiling all programmes and in all subsequent
updating and reporting, the Contractor shall make provision for the time required for
coordinating and completing the design, procurement, construction, testing,

Package BH-03
commissioning and integrated testing of the works, including design co-ordination,

the review of procedures, determining and complying with the requirements of all
Government Departments and all others whose consent, permissions, authority or
license is required prior to the execution of any work. The Design Submission
Programme shall be integrated in to the overall works programme.
3.3.5 The Contractor shall submit the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) to the Engineer
for approval.
3.3.6 The Contractors programme(s) shall be realistic, achievable and shall fully reflect
the Employer’s requirements, and they shall be accompanied by detailed supporting
plans.
3.3.7 Programme activities shall be discrete items of work, which when combined,
produce definable elements and components leading to Milestones, Key Interface
and Sectional Completion dates and clearly identify the completion obligations of
the Contractor.
3.3.8 Any programme activity creating an imposed time or other constraint shall be fully
defined by the Contractor.
3.3.9 Activity descriptions shall clearly convey the nature and scope of the Works.
Programmes shall consider the activities of preceding, concurrent, adjacent, and
follow on parts and sections of the work under the Contract as well as utility service
diversions, new utility installations and connections, and any other activity that may
affect the progress of the work under the Contract.
3.3.10 Milestones, Key Dates, Key Interfaces, Sectional Completions and Taking-Over
Dates shall be an integral part of all programmes and all activities. Sequencing and
interrelationships required to achieve each of these dates shall be shown on the
programme.
3.3.11 The programming shall not impose constraints which in any way affect the float or
limit the achievement of Key Interface, Sectional Completion or Taking Over Dates.
3.3.12 The critical path shall be clearly identified in the programmes, and it shall be fully
described in the accompanying programme narrative.
3.3.13 The Contractor’s prime point of contact for all matters relating to planning,
programming and progress management shall be the Engineer.
3.4 Baseline Programme
3.4.1 Within 28 days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit the initial
‘Baseline Programme’ for review and comment by the Engineer. The Initial Baseline
Programme shall;
a. be fully compliant with the Milestone, Key Interface and Taking Over Dates,
b. provide full programme details for the first twelve (12) months of the Contract,
and
c. outline details for the remaining period of the Contract.
3.4.2 Within 60 days of the Commencement Date and subsequent to review of initial
Baseline Programme, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and

Package BH-03
approval a fully comprehensive Primavera Project P6 based, resource and cost

loaded Detailed Baseline Programme. The Initial Programme shall be used as the
basis for preparing the Contractor’s detailed Baseline Programme. In identifying all
design, procurement, construction, installation, fitting out, testing and
commissioning activities and associated interfaces, the Detailed Baseline
programme shall include:
a. a programme showing key design, procurement, manufacturing and
construction elements and shall include activity sequences taking into
consideration all the interfaces with other project contracts.
b. key plans showing the zones/location mentioned in the programme;
c. narrative explaining contract components, areas, zones methodology,
sequence of construction, logistics, temporary facilities, safety and security,
traffic and utility diversions, planning, permits and licences, interface
management with other construction packages, contractual milestones,
imposed constraint dates and any assumptions;
d. a work breakdown structure (WBS) shall be in accordance with the Contract
and for review by the Engineer;
e. an activity coding system as defined by the Engineer;
f. cost accrual coding as defined by the Engineer;
g. the critical path of the work under the Contract;
h. a planned progress S curve derived from budgeted cost loaded on to the
schedule cumulative and monthly cashflows;
i. long lead item material and equipment delivery schedule;
j. forecasts of all Milestone dates, Key Interface Date, Sectional Completion
dates and Taking Over dates;
k. time chainage diagrams, fully in compliance with the Detailed Baseline
Programme.
3.5 Programme Submissions
3.5.1 All submissions of programmes and schedules shall include the actual progress of
work and a forecast for the remaining work. Actual progress shall be stated in terms
of;
a. completed Milestones, Key Interface, Sectional Completion and Taking Over
Dates (as defined in the Schedule of Payments) with the corresponding
earned value (Earned Value reports along with Actual Cost to Date, Cost to
Completion, Schedule and Cost Variances);
b. percentage completions of activities commenced but between Milestones,
Key Interface, Sectional Completion and Taking Over Dates; and
c. remaining duration and actual start and finish dates for each activity in the
work under the Contract.
3.5.2 The Engineer shall review those Contractor's programme submissions that are in

Package BH-03
compliance with GCC Clause 8.3. If the Programme fails to comply with the Contract
or to be inconsistent with actual progress, the Contractor shall amend the
programme considering the Engineer’s comments and/or requirements and
resubmit the Programme in accordance with GCC Clause 8.3.
3.5.3 Failure to Make Submissions
Failure of the Contractor to submit any Programme, or any required revisions within
the time limits stated shall be sufficient reason for default that the Contractor is not
performing the work required in a timely manner, and the Engineer may retain any
payment due to the Contractor.
3.6 Construction Update Programme
3.6.1 The Detailed Baseline Programme shall be updated by the Contractor and
submitted monthly in the Monthly Progress Report as a Construction Update
Programme, or as required at any time by the Engineer. An electronic copy, pdf and
Primavera P6 of the Construction Update Programme shall be provided each month
to the Engineer.
3.6.2 The Contractor shall produce and submit a summary level report on the Monthly
Construction Update Programme for the Engineer’s review. This report shall contain
the following information as a minimum planning requirement:
a. activity description planned and remaining duration;
b. planned and actual percentage progress, calculated from quantity of works
completed;
c. start and finish dates (original);
d. current early start and early finish dates;
e. forecast finish dates as on data dates;
f. actual start and actual finish dates;
g. contractual and monitoring milestone dates and other key dates (original, plan
and actual);
h. long lead and critical material milestone dates;
i. a programme for Authorities’ Approvals;
j. main interface dates;
k. for all items covered under provisional sums and all variations or other items
to be paid under schedules of rates: quantity to complete, actual quantity
achieved and remaining quantity to be completed; and an ‘S’ curve showing
actual and planned percentages of progress; and
l. in submitting the Detailed Monthly Construction Update Programme and all
updates to it, the Contractor shall ensure that it meets with the requirements
of the Contract.
3.6.3 The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Engineer in the review of the
Contractor’s programmes, schedules, and any sub-programmes below the
Construction Update Programme

Package BH-03
3.6.4 The Contractor shall also provide sub programmes completely consistent with, but
at a more detailed level than included in the Monthly Construction Update
Programme, including:
a. design, procurement and manufacturing sub programme;
b. construction and installation sub programme;
c. fitting out sub programme;
d. testing and commissioning sub programme.
3.6.5 These sub-programmes shall be updated and issued monthly to the Engineer.
3.7 Supplementary Programmes List
3.7.1 The Monthly Construction Update Programme and sub programmes shall be
supplemented by the following, in a format to be agreed with the Engineer:
a. three (3) month rolling programme;
3.8 Effects on Programme of Delays and Change
3.8.1 The Contractor shall report any potential or actual delays which may affect the
sectional key Dates or overall completion to the Engineer in a timely manner, and
recommend suitable measures to overcome the identified issues.

Package BH-03
4 Record Keeping and Progress Reporting

4.1 Record Keeping
4.1.1 The Contractor shall ensure that adequate records are kept of all activities,
particularly site activities, including daily site activity records. The Contractor shall
ensure that all progress reporting to the Engineer is consistent with these records,
and shall make these records available to the Engineer on request, in order to
examine them and verify submitted reports.
4.2 Progress Reporting
4.2.1 All progress reports to be approved by the Engineer shall be delivered in a format
agreed by the Engineer, and in both electronic and hard copy.
4.2.2 Monthly Progress Reports and Dashboards shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer in four hard and one digital copy.
4.2.3 The first Monthly Progress Report shall cover the period up to the end of the first
calendar month following the Commencement Date. Monthly Progress Report shall
be submitted monthly thereafter, each within seven (7) days after the last day of the
period to which it relates. Cut-off reporting dates, and if deemed necessary revised
submission dates, shall be agreed and confirmed by the Engineer.
4.2.4 Reporting shall continue until the Contractor has completed all work which is known
to be outstanding at the Completion Date stated in the Taking-Over Certificate for the
Works.
4.2.5 Each Monthly Progress Report shall include (in addition to any other information
mandated by the Employer's Requirements):
a. charts and detailed descriptions of progress, including each stage of design,
Contractor's Documents, procurement, manufacture, delivery to Site,
construction, erection, testing, commissioning and trial operation;
b. photographs showing the status of manufacture and of progress on the Site;
c. for the manufacture of each main item of Plant and Materials, the name of the
manufacturer, manufacture location, percentage progress, and the actual or
expected dates of:
d. records of the Contractor's Personnel and Equipment;
e. copies of quality assurance documents, test results and certificates of
Materials
f. list of Variations, Notices and Claims (Employer and Contractor);
g. safety statistics, including details of any hazardous incidents and activities
relating to environmental aspects and public relations, and details of any
changes to health and safety and/or environmental management procedures
to be adopted to mitigate any breaches in procedures identified over the
reporting period;
h. comparisons of actual and planned progress, with details of any events or
circumstances which may jeopardise the completion in accordance with the

Package BH-03
Contract, and the measures being (or to be) adopted to overcome delays.
4.2.6 The Contractor shall issue to the Engineer a Weekly Report and a Dashboard before
10 am on the first day of the following week, which shall include a 15-day look-ahead
programme. The content of the Weekly Report and Dashboard shall be proposed by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
4.2.7 The Contractor shall issue to the Engineer a Daily Dashboard Report before 10 am
the following working day. The content of the Daily Dashboard Report shall be
proposed by the Contractor and be approved by the Engineer.
4.2.8 Progress Review Meetings
a. Biweekly meetings will be held to review and monitor the progress of the project
work, and they shall be convened by the Engineer. The Contractor’s
representative and if necessary, representatives of all interfacing Project Partners
shall attend the meetings. The Employer may also be present at the meetings.
b. Quality, Health and Safety, Environmental and Design workshops/meetings will
be held biweekly, or as deemed necessary by the Engineer, to ensure open
transparent communication with regards to issues and progress of the Works.
c. The Contractor shall conduct separate meetings with Interfacing Project Partners
and stakeholders as necessary to clarify technical aspects of the systems and
their requirements.
d. A quarterly Progress Review meeting will be held with the Employer. All the
members of the Contractor (single company/consortium/JV) who are holding
power of attorney for representing their firm(s) must be present at this meeting.
e. The Contractor shall prepare draft minutes recording all matters discussed and
decisions recorded at all the meetings within 48 hours for the Engineer’s review.
These minutes shall be approved by the Engineer.
4.3 Exception Reporting
4.3.1 Where matters arise, which are urgent or deviate substantially from the latest report
the Contractor will not wait until the next monthly report but shall prepare a specific
‘Exception Report’ concerning the new situation and submit this to the Engineer.
4.4 Visuals Reporting
4.4.1 Photographs
4.4.1.1 Following award of the Contract the Contractor will engage a professional
photography service to carry out the following for the work under the Contract:
a. Colour photographs shall provide a fair representation of the progress of the
b. A minimum of 48 photographs per month shall be submitted as a bound booklet
to the Engineer, along with a digital copy of the same.
c. Photograph locations shall be proposed by the Contractor and confirmed by the
Engineer.
d. Photographs shall be taken using a high-resolution digital camera, and picture

Package BH-03
files and shall be provided in raw data format. The resolution, of photographs
shall be sufficient for clarity when photographs are enlarged to A4 size. All
photographs shall be time stamped by the camera.
e. Each monthly set of photographs shall be accompanied by an index indicating
the subject, date, locations and directions in which the photographs were taken.
f. The Contractor shall provide six hard and two soft copies (on a DVD/Data card)
of the photo booklet and of each selected photograph.
g. The photographs, electronic format and albums shall become the property of
the Employer.
h. The photographs shall be taken by a professional photographer to be deployed
by contractor
4.4.2 Recording of DVD
4.4.2.1 The Contractor shall submit video recordings of the project which shall have Hindi
and English audio commentary.
4.4.2.2 Every third month, i.e., quarter, the Contractor shall submit a 30-minute full high-
definition video (1080p) recording, one with audio commentary in Hindi and a second
in English, of the work under the Contract to the Engineer as part of his Monthly
Progress Report.
4.4.2.3 Upon completion of the work under the Contract, the Contractor shall provide a
professionally edited full high-definition video (1080p) to the Engineer showing
progress through the period of the Contract. The video shall be a minimum length of
20 minutes and cover the design, construction, manufacture and installation of all
major components of the work under the Contract.
4.4.2.4 All videos shall be produced by skilled video camera person with professional
equipment.
4.4.2.5 All videos shall present a comprehensive record of the manufacture and construction
of the work under the Contract to a non-technical audience and the Contractor shall
provide any visual aids or graphical representations required to illustrate particular
points, in liaison with the Engineer.
4.4.2.6 Original video clips and all videos produced from them shall become the property of
the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe archiving of the
original video materials during the progress of the work under the Contract and shall
transfer this complete archive with the as-built documents.
4.4.3 Site webcams
4.4.3.1 Within 60 days of commencement of the work by the Contractor shall propose a
system to the Engineer for approval to provide live monitoring at each station site or
any other locations as decided by Engineer on a 24/7 basis. This shall be done by
installing at least one video camera capable of capturing live high-resolution video
and a high-resolution time-lapse camera {capturing every 15 minutes} for archiving
and documentation purposes at locations to be agreed with the Engineer. A secure
password internet log-in access to the site webcams shall be provided to Engineer.

Package BH-03
5 Health and Safety Management

5.1 Compliance
5.1.1 The Contractor shall fully comply with the requirements of Volume II (GC & PC) and
Appendix I Employer’s Health and Safety Policy and Manual. Compliance with the
Employer’s requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of any of their statutory
duties, obligations or responsibilities under the Contract or Law.
5.1.2 The Engineer reserves the right to order the immediate removal and replacement
of any item of Contractor's equipment or personnel, which is deemed to be in an
unsafe condition or who carries out a serious safety violation.
5.1.3 The Contractor shall document and implement a self-certifying Health and Safety
Management System (HSMS) that shall remain in effect during the execution of the
5.1.4 The Contractor’s HSMS shall be in compliance with ISO 45001:2018.
5.1.5 Within 28 days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit the
following for review by the Engineer:
a. health and safety policy;
b. health and safety plan;
c. health and safety manual.
5.1.6 For any amendment to the HSMS documentation, the Contractor shall as soon as
practicable prepare and submit the proposed amendment for review by the
Engineer prior to implementation.
5.1.7 The Contractor shall provide and enforce at all times the wearing of efficient safety
helmets and work shoes and, where necessary, eye goggles, ear protectors, safety
harnesses and other personal protection equipment for all personnel. The
contractor shall also provide 20nos of PPE (Safety helmets, Safety footwear, High
visibility jacket) to the Engineer every year.
5.1.8 Fire Safety Regulations and other requirements pertaining to fire safety included in
the Contract shall be observed at all times.
5.1.9 The Contractor shall ensure that all gases, fuels and other dangerous goods are
stored and handled in a safe manner and in accordance with the statutory
regulations pertaining to their storage and handling.
5.1.10 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any requisite licenses.
5.1.11 No operation involving ionizing or electro-magnetic radiation shall be carried out
without the approval of a safety officer.
5.1.12 The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel and members of the public are
properly protected from the effects of any radiation emitted from the project site. All
radiation areas shall be prominently posted with appropriate signs and exclusion
barriers.
5.1.13 The Contractor shall provide adequate stand-by generating plant, equipment and
spares for illumination of the site of the Works at all times to ensure the safety of

Package BH-03
project personnel, the Works and the public.

5.1.14 High standards of housekeeping shall be established. All materials shall be stored
in an orderly and safe manner. Rubbish and debris shall be disposed of daily.
5.1.15 Measures shall be taken to prevent mosquito breeding within the works area, or
areas to which the Contractor has access, which shall include the following:
a. Empty cans, oil drums, packing and other receptacles which may retain water
shall be deposited at a central collection point in accordance with the
environmental regulations in force and shall be removed regularly; and
b. Standing water shall be treated at least once every week with environmentally
friendly materials which shall prevent mosquito breeding.
c. To avoid mosquito breading the any Contractor's plant or other equipment
and facilities that may retain water shall be stored, covered in such a manner
that water shall not be retained or treated as deemed necessary.
d. Posters in Hindi and English languages drawings attention to the danger of
permitting mosquito breeding shall be displayed prominently on the site.
5.2 Legislation, Codes of Practice
5.2.1 The Contractor shall, in performing the Contract, comply with all applicable Indian
Laws including:
a. all current and future enactments, codes of practice and safety guides
(specifications or other government bodies’ requirements);
b. when interfacing with stakeholders, the Contractor shall comply with their
requirements.
5.2.2 These documents are the minimum standards to be achieved by the Contractor and
do not relieve the Contractor of liability to comply with all relevant Indian Laws.
Where there is a discrepancy in the documents, the higher or stricter standards
shall take precedence.
5.3 Management Responsibility
5.3.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of the Site, for the Works,
their personnel, Subcontractors’ personnel, the public and all persons directly or
indirectly associated with the Works under the Contract, on or in the vicinity of the
Works.
5.3.2 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for submitting reports, notices and
information to all stakeholders where there is a statutory requirement to do so.
5.4 Subcontractors
5.4.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors, and any person authorised by the Contractor
to be on the Site, shall comply in every respect with the provisions of the Contractors
health and safety management system.
5.4.2 The Contractor shall ensure that proper and adequate provisions are included in all
Subcontracts placed by him, and in all Subcontract documentation.
5.4.3 The safety standards of any proposed Subcontractor are to be assessed by the

Package BH-03
Contractor prior to the placing of any subcontract.

5.5 Breach of Health and Safety Obligations
5.5.1 Serious or repeated breaches of the health and safety statutory regulations, rules
of the Site, or other disregard for the health and safety of any person, are reasons
for the Engineer to exercise their authority to require the removal from the Site of
any person employed by the Contractor or subcontractor.
5.5.2 The Engineer shall have the right to order the suspension of any or all of the
Contractor’s and subcontractor activities where it is deemed that to continue such
work activity or activities may pose a hazard to the safety of persons or property.
5.5.3 Where the Engineer orders a suspension of the Contractor or subcontractor work
activities the suspension shall continue until the Contractor has satisfied the
Engineer that corrective action has been taken to eliminate the hazard that was the
subject of the suspension.
5.5.4 For all serious safety violations, the Employer reserves the right to penalise the
Contractor on the recommendation of the Engineer or otherwise. These penalties
shall be determined and recovered at the Employer’s discretion dependant on the
severity of the incident, including but not limited to the following;
Accident or Incident Level 3 & 4 Accidents & Incidents (see Cl

5.8.6)
(A) For any death and/or • NR 30 Lakh for each person in case of any
grievous injury to a death and INR 60 Lakh for subsequent
Member of the Public occurrences INR
• 20 Lakh for each person in case of a
grievous injury and INR 40 Lakh for
subsequent occurrences.
• INR 10 Lakh for any hospitalisation over 10
days and INR 20 Lakh for subsequent
occurrences.
(B) For any death and/or • INR 30 Lakh for each person in case of any
grievous injury to a death and INR 60 Lakh for subsequent
Project Worker occurrences.
• INR 20 Lakh for each person in case of a
grievous injury and INR 40 Lakh for
subsequent occurrences.
• INR 10 Lakh for any hospitalisation over 10
days and INR 20 Lakh for subsequent
occurrences.

Package BH-03
Accident or Incident Level 3 & 4 Accidents & Incidents (see Cl

5.8.6)
(C) For each utility strike • INR 50 Lakhs for each occurrence
with outage (excluding
any penalties from
utility agencies,
stakeholders and
other relevant
authorities) or major
accident (excluding
loss of life or grievous
injury – see (A) & (B))
a. ‘Grievous’ injuries shall be taken as injuries as defined in Section 320 of the

Indian Penal Code, as confirmed below: -
i. Emasculation.
ii. Permanent privation of the sight of either eye.
iii. Permanent privation of the hearing of either ear.
iv. Privation of any member or joint.
v. Destruction or permanent impairing of the powers of any member or
joint.
vi. Fracture or dislocation of a bone or tooth.
vii. Any incident which endangers life, or which causes the sufferer to be,
during the space of twenty days, in severe bodily pain or unable to
follow ordinary pursuits.
b. Major Accidents shall be defined as;
i. An incident involving the loss of life;
ii. Ten or more multiple injuries;
iii. Explosion or fire resulting in on-site or off-site emergencies;
iv. The release of toxic chemicals resulting in on-site or off-site
emergencies;
v. Spillage of hazardous chemical resulting in on-site or off-site
emergencies;
vi. Damage to utility services and equipment leading to an outage or
process stoppage;
vii. A definable adverse effect to the public, unplanned closure of trafficked
roads or the environment.
5.6 Contractor’s Documentation
5.6.1 Within 28 days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit a copy of

Package BH-03
their health and safety policy and plan plus their draft health and safety manual for
approval by the Engineer. The Contractor’s health and safety manual shall be
developed to reflect the progress of the Works and shall establish the required
health and safety processes in advance of each of the phases.
5.6.2 The Contractor shall provide their Subcontractors with copies of the relevant health
and safety documentation throughout the project. This shall include plans, manuals,
safety risk assessments, hazard logs and method statements as appropriate. THE
Contractor shall monitor the Subcontractors comply with all the documentation.
5.6.3 Health and Safety Plan (HSP)
a. The Contractor shall devise and implement a health and safety plan to fully
comply with the requirements of the Contract.
b. The HSP plan shall include a policy statement signed by the Chief Executive
Officer of the Contractor (or other senior company officer) declaring that
occupational health and safety shall be given the highest practicable priority
in all aspects of the Contract and in the discharge of their contractual
obligations.
c. The HSP plan shall include and confirm as a minimum:
i. identification of personnel responsible for health and safety
management and reporting, with their responsibilities;
ii. training and competency assessment for staff and Subcontractors;
iii. procedures and forums for identifying health and safety risks and
issues;
iv. specific requirements of the Site and other work Sites;
v. requirements of the Contractor's corporate Health and Safety
Management System.
vi. adequate mandatory induction and training is provided to personnel
working on, and using, the Site;
vii. access is only available to authorised personnel and registered visitors:
viii. all personnel must attend an induction covering:
ix. All personnel on the Site must be identified by means of a prominently
displayed identification card (provided by the Contractor), which shall
be in a tamper-proof format reviewed by the Engineer and shall include
the following information:
• Company Logo
• Company Contact Info
• Cardholder Name
• Cardholder Photo
• Cardholder Signature

Package BH-03
• Cardholder Title
• Card holder ID Number
• Issue/Expiration Date
x. each visitor to the Site is registered and managed.
5.7 Job Hazard Assessments (JHA’s)
5.7.1 The Contractor shall carry out a detailed JHA’s (health and safety risk assessments)
covering the occupational health and safety aspects of the work under the Contract.
All detailed JHA’s shall be submitted to the Engineer 14 days prior to the
commencement of work on site.
5.7.2 The documentation arising from the detailed JHA shall contain a comprehensive
schedule of all perceived risks and the proposed resolution or mitigation measures
necessary to reduce these risks to a minimum. The findings of the assessment shall
be incorporated into the HSP and relevant method statements. The nature of the
work under the Contract environment dictates that the JHA requires regular reviews
and updates. JHA’s shall be included as part of all method statement submittals.
5.7.3 The Engineer reserves the right to request the Contractor to conduct a JHA and
document a method statement for hazardous works as and when deemed
necessary.
5.8 Contractor’s Safety Arrangements
5.8.1 Co-ordination of Work Activities
a. The Contractor shall ensure that Work is coordinated so that the activities of
one group of workers do not affect the safety of another group.
b. Daily meetings shall be held to coordinate the Work activities, with permits to
work issued where and when required.
5.8.2 Permit to Work
a. The Contractor shall implement a permit to work procedure that facilitates the
control of hazardous works, as identified during the risk assessment.
b. The permit to work procedure for the work under the Contract shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review within 45 days of the Commencement
Date.
c. The permit to work procedure is critical to the well-being of all persons who
participate in the work under the Contract and the public. The Contractor shall
ensure that any amendments to this procedure are communicated to all
persons involved in or around the work under the Contract.
5.8.3 Safety Inspections /walk
a. The Contractor shall conduct dedicated Site safety inspections/walk once a
week as a minimum, which shall be attended by the Contractor’s most senior
Site staff and safety management.
b. A brief report of the inspection shall be made and issued to the Engineer. The

Package BH-03
report shall include the actions taken to resolve any problems or shortcoming
discovered during the inspection. The report shall be made available for audit
purposes, and shall be discussed at safety meetings.
c. A comprehensive health and safety inspection check-list for the use of the
Contractor’s Site staff when inspecting the Site is to be formulated by the
Contractor and submitted for review by the Engineer.
d. The checklist shall indicate the standard to be achieved on any particular
aspect of health and safety and be compiled in such a way that allows the
inspector to enter their actual findings for instant comparison and subsequent
rectification.
e. When completed the checklist shall be kept for record purposes and be made
available to the Engineer for audit purposes.
f. A grading system is to be established which grades the area inspected as
either acceptable or unacceptable.
g. Where an area receives a grading of unacceptable, immediate action is to be
taken to rectify the problems raised, and a further audit shall be conducted
after 7 and 14 days to assess the conditions.
h. The Contractor is to advise the Engineer of the date of the safety inspections.
The Engineer may send a representative to assess the thoroughness of the
inspection.
5.8.4 Engineer Safety Audits
a. The Engineer may conduct safety audits to confirm the effectiveness of the
Contractor’s health and safety management system.
b. The outcome of the Engineer’s audit will be graded as either acceptable or
unacceptable.
c. Where the Contractor receives a grading of unacceptable, immediate action
is to be taken by the Contractor to rectify the problems raised. A follow up
audit shall, if necessary, be conducted by the Engineer within 30 days to
access whether satisfactory remedial action has been taken.
d. The Contractor shall continue to be audited, every 30 days, until such times
as a grade of acceptable has been achieved.
5.8.5 Internal Safety Audits
a. The Contractor shall regularly, at periods not greater than 30 days, conduct
internal safety audits on both the health and safety management system and
the physical Site conditions. The audits shall be performed to the same criteria
and using the same grading and benchmarking as the Engineer’s audits.
b. The audits shall be conducted by person(s) who are qualified and competent
to carry out safety audits. The documentation generated by the audit process,
including score sheets, shall be made available to the Engineer for audit
purposes.
c. The audits shall include the work of subcontractors.

Package BH-03
d. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the date of all the audits. The
Engineer may send a representative to assess the thoroughness of the audit.
5.8.6 External Safety Audits
a. The contractor shall conduct quarterly External health and safety audits or
assessments by National / international accredited third-party agency to confirm the
effectiveness of the contractor’s health and safety management system and the
physical site conditions. The Engineer is to be advised in advance of all external
audits and assessments to be performed in order to have the opportunity to attend
and evaluate the thoroughness of the audit or assessment. Audit report shall be
submitted to the Engineer. Corrective actions resulting from External Audits and
assessments are to be addressed holistically across the site and must be tracked
until they are closed. Those that remain open past their deadline date are to be
recorded in the monthly H&S Report.
5.8.7 Reporting of Accidents, Incidents and Dangerous Occurrence
a. Within 45 days from the Commencement Date and before any construction
work commences on site the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an
Emergency Escalation Tree. The Emergency Escalation Tree shall be in
compliance with the Employer’s Health and Safety Manual Section 21.
b. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any incident,
dangerous occurrences or accidents, which results in death, serious bodily
injury, or incapacity or damage to the Employer’s property (see table below
for severity). Initial notification may be verbal but shall in any event be
followed by a preliminary written report, in a format reviewed by the Engineer,
within 24 hours of the occurrence/accident and a detailed written report shall
be submitted within seven (7) days.
c. The Contractor shall report all incidents to the Engineer and relevant authority
or other stakeholders as required. The format and mechanism for this
reporting shall be confirmed by the Engineer.
d. The Contractor shall submit at the end of each week a list of persons who are
on sick leave following an accident on the Contract to the Engineer.
Minor (Level 1) Significant (Level 2) Major (Level 3) Fatal (Level 4)
Near Miss Lost Time Incident {LTI}

(between 1 - 3 days) Major Incident
No Treatment Multiple Fatalites
Dangerous Occurence
LTI > 3 days
First Aid Occupational Disease
Violence at Work
Medical Treatment
Major Pollution
Third Party Hospital
Property Damage Fatality
Significant Pollution
Utility Strike with
Minor Pollution Utility Strike no Outage Outage

Package BH-03
5.8.8 Monthly Reports

a. The Contractor shall submit a Monthly Health and Safety Report separate to
the Monthly Progress Report. Prior to submission, the Contractor’s
Representative and Health and Safety Manager shall endorse the Site safety
report.
b. The Monthly Health and Safety Report shall comprehensively address all
relevant aspects of health and safety and shall contain certain standard forms
and information as directed by the Engineer, for statistical analysis.
c. The Contractor shall submit reports or accident analysis, in the agreed format,
as and when required by the Engineer.
d. The Contractor will be required to provide safety performance data (Key
Performance Indicators) as required by the Engineer, in order to measure the
Contractor’s compliance with all applicable Laws, Contractor’s health and
safety manual and health safety plan.
5.8.9 Emergency Procedures and Facilities
a. The Contractor shall establish and implement emergency procedures. The
Contractor shall prepare a Security and Emergency Plan, which is to be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
b. The Contractor shall submit within 45 days an Emergency Call-Out Escalation
Matrix. The format of the Emergency Call-Out Escalation Matrix shall be
approved by the Engineer. The Emergency Call-Out Escalation Matrix shall
be updated monthly and included in the Monthly Health and Safety Report.
5.8.10 First Aid Facilities
a. The Contractor shall provide first aid provisions in accordance with Indian
Law. Arrangements for transporting the injured (ambulance, stretcher, etc.)
shall be provided. Plans for the provision of trained first aid personnel shall
be reviewed by the Engineer.
b. Provisions shall include trained personnel and facilities appropriate to the Site
conditions. First aider competency shall be demonstrated by attendance and
certification at a licensed establishment for at least one day for basic first aider
and three (3) days for advanced first aiders.
c. Trained first aid personnel shall be in attendance at all times at the Site during
working hours.
d. The Contractor shall maintain a register of all persons receiving first aid
treatment. Records shall be in a comprehensive format and submitted weekly
to the Engineer, and where necessary to the relevant authority, and shall be
retained for audit purposes.
e. First aid kits, as required by the relevant authority, shall be made available in
all Site vehicles.
f. First aid kits shall be made available where work under the Contract are in
remote areas.

Package BH-03
5.8.11 Site Transport and Equipment

a. The Contractor shall ensure that all Site vehicles are regularly maintained and
kept in a safe condition with fully working brakes, reversing horns, lights,
exhaust, windscreen, windows and doors, and the like.
b. Each vehicle, piece of equipment or machinery shall be uniquely and clearly
identified and registered for maintenance purposes.
c. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove any vehicle from
the Site that is not up to the standards required.
d. All Contractor’s Equipment used on the Works shall be less than Seven (7)
years old at the commencement of the Contract. If the Contractor proposes
to use any equipment older than five years old, they shall first seek the
approval of the Engineer before mobilisation on site.
5.8.12 Work over Public Areas
All activities requiring lifting, launching, or otherwise working over public areas, shall
be performed in accordance with a method statement which shall be submitted to
the Engineer for review and comment.
5.8.13 Site Security
a. The Contractor shall take all necessary practicable precautions to prevent
trespass onto the Site, whether it is intentional or unintentional.
b. The Contractor shall provide Site security on a 24/7 basis and this shall
include lighting, signage and security personnel for the protection of the work
under the Contract so as to prevent theft and/or damage to plant, equipment
vehicles or materials.
5.8.14 Essential H&S services:
Contractor shall ensure collaboration with government agencies such as
Electrical department, Fire department, Police department, Meteorological
department, Hospital and other government agencies as may be essential
and required during the tenure of the project.

Package BH-03
6 Quality Management
6.1 Compliance
6.1.1 The Contractor shall comply with GC Clause 4.9 and Appendix II Employer’s Quality
Manual.
6.1.2 The Contractor shall document and implement a self-certifying Quality Management
System (QMS) that shall remain in effect during the execution of the work under the
Contract.
6.1.3 The Contractor’s QMS shall be in compliance with ISO 9001.
6.1.4 The Contractor’s QMS documentation shall include but not be limited to the
following:
a. quality manual;
b. quality plans;
c. quality procedures and work instructions;
d. forms and templates;
e. guidance notes;
f. inspection and test plans (ITP’s);
g. request for inspections (RFI’s);
h. compliance plan.
6.1.5 The overall philosophy for quality in all aspects of the work under the Contract shall
embody a ‘Right First Time’ culture and of continuous improvement via the
methodology of plan, do, check, act cycle as confirmed in ISO 9001. In particular,
the Contractor shall provide evidence that the following areas of quality
management are detailed within the QMS:
a. management responsibility;
b. promote a ‘right first time’ approach;
c. minimise reliance on inspection;
d. continuous improvement;
e. customer satisfaction is achieved.
6.1.6 Within 28 days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit the
following for review by the Engineer:
a. quality policy;
b. quality manual;
c. quality plans.
i. Design quality plan
ii. Manufacturing Quality Plan
iii. Construction Quality Plan

Package BH-03
6.1.7 For any amendment to the QMS documentation, the Contractor shall as soon as
practicable prepare and submit the proposed amendment for review by the
Engineer prior to implementation.
6.2 Contractor’s Documentation
6.2.1 Quality Manual
The Contractor’s quality manual is to be regularly updated to reflect changes to work
practices and/or changes to policy and legislation. The proposed changes are to be
submitted to the Engineer for review prior to inclusion and implementation.
6.2.2 Quality Plans
6.2.2.1 Quality plans shall be based on those outlined by ISO 10005:2018 and shall define
all measures necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract at all appropriate
phases of the work under the Contract.
6.2.3 Inspection and Test Plans (ITP)
a. 30 days prior to the Commencement Date of all major work activities requiring
test and/or inspection the Contractor shall produce and issue to the Engineer
for approval a draft outline of the ITP(s) for the work activity. Each ITP shall
identify the quality objectives and include, without limitation:
i. the personnel responsible for undertaking and certifying the inspection
and/or testing;
ii. the procedure or instructions for the inspection and/or testing;
iii. the test method or a reference to the relevant standard of testing;
iv. the inspection and/or testing required prior to commencement of an
activity;
v. the inspection and/or testing during an activity and its frequency;
vi. the inspection and/or testing required to complete an activity;
vii. all hold points;
viii. all witness points;
ix. any notices or other documents to be given to the Engineer in relation
to witness points and hold points;
x. the compliance criteria;
xi. the method of analysis of test data;
xii. the procedure for correction or disposal of any work which fails the
compliance criteria;
xiii. examples of the documentation to be used for reporting the results of
inspections, tests and the analysis of test data;
xiv. examples of the documentation to be used for recording the status of
inspections and tests;
xv. the procedure for the distribution, filing and storage of inspection

Package BH-03
reports, test reports and reports on analysis of test data.

b. The Contractor shall plan, perform and record all quality control activities to
ensure that all work is performed in accordance with the QMS documentation
reviewed by the Engineer and in compliance with the requirements of the
Contract.
c. The Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out further additional
inspections and/or tests as are in their opinion appropriate.
6.2.4 Quality Management Staff
The Contractor shall appoint competent Quality Engineers and support staff in
sufficient numbers to ensure the effective function of the Quality Management
discipline.
6.2.5 Reports of Inspections, Tests and Trials
The Contractor shall supply reports of each inspection and/or test. Such reports
shall show the results of all the inspections and/or tests carried out and shall certify
that the work has been inspected and/or tested in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract and in compliance with the requirements of the Contract.
The Contractor will ensure that inspections requiring ongoing monitoring and
improvement to ensure minimal rework and right first time are implemented.
Each report of inspection and/or test shall be signed by a representative of the
Contractor who has the necessary authority.
The Contractor shall ensure that a signed copy report of any on and off-Site
inspection/test is filed in his records within a reasonable time period, and no more
than 30 days.
All sampling & testing (off-site) is to be carried out by laboratories accredited by
NABL (National Accreditation Board of Testing and Calibration Laboratories) or by
an equivalent internationally accredited laboratory to ISO 17025:2005 approved by
the Engineer. A fully equipped laboratory for material quality testing shall be
established on site along, with laboratory technicians and support staff. Testing
machines shall be periodically calibrated in accordance with Indian Standards
requirements.
6.2.6 Quality Control Register
a. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all stages of the Work a quality
control register or registers to identify the status of inspections, sampling and
testing of the Work, and all certificates. These registers shall be maintained
as current at all times.
b. The Contractor shall submit monthly digital summaries based on each quality
control register to the Engineer. Each quality control register shall show the
type and amount of certification received and the sampling, inspection, and/or
testing undertaken on each element of the work under the Contract during the
previous month. The summaries shall identify and demonstrate the
compliance of such certification, sampling, inspection and/or testing with the
requirements of the Contract and shall identify any item which does not

Package BH-03
conform to the requirements of the Contract, including:

i. a list of the certificates received for each batch of manufactured goods
or materials incorporated in the work under the Contract and compare
this against the certification required by the Contract and the
Contractor's quality plans;
ii. a list of the inspection, sampling and testing activities undertaken by the
Contractor on each element of the work under the Contract and
compare these activities against the amount of inspection, sampling
and testing required by the Contract and the Contractor's quality plans;
iii. the results of each report of inspection and/or test and any required
analysis of these results and compare these results against the
acceptance criteria;
iv. reference to any actions proposed by the Contractor to overcome any
non- conformities identified by the Contractor and by the Engineer; and
v. a nonconformity register to indicate the status of all nonconformities.
6.3 Quality Management System Information
6.3.1 The Contractor shall make available a copy of quality bulletins in each of his site
offices, workshops, canteens and site notice boards. All bulletins shall be translated
into languages, which are understood by labour engaged by the Contractor or
subcontractors. Posters in Hindi, English, and other languages understood by the
workers to draw attention to quality polices shall be displayed prominently in
relevant areas of the Site.
6.3.2 The Contractor shall ensure that QMS matters are given a high degree of publicity
to all persons on the Site.
6.3.3 The Contractor will ensure all quality documents including records must be available
upon request from the Engineer.
6.3.4 The Contractor shall make available on the Site a complete and up to date set of
QMS documentation including but not limited to policies, procedures, guidance
notes, work instructions templates, forms, etc.
6.3.5 The Contractor shall also keep a working stock of all necessary forms, ensuring the
latest version is available, as required by the QMS.
6.4 Audits
6.4.1 External Audit
The Contractor shall ensure that audits of all the activities in each quality plan are
carried out at quarterly intervals, or at such other intervals as the Engineer may
require, ensuring the continuing suitability and effectiveness of the quality system.
The independent external auditor/ agency will be engaged by the contractor out of
the list attached. A penalty of Rs 2,00,000 lakhs (Two lakhs) will be imposed on
contractor if quarterly audit is not carried out. In addition to this Engineer reserve
the rights to deploy agency on his own to carry out the audit and the payment to the
agency done will be recovered from the contractor. Reports of each such audit shall
be submitted within 15 days to the Engineer.

Package BH-03
6.4.2 The Contractor shall submit for review by the Engineer details of qualifications and
experience of personnel assigned to carry out audit and inspection and testing
activities.
6.4.3 Upon receipt of a Corrective Action Request (CAR), Non-Conformance Report
(NCR), or similar as a result of a quality audit, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for review a proposed corrective and preventative action plan as required.
6.4.4 Quality audits may be conducted by the Engineer to ensure the continuing suitability
and effectiveness of the Contractor’s QMS.
6.4.5 Internal Audit
The Contractor shall continuously monitor the performance of the QMS and shall
specifically include in each monthly progress report:
a. the status of all QMS documentation;
b. an up-to-date audit schedule and status;
c. an up-to-date non-conformity register providing the status of all non-
conformities identified by the Engineer and the Contractor;
d. any other items as instructed by the Engineer.
6.5 Quality Control Requirements
6.5.1 The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a list of quality control points which
establish the criteria for control of each major component or activity during design,
construction, manufacture, installation and commissioning, in accordance with the
quality requirements of the Contract and submit to the Engineer for approval.
6.5.2 Before being brought to the Site, any goods proposed by the Contractor shall be
assessed by the Contractor for their compliance with the Employer’s Requirements.
6.5.3 Formal records of quality control inspection shall be retained by the Contractor, and
be accessible to the Engineer as and when required.
6.5.4 The identification and storage of goods on Site shall be controlled such that the
quality control status can be readily understood.
6.5.5 The Contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice, generally seventy-two
(72) hours, of when relevant work will be inspected and/or tested by the Contractors
QC team.
6.5.6 The Engineer may elect to witness inspections and/or tests by the Contractor in
relation to all quality control points as per approved ITP. Witness by the Engineer
shall not discharge the Contractor of the responsibility to provide compliant product,
nor shall it preclude subsequent rejection by the Engineer.
6.6 Notice of Place of Manufacture and/or Source of Supply
6.6.1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the places of manufacture and/or the
source of supply of all goods to be incorporated into the work under the Contract.
6.6.2 The Contractor shall give reasonable notice (which shall not in any event be less
than 30 days) to the Engineer before the start of any manufacturing and/or the
supply of goods.

Package BH-03
6.7 Quality Training

6.7.1 The Contractor shall submit the material for the quality induction training to the
Engineer, prior to conducting quality training sessions.
6.7.2 The Engineer has the right to request the Contractor’s quality training records.
6.7.3 The Contractor shall keep records of such training for quality audit purposes. Upon
completion of their training, the Contractor’s site staff shall sign a copy of their
assigned safety responsibility statement, which shall be kept by the Contractor for
audit purposes.
6.7.4 The Contractor is to report the number of QMS training sessions and employees
trained each month, at the QMS Committee meeting and in the monthly report.

Package BH-03
7 Design Management
7.1 Contractors Compliance and Obligations
7.1.1 The Contractor shall comply with all Legal requirements and the Employer’s
Requirements.
7.1.2 Whilst work under the Contract is being performed, one complete set of the
Employer's Requirements, the Design Documents and other written information
supplied by the Employer, the Engineer, the Contractor, any Subcontractors or
consultants shall be kept by the Contractor at the Site or other location approved in
writing by the Employer and shall be available at all times for reference by the
Employer, the Engineer and any persons nominated in writing by either of them.
7.1.3 During the manufacture or assembly of any significant part of the work under the
Contract away from the part of the Site where the Works are to be constructed, a
set of the drawings and written information relevant to that part of the work shall be
kept by the Contractor at the place of manufacture or assembly and shall be
available for reference by the Employer, the Engineer and any persons nominated
in writing by either of them.
7.1.4 All design work by or on behalf of the Contractor shall be prepared by qualified
designers who are engineers or other professionals who comply with the criteria (if
any) stated in the Employer's Requirements, and they shall be known as the
Designer. The Designer shall have experience, which shall be as stated (if any) in
the Notice Inviting Tender of Volume I. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, on
award of the Contract the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for consent the
names and particulars of the Designer.
7.1.5 The Contractor shall warrant that he, his designers, any design subcontractors or
other consultants have the experience and capability necessary to design the
Works to the relevant standards. The Contractor undertakes that the designers shall
be available to attend discussions with the Engineer at all reasonable times, until
the expiry date of the relevant Defects Notification Period.
7.1.6 Biweekly Design Workshops will be arranged to monitor design progress, agree key
element parameters and to promote transparency in the design process. The
Contractors and Designer Key Personnel related to design shall attend the Design
Workshops until such time the Engineer deems the frequency can be increased or
they are no longer required.
7.2 Design Submittal
7.2.1 The Contractor shall send all design submittals to the Engineer under the cover of
a Transmittal Form. The Transmittal Form shall be sequentially numbered and
signed in accordance with the Document Control Index. A separate Transmittal
Form shall be used for each submittal.
7.2.2 The Contractor shall provide supplemental information with each submittal in
sufficient detail to completely explain the subject of the design submittal.
7.2.3 For designs that are on the Programme Critical Path the Engineer shall respond as
per Volume II (GC & PC). Where designs are not on the Programme Critical Path

Package BH-03
the Engineer shall use his best endeavours to respond within a reasonable time so
as not to delay the progress of the Works. These review periods shall commence
the day after the Engineer receives a Contractor's Document and the Contractor's
notice. This Contractor’s notice shall state that the Contractor's Document is
considered ready, both for review in accordance with this Clause and for use. The
Contractor’s notice shall also certify that the Contractor's Document complies with
the Contract, or the extent to which it does not comply.
7.2.4 The Engineer may, within the review period, give notice to the Contractor that a
Contractor's Document fails (to the extent stated) to comply with the Contract. If a
Contractor's Document so fails to comply, it shall be rectified, resubmitted at the
Contractor's cost and reviewed. If the Contractor’s Document complies with the
Contract, the Engineer shall issue a statement of no objection (SONO), unless
expressly stated in the Contract that he shall approve or review the Contractor's
Document. Design submittals will be reviewed by the Engineer who will respond
with one of the following comments:
a. In the case of a Contractor's Document which has been submitted for the
Engineer's review the Engineer shall issue a Statement Of No Objection
(SONO) to the Contractor indicating that the Engineer does not object to the
Contractor's Document,
b. or a statement of No Objection with Comments (NOWC) and confirmation
whether work may commence on the acceptance the Contractor will close out
the Engineer’s comments,
c. or shall issue a statement that the Contractor's Document fails (to the extent
stated) to comply with the Contract.
7.3 Design Plan
7.3.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Design Plan for the design of the Works
within 45 days from commencement.
7.3.2 The Contractors Design Plan shall identify protocols for progressive design
assurance. This Design Plan shall include the provision of intermediary design
review gates for each design element, at which the Engineer will be kept appraised
of the Contractors Design.
7.3.3 The Design Plan shall define the Contractor's policy for the design of the Works and
shall, without limitation define:
a. the list of procedures and work instructions to be applied to manage and
control the quality of the design work, including:
i. the design and performance requirements which shall be defined in
terms of basic data and design assumptions made; relevant codes,
standards and regulatory requirements; safety, reliability, security and
environmental requirements; and commissioning requirements;
ii. design methods including software applications to be used in the
design, both proprietary and public domain, including any requirements
for physical and mathematical model testing;

Package BH-03
iii. preparation, checking, issue, distribution, indexing and filing of reports,

calculations, drawings and specifications together with the means for
their revisions;
iv. Contractor’s design review, authorisation and approval of design
documentation.
7.4 Design Submission Programme
7.4.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit with 30 days from the Commencement
Date a Design Submission Programme which is to set out fully the Contractor's
anticipated programme for the preparation, submission and review of the Design
Packages, the Definitive Design Submission and the Construction Reference
Drawings Submissions.
7.4.2 The Design Submission Programme shall:
a. make adequate allowance for the design and development of specialist
works;
b. be consistent with and its principal features integrated into the Works
Programme, and show all relevant Key Dates;
c. identify dates and subjects by which the Engineer’s decisions should be
made;
d. make adequate allowance for periods of time for review by the Engineer and
other review bodies;
e. include a schedule identifying, describing, cross-referencing and explaining
the Design Packages into which the Contractor intends to divide the Definitive
Design and Construction Reference Drawings; indicate the Design Interface
and Co-ordination periods for each Designated Contractor.
7.5 Design Quality Checking Plan
7.5.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Design Quality Checking Plan for the
design of the Works within 60 days from the Commencement Date. The Design
Quality Checking Plan is a design quality document and shall confirm how the
Contractor and their Designer(s) will quality check each submission to the Engineer.
7.5.2 The Design Quality Checking Plan shall confirm;
a. the objectives of the checking of each design stage to ensure the required
quality of work is achieved;
b. defined input and output criteria for each design stage;
c. identification of types and detailed methods of checking activities to be carried
out;
d. the Contractor’s approach to progressive design assurance;
e. detailed planning of checking activities to be carried out, including schedules,
resources and approval authorities;
f. selection and utilisation of the test equipment, and their test environmental
conditions;

Package BH-03
g. acceptance criteria on which the design is demonstrated, to be in accordance

with and traceable to the Employer’s Requirements;
h. demonstrating how the Employer’s Requirements have been met.
7.6 Design Submission Stages
7.6.1 The following design submissions shall be made by the Contractor for the
Engineer’s review:
a. Detailed Design Stage 1 {DS1};
b. Detailed Design Stage 2 {DS2};
c. Good for Construction (GFC)
d. As-built Drawings.
7.7 Detailed Design Stage 1 {DS1 - Preliminary}
7.7.1 The Contractor shall prepare the DS1 based on the Employer’s Requirements.
7.7.2 In order to complete the DS1, the Contractor shall have coordinated basic details
of spatial requirements for Railway Systems, environmental control systems
7.7.3 The preliminary structural design shall be sufficiently well developed to confirm that
the spatial provisions given in the layout drawings are necessary to suit all
interfacing requirements and can be achieved.
7.7.4 The preliminary design shall include a set of drawings and 3D BIM models to define
the basic layout of the public and plant room areas, in sufficient detail to allow the
Railway Systems, environmental control systems and designers to confirm their
finalised plant and equipment room layouts.
7.7.5 The preliminary design submission shall include but not be limited to the
documents, drawings and models outlined in this section. The Contractor shall
prepare a table of contents, listing all drawings, specifications, calculations and
other documents included in the submission.
7.7.6 DS1 (Preliminary) submission shall include but not be limited to:
a. the quality assurance plan for design
b. design status report;
c. the submission of proposed software
d. the preliminary equipment layouts and details
e. the preliminary maintenance analysis
f. the submission of specifications proposed for the work
g. preliminary station sizing
h. alignment review
i. the preliminary construction methodology
j. utility diversion plans;
k. utilities protective works report;

Package BH-03
l. traffic plans;
m. paving and reinstatement drawings;
n. geotechnical interpretation report (GIR);
o. geotechnical instrumentation plan (if any);
p. settlement analysis and protective works report (if required);
q. building protection drawings (if required);
r. civil and structural design statement;
s. structural analysis and calculations;
t. structural arrangement drawings for permanent and temporary works;
u. waterproofing drawings;
v. 3D BIM design models including 3D animation of construction methodology;
w. Fire and Life Safety report;
x. combined services drawing (CSD);
y. structural and rail systems (SRS) submission;
z. stray current, earthing, bonding, and lightning protection plan;
aa. equipment delivery and future replacement route drawings;
bb. architectural design report;
cc. architectural drawings.
7.8 Detailed Design Stage 2 {DS2 - Final}
7.8.1 In DS2 the Contractor shall consider and close out to the satisfaction of the Engineer
all comments raised in the progressive design verification process.
7.8.2 Acceptance of the design shall be sought and secured from the relevant Authorities.
The degree of design detail shall be adequate and sufficient for the Contractor’s
preparation of necessary construction, assembly, shop drawings, schedules for
implementation of the Works.
7.8.3 DS2 submission shall comprise but not be limited to:
7.8.3.1 General
a. design status report;
b. standard details
c. structural arrangement drawings;
d. reinforced concrete detail drawings;
e. development interface report and drawings;
f. architectural drawings;
g. 3D BIM models;
h. animations;

Package BH-03
i. maintenance strategy;
j. integrated energisation and system test plan;
k. architectural design report;
l. civil design statement;
m. alignment drawings;
n. Fire and Life Safety report;
o. civil and structural design submission:
i. GIR;
ii. instrumentation plan;
iii. settlement analysis report;
iv. building protection drawings;
v. underpinning reports;
vi. utilities drawings and subsidence report;
vii. structural analysis and calculations;
viii. structural detail drawings;
ix. waterproofing drawings;
x. paving and reinstatement drawings;
xi. traffic diversion drawings;
xii. contract material and workmanship specification;
xiii. construction staging drawings;
p. station drainage submission;
q. CSD/SRS and SEM submission;
r. the Contractor shall coordinate his designs with his interfacing parties and
produce the respective interface control design documents;
s. sustainability report;
t. materials and workmanship specifications.
u. Access & Maintenance Strategy for MEP equipment.
7.8.3.2 Good for Construction (GFC)
a. construction drawings, schedules and specifications;
b. manufacture, construction and installation drawings;
c. shop details, fabrication and assembly drawings.
7.8.3.3 As-built drawings and calculations shall comprise:
a. civil and architectural as-built drawings;
b. roadworks drawings;

Package BH-03
c. detailed topographical survey;

d. submission of survey information
e. survey standards.
7.9 Design Submission Requirements
The Contractor’s designs shall be fully coordinated with all Interfacing Parties,
Project Partners and relevant Stakeholders. The Contractor shall coordinate with all
Stakeholders and shall be responsible for obtaining all the required approvals which
relate to the submissions.
7.9.1 The Contractor shall develop and maintain detailed schematic drawings along with
functional descriptions of all the systems that are part of the work under the Contract
including their external interfaces.
7.9.2 Each design submittal, or groups of design submittals shall be accompanied by a
design report which includes, without limitation:
a. the basic input parameters and assumptions used as the basis for the design;
b. the scope and purpose of the design submittal;
c. a brief high-level description of the design submittal written in plain English
and how it relates to the overall work under the Contract, stating level of
integration achieved and assumptions made;
d. design and check certificates.
7.9.3 Each design submittal shall be supported, as appropriate, by:
a. functional descriptions;
b. Access & Maintenance Strategy
c. calculations;
d. catalogues;
e. samples.
7.9.4 Design Drawings & reports submission shall be in A1 Size with minimum 3 copies,
as per requirement of the Engineer.
7.10 Format of Calculations
7.10.1 Calculations relevant to all design submissions shall be submitted with the
respective design submissions. Input used in computer analysis, with supporting
explanation, shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of computer output on
request.
7.10.2 If the design of the work under the Contract are revised and such revisions render
the submitted calculations obsolete or inaccurate, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit revised calculations.
7.10.3 Calculations including computer analysis and design shall be subdivided according
to various disciplines and major structures. They shall be clearly and concisely
compiled, cross referenced and indexed, and form a clear and comprehensive

Package BH-03
record of the design. They shall be clearly documented and referenced, and
presented, after any photocopying reduction, in a readily legible format of minimum
font size 10.
7.11 BIM 3D and CAD Data
7.11.1 The Contractor shall comply with the Employer’s Volume IV BIM and CAD Manuals.
7.11.2 Within 45 days of Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit CAD and BIM
Manuals, which shall be in compliance with the Employer’s requirements.
7.11.3 The design shall be carried out on a common BIM 3D (shared information model in
a common data environment) platform and shall be clash free.
7.11.4 For each of the Stations the Contractor shall provide, and update when requested
by the Engineer, construction time sequencing in the model to permit time-lapse
construction and walkthrough video to be prepared from commencement to
completion.
7.11.5 Access to the 3D BIM model common platform shall be made available to the
Engineer, and a monthly update, 3D BIM Model and pdf, shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Engineer.
7.12 Manufacture, Construction and Installation
7.12.1 The Contractor shall not proceed with the manufacture, construction or installation
of any work contained within a design submission unless it has been approved by
the Engineer.
7.12.2 All materials must be reviewed and approved by the Sustainability Manager of the
Contractors based on the IGBC Green building assessment objectives and
requirements.
7.13 Working (Shop) Drawings (Structural Architectural)
7.13.1 For construction purposes the Contractor shall prepare working drawings, shop
drawings and schedules. The working drawings shall correspond to the final design
drawings, the final CSD, SEM, RCP and SRS drawings.
7.13.2 The Contractor shall provide samples and mock ups, including; piers, pier cross
heads, viaduct, electrical containment, pipework, major architectural finishing
elements (flooring, walling, glass, balustrades, doors, barriers etc.), as required by
the Engineer, at least 28 days prior to the construction or fabrication of the part of
work under the Contract to which they are related. The Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for approval a programme for the planned mock-ups within 90 days
from the Commencement Date.
7.13.3 The structural reinforcement drawings together with the bar bending schedules shall
be regarded as shop drawings. These drawings and schedules shall be certified by
the Contractor and DVE.
7.14 As-Built Drawings and Calculations
7.14.1 The Contractor shall maintain contemporaneously all records necessary for the
preparation of as-built drawings. As-built drawings shall be produced progressively
as elements of the works are completed. All as–built Drawings shall be checked and

Package BH-03
certified by the designer of the relevant item of the Works and verified by the DVE.
7.14.2 The as-built drawings and models shall be endorsed by the Contractor as true
records of the construction of the work under the Contract. One complete set of as-
built drawings shall be submitted, in both hard copy and electronic formats,
complete with calculations, to the Engineer for review.
7.15 As Built Survey
7.15.1 The Contractor at his own cost provide a detailed survey of the completed works,
which shall include a topographical survey, locations of all piers, road realignment,
finished deck levels all structural elements, façade works, VHTS equipment, floors,
ceilings and roofs. The reports shall include design coordinates, actual coordinates
and difference in millimetres.

Package BH-03
8 Information Management
8.1 General
8.1.1 The Contractor shall comply with the standards of the Employer’s Project
Management Information Systems (PMIS), in respect of information management.
8.1.2 The Contractor shall submit an Information Management Plan describing how the
Contractor shall create, collect, store, search, manage and distribute information
within 45 days of the Commencement Date for review by the Engineer.
8.1.3 The Information Management Plan shall:
a. include system architecture and process to describe how the Contractor will
provide information to the Engineer in a controlled, efficient, transparent,
auditable and timely manner;
b. contain information on workflow, metadata, Contractor’s approval process
and status;
c. be compatible with the Contractor’s BIM/CAD/GIS/SMP and Engineering
Content Management (ECM) Plan;
d. reference the Contractor’s Electronic Document Management System
(EDMS) document management plan;
e. detail how data and information will flow between the Contractor’s BIM/CAD
ECM environment to the Contractor’s document control EDMS environment;
f. detail how assigned authority is controlled through workflows and permissions
to ensure any sign-off function will only be presented to the correct authority;
and
g. detail how object data from the BIM Model will populate areas in the
Configuration Model.
8.2 Project Management Information System (PMIS)
8.2.1 The Contractor shall ensure data, metadata and information formats are compatible
with formats required for PMIS reporting in accordance with Employer’s
Requirements.
8.3 Electronic Document Management System (EDMS)
8.3.1 The Contractor shall use an EDMS which is compatible with the Employer’s web-
based EDMS, to coordinate and control the document flow (create, process,
storage, retrieval and distribution) of electronic and paper documents in a secure
and efficient manner.
8.3.2 All the Contractor’s Documents shall be controlled via the EDMS system for the
8.3.3 These requirements cover all types of documents including, but not limited to:
a. management plans, procedures, method statements;
b. quality plan and documentation covering norms, standards quality control
register etc.

Package BH-03
c. design documentation covering preliminary and definitive designs,

construction reference drawings, shop drawings etc.
d. design models;
e. mock-ups;
f. as-built drawings;
g. operation and maintenance manuals, safety manual, training manual
h. engineering calculations;
i. reports: - progress, investigation & survey, construction, test &
commissioning, technical and non- technical;
j. time: programmes, schedules and cost;
k. certification documents for safety, technical clearance and opening of metro
line for carriage of passengers.
8.3.4 The Contractor’s EDMS shall;
a. provide a storage and backup infrastructure to prevent data loss and provide
data recovery mechanisms;
b. provide a single, controlled source for each document;
c. provide an efficient search and retrieval of specific documents;
d. provide measures to control restricted access to program documents and
provide access to all documents to all team members;
e. identify document development and approval processes that promote quality
and consistency;
f. provide clarity regarding which version of a deliverable is the latest version;
g. provide a clear record of deliverables;
h. enable quick and direct propagation of changes;
i. provide an accurate and complete archive of documents to the Employer; and
j. Access of Contractor’s EDMS to Employer and Engineer.
8.3.5 The Contractor shall submit an Electronic Document Management Plan within 60
days of Commencement Date for review by the Engineer, detailing how the
Contractor shall implement and maintain a web-based EDMS. The Electronic
Document Management Plan shall give an overview of the EDMS strategy and shall
include a permissions matrix mapped to roles and responsibilities, workflow,
systems architecture, resilience and disaster recovery.
8.4 Records
8.4.1 The Contractor shall ensure that records are kept and traceable to the material,
equipment or services to which they relate. Those records shall include, but are not
limited to:
a. calculations, specifications and drawings;

Package BH-03
b. certificates verifying the characteristics and quality of the Goods;

c. tools and equipment calibration records;
d. surveillance, inspection and test results;
e. acceptances of processes, procedures and personnel for manufacturing,
construction and installation;
f. non-conformance reports and corrective or preventive actions and their
closeout;
g. specification waivers and concessions;
h. design review reports;
i. quality audit reports.
8.4.2 A record is any significant item of information received or created in the course of
the Contract and maintained on any media for use at a later time.
8.4.3 The Contractor shall retain all records relating to the Works (including copies of all
original documents delivered to the Engineer) for a period of five (5) years after the
date of the last Performance Certificate issued for the Works, or for a longer period
where required by applicable Laws.
8.4.4 Retention media can be hard copies, microfilm and/or electronic media. All records
shall be stored in a storage facility suitable for the type of media being stored. All
storage media shall be indexed and clearly labelled to identify the contents.
8.4.5 Records shall be stored electronically, unless otherwise required by applicable
Laws.
8.4.6 Records shall be held in a suitable records storage facility until their destruction
date. The storage facility shall meet the following minimum requirements:
a. the storage facility shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent
degradation or destruction of records by insects, rodents, weather conditions,
fire, theft and deterioration by environmental conditions;
b. a system shall exist by which all of the Engineer’s records are indexed
(according to contents, organization, reference number, entry date and
destruction date) so that they can be located within a reasonable time;
c. access to all records shall be controlled.
8.4.7 Complete reports of the inventory shall be provided by the Contractor when
requested by the Engineer. A security system shall be maintained to preclude the
entry of unauthorised personnel into the storage area and to guard against larceny
and vandalism.
8.4.8 Equipment and software shall be available to read, view and print records in storage.
8.4.9 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer where the records are being held. The
Engineer may perform a periodic audit check of the Contractor’s storage facility to
ensure all documents are being kept and stored correctly.
8.5 Document Submittal Register

Package BH-03
8.5.1 The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a document submittal register (DSR)
of all contract deliverables within 30 days of the Commencement Date for approval
by the Engineer.
8.5.2 The DSR shall be kept up to date by the Contractor and issued to the Engineer with
the Contractor’s monthly report and or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
8.6 Document Submissions
8.6.1 All correspondence reference numbers shall be generated in accordance with the
Employer’s File Naming Conventions and Metadata Requirements.
8.6.2 Copies of correspondence relevant to the execution of the work under the Contract
and not of a confidential nature received from or despatched to government
departments, utility undertakings, stakeholders and Project Partners shall be
submitted to the Engineer via EDMS for information as soon as possible but in any
case, not later than 7 days after receipt or despatch.
8.7 Electronic Submissions and Software to be provided
8.7.1 Design documents for Engineer review shall be submitted in digital format. Native
formats of all final submissions shall be provided in addition to PDF copy.
8.7.2 Any commercial or proprietary software can be used for analysis and design
provided the same is validated with manual computations or other standard
software in multiple scenarios.
8.7.3 The Contractor shall provide 1 (one) certified licenced copy of the following Program
management software
a. One copy of Primavera P6 scheduling software
8.7.4 The Contractor shall provide one certified copy of any design (civil, Architecture)
and native drawing software they use to the Engineer to allow review of the design.
As a minimum the Contractor shall provide;
a. One copy of the drawing software (AutoCAD or similar)
b. BIM model software (Bentley Revit or similar) as defined in Employer’s
requirements
c. One copy of asset management software (Maximo or similar) compatible with
the 3D BIM software
d. One copy of proprietary design (civil/structural, Architecture) software used
for computation
8.7.5 The Contractor shall provide one certified copy of the software they use for Interface
and Requirements Management. Managements as per requirement of the
Employer.

Package BH-03
9 Stakeholder and Communication Management

9.1 Stakeholder and Communication Management Plan {SCMP}
9.1.1 Within 45 days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for review an SCMP.
9.1.2 The Contractor shall include all stakeholders as part of the SCMP.
The SCMP shall define the engagement of all external stakeholders, including the
authorities required to participate in the review, approval and issue of design and
construction permits, as well as the residents, business and developers affected by
the work under the Contract. The external stakeholders shall include but not limited
to:
a. Statutory Authorities;
b. Utility Owning Agencies;
c. Public Service Providers;
d. Developers; and
e. Resident Welfare Associations, Non-Governmental Organisations (NGO),
Industry Associations, etc.
9.1.3 The SCMP shall include a communications matrix and details of distribution
methods and responsibilities.
9.1.4 The Contractor shall submit a monthly status update of all stakeholder
communications and agreements.
9.2 External Communications
9.2.1 The Contractor shall not issue or verbally disclose any information, publication,
document or article for publication in any media, print or digital, without prior
approval of the Engineer, who may place conditions on its approval.
9.2.2 The official language of formal communications is English, excepting for
communication in Hindi with government bodies, as necessary. Any document
written in Hindi shall be translated into UK English.

Package BH-03
10 Construction, Manufacturing, Installation and Logistics

10.1 Method Statements
10.1.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review comprehensive method
statements for all planned construction activities.
10.1.2 Method statements shall be submitted a minimum of 30 days in advance of the work
commencing to allow for adequate time for Engineer review and resubmission as
necessary and further review.
10.1.3 Prior to any activity for which a method statement is required, the Contractor shall
have obtained the Engineer's approval to its method statements for such activity.
10.1.4 Prior to the commencement of all major work elements the Contractor shall call a
Readiness Review to brief the Contractors and Engineers site construction teams
on the construction methodology.
10.1.5 The method statements shall clearly identify the Contractor’s proposed methods
and sequence of working, including programme details and shall include but not be
limited to:
a. personnel;
b. method and sequence of the work;
c. proposed methods of temporary support where required to ensure the safety
of the work under the Contract, addressing prevention of deterioration of the
excavation due to exposure;
d. programme for the work;
e. traffic diversion schemes;
f. a comprehensive construction risk assessment report prior to the
commencement of the construction work under the Contract and detailed
Work Specific construction risk assessment reports prior to the
commencement of particular elements of the work under the Contract;
g. proposals for protection of adjacent structures and ground treatment where
appropriate;
h. instrumentation for monitoring the work, particularly monitoring of adjacent
structures, utilities and adjacent ground where appropriate;
i. locations and method of stockpiling excavated fill material where appropriate;
j. reinstatement work inclusive of roadworks, drains, box culverts, and ancillary
structures where appropriate;
k. noise and vibration monitoring, including attenuation proposals where
necessary;
l. methods for the collection, storage and disposal of all waste, including
procedures for safe handling, storage and disposal of toxic waste;
m. identification of checks to be carried out, details of the QA/QC records that
will be submitted to the Engineer;

Package BH-03
n. a staff supervision/responsibility matrix for the various elements of the work.

10.2 Survey
10.2.1 Before the Contractor commences the setting out of the Works, the Engineer will
provide reference drawings showing the position of survey points and benchmarks,
together with the co-ordinates and/or level assigned to each point, that were used
in developing the Employer’s Reference Drawings, which have been provided for
information only. The Contractor shall comply with GC Clause 4.7 and verify the
accuracy of the information.
10.2.2 The Contractor shall design the Works to comply with vertical and horizontal
clearances confirmed in Volume IV.
10.2.3 In case of any differences from the Employer’s drawings or data, the Contractor
shall bring these to the notice of the Engineer immediately and submit his proposals
for correction/modification of the alignment. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that
there are no further conflicts between the data given and the survey
control/reference points & bench marks established by him and all the conflicts
(including with the survey data of adjacent Contractors) shall have to be
satisfactorily resolved by this contractor. All such proposals for correction prepared
by the Contractor and all such rectifications works undertaken by the Contractor to
resolve/eliminate all such differences/discrepancies/conflicts in survey data of the
Employer/adjacent contractor and the Contractor shall not entitle the Contractor for
any claims or extension of Contract time. All the necessary works in this regard shall
be done by the Contractor without any cost or time implications to the Employer.
10.2.4 The Contractor shall establish and provide all subsidiary setting out points,
monuments, towers and the like which may be necessary for the proper and
accurate setting out and checking of the Works.
10.2.5 The Contractor shall carefully protect all the survey reference points, bench marks,
setting out points, monuments, towers and the like from any damages and shall
maintain them and promptly repair or replace any points damaged from any causes
whatsoever.
10.2.6 The setting up of the accurate survey reference points and maintaining them shall
be the full responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall check the survey
reference points every three months to ensure that these survey points continue
consistent with the bench marks.
10.2.7 All levels given on the Contractor’s Documents shall refer to a project height datum,
which shall be confirmed by the Engineer. The project height datum shall be clearly
defined and indicated on the design drawings.
10.2.8 All coordinates given on the Contractor’s Documents shall be based on the project
coordinate system, which will be confirmed by the Engineer. The project coordinate
system shall be clearly defined and indicated on the design drawings.
10.2.9 The Contractor shall relate the construction of the work under the Contract to the
coordinate system and height datum.
10.2.10 The Contractor shall maintain a common survey interface with adjacent Work

Package BH-03
Packages, and shall make available accurate survey information for setting out
subsequent work under the Contract by other Project Partners.
10.2.11 The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the setting out of the Works, and
certify it is in full compliance with the Employer’s requirements and their Design.
The Contractor shall have a third party check the setting out of the Works to ensure
at handover the alignment is compliant with the Employer’s requirements.
10.2.12 Prior to handover to Project Partners the Contractor shall carry out a wriggle survey
to confirm clearances are in compliance with the Project Schedule of Dimensions.
The Contractor shall provide a Clearance Report which shall be endorsed by Project
Partners as applicable.
10.3 Contractor’s Equipment
10.3.1 All Contractor’s Equipment used on the Works shall be less than Seven (7) years
old at the commencement of the Contract. If the Contractor proposes to use any
equipment older than five years old, they shall first seek the approval of the Engineer
before mobilisation on site.
10.3.2 All Contractor’s Equipment used on the Works shall have a valid certificate of
operation provided by a recognised licencing authority.
10.3.3 Contractor Equipment operators shall hold a valid appropriate operator licence.
10.4 Removal of Temporary Works and Facilities
10.4.1 On the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate, or earlier if directed by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall remove all Temporary Works and facilities and reinstate the
Works to the original existing conditions to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
10.4.2 Reinstatement means replacement to match the original condition unless otherwise
stated. The Contractor shall also remedy any defect caused by the Contractor
during the course of the work under the Contract.
10.5 Temporary Traffic Management
10.5.1 The Contractor shall provide all necessary expertise to plan, design, implement,
operate and maintain a temporary traffic control in accordance with the
requirements of all relevant Laws and the Employer’s requirements.
10.5.2 A comprehensive temporary traffic management scheme shall be installed and
operated by the Contractor to facilitate the construction of the work under the
Contract. Temporary traffic management schemes shall ensure that minimum
disruption is imposed on the traffic in the vicinity of the work under the Contract and
ensure safe and efficient management of traffic for all work conditions and at all
stages of construction.
10.5.3 The Contractor shall produce detailed temporary traffic management schemes to
suit their method and sequence of work for approval by the relevant statutory
authorities.
10.5.4 The Contractor shall prepare a complete traffic management scheme for the work
under the Contract that considers any wider impact of modifications to the existing
road network. This will include an advance traffic signals & signing strategy;

Package BH-03
forewarning drivers of construction works and associated diversions.

10.5.5 The Contractor shall undertake traffic surveys on roads affected by the traffic
diversions, in particular at junctions currently experiencing high demand or
operating close to capacity, both prior to undertaking the diversion to establish a
baseline, and following a settling-in period of the new diversion. These shall be used
to monitor the traffic impact of the work under the Contract.
10.5.6 Drawings of Barricading to be used for temporary traffic management are given
bellow:

Package BH-03
10.6 Demolition of Structures

10.6.1 The Contractor shall demolish and dispose of all resultant demolition materials for
all structures including buildings, drains or any other structures, to facilitate the
construction of the work under the Contract.
10.6.2 The Contractor shall backfill any part of the void created with suitable material and
reinstate the area to match with the surrounding ground level.
10.7 Disposal of Excavated and Contaminated Materials
10.7.1 The Contractor shall carry out regular testing to confirm the classification of
materials to be disposed. The laboratory at which the testing is to be carried out
shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. Prior to taking any sample for testing,
the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s agreement that the sample is
representative of the material to be disposed.
10.7.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval an Excavated and
Contaminated Materials Disposal Plan within 60 days of Commencement.
10.7.3 Where excavated soil or imported fill fail to meet the requirements for fill material
only because of excessive moisture content, the Contractor shall dry it so that it
meets the requirements for fill material.
10.7.4 The Contractor may propose and implement methods to treat waste to render it
acceptable as fill material acceptable.
10.7.5 The Contractor shall ensure that materials in each of the defined categories are
segregated during excavation and kept so thereafter. Where materials from different
categories are mixed together the resulting mixture shall be considered as waste.

Package BH-03
10.7.6 The disposal of waste and contaminated material shall be entirely the responsibility
of the Contractor.
10.7.7 The Contractor shall maintain a record of all materials disposed of the Site.
10.7.8 The Engineer shall have access to these records at any time and may instruct the
Contractor to obtain, at the Contractor’s cost, independent verification of the size of
loads carried by any or each vehicle.
10.7.9 If the Contractor identifies contaminated material a specific disposal plan shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review. Excavation works of any works leading to the
production of contaminated excavated material for disposal shall not proceed until
a successfully reviewed plan is in place.
a. The plan shall include the Contractor's proposals for additional and ongoing
environmental sampling and testing, including the programme of sampling
and details of the testing facility.
b. The plan shall outline procedures for action in the event that contaminated
material is encountered. These shall include all health and safety aspects and
materials handling and transportation.
10.7.10 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review their proposed method of
disposal of any polymer slurry waste and polymer contaminated excavated material,
including the methods of transporting polymer slurry waste and contaminated
excavated material on public roads.
10.7.11 A Mechanical Type Washing Plant shall be installed by the Contractor for use of all
Vehicles leaving the Casting Yard or any other work area of the Contractor to avoid
any spillage on any connecting roads. The Contractors shall ensure any material
spillage deposited on roads is immediately removed so as to minimise impact on
the public and other road users.
10.7.12 All incoming and outgoing haulage trucks used to move material shall have sealed
tailgates and a cover to prevent dust and debris escaping.
10.8 Restoration of Areas Disturbed by Construction
Any areas disturbed by the construction activity, either inside or outside the Project
Right of Way or Site Areas, shall be reinstated by the Contractor to their original
condition, or better, with new materials. These shall include but not necessarily
limited to sidewalks, parking lots, access roads, adjacent roads, adjacent properties
and landscaping. Grass cover shall be provided for any bare earth surface areas,
along with proper provision for surface drainage.
10.9 Manufacturing
10.9.1 Management
The Contractor shall establish procedures and controls that govern the
procurement, integration, manufacture and testing, quality assurance and delivery
of plant, equipment and spares to be supplied under the Contract. This shall include
the administration and supply of spare parts and warranty in accordance with the
Contract. The Contractor’s Manufacturing Management Plan shall be submitted to
the Engineer for an approval within 45 days of the Commencement Date.

Package BH-03
10.9.2 Procurement and Subcontract Management

The Contractor’s management system and procedures shall establish and employ
a procedure for materials procurement and Sub-contracting, sufficient to assure
technical, administrative, quality and contractual controls consistent with those of
this Contract. The Contractor’s management system shall be auditable for materials
sources, lot number, serialised equipment, etc. Sub-contract amendments shall be
employed whenever contractual changes are made either bilaterally or unilaterally
by the parties involved. Prior approval of the Engineer shall be taken for the make
of all equipment and accessories.
10.9.3 Manufacturing and Production Management
The Contractor’s manufacturing and production management system shall
encompass all points of receiving, raw material and components processing,
fabrication, assembly, test and all points of in-process inspections. The Contractor’s
Manufacturing Management Plan shall contain:
a. a brief description of all inspection hold points and test points, and a
correlation with the programme schedule;
b. a list of all Sub Contractors; and
c. a delivery schedule of each item of equipment to match installation plan,
together with Manufacturer’s Qualification: The equipment manufacturer shall
show at least ten year of continuous and current experience in the design,
assembly, and testing of similar equipment as being offered complying with
the Contract Specifications.
10.10 Equipment Installation
10.10.1 Equipment Installation Plan and Programme
The Equipment Installation Plan shall confirm how the Contractor proposes to
organise and carry out the installation and complete the whole of the Works by the
given Key Dates.
The Contractor shall submit the Plan for approval to the Engineer 90 days prior to
the start of installation on site the Contractor shall attend weekly planning meetings
with the Engineer to finalise the Work detail, commencing 4 weeks prior to the start
of installation on site.
The complete installation is to be carried out as per Coordinated Installation
Programme (CIP) agreed by all Interfacing Project Partners and approved by the
Engineer.
10.10.2 Contractors’ Resident Staff
The Contractor shall ensure that a qualified representative of the manufacturer is
available on-site for the duration of the on-site Works during normal working hours
and installation period and on-call to arrive on site within 30 minutes at all other
times. The manufacturer’s representative shall support the Contractor’s
Representative during the Installation and Testing phase of the Works.
The Contractor’s Representative shall have sufficient authority to progress the
Contractor’s work on Site. The Contractor’s Representative shall be competent and

Package BH-03
qualified to act on behalf of the Contractor, and Provide upon request information
that may include:
a. Current progress of the Works;
b. Planned work for the next 5 weeks;
c. Audit and inspections reports;
d. Health and safety information; and
e. Documents and records pertaining to the Works.
10.11 Storage, Shipping and Delivery
10.11.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain acceptable storage facilities for the
Contractor’s Equipment, temporary works, Employer’s equipment, plant, materials
and any other things intended to form or forming part of the work under the Contract.
10.11.2 The Contractor shall prepare, protect and store all Contractor’s Equipment,
temporary works, Employer’s equipment, plant, materials and any other things
intended to form or forming part of the work under the Contract. This shall act to
safeguard them against loss or damage from repeated handling, from climatic
influences and from all other hazards arising during shipment or storage on or off
the Site.
10.11.3 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 14 days in advance of any expected
shipment date and give further notification of the actual shipment date and routing
when such information is subsequently established. This shall complement the
inspection requirements prior to delivery as specified herein.
10.11.4 Packing lists and quality certificates for all materials and equipment shall be issued
monthly to the Engineer as part of the Quality Register.
10.11.5 Any part of the goods to be supplied under the Contract which is damaged in transit
shall not be considered as delivered until repairs or replacements have been made
and all necessary spare parts or items have been delivered to the Site.
10.11.6 The Contractor shall remove temporary fittings required for shipment and re-
assembly of equipment and shall complete this prior to the equipment or parts
thereof being inspected and before they are considered delivered.
10.11.7 An item shall be considered delivered when all damage has been repaired and all
documentation and post-delivery preparation have been completed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
10.12 Logistics
10.12.1 The construction involves extensive works and to prevent major traffic congestion,
construction vehicle movement shall be reduced to a minimum.
10.12.2 The Contractors’ responsibilities shall include development of a detailed logistics
plan, processes and procedures for the Project:
a. Provision of information related to the transport of all plant, materials,
equipment, goods, and labour to the Employer and to relevant stakeholders
and Authorities to assist with coordination; and

Package BH-03
b. Acquisition of all permits and approvals from the relevant stakeholders and
authorities required for the transport of all items related to construction
including material sourcing, storage, manufacture, treatment and disposal.
10.13 Key Materials Stocks and Supplies
10.13.1 Buffer Stocks
10.13.1.1 In order to minimize the risk of key material shortages during execution of the
Works, the Contractor shall maintain, either on-site or off-site, a minimum of two-
month rolling buffer stock of the following key materials:
a. Cement – for incorporation in cast in situ and/or precast concrete;
b. Aggregates – for incorporation in cast in situ and/or precast concrete;
c. Reinforcement Steel - for incorporation in cast in situ and/or precast concrete;
d. Bridge bearings;
e. Stressing tendons and fixings.
10.13.1.2 For the purposes of monitoring of the Contractor’s compliance with the rolling buffer
stock requirement, the Contractor shall supply a supplementary program. This shall
be updated and aligned with the Contractor’s Programme. It shall also include but
not be limited to the key raw materials.
10.13.1.3 The Contractor shall provide monthly reports to the Engineer, which confirms
compliance with the Employer’s rolling buffer stock requirement.
10.13.1.4 All costs associated with the material storage in the buffer stock, including but not
limited to any transportation costs, shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
Maintenance of the material buffer stocks includes, but is not limited to, protection
of stockpiles from weather conditions, stockpile management processes,
procedures, and storage facility plant and equipment.
10.13.1.5 Any request by the Contractor for approval of key materials from international
markets shall contain in minimum the following:
a. proof that the local markets are unable to meet the required demands;
b. method for utilising internationally sourced key materials in supplementing
key materials supply from the local market;
c. assurance of internationally sourced key material compliance and
compatibility with local market key materials, particularly related to effects and
impacts on blended materials/products properties for consistency and
conformance.

Package BH-03
11 Site Management
11.1 Access to the Site
11.1.1 The Contractor shall be given access to the Site in accordance with the Contract.
On taking access the Contractor shall inspect the Right of Way and take a
photographic survey confirming the condition which shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
11.1.2 Entry to and exit from the Site shall be controlled by the Contractor.
11.1.3 The Contractor shall ensure that access to every portion of the Site which is in its
possession or to which it has access is continuously available to the Employer and
Engineer.
11.1.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that any access or egress to the
Works is controlled so that there is no disturbance to members of the public or
damage to public or private property occurs as a result of the use of such access or
egress.
11.1.5 The Contractor shall provide a means of distributing loads imposed by Contractor’s
Equipment and traffic and prevent damage to roads and utilities.
11.1.6 The Contractor shall maintain access to all roads and side roads within the Site
throughout the Works. Access to all existing buildings, car parks and other accesses
shall be similarly maintained.
11.1.7 Existing pedestrian routings and road crossings, and their existing widths, shall be
maintained at all times.
11.2 Site Installation
11.2.1 The following particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not more
than 30 days after the Commencement Date:
a. Drawings showing the formation works and the layout at all sites for the
Contractor's offices, project signboards, principal access and other major
facilities required, together with all service utilities.
b. Drawings showing the details to be included on the project signboards and
diversion boards.
c. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a plan of intended use
of the Works areas and the layout of each proposed Site facility.
11.2.2 Drawings showing locations of stores, storage areas, concrete batching,
Contractor’s Equipment and other major facilities and their access roads/paths shall
be submitted to the Engineer for his review as early as possible, but in any case,
not less than 30 days prior to when such facilities are intended to be constructed on
the Site.
11.2.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for forming the Works areas, constructing all
temporary access roads, services including water and power supply for the Works,
and drainage and for maintaining the Works areas. All Temporary Work used in the
construction of the temporary facilities or Permanent Works shall be such that they
can be easily removed before Taking Over of the Works.

Package BH-03
11.2.4 Roadworks, sewer and drainage work and utilities diversions required may extend
beyond the Contract limits. Requirements of other relevant authorities shall be
deemed to be included in the Works.
11.2.5 The use of ground anchors shall be avoided as far as possible. For any ground
anchors or other Temporary Work used in the Works that encroach beyond the
Works areas boundary, the Contractor shall seek the permission of and satisfy all
requirements of the relevant statutory authorities and stakeholders.
11.2.6 The Contractor shall take note that the Works areas shown on the drawings are
indicative and approximate. The actual extent of such areas and the layout of the
Contractor’s facilities shall be agreed and confirmed with the Engineer through Site
surveys conducted by the Contractor before taking possession of the Site. The
Engineer reserves the right to adjust the boundary of these areas to suit Site
conditions.
11.2.7 The Contractor may also use Works areas for storage of construction materials
subject to obtaining all necessary approvals. The Contractor shall take all necessary
safety precautions to ensure that such activities do not pose a hazard. Barriers and
signage shall be erected by the Contractor to serve as proper demarcation and
warning.
11.2.8 Where the Works area is not served by an access road, the Contractor shall
construct access roads as required. The Contractor shall survey the Site and
propose the road alignment for the Engineer’s review prior to its construction.
Complete details of access roads and the integration with the existing or temporary
traffic management system shall be submitted to the relevant authorities for
approval prior to commencing the Works.
11.2.9 If additional Works areas are necessary, the Contractor shall be responsible for
seeking, at his own cost, any additional Works areas that may be required.
11.3 Site Conditions, Maintenance and Clearance
11.3.1 All Temporary Works which are not to remain on the Site after the Completion of
the Works shall be removed prior to Completion of the Works or at other times
instructed by the Engineer. The Site shall be cleared and reinstated to the lines and
levels and to the same or better condition as existed before the Works started
except as otherwise stated in the Contract.
11.3.2 Housekeeping is a basic requirement and good housekeeping shall be maintained
at all times. The Contractor’s responsibility for good housekeeping shall include, but
is not limited to:
a. the wheels of all Site vehicles shall be washed before leaving Site to avoid
depositing mud and debris on the adjacent roads; and
b. the Contractor shall ensure all roads adjacent to the Site entry gates are kept
clean and free from any mud or debris from the Works.
11.3.3 Prior to taking over of the Works or any Section, the Contractor shall undertake full
clearance of all rubbish and waste and full cleaning of all of the parts of the Works.
11.3.4 The Contractor shall provide latrines and wash places for the use of Contractor’s

Package BH-03
Personnel and all other persons who will be on the Site. The size of latrines and
wash places shall accord with the numbers of persons entitled to be on the Site,
which may necessitate their location on structures. Where necessary there shall be
separate facilities for males and females. The capacities and layout shall be subject
to review by the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange regular disposal of effluent
and sludge in a manner that shall be in accordance with local laws/regulations.
11.3.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all latrines and wash places on
the Site in a clean and sanitary condition, ensuring that they do not pose a nuisance
or a health threat. The Contractor shall also take steps and provisions as deemed
necessary or as directed by the Engineer to ensure that vermin, etc. are controlled
at all times.
11.4 Site Utilities
11.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing water, electricity, telephone,
sewerage and drainage facilities for the Engineer’s Site offices, Contractor’s Site
offices, structures and buildings and for all Site laboratories and all such services
that are necessary for satisfactory performance of the Works. The Contractor shall
make all arrangements with and obtain the necessary approval from the relevant
civil and utility authorities for the facilities.
11.4.2 The Contractor shall meet the requirements for the supply and provision of power
and water services for all Interfacing Parties which shall be on a chargeable basis.
11.4.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for power provision on the Site during
Construction.
11.5 Site Traffic Management and Transport Safety
11.5.1 Traffic Management Plan
The Contractor shall develop a detailed Traffic Management Plan for the work
under the contract. This Traffic Management Plan shall be submitted within 45
days from the Commencement Date. The purpose is to develop a Traffic
Management Plan to cope with the traffic disruption as a result of construction
activities by identifying strategies for traffic management on the roads and
neighbourhoods impacted by the construction activities. The Contractor shall
implement the Traffic Management Plan throughout the whole period of the
Contract.
11.5.2 The basis for the Plan shall take in to consideration four principles:
a. To minimize the inconvenience of road users and the interruption to surface
traffic through the area impacted by the construction activities;
b. To ensure the safety of road users in the impacted area;
c. To facilitate access to the construction site, and to maintain reasonable
construction Progress; and
d. To ensure traffic safety at each construction site.
The Contractors Traffic Management Plan shall confirm the arrangements to be
made for accommodating road and pedestrian traffic at individual construction

Package BH-03
sites and continuously along the alignment, for smooth traffic operations and for
the safety of both construction workers and road users. The Plan shall consider
different measures such as:
a. Proper phasing and timing of traffic signals;
b. Modifications to inter section geometry;
c. Changes in lane usage;
d. Parking prohibitions;
e. re-location of bus stops;
f. reducing width of foot paths and median
g. right-turn prohibition;
h. work site access management;
i. Minimizing the duration of any road closure;
j. reversible lane operations;
k. Modification of road way alignment affected by the construction, which
shall be in conformance with the requirements and regulations defined by
the relevant authorities; and may include widening of roads, Construction
of temporarily new road etc.;
l. Other traffic engineering measures as may be applicable.
11.5.3 The Contractor shall manage the vehicular and pedestrian right of way during
the period of construction. The Contractor shall include local traffic diversion
routes and assess traffic impacts caused by the construction in the affected
areas. Signage layout shall be included to ensure that adequate motorist
information will be provided for traffic diversions. Where it becomes necessary
to close a road or inter section, or supplementary lanes are required to satisfy
the traffic demands, traffic diversion schemes to adjacent road ways shall be
developed with quantitative justifications. The Contractor shall co-ordinate with
all relevant authorities.
11.5.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for all on-Site traffic management. Vehicular
routes shall be segregated from pedestrian traffic wherever possible and clearly
marked.
11.5.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for provision of access to emergency services
including but not limited to police, fire services, ambulance, civil defence and other
authorities.
11.6 Contractors Responsibilities
11.6.1 The Contractor shall restrict his workforce from entering the Site(s) of other
Contractors (other than Project Partners) in and around the vicinity of the Works
and taking all necessary precautions to prevent any trespassing and damage arising
from nuisance of any kind.
11.6.2 The Contractor shall confine the work activities including storage of construction
materials, movement and packing of equipment, machinery and plant within the

Package BH-03
allocated Works areas.

11.6.3 The Contractor shall execute his work in such a manner as to cause minimum
inconvenience to the public and other contractors (other than Project Partners).
11.6.4 The Contractor shall control its workforce and those of the Subcontractors to ensure
that workers do not loiter in public areas or facilities and do not intimidate local
residents.
11.6.5 The Contractor shall make suitable provisions for and shall control vehicles to the
Works areas. This shall ensure that roads are not blocked and there is no
disturbance to the community.
11.6.6 The Contractor shall:
a. confine his use of the areas of the Site for purposes reviewed by the Engineer
who reserves the right to extend, amend or restrict the uses to which areas of
the Site will be put;
b. refrain from depositing rubbish or causing nuisance or permitting nuisance to
be caused and except where reviewed by the Engineer, depositing earth on
or removing earth from areas of the Site;
c. on issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate, or earlier if directed by the
Engineer, remove all Temporary Works except where permitted and reinstate
the areas of the Site to the extent, standards and details indicated in the
Contract or as proposed by the Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer;
d. refrain from obstructing manholes, utility access points and the like;
e. refrain from felling trees, refrain from depositing earth around the trunks of
trees and protect all trees remaining on Site.
11.6.7 Work other than that necessary for completion of the Works shall not be carried out
on Site.
11.6.8 Unless otherwise stated, the Contractor shall pay all rates and charges of any nature
whatsoever arising out of his use of the Site and all Works areas provided therein
under the Contract.
11.7 Services and Facilities for the Employer and Engineer
11.7.1 The Contractor shall provide all facilities and the services for such facilities for the
exclusive use of the Employer, Engineer and any other parties directed by the
Employer, on the Site or at other locations very near to the work area agreed with
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
11.7.2 Engineer Offices
a. The Employer/Engineer Office shall be located no further than 50m, i.e.
walking distance, from the Contractor’s Project Office.
b. The Contractor shall provide as a minimum a temperature and humidity
controlled (air-conditioned) Engineer office as shown in the table below, which
shall, except otherwise stated, be fully fitted, furnished and equipped. The
purpose of the offices is to provide adequate office accommodation for those

Package BH-03
members of the Engineer's personnel involved in the daily inspection and

examination of the work under the Contract and the auditing of the
Contractor’s activities.
c. The Contractor shall arrange for and provide adequate office facilities and
telecommunications for the use of the Engineer and his nominated
representatives, temporarily based (either short or long term) in any off-shore
or out of city places of manufacture for the purposes of fulfilling their duties in
connection with the work under the Contract.
d. Meeting rooms shall be fully equipped with, but not limited to, tables, desks,
chairs, white boards, flip charts, telephone, large LCD screen (50-inch
minimum), video conference facility.
e. The Contractor shall provide a fully functioning local server, with network
software and 16TB minimum of hard drive space. The Contractor shall provide
network connectivity, a minimum 30mbps to the office, to all desks and Wi-fi
connection throughout the office. The Contractor shall provide minimum 2nos
of Desktops along with required software as per Contract for Engineer’s use.
f. ‘Fitted’ means fixtures and fittings that is everything necessary to allow the
site accommodation to function as an office ready for immediate occupancy
(i.e. plug and play).
g. ‘Furnishings’ include office desks, swivel chairs, visitors' chairs, tables, white
boards, rubbish bins and document/filing cabinets appropriate to the number
of occupants.
h. ‘Equipped’ means provided with standard office equipment including but not
limited to one A3 Size Colour laser printer, fire extinguisher, first aid kit,
whiteboards (one per two occupants space), filing trays (three per occupant
space), all stationery including phot copying cartridges, wastepaper baskets
(one each per occupant space).
i. The offices shall include a fully equipped kitchens complying with regulatory
requirements, suitable for the preparation of hot and cold food and drinks
relevant to the intended number of occupants. The kitchen will as a minimum
be provided with a refrigerator/freezer of minimum 500 litre capacity, a
microwave, water boiling equipment, dishwashing facilities etc.
j. Toilet facilities shall comply with regulatory requirements and as a minimum
shall comprise separate male and female toilets on the basis of a male to
female ratio of 9:1. Both male and female toilet facilities shall have a minimum
of one shower unit, and the Contractor shall provide a changing area and
clothes lockers.
k. A room with seating is to be provided for drivers.
l. The Contractor shall provide the main Contract office with 24-hour security
services.
m. All office facilities shall have electronically controlled access cards (RFID) &
biometric entry.

Package BH-03
n. Minimum office provision;
No. Area Type Fitted Furnished Equipped

(m²)
1 15 Project Director / Deputy Yes Yes Yes

Project Director (GC)
1 10 Chief Resident Engineer Yes Yes Yes
1 10 Senior Project Execution Yes Yes Yes

Expert
1 15 Employer Room Yes Yes Yes
3 50 Engineers Team (one each for Yes Yes Yes

Civil, MEP & Architecture)
1 125 Open Plan office with cubicles Yes Yes Yes

for 20 persons
1 30 Meeting Room Yes Yes Yes

(suitable for 15 persons)
1 15 Meeting Room Yes Yes Yes

(suitable for 10 persons)
1 10 Reception Area, with biometric Yes Yes Yes

security & RFID card access
1 25 Kitchen/mess room Yes Yes Yes
1 18 Male Rest rooms, shower(s) Yes Yes Yes
1 10 Female Rest rooms, shower Yes Yes Yes
1 10 Server Room Yes Yes Yes
1 30 Document Archive, with Yes Yes Yes

Shelving
Contractor shall take prior consent before finalizing the office space, furniture,
material and layout / design, utilities and other services.
11.7.3 Satellite Offices:
The contractor shall provide suitable satellite offices (Porta Cabin) with required
facilities to accommodate minimum 3 Engineer’s personal at each station work site.
11.7.4 Services

Package BH-03
The Contractor shall provide services to all offices and buildings provided for the
use of the Employer and the Engineer. The services shall include signage,
maintained access roads, standard 240V voltage electricity, lighting, internet
connections, air conditioning and heating, water supply, sewage disposal and waste
disposal, fire detection/alarm system and the like. The Contractor shall provide 24/7
security guards, 3 nos Office Boys (2 for Day and 1 for Night) and one Pantry Boy.
11.7.5 The building(s) shall be cleaned daily and shall regularly maintained with 365/24/7
working. Sanitary facilities shall be regularly supplied with consumables such as,
but not limited to, lavatory paper, disinfectant, soap, detergent and paper towels.
11.7.6 Signage shall clearly identify the offices and building(s). The size, colours and style
to be adopted shall be agreed with the Engineer. Schematic plans shall be used to
orientate visitors.
11.8 Office Equipment and Services for the Engineer
11.8.1 The Contractor shall provide 1 A3 size all in one coloured auto-feed network laser
printer (Multifunctional Printer).
11.8.2 The Contractor shall maintain all equipment and provide all required consumables
(ink, cartridges, toner, paper, etc.) throughout the whole duration of the Contract.
11.8.3 The Contractor shall provide high speed internet connection (minimum 100 mbps)
to support the facilities and pay both the Internet Service Provider fees and the user
costs for internet connections.
11.8.4 Water cooler with RO filter for potable water and two water fountains including a
supply of potable water bottled by a reputable and registered water supplier.
11.8.5 The Contractor shall provide all electrical power required for Employer's and
Engineer's facilities including UPS of 10 KVA and pay all electrical bills.
11.8.6 The Employer’s offices, equipment therein, consumables, maintenance and
security services shall be provided for the whole period of the Works (including the
Defects Liability Period), at which time the Offices and all furniture and fittings
therein shall revert to the Contractor and the sites thereof shall be reinstated by the
Contractor. All moveable equipment detailed and any other equipment provided by
the Contractor under an Instructed Variation Order, shall be handed over to the
Employer.
11.8.7 Except where otherwise expressly stated, the services and facilities for the
Employer and Engineer are to be provided, or in the case of services and facilities
provided over time, shall have commenced within the as time line defined in Key
Dates of Volume II of Particular Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall provide following vehicles / IT gadgets for use of the Engineer
/ Engineer’s representatives for management & supervision of construction work : -
a. Within 30 days of commencement date, Three number of AC SUV (1 Innova
Crysta and 2 Xylo/Ertiga/Bolero) with driver for 24 hours. Maximum running of
each vehicle shall be 4000 Km/month. The maintenance expenses, wages of
drivers, insurance, POL, toll, parking and other running expenses of these

Package BH-03
vehicles shall be borne by Contractor. Make of all the vehicles to be provided

shall not be earlier than 2020.
b. 3 Nos of iPad Pro (32.77 cm (12.9-inch)) with Key Board of latest specification.
c. 3 Nos Desktop Computers with 21 Inch Screen Monitor with 8 GB RAM (i7
Processor), 500 GB SSD with latest configuration as approved by Engineer.
d. 2 Nos Laptop Computers with 15 Inch Screen Size with 8 GB RAM (i7
Processor), 500 GB SSD with latest configuration as approved by Engineer.
e. 65 Inches LED TV
12 Interface Management
12.1 Interfaces
12.1.1 The Contractor, in the delivery of the work under the Contract, shall coordinate the
work under the Contract with the works of project Interfacing Parties and with
external stakeholders who are affected by the Works. Such interfacing and
coordination activities require the implementation of interface management
techniques to efficiently manage interfaces that can be either design or construction
related.
12.1.2 An outline Project Interface Matrix and Interface Requirements are listed in
Appendix IV for the guidance of the Contractor.
12.2 Interfacing Parties
12.2.1 “Interfacing Parties” or “Project Partner” shall be defined as:
Any Authority, Project Partners employed by the Employer on the Project,
consultants performing design services on the Project (such as but not limited to
adjacent civil works contractors, viaduct/station contractors, system-wide
contractors, trackwork contractors, depot contractors and rolling stock suppliers), or
in the case of the Employer, only to the extent of any Project contract not yet
awarded to Project Partners or consultant employed by the Employer; who interface
with the Contractor in the execution of the work under the Contract.
12.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for his work on the Site and shall coordinate all
activities {design and construction} with those activities of Project Partners on the
project, to the extent specified in the Employer's Requirements or as required by
the Engineer from time to time.
12.2.3 The Contractor shall provide a fully coordinated and interfaced design for the Works.
12.2.4 The Contractor shall, as specified in the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer,
allow appropriate opportunities for carrying out work to:
a. the Employer's Personnel and the personnel of any Authority;
b. Interfacing Parties;
c. Stakeholders;
who may be engaged in executing, on or near the Site, or elsewhere in the Project

Package BH-03
work not included in the Contract.

12.3 Interface Management Plan
12.3.1 Within 45 days of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall submit for the
Engineer’s approval, an Interface Management Plan (IMP) that will describe how
the Contractor will develop and maintain the IMP throughout the Time for
Completion of the Works.
12.3.2 The IMP will identify as a minimum:
a. the Contractor’s organisation responsible for Interface Management;
b. the roles and responsibilities of the individuals performing interface
management;
c. the interface coordination processes and procedures to be implemented that
will ensure design and construction interfaces are identified, managed,
controlled and validated throughout the delivery of the Works.
12.3.3 The Contractor shall produce the following working documents that will form part of
the Interface Management Plan (IMP):
a. The IMPP (see Clause 12.4);
b. Responsibility of the Contractor;
c. Interface Management System;
d. Responsibility Interface Matrix and Interface Sheets;
e. Interface Register;
f. Coordinated Design Interface Programme;
g. Design control interface documents.
The IMP shall conform with the Employer’s Requirements.
12.4 Interface Management Plan & Programme (IMPP)
12.4.1 The IMPP will be submitted by the Contractor to describe the sequencing and timing
of each of the Interfacing Project Partners’ scope of work, clearly describing the
interdependencies for all stages of the work between the Contractor’s work and that
of the Interfacing Project Partners and complementing the Interface Management
Plan, whilst complying with all Key Dates stated in the tender document.
12.4.2 The IMPP shall be structured to detail each of the primary zones of interface and
the principal elements of the design and of the works requiring interfacing
contribution from others. This IMPP shall also be related to the Contractor’s Works
Programme and shall show the sequences and timing agreed with the Interfacing
Project Partners to the necessary degree of detail to clearly illustrate each of the
interfaces to be undertaken.
12.4.3 Targets to receive or supply information shall also be shown, with due allowance
being given for the design process of others. Information relating to Contractual Key
Dates and information exchanges dates shall be shown for both the Contractor and
the Interfacing Project Partners to demonstrate a matching of design processes. A

Package BH-03
record of these interfaces, with current status and agreed dates for information
transfer, site inspections, access, occupation, handover, etc. shall be maintained.
12.4.4 The Interface Management Plan & Programme (IMPP) shall be a process driven
programme in a format to be agreed with the Engineer. The IMPP shall incorporate
the Key activities from both the Interfacing Project Partners’ and Contractor’s Works
programmes that will enable the Contractor to demonstrate that any Interface is
being correctly managed and will result in fully co-ordinated
design/construction/installation of works.
12.5 Responsibilities of the Contractor
12.5.1 The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the work under the
Contract is coordinated and integrated with the works of the Interfacing Parties and
shall comply with any directions which the Engineer may give for the integration
and/or coordination of the work under the Contract with the work of the Interfacing
Parties.
12.5.2 The Contractor shall adopt a proactive approach in seeking out interface issues and
their solutions and shall identify the Interfacing Parties and their related
requirements.
12.5.3 The Contractor shall communicate, coordinate and exchange information directly
with Interfacing Parties. Information necessary to fulfil the Contractor’s interface
obligations shall be directly requested and obtained from the Interfacing Parties,
and receipt acknowledged. Conversely, the Contractor shall provide directly to the
Interfacing Parties information within the Contractor’s scope that is required by
them.
12.5.4 By exception, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer in writing with details of any
issues of significance encountered in obtaining necessary information and or lack
of cooperation from any Interfacing Party. The Engineer will review the matter and
direct the Contractor and the Interfacing Party or Parties as to the required action.
12.5.5 The Contractor shall provide all information reasonably required by the stakeholders
in a timely and professional manner to allow them to proceed with their design and
construction activities.
12.6 Interface Management System
12.6.1 The Contractor shall develop an Interface Management System {IMS} in close
coordination with the Engineer and shall offer the use of proven interface
management processes and tools suitable for a railway infrastructure program of
the size and complexity of the project.
12.6.2 The Contractor shall establish and maintain the IMS to include the methodologies
and procedures to achieve a fully coordinated design covering all aspects of
interface requirements including; identification, management, control and validation.
12.6.3 The Contractor’s IMS shall include as a minimum;
a. the development and maintenance of an Interface Register (database)
b. a Coordinated Design Interface Programme (CDIP).

Package BH-03
12.6.4 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with access to the IMS and or specific
details of any interface item or interface specification, at any time.
12.6.5 The Contractor’s IMS shall include the use of BIM processes to confirm design and
construction coordination in the delivery of the work under the Contract. The output
from these processes shall be used to demonstrate engineering assurance in
accordance with the Employer’s Requirements for Systems Assurance.
12.7 Responsibility Interface Matrix and Interface Sheets
12.7.1 The Contractor shall coordinate his design and construction of the Works with all
stakeholders.
12.7.2 The Contractor shall develop a Responsibility Matrix to show levels of detail of each
interface, as required by his IMS.
12.7.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer Interface Sheets to be consistent with
his Design Documents in accordance with his Interface Management System.
12.7.4 The Responsibility Matrix and Interface Sheets shall identify the responsibilities of
the various parties concerned with a particular interface or interfaces. The parties
shall be as follows:
a. ‘Lead’ indicates that the Interfacing Party is responsible for leading the
interface coordination, accommodating the design requirements of ‘Interface
1’ and / or ‘Interface 2’ parties etc. into their works and/or systems;
b. ‘Interface 1’ indicates that the interfacing party is responsible for the exchange
of information necessary to specify the interface. Information exchange shall
include, but not be limited to, design requirements, scheduling requirements
and coordination drawings;
c. ‘Interface 2’ indicates that the interfacing party is responsible for the exchange
of information necessary to specify the interface. Information exchange shall
include, but not be limited to, design requirements, scheduling requirements
and coordination drawings.
12.8 Interface Register
12.8.1 The Contractor shall create and maintain an Interface Register (database). The
Interface Register shall contain specific information about all interfaces, including
identification, category, description, location, interface type and status.
12.8.2 For consistency Interface Registers shall use a common format as agreed with the
Engineer.
12.9 Coordinated Design Interface Programme (CDIP) and Report
12.9.1 The Contractor shall prepare a CDIP in the form of a logic linked Gantt chart. The
purpose of the CDIP is to monitor and support the management of key design
interfaces to ensure timely information exchange between the Contractor and the
Interfacing Parties.
12.9.2 The status and summary information of all key interfaces between Interfacing
Parties and the Contractor shall be included as part of the CDIP document and
compiled into a report.

Package BH-03
12.9.3 Information recorded for each interface shall include, but not be limited to:
a. interface description;
b. interface location;
c. status, indicating whether the interface is closed (meaning the design is
completed and mutually agreed) or in progress.
12.9.4 The Contractor shall update the CDIP and Report on a continuous basis. Updates
of the interface management documents shall be issued monthly to the Engineer
for his information.
12.9.5 The format of the CDIP and Report shall be submitted, as part of the Interface
Management Plan.
12.9.6 A design control interface document(s) (DCID) shall be created for each design
interface. The document shall identify design inputs from all interfacing parties and
will be used to demonstrate a coordinated design between all Interfacing Parties.
12.10 Interface Management Software (IMS) and Reporting
12.10.1 All interface documents shall be available in electronic format. The Contractor shall
use software specifically designed for handling interface management information
exchange as part of his IMS.
12.10.2 The Contractor's software (DOORS based, e.g. Comply-Pro or similar) shall be
approved by the Engineer, and the data shall be made available to the Engineer at
all times.
12.10.3 The Contractor shall provide one copy of the software they use for Interface
Management.

Package BH-03
13 Testing and Commissioning

13.1 General
13.1.1 The testing, inspection and commissioning are the final steps in order to prove the
quality control process of each stakeholder (Contractor(s), Engineer, and
Employer). The tests objectives are to check that the design requirement (functional
performance, operational and technical) of the sub-system(s) and of the global
transport system are achieved and respected. The Contractor shall prove that all
sub-systems are compliant with the Employer’s Requirements and specifications,
including interfacing with Systems sub-systems. The Engineer shall check that the
global transport system is compliant with the overall system performance objectives
and requirements. The test process will lead to the overall transport system
acceptance.
13.2 Test Plan & Procedure
13.2.1 Within sixty (60) days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall present for
the approval of the Engineer an Inspection, Test and Commissioning Plan (ITCP)
showing in as much detail as available the tests anticipated to ensure a safe and
reliable operation of the Works and the integration of the Works with the rest of
Phase 1 works together with an indication of the periods in which the various stages
of testing will be carried out. The ITCP shall:
a. Identify the date on which the Contractor proposes to conduct each of the
listed tests;
b. Describe the nature and purpose of each test;
c. State the location at which the test is to be conducted;
d. subsystem testing schedule;
e. Integrated Testing and Commissioning schedule;
f. Identify the interfaces with Project Partners that will require their attendance
and/or support;
g. Identify the Contractor’s requirements for the Engineer’s staff to operate
equipment during Integrated Testing and Commissioning and Trial running;
and
h. Confirm safety and security deployment and safe notice and/or training for all
participants.
13.2.2 Testing procedures shall be in accordance with the Employer’s Requirements.
13.2.3 The Contractor shall perform all necessary testing and commissioning activities in
order to ensure satisfactory operation of the completed Works and compliance with
the Employer’s Requirements. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
13.2.4 The Contractor shall identify the witness, inspection and hold points as required by
the Contractor, the Engineer or both. The Engineer has the option to attend or
otherwise any schedule tests. (See GC Clause 9).
13.2.5 For inspection and testing of the equipment that interfaces with Project Partners,

Package BH-03
the Contractor shall coordinate with interfacing parties regarding the timing and
place of the tests and the arrangements to be made for measuring or assessing
parameters affected by the interface.
13.2.6 The manufacturers and places of manufacture, testing and inspection for the
various items of equipment shall not be varied without the prior review of the
Engineer.
13.2.7 All costs associated with material testing, including cost towards expenses incurred
by the Engineer representative towards travel, accommodation, and miscellaneous
expenses during such Factory acceptance test/inspection shall be borne by the
Contractor. This shall also include any expenses incurred due to re-testing caused
by defects or failure of equipment to meet the requirements of the Contract in the
first instance wherever the location may be.
13.2.8 The Contractor shall submit a schedule of tests to the Engineer for review, giving
full details of all tests to be carried out under the Contract with standards or limits to
be achieved, not less than 60 days before the tests are due to be carried out.
13.2.9 No tests shall be carried out until the schedule has received approval from the
Engineer. The schedule may be submitted in stages.
13.2.10 The Contractor shall submit testing procedures to the Engineer at least 60 days
prior to conducting any test.
13.2.11 Test procedures shall unambiguously show the extent of testing covered by each
submission, the method of testing, acceptance criteria, the relevant drawing (or
modification) status, and the location.
13.3 Test Instrumentation
13.3.1 All test instruments used during the testing and commissioning phases shall have
been subjected to calibration tests in accordance with industry standards.
13.3.2 Calibration test certificates shall be supplied to the Engineer for a Statement of No
Objection in duplicate and shall be signed and dated clearly identifying the type of
test equipment, serial number, date of calibration test and expiry date of the
calibration period. All calibration checks shall be undertaken prior to testing and, if
required by the Engineer, shall be repeated afterwards.
13.3.3 All test instrumentation shall carry a self-adhesive calibration identification label
which clearly identifies the serial number of the equipment, the date when calibrated
and the expiry date of the calibration
13.4 Testing and Commissioning Stages
The list below gives broadly the tests leading to the Transit System acceptance of
the works:
a. Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT): These generally apply to equipment, sub-
assembly, items of supply and are conducted at the factory before dispatch.
FAT tests include;
i. Unit tests
ii. Type tests

Package BH-03
iii. Routine tests

iv. Functional and operational tests
v. Integration tests
b. Tests before Completion;
i. Installation Tests (IT): Visual inspection of all the equipment within the
identified commissioning lot together with all equipment, cable and
earthing tests to demonstrate that the equipment has been installed in
accordance with the design and that it is safe to be energised with
permanent power
ii. Partial Acceptance Tests (PAT): Test of components and sub-systems,
to prove functionality and compliance with the specifications based on
the equipment contained within a defined commissioning lot
iii. System Acceptance Tests (SAT): Test of components, sub-systems
and systems alone, to prove functionality and compliance with the
specifications. This testing phase combines all identified commissioning
lots of one primary system.
c. Tests after Completion
i. System Integration Tests (SIT): Tests to prove the functionality of the
different systems together, in particular the technical interfaces
between the different primary systems
ii. System Performance Tests (SPT): To prove the overall inter-operability
of all independent pre-commissioned systems. This includes the proof
of compliance with the overall system specifications
d. Trial Running
i. Official Review by MPMRCL,
ii. Approval by Statutory Authorities,
iii. Integrated testing and commissioning
iv. RDSO and the Commissioner of Metro Railway Safety,
v. Regular Revenue Service verification and service trials,
13.4.1 The D&B Contractor shall confirm the dates for the above FATs in sufficient time to
enable the Engineer to witness these FATs. The Contractor shall give minimum of
twenty-one days of notice to the Engineer for witnessing all tests. All costs pertaining
to witness the tests anywhere (like transportation, accommodation, lodging,
boarding) for the Engineer, Employer and Employers Representative(s) within India
shall be borne by the Contractor.
13.4.2 Testing and Commissioning activities shall be divided into three areas, covering
Civil and Architecture. The Civil will be undertaken during the construction phase,
and the Architecture Testing and Commissioning activities will be covered during
the initial design review phase and post construction phase. The Testing and
Commissioning activities relating to these areas are described further in the

Package BH-03
following section.
13.5 General Testing
13.5.1 Prior to construction, all materials shall be tested and certified by the manufacturer
before being delivered to site. Certifications of testing shall include all reports of
inspections and/or tests and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
13.6 Architecture and Plumbing Testing and Commissioning
13.6.1 If a permanent power supply is not available during any step of the testing and
commissioning activities it is Contractor’s responsibility to provide temporary power
of adequate size to carry out the Testing and Commissioning activities. Para 11.4.2
may also be referred.
13.6.2 It shall be necessary for the purposes of commissioning to delineate the testing and
commissioning into phases, as previously stated in Clause 13.4.
13.6.3 At the end of each test phases the Contractor shall provide the test results to the
Engineer. Any deficiencies and or deviations from the reviewed detailed design for
the installation, testing and performance of the equipment and/or system shall be
confirmed.
13.6.4 Building envelope and façade commissioning, a process that examines the
robustness of façade elements and their interrelationships.
13.6.5 Elements and joints shall be tested including, but not limited to, roofs, windows,
curtain walls, flashing, waterproofing, cladding, foundations, terraces, and plaza
elements.
13.6.6 Balustrades shall be tested to demonstrate the resistance to a horizontal load of at
least 0.5 KN/m (according to DIN 1055.3)
13.7 Test Reports
13.7.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy of a test report no later than 14
days after completion of each test, whether witnessed by the Engineer or not.
13.7.2 Attendance by the Engineer of any tests or inspections shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his Contractual obligations.
13.8 Commissioning Co-ordination
13.8.1 The Contractor shall appoint a Commissioning Manager nine months prior to testing
and commissioning commencing to co-ordinate all activities of the commissioning
schedule, so that installation, testing, and commissioning of the system is carried
out without hindrance and in a safe and satisfactory manner.
14 Operating and Maintenance Manuals, Record Drawings
14.1 General
14.1.1 The Works shall not be considered to be completed for the purposes of taking-over
(Taking Over of the Works and Sections) until the Engineer has received final
operation and maintenance manuals in sufficient detail for the Employer to operate,
maintain, dismantle, reassemble, adjust and repair the Works and any other
manuals specified in the Employer's Requirements for these purposes.

Package BH-03
14.1.2 The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer provisional operation and maintenance
manuals in sufficient detail for the Employer to operate, maintain, dismantle,
reassemble, adjust and repair the Works (i.e. the Civil, Plant, systems, subsystems,
equipment etc.).
14.1.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the operation and maintenance
manuals with data sheets from the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) for the
equipment, systems or sub-system with their delivery to the site.
14.1.4 A comprehensive alphabetical list of suppliers, manufacturers, agents and
distributors of all proprietary articles provided and incorporated into the work under
the Contract. This list shall include trade names, business names, addresses,
telephone and facsimile numbers, email addresses, websites etc.; six (6) copies in
a durable loose-leaf binder, complete with index and alphabetical dividers shall be
provided to the Engineer.
14.1.5 All manuals shall be provided in hard copy and electronic format, in both Hindi and
English language, in a format to be agreed with the Engineer (which must allow the
Employer to clearly document future changes). Six (6) properly bound oil and dirt
resistant hard copies shall be provided. The material for the hard copies shall be
agreed with the Engineer.
14.2 Record Drawings and As-Built Records
14.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare, and keep up-to-date, a complete set of "As-Built"
records in hard copy and digital format of the execution of the Works, showing the
exact As-Built locations, sizes and details of the work as executed. Weights of
assemblies shall be shown on the Drawings. These records shall be kept on the
Site.
14.2.2 All As-Built drawings shall be checked and certified by the Designer(s) of the
relevant item of the Works.
14.2.3 The Contractor shall obtain the consent of the Engineer as to the size, the
referencing system, and other relevant details of the As-Built Records.
14.2.4 Prior to the issuance of any Taking-Over Certificate the Contractor shall supply all
the As-Built Records.
14.2.5 Three hard copies and one digital copy shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to the
commencement of the Tests on Completion.
14.2.6 The electronic format of the As-Built drawings will be confirmed by the Engineer.
14.3 Maintenance Drawings
14.3.1 The Contractor shall provide such drawings as may be required for the operation
and maintenance the Works (i.e. the Civil, Plant, systems, subsystems, equipment
etc.) to the Engineer.
14.3.2 Information contained on the drawings shall include but not be limited to:
a. sizes of all fixtures;
b. manufacturers code drawing and reference numbers;

Package BH-03
c. wiring diagrams to appropriate standards, including internal wiring of sealed

unit items;
d. appropriate standards;
e. setting dimensions and tolerances

Package BH-03
15 Employer Training
15.1 Operations and Maintenance Training Requirement
15.1.1 The Contractor shall provide comprehensive training to employees of the
Employer's Operations and Maintenance (O&M) team and the Engineers personnel.
The training shall confirm technical matters on each O&M activity according to the
intended function, as well as providing training for personnel who will become
trainers in the intended functions.
15.1.2 Within six months of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a Training Plan to provide a detailed explanation of the training
philosophy, objectives and methodology for the Employer's O&M team such that
personnel on completion of training shall have the knowledge and/or skills required
to perform the intended functions.
15.1.3 The Contractor shall provide training in class room suitable for required training. It
may be at site or at the Employer’s location.
15.2 Operations and Maintenance Training Objectives
15.2.1 The content, timing and duration of the training programme shall be such that:
a. personnel trained by the Contractor will be able to operate and maintain the
equipment/systems in the designated manner with maximum reliability and
economy;
b. trainers trained by the Contractor shall be competent to train personnel to be
able to operate and maintain the equipment/systems.
15.2.2 Training objectives in terms of minimum standards to be achieved by each trainee
shall be clearly defined by the Contractor for each trainee post, including the future
trainers.
15.3 Selection of Operations and Maintenance Trainees
15.3.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, 60 days before the
commencement of the proposed training, the range of staff, including the service’s
instructors, for which training is recommended.
15.3.2 The Contractor shall submit measurable selection criteria for entry to each trainee
post, indicating the minimum standards required:
a. qualification and/or educational standards;
b. basic skills and knowledge levels, any special aptitudes necessary such as
manual dexterity;
c. oral and written ability.
15.4 Operations and Maintenance Training Methods
The training shall be planned and carried out in a manner suitable for the intended
occupation, and shall consist of:
a. formal off-the-job theory and practice,
b. practical on-the-job follow-up experience.

Package BH-03
15.4.1 The Contractor shall demonstrate that the trained staff and instructors have
achieved the minimum standards established for each trainee post.
15.4.2 The Contractor shall provide one original and five coloured copies of the Training
Manual for use by the Employer for conducting in-house training.
15.4.3 The Contractor shall submit training programmes and syllabi and measures for
monitoring the progress of both the training programmes and individual trainees to
the Engineer for review not later than six (6) months after Commencement Date.
Programmes shall clearly show commencement and completion dates and the
number of trainees for each training course. The programme shall clearly identify
whether the training is off-the-job theory or on-the-job.
15.4.4 Syllabi shall clearly indicate:
a. course title and objectives;
b. course content or attachment objectives;
c. location of training course and/or attachments;
d. methods of training.
15.4.5 Methods for monitoring progress shall relate to:
a. theoretical tests;
b. practical tests;
c. progress reports.
15.4.6 Records of trainees’ progress shall be kept up-to-date and made available for
examination when required to do so.
15.4.7 Copies of individual trainees’ records showing all test results and reports of progress
shall be issued to the Engineer on completion of each training course or attachment.
15.5 Contractor’s Operations and Maintenance Training Staff
15.5.1 The Contractor shall ensure that qualified staff are provided for all off the job formal
theoretical and practical training.
15.5.2 Where the trainees are attached to the Contractor (or his Subcontractors) for the
purposes of gaining job experience, all such trainees shall be properly supervised
and monitored by a qualified training supervisor to ensure that each trainee has the
best opportunity to benefit from the theoretical and practical experience.
15.6 Operations and Maintenance Training Locations
15.6.1 The training shall be carried out at such locations where the greatest benefit for
trainees may be gained. This may be in Country, at places of manufacture,
assembly or testing, or at such other locations as may be necessary.
15.6.2 The Contractor shall be responsible providing all the logistics for the training of the
Employers staff which shall include but not limited to class rooms facilities, projector,
handouts, training tools and material, etc.
15.7 Operations and Maintenance Training Equipment

Package BH-03
15.7.1 In general, the Contractor shall use plant and equipment specifically set aside for
training purposes. However, he may use as may be agreed with the Engineer, plant
and equipment being erected, tested or commissioned for the training, when no
other such plant or equipment is available. The Contractor shall not use spare parts
that are to be used as work under the Contract for this purpose.
15.7.2 The supply of plant, equipment and materials shall be sufficient both for the persons
trained by the Contractor and for those to be subsequently trained.
15.8 Administration
15.8.1 The Contractor shall:
a. be responsible for the general welfare of trainees under their control;
b. submit procedures which will enable him to control, and to repatriate where
necessary, those trainees not found to be responding to training as a result
of:
i. aptitude;
ii. discipline;
iii. incorrect selection;
iv. any other cause.

Package BH-03
17 Environmental and Sustainability Management

17.1 General
17.1.1 The Contractor shall fully comply GC Clause 4.18 and the Appendix III Employer’s
Environmental Policy and Manual. Compliance with the Employer’s requirements
shall not relieve the Contractor of any of their statutory duties, obligations or
responsibilities under the Contract or Law
17.1.2 The environmental welfare of all personnel engaged in the work under the Contract,
the general public, the avoidance of damage to property, and the prevention &
mitigation of adverse impacts on the environment, cultural heritage and social
values is of paramount importance to the Employer. The Contractor shall ensure
that all operations are conducted in such a manner as to minimise to acceptable
levels or eliminate the negative risks to the environment and where opportunities
exist, maximise the beneficial factors to the environment.
17.1.3 ‘Environment’ shall be defined as ‘The biosphere which includes the living beings
whether human, animal or plant and all the surroundings, such as air, water and
soil, and all it contains, such as solid, liquid or gas substances or radiation, and any
installations built by man and industries or inventions created by man.’
17.1.4 The Contractor shall implement an environmental management system that
complies with all applicable Laws and standards.
17.1.5 The Contractor’s environmental management system shall comply with the
requirements documented within EN ISO 14001 Environmental Management
Systems, which is the minimum standard to be adopted by the Contractor. This
standard does not relieve the Contractor of their liabilities under the applicable Laws
and where there is a discrepancy in the documents, the higher requirement will take
precedence.
17.1.6 The Contractor’s overall philosophy for environmental management shall embody
a culture of continuous improvement via the plan, do, check, act cycle as
documented by EN ISO 9001. The Contractor shall regularly review the
performance of the environmental management system, and implement
improvement actions as and when required, providing evidence to the Engineer of
the same.
17.1.7 The Contractor shall obtain “Platinum Rating Certification” as per prevailing IGBC
Green Mass Rapid Transit System (MRTS) Rating.
17.2 Personnel
17.2.1 The Contractor shall ensure that their staff that are responsible for the Site
environment are adequately trained regarding environmental management and are
provided the necessary authority to suspend any work where there is imminent risk
of an environmental impact.
The Contractor shall set up an environmental team to execute the environmental
requirements
To lead his environmental team, the Contractor shall deploy an Environmental
Manager who shall be responsible for environmental control, pollution monitoring,

Package BH-03
and record keeping and be available to the Employer for resolution of environmental
issues.
The duties of the Contractor’s environmental team shall include (but not limited to)
• To monitor the various environmental parameters as required by the Manual
• To inspect, investigate and audit the work methodology with respect to
environmental mitigation and control
• To anticipate environmental issues before they arise and plan for their
mitigation
• To audit and prepare audit reports, weekly/monthly reports on site
environmental conditions for submission to the Engineer.
• To maintain records for obtaining “Platinum certification from IGBC”.
17.3 Breach of Environmental Obligations
17.3.1 Serious or repeated breaches of the statutory regulations for the environment, or
other disregard for the environment, may be reasons for the Engineer to exercise
their authority to require the removal from the Site of any employee of the Contractor
or a Subcontractor.
17.3.2 Once removed, such person shall not be re-employed on the Contract.
17.3.3 The Engineer shall have the right to order the suspension of any or all of the
Contractor’s activities where it is deemed that to continue such activity or activities
may have an adverse impact on the environment.
17.3.4 Where the Engineer orders a suspension of the Contractor’s activities, such
suspension shall continue until the Contractor has satisfied the Engineer that
satisfactory corrective action has been taken to eliminate the impact that was the
subject of the suspension.
17.4 Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
17.4.1 The Contractor shall devise and implement an Environmental Management Plan in
accordance with the Employer’s EIA Report and Employer’s Requirements /
Environmental Management Manual, which address the conditions and proposed
work activities for the construction phase of the work under the Contract.
17.4.2 The EMP shall include a policy statement signed by the Chief Executive Officer of
the Contractor (or other senior officer) declaring that environmental management
shall be given high priority in all aspects of the Contract and in the discharge of their
contractual obligations. The Contractor’s policy shall be aligned to the Employer’s
environmental policy.
17.4.3 The EMP shall also set out in detail the approach that will be adopted in dealing
with the potential environmental impacts from the various different construction
activities. The EMP shall address all the potential impacts (both positive and
negative) outlined in the EIA Report and shall follow the EMP outline contained in
Employer’s Requirements and Environmental Management Manual. The Contractor
shall submit an EMP for review by the Engineer 28 days prior to the commencement
of the construction activities.

Package BH-03
17.5 Risk Assessments

17.5.1 The Contractor shall carry out a detailed Environmental Risk Assessment, which
shall address the environmental aspects of the work under the Contract.
17.5.2 The environmental risk assessment shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
within 60 days of the Commencement Date or at a date agreed with by the Engineer.
17.5.3 The findings of the assessment shall be incorporated in the EMP along with relevant
method statements, and other documents as required.
17.6 Environmental Inspections and Monitoring by the Contractor
17.6.1 The Contractor shall conduct dedicated weekly/monthly site environmental
inspections or as decided by the Engineer which are to be attended by the
Contractor’s Environmental Manager.
17.6.2 A brief report of the monthly inspection shall be made and shall include the actions
taken to resolve any problems or shortcoming discovered during the inspection. The
report shall be made available for audit purposes and be discussed at the relevant
meetings.
17.6.3 A comprehensive environmental inspection checklist for the use of the Contractor’s
Site staff when inspecting the Site is to be formulated by the Contractor and
submitted for review by the Engineer.
17.6.4 The checklist shall indicate the standard to be achieved on any particular aspect of
environmental management, and be compiled in such a way that allows the
inspector to enter their actual findings for instant comparison and subsequent
rectification.
17.6.5 When completed, the checklist shall be kept for record purposes so that it is
available to the Engineer for audit purposes.
17.6.6 A grading system shall be established which grades the area inspected as either;
‘acceptable’ or ‘unacceptable’.
17.6.7 Where an area receives a grading below ‘acceptable’, necessary action is to be
taken to rectify the problems raised and a further inspection shall be conducted after
7 and 14 days to assess the conditions.
17.6.8 The Contractor is to advise the Engineer of the date of the monthly inspection. The
Engineer may send a representative to assess the thoroughness of the inspection.
17.6.9 The Contractor shall undertake all necessary environmental monitoring including
the setting up of all monitoring stations to comply with the requirements of all
environmental legislation, and regulations. The Monitoring requirements are
indicated in the Environmental Manual. Output data from the monitoring stations
shall be provided to the Engineer in the monthly reports.
17.7 Environmental Audits by the Contractor
17.7.1 The Contractor shall conduct regular (at least every three (3) months) internal
environmental audits on both the environmental management system and the
physical site conditions. The audits shall be performed to the same criteria and using
the same grading and benchmarking as the Engineer’s audits.

Package BH-03
17.7.2 The audits shall be conducted by person(s) reviewed by the Engineer who are
qualified and competent to carry out Environmental audits. The documentation
generated by the audit process, including score sheets, shall be made available to
the Engineer for performance measurement purposes.
17.7.3 The audits shall include the work of Subcontractors of all levels.
17.7.4 The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the date of all the audits. The Engineer
may send a representative to assess the thoroughness of the audit.
17.8 Reporting of Environmental Incidents
17.8.1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any environmental incident.
Initial notification may be verbal but shall in any event, be followed by a preliminary
written report, in a format that has been reviewed by the Engineer, within 24 hours
of the incident. A detailed written report shall be submitted within three (3) days.
17.8.2 The Contractor is required to report all incidents to the Engineer and relevant
authorities.
17.9 Monthly Reports
17.9.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for submitting reports, notices and
information to relevant authorities where there is a statutory requirement to do so.
17.9.2 The Contractor shall provide environmental performance data as required by the
Engineer to a scope and frequency determined by the Engineer, to measure the
Contractor’s compliance with all applicable Laws, other enactments, the
Contractor’s EMS manual and Environment Management Plan.
17.9.3 The Contractor shall, as part one of each monthly progress report, submit a Site
environmental report. Prior to submission, the Contractor’s Representative shall
endorse the Site environmental report.
17.9.4 The environmental report shall comprehensively address all relevant aspects of
environmental management.
17.9.5 The Monthly Environmental Report content shall include the following;
i. Executive Summary
ii. Brief mention of construction activities
iii. Monitoring results
iv. Interpretation of monitoring results, significance and influencing factors
v. Graphical representation of monitored results over past four reporting
periods.
vi. Raw material consumption details such as electricity, diesel, water
vii. Generation of scrap during the month and sold to authorised recyclers
viii. Generation of other type of waste and sold to respected authorised
buyers.
ix. Measures to control spills

Package BH-03
x. Action taken on recommendation under site inspection programme or

specific directions.
xi. Summary of complaints, results of investigations and follow-up action
xii. Trainings conducted
17.10 Sustainability
17.10.1 The work under the Contract shall be designed, constructed and operated to
achieve a minimum of IGBC Platinum rating Certification as per prevailing IGBC
Green Mass Rapid Transit System (MRTS) Rating.
17.10.2 All temporary traffic management shall be in accordance with the logistics concepts
detailed in the Logistics and Supply section of the Employer’s Requirements.
17.10.3 The Contractor shall investigate ways to mitigate potential negative impacts by
understanding the additional burdens the project will place on existing infrastructure
and using appropriate design strategies to reduce it. The Contractor shall work with
the appropriate municipal agencies to explore potential new transportation
infrastructure.
17.10.4 The Contractor shall identify the basic amenities and their proximity to metro
stations, and address how the station layout and Site design can be done to ease
accessibility. This shall include consideration of the position of entrances, walkways
and roads etc., and the location of existing amenities and services. A field survey
shall determine the range of amenities, services and facilities accessible from the
proposed Site.
17.10.5 The Contractor shall control the amount of exterior lighting features than can create
light pollution. The Contractor shall review and consider lighting ordinances and
bylaws relevant to the Site. The approach taken shall address how to minimise
exterior lighting, avoid upward lighting, and use efficient and shielded fixtures.
17.10.6 The Contractor shall work with other Stakeholders and other municipal agencies to
provide bus/taxi stations at the metro stations to have a complete network of mass
transit systems.
17.10.7 The Contractor shall collect store, and remove solid and harmful waste in
accordance with Legal requirements. Furthermore, the Contractor shall identify
potentially harmful materials that may be present in the project and have in place
appropriate management practices. Additionally, the Contractor shall develop
drainage and run-off strategies to minimise potential sewer and waterway
contamination by treating or separating harmful materials. Strategies and
approaches may include point-source control at drain locations as well as filtration
and treatment systems on a building or cluster level.
17.10.8 The Contractor shall mitigate the project’s impact on existing or future adjacent
buildings with respect to shading and daylight access. The Contractor shall conduct
simulations to determine the potential amount of shade and shadows that will fall
on adjacent Sites. The design shall address how the proposed building’s location,
orientation and height can minimise the obstruction of daylight.
17.10.9 The Contractor shall minimise rainwater runoff, by providing proper rain water

Package BH-03
harvesting system as described below. Specifically, the Contractor shall address

how the project can collect, store, and treat all water that falls on the building and
pavement. Plants and trees shall be allowed to absorb rain that falls directly onto
landscaped areas. Handling the rainwater may require several types of systems and
the approach taken shall address how to create a comprehensive, integrated water
management system.
17.10.10 Rain Water Harvesting (RWH)
Rain Water Harvesting shall be provided for the catchment area of the stations. A
minimum of two RWH pits shall be provided at each Station and one at every span
along the Viaduct. The Contractor shall design the RWH catchment system to be of
sufficient capacity to ensure there is no overflow from the pit. The Contractor shall
submit the RWH system design for the Engineer’s review.
a. The system shall be designed to perform effective ground water recharge and
it shall require minimum maintenance. The RWH proposal shall be as per
Central Ground Water Board specifications.
b. The following IS codes (latest version) shall be complied with;
i. IS 2800 – Code of practice for construction and testing of tube wells
ii. IS 11189 – Methods for tubewell development
iii. IS 12818- (PVC-U) screen and casing pipes for bore/tubewells
iv. IS 4097 – Gravel for use as pack in tubewells
c. All connections made for rain water harvesting system shall be leakproof and
watertight.
d. The testing of the ground water recharging system, including the monsoon
period, shall be carried out to the satisfaction of Engineer.
17.10.11 The Contractor shall establish adequate energy demand performance levels for the
proposed station or depot building design. This shall reduce the energy needs for
the building to maintain adequate thermal comfort conditions. The approach taken
shall address all building design features that have a major impact on the energy
demand.
17.10.12 The Contractor shall develop a strategy for establishing adequate energy delivery
performance levels for the systems that serve the building. The approach taken
shall address all the features of building systems that have a major impact on energy
delivery and consumption.
17.10.13 The Contractor shall design buildings and their supply systems which will minimise
the use of fossil fuels. The designs shall address all building and system features
as well as their connections to the delivery networks that consume primary energy
sources.
17.10.14 The Contractor shall develop and implement a strategy for encouraging the design
of buildings and their supply systems and networks that minimise CO2 emissions.
The strategy shall outline how to achieve those standards by addressing system
features at all supply network scales that impact the generation of CO2.

Package BH-03
17.10.15 The Contractor shall develop a strategy for encouraging the design of buildings and
their supply systems and networks that minimise oxides of Nitrogen, Sulphur di-
oxide and dust emissions. The design shall outline how to achieve those standards
by addressing system features at all supply network scales that impact the
generation of Mono-nitrogen oxides, sulphur oxide and dust.
17.10.16 Consideration shall be given for specifying efficient equipment and fixtures, reusing
rainwater and grey water for non-potable applications, installing and using water
sub-metering facilities, and using efficient landscape irrigation techniques.
Reducing water consumption may require several types of these systems and the
design approach shall address how to integrate those systems into a
comprehensive solution. The solution shall address using water efficiently and
recycling water where possible.
17.10.17 The Contractor shall identify products and materials available from within the region
and determine which of these products and materials can be used during the project
development. The Contractor shall also consider and document the weight and the
source of the building materials.
17.10.18 The Contractor shall where required provide a comfortable environment with
negligible fluctuations in temperature and humidity to ensure the health and comfort
of the users of metro stations and depots. The Contractor shall determine the
environmental conditions required for users, programmes, and spaces in the
project. Furthermore, he shall address how active conditioning, passive
conditioning, or a combination of both can work with the building design and building
envelope.
17.10.19 The Contractor shall use indoor materials with low VOC emissions and avoid
materials and mechanical systems that can emit harmful contaminants. The
Contractor shall identify the emission rates of specified materials and how to
effectively mitigate any harmful emissions.
17.10.20 The Contractor shall develop and implement a strategy for encouraging effective
natural ventilation in conjunction with mechanical systems. The Contractor shall
address how to create cross ventilation, the number, location and type of windows,
and the type and degree of user-control. The strategy shall also determine the ways
in which natural ventilation and mechanical ventilation systems will work together to
meet heating and cooling demands while reducing energy consumption.
17.10.21 The Contractor shall develop a design approach for ensuring occupant well-being
and comfort through the use of mechanical ventilation systems. Ventilation rates
and air quality levels shall meet the minimum compliance requirements of accepted
standards. The Contractor shall address the location and protection of fresh air
intake vents, the type and degree of user-control, and the ease of maintenance and
service. The design approach shall also include how to integrate natural ventilation
strategies with the mechanical ventilation system.
17.10.22 The Contractor shall develop and implement a strategy for reducing hazardous
particulates and chemical or biological contaminants in the indoor air. This may
include physically isolating areas that may generate harmful contaminants,
providing adequate barriers between isolated areas and adjacent spaces, and using

Package BH-03
dedicated exhaust systems to mitigate the potential hazards of airborne

contaminants. The Contractor shall identify potential sources of hazardous
contaminants and determine what containment and control measure will be
required.
17.10.23 The Contractor shall develop a design approach for preventing and controlling glare
within buildings. The design may include physical measures such as light shelves,
blinds, louvers, fins, shades or tinted glazing to control glare. Consideration shall be
given to the special arrangement of the building interiors to minimise discomfort
from excessive glare and contrast.
17.10.24 The Contractor shall ensure there are adequate illumination levels for the visual
comfort and well-being of building users. He shall address how to use daylight to
reduce the energy needed for electrical lighting, and include the potential use of
automatic lighting control systems to further reduce energy consumption.
17.10.25 The Contractor shall include a strategy for developing designs that reflect the
cultural identity and traditions of India and Madhya Pradesh. The design approach
shall address how Site design, building form, material palette, and overall aesthetic
quality can reference the culture and heritage of India. Furthermore, the proposed
building design must not degrade the cultural character of any existing buildings on
adjacent properties. When designing the features and components of the new
building, consideration shall be given to existing building fabrics.
17.10.26 The Contractor shall maximise the procurement of construction-related products
and services from within the region in order to support Indian national economy.
The Contractor shall investigate the regional availability of products and services,
and develop a plan to use and employ local companies and firms where possible.
17.10.27 The Contractor shall develop and implement a strategy for installing energy sub-
metering facilities to monitor and evaluate energy system performance and
consumption during building operations. This shall include metering and monitoring
of major energy systems in conjunction with data logging to provide for continued
accountability of energy consumption over the building’s lifespan. The strategy shall
include the types of building systems to be monitored, the best method for installing,
using, and servicing the monitors, and ways in which the data will be interpreted
and used.
17.10.28 The Contractor shall be required to install an effective leak detection system for all
water and wet areas, including the buildings.
17.10.29 The Contractor shall be required to develop and implement a strategy for the
collection, storage, and removal of recyclable materials. He shall design sufficient
sorting and storage spaces for the anticipated recycling materials produced by the
project. These spaces shall be properly isolated and ventilated. Consideration shall
be given to the location of these services so as to be proximal to other waste
handling services.
17.10.30 The Contractor shall install a Building Automation System (BAS) that controls and
monitors major building systems including cooling, ventilation, and lighting. The
Contractor must also develop a preventive maintenance plan. The plan shall ensure
that components are tested and calibrated at intervals recommended by the BAS
manufacturer.

Package BH-03
18 Scope of Work
18.1 Brief Scope of Work
18.1.1 This scope of work is to be read in conjunction with the Employer’s Requirements
set out in all the Tender Volumes.
18.1.2 Part Design and Construction of elevated Viaduct, Obligatory Spans, Two ramps,
all Civil, Structural, Architectural, including roof structures except roof sheeting
(PEB) works, Entry/Exit, Foot Over Bridges (FOB), viaduct within station, plumbing
works within the stations and provision for Solar Panel installation, for all Six (6)
Elevated Metro Rail Stations (Pul Bogda – a Passenger Interchange station
between orange and blue line, Aishbagh, Sindhi Colony, DIG Bungalow, Krishi Upaj
Mandi and Karond).” between Chainages 27+000 & 28+375 and 31+765 & 36+146
of orange Line.
18.1.3 Station names are tentative and are likely to undergo change as per the approval
of GoMP.
18.2 General
18.2.1 The design and construction of the Works shall be developed in accordance with
the Employer's Requirements and the Contractor's Technical Proposals.
18.2.2 The Works shall be designed for minimal maintenance through a 100-years
operation life.
18.2.3 The Contractor shall provide all the software confirmed in the Employer’s
requirements in a timely manner to permit the Engineer to review the Contractor’s
submissions.
18.2.4 All the works in this Contract are covered under Schedule ‘A’, Schedule ‘B’,
Schedule ‘C’, Schedule ‘D’, Schedule ‘E’, Schedule ‘F’ and Schedule ‘G’.
18.2.5 The Schedule ‘A’ shall include:
a. Design and Construction of elevated Viaduct, Obligatory Spans, Two ramps,

all Civil, Structural, viaduct within station, for Bhopal Metro Rail Project. The
cost of the works/ activities pertaining to all the Utilities which are required to
be retained and/or protected during execution of Works shall be deemed to be
included in this Schedule. The cost of the works/ activities pertaining to
relocation/ shifting/ removal of all the “Utilities” (subject to exclusion if any),
which are existing as on the Base Date shall be deemed to be included in this
Schedule.
b. Design and Construction of elevated Station, all Civil, Structural, including roof
structures (PEB) except roof sheeting, Entry/Exit, Foot Over Bridges (FOB),
viaduct within station, Transition spans and provision for Solar Panel
installation, for all 6 (Six) Elevated Metro Rail Stations viz Pul Bogda (a
Passenger Interchange station between orange and blue line), Aishbagh,
Sindhi Colony, DIG Bungalow, Krishi Upaj Mandi and Karond for Bhopal Metro
Rail Project. The cost of the works/ activities pertaining to all the Utilities which
are required to be retained and/or protected during execution of Works shall be
deemed to be included in this Schedule. The cost of the works/ activities

Package BH-03
pertaining to relocation/ shifting/ removal of all the “Utilities” (subject to

exclusion if any), which are existing as on the Base Date shall be deemed to
be included in this Schedule.
18.2.6 The Schedule ‘B’ shall include Design and Execution of all Architectural Finishing
works in public and non-public areas which includes Concourse, Platform, Foot over
Bridges (FoB), Entry/Exit structures, Ancillary structures, Water Storage Tanks,
Pump rooms, DG Room Pick-Up and Drop off bays for other modes of transport,
Foot Path, Plaza area, Roof sheeting; System Rooms; construction of
masonry/blockwork walls, fixing of doors, windows, glazing, louvers and fire doors,
mullions, tie beams, Lintels, Internal and external Plastering, Painting & cladding,
Flooring & Ceiling, Making provisions of Cable Ducts, Cut outs, Trenches and
Making good the affected areas etc, complete as approved by the
Employer/Engineer
18.2.7 The Schedule ‘C’ shall include Design and Execution of Façade works including the
required supporting structural elements as approved by the Employer/Engineer.
18.2.8 The Schedule ‘D’ shall include item rate component for miscellaneous works.
18.2.9 Schedule ‘E’ consists of bill of quantities for the Water Supply, Sanitary Installation
& Drainage Works, i.e., Design and Execution of Water Supply, Sanitary Installation
& Drainage Works as approved by the Engineer/Employer
18.2.10 The Schedule ‘F’ Provisional Sum under DSR-2021 provided for the miscellaneous
works which are encountered during execution of the Works, like the works/
activities and any other items not included in any of the schedules and required for
completion of the work.
18.2.11 This Schedule ‘G’ consists of Provisional Sum provided for the works/ activities
pertaining to relocation/ shifting/ removal of all the “Underground Utilities” and other
above ground utilities upto 33 KV, which came in existence after the Base Date
(subject to exclusion if any) required for completion of the work.
18.2.12 The Contractor shall be responsible for getting approval, co-ordination and
supervision of execution of works pertaining to relocation/shifting/removal of above
and below ground utilities, through respective Utility agencies. The payment for
these approvals will be made directly by the Employer to the respective Utility
agencies. The Contractor will be entitled for payment for co-ordination and
supervision charges for the executed works as defined in the Pricing Document
(Volume VII). Any delay in completion of these works shall not relieve the
Contractor’s obligation and it shall be at Contractor’s own risk and cost.
18.2.13 The Schedule ‘A’ shall include Design and Construction of Metro Elevated Viaduct
(Guideway), Obligatory spans, Special spans, Metro Stations, all Civil, Structural,
Roof Structure, Entry/Exit, FOB, viaduct within station, Transition spans and
provision for Solar Panel installation as detailed in the Employer’s Requirements,
including but not limited to:
i. progressive Design Assurance (including Design Workshops and Design
Gate Review with the Engineer and Project Partners);
ii. all site survey and setting out work;

Package BH-03
iii. site clearance and establishment of the site boundary;

iv. offices for the Employer/Engineer, and the continuing maintenance and
attendance;
v. casting yard and materials laboratory;
vi. location of underground utilities through trial trenches at all pier/column and
foundation locations;
vii. utility retention/protection;
viii. geotechnical investigation at all piers/columns of Viaduct/guideway and
stations foundation locations;
ix. ground treatment as and where required;
x. viaduct and station foundations, substructure, superstructure and platform
roof;
xi. the provision of noise barriers in urban areas at deck level;
xii. obligatory and special spans foundations, substructure and superstructure;
xiii. construction interface with station structures;
xiv. ramps to UG section;
xv. viaduct and station drainage requirements;
xvi. shear connectors for track plinth and cross overs;
xvii. station Entry/Exit, Subways and Foot Over Bridge (FOB) structures;
xviii. multimodal commuter facilities at Entry/Exit Plaza level;
xix. provisions for cut outs in the stations required for services in co-ordination
with various Project Partners (system contractors);
xx. interface, coordination and finalisation of design with Project Partners;
xxi. provision for the installation and maintenance of Solar Panels on the
Station Roof (supply and installation of solar panels to be carried out by
Project Partner);
xxii. provision for installation and maintenance of Telecom Tetra Towers at
stations and GSM Towers at each station or at a location to be approved
by the Engineer (supply and installation of Telecom Tetra Tower and GSM
Towers to be carried out by Project Partners);
xxiii. provision for installation and maintenance of vertical and horizontal
transportation within stations and entrances (supply and installation of lifts,
escalators and travellators to be carried out by Project Partners);
xxiv. providing and fixing MS/RCC staircases with railing at both ends for up and
down lines for approaching the viaduct track bed from station platform as
per tender drawings. All MS structures shall be painted with Epoxy paint of
approved colour;
xxv. Design, Fabrication, Supply and Erection of Pre-Engineered Building

Package BH-03
(PEB) roof Structure over platforms and trackway, Entry/Exits, FOB, any
other structures including supporting columns, rafts, purlins, Gutter etc., all
complete including making provision for “first fix” Cable trays, structural
arrangement for Passenger Information Displays (PIDs), Clocks, Cameras,
Signage, solar panels etc,
xxvi. Façade loading shall be considered in the design;
xxvii. provisions for Façade supporting structure;
xxviii. access to the station roof for maintenance and cleaning;
xxix. provision for installation and maintenance of Traction Power, Signalling &
Telecommunication, Automatic Fare Collection and Passenger Screen
Door/Gate equipment (equipment to be supplied and installed by Project
Partners);
xxx. temporary traffic diversion management;
xxxi. road widening/permanent diversion works wherever required;
xxxii. site reinstatement including median (width including pier and crash barrier)
final landscaping and roadworks;
xxxiii. site health and safety management;
xxxiv. fire rating requirements as per relevant NFPA codes;
xxxv. site security management;
xxxvi. environmental management;
xxxvii. quality management;
xxxviii. training of the Employer’s Personnel;
xxxix. shared work access to Project Partners;
xl. rainwater Harvesting as approved by employer
xli. demolition and disposal of all resultant demolition materials for all
structures including buildings, drains or any other structures, to facilitate
the construction of the works under the Contract, including backfilling any
part of the void created with suitable material and reinstate the area to
match with the surrounding ground level.
xlii. for stations located over road, temporary arrangement is to be made for
providing working platform at suitable height so that traffic can run below
it, unhindered and safety of road use is to be ensured. This arrangement
shall be maintained till completion of work. The working platform has to be
covered with suitable material so that the nothing falls on the road. A
detailed scheme is to be submitted for approval before start of work.
Temporary staging with loading deck shall be provided by the civil
contractor to facilitate erection of Panels, equipment etc. of Project
Partners (system contractors) at multiple stations at same time;
xliii. Temporary Power Supply to System Contractor

Package BH-03
18.2.14 At Pulbogda Interchange, the Contractor shall design transition spans considering
span length as 15m (c/c of piers) for super structure. The Transition span
superstructure loads shall be considered in design of station end Pier & Pier caps.
The design of superstructure of transition spans shall be shared with the Project
Partner and the Engineer. The construction and erection of Transition spans
superstructure shall be done by the Project Partner.
18.2.15 The Contractor shall provide and fix Parapets. Aesthetics and pattern of Parapets
shall be as per the tender drawings.
18.2.16 Some of the major utilities which cannot be diverted if decided by utility owning
agency, the Contractor shall take into consideration the existence of these utilities
and design of the foundation at these locations shall be altered accordingly; if
required, the pile cap top level shall be fixed at the bottom of the utilities without any
extra cost.
18.2.17 The Schedule ‘A’ shall include any other item of work as may be required to be
carried out for completing the construction and commissioning of station buildings
including viaduct within station and transition span with all necessary interface
works with Project Partners in all respects in accordance with provision of the
contract and to ensure the structural stability and safety during and after
construction and commissioning.
18.3 Clearances, Investigations and Reinstatement
18.3.1 The Permanent Works shall not infringe the Metro railway Structure Gauge as
confirmed by the project Schedule of Dimensions (SOD).
18.3.2 The Permanent Works shall allow for provisions for the installation of Metro railway
operating equipment without infringement of the structural gauge as confirmed by
the project Schedule of Dimensions (SOD).
18.3.3 The Contractor shall request the Engineer’s approval prior to demolishing any
building or structure.
18.3.4 The Contractor is responsible to obtain No Objection Certificates (NOC) &
Completion Approval for all utility and traffic diversions from the concerned Statutory
Authority or utility Owner.
18.3.5 Prior to commencement of any traffic diversion the Contractor shall obtain No
Objection Certificates (NOC) from the relevant Statutory Authorities/Stakeholder
and the Engineer. The Contractor at all times shall minimise the impact of the Works
on traffic flows. All traffic diversions, height clearances, road narrowing and any
other restrictions shall be approved by the appropriate Authorities and the Engineer
before work commences.
18.3.6 The Contractor shall carry out all reinstatement works to the satisfaction of all
Stakeholders, Statutory Authorities and the Engineer.
18.3.7 The Contractor shall verify the survey information provided by the Employer/Project
Partners. The Contractor’s survey shall be used for the basis of the design of the
works. Any discrepancy found needs to be resolved before the commencement of
work. The survey information shall be shared, verified and confirmed with other

Package BH-03
Project Partners.
18.3.8 The Contractor is advised to conduct further investigations considered necessary
by them at their own cost. Any error or discrepancy found in the Employer’s / Project
Partners data at any stage will not constitute grounds for any claim for an extension
of time or cost.
18.4 Detailed Scope of Works
18.4.1 The Contractor shall design & construct Viaduct and all Metro Stations including but
not limited to; foundations, piers/columns, concourse, platform, technical rooms,
paid and unpaid areas, station entrances, provision for lift & escalators shafts and
the rail track guideway (viaduct) including the station finishing of all public and non-
public areas, system rooms, internal & external finishes, roads, footpath, plazas,
ancillary structures, entry/exit structures and FOB.
18.4.2 The Contractor shall carry out geotechnical borehole soil investigation for
foundation design at every pier/column location.
18.4.3 The Contractor shall carry out a Rail-Structure Interaction (RSI) study.
18.4.4 The Contractor shall fully coordinate and interface their design and construction
work with those prepared by Project Partners.
18.4.5 The Contractor shall carry out detail designs either in-house or shall engage a
competent Detailed Design Consultancy firm (DDC) for this project.
18.4.6 Available GFC drawings of parapet and RCC Cable trays will be issued to the
Contractor by the Employer / the Engineer. Any modification required to suit the
Contractor’s methodology shall be within Contractor’s scope.
18.4.7 The Employer will engage independent Design Verification Engineer (DVE) who
shall independently verify / proof check the Design and Engineering outputs
produced by the Contractor / their DDC/s at every stage.
18.4.8 The DDC / Contractor shall coordinate with DVE in design approval process and
obtain approval for all design and engineering outputs produced either by DDC or
sub-contractor or the Contractor. The approval of the design shall be obtained from
the Engineer.
18.4.9 Design and engineering outputs produced by the Contractor / their DDC/s shall be
checked, evaluated and validated by DVE before submission to the Engineer to
obtain their approval for construction/production. These checks, evaluations and
approvals must be documented and reported (communicated) to the Engineer as
directed. The quality of the design work must be validated by the DVE at each stage
of design submission.
18.4.10 All Design and engineering changes must be reviewed, verified and validated as
appropriate, and approved by DVE before submission to the Engineer.
18.4.11 The Design of all temporary works / structures shall be done by the Contractor DDC.
This shall be got proof checked by third party, to be engaged by the contractor
before submission to the engineer for record.
18.4.12 The Contractor shall ensure that on or before seventh day of each month to issue a

Package BH-03
written report to the Engineer, covering the status of all designs checked during the
preceding month. The format of the DVE’s monthly reports shall be approved by
Engineer.
18.4.13 Viaduct
The Viaduct and the Station aesthetics (“Look and Feel”) have an impact on the
passengers and general public. The architectural design principles shall include
order and balance, proportion, simplicity, clarity or function, colour, form, texture,
and how they complement each other. The principal aesthetic design factors shall
fashion the visual basis upon which the balance of the appearance is built.
Principal Aesthetic Design Factors shall be;
a. Superstructure type and shape;
b. Vertical and horizontal geometry and their relationship to the surrounding
environment;
c. Pier placement and shape to maximum sight lines;
d. Interaction between the station and its surroundings and environment;
e. The Station aesthetics shall showcase the heritage and culture and or history
of the City.
f. Special /Obligatory/Railway spans shall be approved by the relevant
Authority. Any minor changes/iterations in the design process required by the
respective statutory authority shall be at Contractor’s own risk and cost.
g. The Contractor shall design & construct Viaduct (Guideway), Guideway within
the stations, including immediate structures adjacent to Stations.
h. The Contractor shall design & construct all viaduct, obligatory spans and
special spans including the foundations, sub-structure and superstructure,
namely; piles, pile caps, raft foundations, piers, pier caps (cross-heads),
bearings, shear keys and the guideway.
i. The Contractor shall carry out utility location trial trenches at every foundation
location. The Contractor shall use the trial trench investigation to confirm the
span configuration and where possible to minimise utility diversions.
j. The General arrangement drawings, design and launching scheme of all
spans/FOBs crossing Railway tracks shall be approved by the Indian Railway
Authority.
k. Open or Pile foundations shall be adopted for Viaduct and Station
Piers/Columns considering maximum height of the structure.
l. The Alignment between CH: 27+000 and CH: 28+000 is parallel to existing
Indian Railway tracks, the Contractor shall adopt appropriate construction
methodology to ensure safety and stability of existing IR tracks.
m. For alignment between CH: 27+000 and CH: 28+000 parallel to Indian
Railway tracks, the existing earth in cutting shall be protected with a suitable
protection methodology and the proposal shall be approved by Indian Railway

Package BH-03
Authority.
n. Foundations of viaduct or stations shall be coordinated with proposed/existing
PWD flyovers along the Metro alignment.
o. The Contractor shall Design and Construct Abutments at Viaduct ramp end
interfacing with Project Partners. The design shall ensure proper connection
and water proofing with immediate structure. The joint shall be capable of
Water bars shall be provided for walls and foundation shall be designed and
constructed.
p. The Contractor shall design and construct obligatory spans at Pulbogda
Interchange for Blue line metro tracks & Platform, Aishbagh station Entry/Exit
FoB and Krishi Upaj Mandi to cross Indian Railway Tracks. Future Tracks
planned by Indian Railways shall be considered for span arrangement. The
Contractor’s General Arrangement Drawing and design shall be approved by
the concerned Authority. The tentative chainage and minimum span length
are as listed below;
Location Chainage (km) Minimum span (m)
Pulbogda (ROB) 27+190 45
Aishbagh (FOB) 27+947 45
Krishi Upaj Mandi (ROB) 34+000 to 34+200 60
45
q. Spans at road intersections shall be interfaced and approved by the Municipal

Road Authority, PWD, the Capital Development Authority and/or the Smart
City Authority or any other concerned Authority. The locations of piers and
clearances shall be approved by the Statutory Authorities and shall provide
maximum visibility and minimum impact to traffic flow, this shall be part of the
Lump Sum.
18.4.14 Viaduct and Bridge Foundations;
a. All pier foundations shall be designed and constructed as piled foundations.
Where rocky strata permit the Contractor, may request the Engineer’s
approval to provide open or raft foundations.
b. Pile Load Tests shall be carried out as confirmed in the Employer’s
requirements. All initial pile load tests shall be carried out on piles that will not
be part of the Permanent Works.
c. Non-destructive testing shall be carried out on the Permanent Works piles as
confirmed in the Employer’s requirements.
d. All piles shall be bored using a hydraulic rotary rig unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
e. The design and construction of all pile caps includes the excavation

Package BH-03
temporary works. Pile cap excavation shall be deemed as deep excavations

and the ground support shall be designed and monitored by a qualified
geotechnical engineer(s) approved by the Engineer.
f. Ground earthing shall be provided, from the deck to earth through the
substructure and foundations, and the design shall be coordinated with the
Systems Contractor(s).
18.4.15 The Substructure;
a. This includes all piers, namely; standard piers, cantilever piers, portal piers,
portal beams and piers. It also includes the design and construction of the
piers and pier caps at package end (ramps), which shall be coordinated with
Project Partners
b. The Contractor shall provide Elastomeric bearings for all viaduct/guideway
spans. This shall include the design and provision of vertical movement
retainers, and vertical bearings. POT/PTFE or Spherical bearings shall be
provided obligatory spans.
c. Ground earthing shall be provided, from the deck to earth through the
d. Traffic crash barriers shall be provided to all piers, which shall include non-
traffic roads.
18.4.16 The Superstructure;
a. It is proposed to have a uniform superstructure profile project wide, where
possible and standard spans should be designed and constructed. The
superstructure shall be of pre-cast segmental box girder type, but alternative
Contractor aesthetic proposals may be considered by the Engineer.
b. The span length configuration shall be configured to minimise the impact on
existing road infrastructure, and to minimise utility diversions. The Works shall
remain within the given Right of Way, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure the design of pier locations at all road
intersections and rail crossings are approved by the Statutory Authorities.
c. The Contractor shall design & construct non-standard and special spans
where confirmed in the Employer’s Requirements or required by the
Contractor’s design.
d. To comply with Railway Authority requirements at all railway crossings they
shall be constructed using steel composite spans, unless otherwise approved
by the Railway Authority and the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain
approval for their design from the Railway Authority, for which MPMRCL will
provide assistance. The cost of design and construction shall be included in
the Contractors Lump Sum price excluding railway charges.
e. The Contractor is advised to visit the site and review possible span lengths
during the bidding process.
f. The Deck shall be continuous at Crossover locations. Length of continuous

Package BH-03
span shall be as required by the System Contractors (Track).

g. The MPMRCL Metro logo shall be provided on the parapet at locations to be
agreed with the Engineer. Details of the logo shall be provided by the
Engineer during the execution of the Works.
h. The Contractor shall provide noise barriers in urban areas. These shall be
designed and located to ensure noise is limited to the Municipal/Engineer’s
requirements.
i. The Contractor shall interface the design with System Contractor(s) and
provide where required fixings, box-outs to facilitate systems installations.
The traction power contractor will install a 3rd rail and the civil design shall
confirm provision against stray current, fixings and corrosion protection.
j. Expansion joints shall be designed for minimum maintenance and
replacement.
k. All superstructure manholes shall be provided with manhole covers. The
covers shall be made of cast iron and be provided with a locking arrangement.
l. Cut outs, inserts and cabling brackets for the Systems Contractor(s) shall be
installed by the Contractor. This work shall be fully coordinated between the
Contractor and the Systems Contractor(s).
m. The Contractor shall make provision to install plinths for the Systems
Contractor(s) signalling masts. This work shall be fully coordinated between
the Contractor and the Systems Contractor(s).
n. The Contractor shall provide grooves in parapets.
o. The Contractor shall provide drainage systems to the deck and viaduct box
to ensure gravity discharge. The design of the drainage system discharge
shall be approved by the Engineer. The drainage pipe shall be laid outside
the pier.
p. Ground earthing shall be provided, from the deck to earth through the
q. The contractor shall implement all necessary Health and Safety measures
during the commencement of segment transportation, erection, pre-stressing,
post-stressing, grouting, etc and only competent personnel shall be entrusted
while carrying out such high-risk activities.
18.4.17 The Stations
a. The Stations shall be designed for multimodal integration including linkage to
stakeholder properties and facilities as shown in the Tender drawings. The
stations shall be designed for ease of passenger flow. The stations design
shall ensure the essential satisfactory quality of the Station layout by providing
adequate space for the systematic and organised movement of passengers
from the ground level entrances to the concourse and then up to the platform
areas and onto the train coaches. The stations shall be designed to ensure
the security of the passengers and the facilities at all times.

Package BH-03
b. The design and construction of all the station structures including track
supporting structure, columns, beams, slabs, staircases, parapets, canopies,
gutters, RCC Water Tank (Underground and Overhead), Entry-Exit Structures
and other ancillary structures such as DG room, Pump room, Earthing Mat
etc.
c. The Contractor shall carry out geotechnical borehole soil investigation at
every foundation location for the foundation (including pile) design.
d. All column foundations shall be designed and constructed as pile foundations.
Where rocky strata permit, the Contractor may request the Engineer’s
approval to provide open raft foundations. Permanent liners, if required shall
be provided.
e. Bore wells 2nos. (capacity 24000 lph) with submersible pumps of required
capacity, Cables, starter and necessary connection in main panel at each
station and connection with suitable dia. GI/UPVC line from bore wells to the
underground water tanks with automated operation arrangement as approved
by the Engineer.
f. Design & Construction of Lift shafts and escalator pits and other fixtures in
stations in coordination with respective system contractors including water
proofing of lift pits and escalator pits as per specifications and as per tender
drawing.
g. Water proofing in the underground structures, underground water tanks &
overhead terrace tanks shall be with injection grouting, water proofing plaster
and finishing the tanks with Ceramic tiles.
h. The design and construction of the expansion joints at including track bed and
at all floor levels of station. The expansion joints shall not be placed above
the technical rooms in BoH area.
i. Water supply connections from Municipal Authority installations at all stations.
j. Detailed Design and Construction of Station water supply, Sanitary
Installation and drainage systems shall include but not be limited to the
following:
i. Soil waste & vent pipes and fittings

ii. Sewerage and drainage system
iii. Water supply System
iv. Rain water piping
v. Suction and delivery pipes and valves for water supply Pumps
vi. Sanitary fixtures and fittings
vii. Pipes works for hydraulics services
viii. Piping ancillaries for hydraulics services
ix. Sewerage treatment plant
x. Tube well/ borewell
xi. Any other Miscellaneous items required for successful
commissioning of Plumbing work services
k. Clean and dirty water drainage connections to Municipality installations.

Package BH-03
l. Public toilets shall be provided at each station. The discharge shall be

connected to the municipal sewage system, and be in full compliance with the
Authorities requirements. The Contractor shall fully coordinate and interface
their drainage design and construction work with Project Partners.
m. Design, Providing & Fixing of insert plates, bolts, support hangers for Project
Partners (System Contractors) and Façade.
n. Traffic crash barriers shall be provided to all piers, which shall include non-
traffic roads.
o. Crash barriers shall be provided for Entry/Exit piers/columns which are
adjacent to the Road traffic.
p. For stations located over traffic roads protection installations shall be provided
during construction to permit unimpeded traffic and pedestrian flow and
damage to the Works. This protection shall be maintained until completion of
all the station exterior finishing work. All working platforms shall be covered
with suitable material to prevent any falls of equipment, materials and persons
on to trafficked roads.
q. The Contractor shall fully interface with Project Partner Contractors the size
of System Technical rooms, all cut-outs, cable containment, corridors,
earthing and Tetra and GSM tower requirements.
r. The Contractor shall ensure that installation routes are provided of sufficient
size for the Project Partner Contractors proposed equipment. Rooms shall
include as a minimum those shown in the Employer’s reference drawings.
s. During design and Construction stage, Interfacing issues between viaduct
and stations within the Contract package and with the adjacent Contracts /
Project Partners is to be fully coordinated. In case of any discrepancy,
Engineer’s decision will be final and binding.
t. The Contractor shall maintain maximum stepping distance of 75mm at all
Station Platforms duly interfacing with other Project Partners (Rolling Stock
and Track). If stepping distance exceeds 75mm, an alternative arrangement
such as Gap-filler shall be provided. The material, specification, workmanship
and methodology of the Gap filler shall be approved by the Engineer before
execution.
18.4.18 Pre-Engineered Building (PEB) roof structure
Pre-Engineered Buildings or building components wherever specified shall be
designed, supplied, fabricated and erected by a specialist agency called PEB
manufacturer approved by the Engineer. All codes and standards for material,
design, fabrication and erection shall generally be as indicated for structural steel
work unless the following specifications call for a deviation otherwise. PEB
manufacturer shall use Submerged Arc Welding for built-up sections, meeting the
applicable requirements of the American Welding Society (A.W.S) 01.1.98.
The agency responsible for design, fabrication and erection shall not be allowed to
sub-let any of the activities/operations to another sub-agency in anyway unless a

Package BH-03
prior written approval of the Engineer is taken. The agency for PEB should have an
ISO 9001 certification for manufacture of PEBs. The Contractor shall submit all
design drawings, erection drawings, fabrication design and drawings for approval
by Engineer prior to commencement of fabrication works.
The work shall include:
a. Design, Fabrication, Supply and Erection of Pre-Engineered Building (PEB)
roof Structure over platforms and trackway, Entry/Exits, FOB, any other
structures including supporting columns, rafts, purlins, gutter etc., all
complete including providing for “first fix” structural arrangement for
Passenger Information Displays (PIDs), Clocks, Cameras, Signage, solar
panels etc,
b. Design, fabrication, supply and erection of structural steel for roof inspection
platforms, catwalks and cable tray support brackets & hangers.
c. Providing life line for maintenance / cleaning purpose.
d. Providing ladder to access roof.
e. The Contractor or their PEB sub-contractor must have their own fabrication
unit with fully computerized and automatic machineries for cutting, bending,
drilling, moulding, welding, grinding etc. with full flagged facilities of sand
blasting, painting and testing equipment complete.
f. All aspects of quality assurance, including procurement & testing of materials
and other components of the work, as specified or as directed;
g. Clearing of site and handing over of all the Works, as directed;
h. Maintenance of the completed Work during the Defect Liability Period (DLP).
i. The Contractor shall design and submit Design Drawings, Erection Drawings,
Fabrication Drawings, completion (i.e., 'as-built') drawings, calculation,
analysis and other related documents as specified;
j. The Contractor shall submit his design calculations and 'Engineering
Drawings' to the Engineer for his approval. The contractor is advised to
discuss his design philosophy and design procedure with the Engineer before
proceeding with the final design work.
k. The Contractor to obtain all relevant design information from the project
partners for preparing his designs, including all special loading like loads from
cranes and other utility services supported by the structure.
l. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
i. Detailed marking plans.
ii. Details of member connections and connections to other structures/
components of buildings.
iii. Detailed dimensions for fabrication indicating dimensional
modifications required for field conditions.
iv. Welding and bolting procedures to be used both at shop and field.

Package BH-03
v. Cambers required to be provided, and permissible tolerances in

fabrication.
vi. Assembly and erection sequences indicating components to be
connected at field.
vii. Complete bill of materials for each component (preferably drawing
wise).
m. All major Welding works shall be done at shop only.
n. The contractor shall submit:
i. Complete fabrication drawings, materials list, cutting list, bolt lists,
welding schedules and QC schedules, based on the design drawing
furnished to him and in accordance with the approved schedule. It is
highlighted that structural steel members, dimensions thereof
indicated in tender drawings are tentative only, and may be modified
during final design stage.
ii. Results of any tests, as and when conducted and as required by the
Engineer.
iii. Manufacturer's mill test reports in respect of steel materials, bolts,
nuts and electrodes, wires as may be applicable.
iv. A detailed list of all constructional Plant & Equipment, such as
cranes, derricks, winches, welding sets etc. their makes, model,
present condition and location, available to the contractor.
18.4.19 Logistics Areas
The Employer will not provide any land for logistics areas, casting yards, dumping
site or offices. The Contractor shall identify the land they require and procure the
same at their own cost.
18.5 Design
18.5.1 A Designer or Designers (DDC) shall be employed by the Contractor. The
Designer(s) shall have relevant experience as defined in following sub-clauses for
designing of Metro Stations and Viaduct. Meeting the relevant experience defined
in following sub-clauses is mandatory. The DDC shall have relevant experience in
detail design of;
i) at least 2 (Two) km length of Metro Rail Viaduct and at least 2 (Two)

Elevated Metro Rail Stations for civil & structural works,
ii) at least 2 (Two) Elevated Metro Rail Stations for Architectural works, and
18.5.2 The Contractor shall provide full details of the DDC or Designer(s) past experience
and details of the proposed design discipline leads and Key personnel for the
Engineer’s approval.
18.5.3 The proposed DDC in the form of JV/ Consortium shall not be eligible.
18.5.4 Documentary proof of detail design works should be submitted, namely; client

Package BH-03
completion certificates clearly indicating the nature and scope of work, actual
completion costs, actual completion dates.
18.5.5 In case the work is executed for a private client the following shall be submitted:
copy of the work order(s), bill of quantities, details of payments received, T.D.S.
certificates for all payments received (to be certified by Statutory Auditor/ practicing
Chartered Accountant) and copy of the final/last bill paid.
18.5.6 If relevant experience work(s) were done in JV/ Consortium having different
constituents, then the quantum of work(s) as per their percentage participation in
such JV/ Consortium shall be considered (or as certified by the Client furnishing
exact value/quantity of work done by the subject member/partner of the
JV/Consortium). This is to be substantiated with documentary evidence.
18.5.7 The Contractor may propose to carry out the design work in-house if they have a
design office with an experienced design team capable of carrying out the design
work for this Contract. The in-house design team should have the relevant
experience as prescribed in 18.5.1 above for the Designer. The Contractor shall
provide full details of his design teams past experience and details of the proposed
design discipline leads which he intends to deploy for the Engineer’s approval.
18.5.8 To ensure progressive design assurance is achieved the Designer(s) discipline
leads (including Key Personnel) shall be available at all times for design meetings
and workshops with the Engineer and shall be located in Bhopal.
18.5.9 The Permanent Works shall be designed and constructed in such a way that, when
maintained in accordance with the Contractor’s Operations and Maintenance
manuals, the structures will remain serviceable for a minimum 100-year design life.
18.5.10 The Contractor shall develop their design and construction methodology to suit the
areas provided for the Works including but not limited to the special design wherever
needed on the viaduct, stations, ramps and special track locations.
18.5.11 The Works shall be designed to the Employer’s requirements and all relevant
current codes, specifications and drawings or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
18.5.12 The design shall be fully coordinated for all disciplines including systems
installations. The Contractor shall design all disciplines in a fully coordinated BIM
3D model to minimise clashes, which shall be shared with other Project Partner
Contractors and Stakeholders, and this shall be carried out on a common digital
platform to which the Engineer and other Project Partner Contractors will be
provided access.
18.6 3D BIM requirements
18.6.1 BIM Employer’s Information Requirements (EIRs) is in line with PAS1192-2:2013.
18.6.2 During the design stage the Contractor shall prepare the project BIM Execution Plan
(BEP) which will provide a detailed account of how the deliverables stated in the
EIR are to be achieved, each team member's responsibility and allocation of said
deliverables according to discipline, for the Engineer’s review.
18.6.3 The BEP should include the following sections in line with PAS1192-2:2013:

Package BH-03
a. Response to the EIRs

b. Management processes
c. Planning & Documentation processes
d. Standard Method and Procedure (SMP)
18.6.4 Information Management
18.6.4.1 Level of Definition
Level of Definition (LOD) is used to determine both the level of geometry detail and
Level of associated Information (LOI) for any given model element at the project
work stage. Defining LOD and LOI informs the Contractor of the degree of
information reliability when using the model.
18.6.4.2 Training Requirements
Training for access and operation of the Employer’s CDE shall be provided by the
Employer to the Contractor as required. Data security or induction requirements will
be highlighted to the contractor on a project specific basis.
18.6.4.3 Planning of work and Data Segregation
This section is to set the management and modelling process requirement for the
Contractor.
Data segregation planning and information management responsibilities shall be in
accordance with the process described inside PS 1192-2:2013. The following are
required as a minimum and shall be documented in the project BEP:
a. Naming Conventions
b. Model Managements
c. Volume, zones and areas
d. Publishing Process
The Contractors 3D Model shall be the originating source for drawing productions.
The Employer expects all Contractors to work in a collaborative manner utilizing
intelligent 3D geometry models.
18.6.4.4 Co-ordination and Clash Deduction
Project quality and de-risking through the model and information co-ordination
between various interfaces is a key Employer’s objective and requirement.
Coordination meeting shall be conducted at least once in a week or 2-3 times in a
month with the specialist/ representatives.
The Contractor shall ensure the availability of space and technical equipment for
hosting the meetings, but all the contractor’s specialists, sub-contractors and
engineers shall be able to work during the meeting using their own portable
hardware.
The clash detection and avoidance process shall be detailed in the project BEP.
BEP shall include but not be limited to software utilization, responsibility

Package BH-03
assignment, outputs and clash resolution process.

Delivery shall be undertaken through regular sharing of model data as outlined in
the BEP in the form of native files and other agreed exchange formats. Prior to
sharing, all data shall be checked, approved and validated as ‘issued for
coordination’ in CDE in line with the BS 1192:2007 and PAS 1192-2:2013+A1
Status codes.
Model federation, coordination and reporting responsibilities shall align with the
information exchange activities and roles outlined in PAS 1192-2:2013, Table 2.
18.6.4.5 Collaboration Process
The CDE for the project will be provided by the Employer. Details of the project
collaboration process shall be fully outlined in the project BEP and should be
sufficient to demonstrate competence and capability.
All processes must follow BS 1192:2007 & PAS 1192-2:2013, utilizing the described
Common Data Environment (CDE) phases such as Work in Progress, Shared,
Published and Archive during all project work stages.
The project CDE setup and management shall align with activities and
responsibilities as outlined in PAS 1192-2:2013, Table 2
18.6.4.6 Common Data Environment Security
The project BEP shall set out the process for monitoring, managing and complying
with the Employers security mandate, including adhering to any standard or process
for data sharing.
All project information is to be treated with confidence and all models shall be
exchanged in the CDE using agreed metadata tags. The project BEP shall
demonstrate compliance processes and the means by which compliance is
monitored and managed.
18.6.4.7 System Performance
The following shall be considered when developing the BEP:
a. Model size – no size limitation but practically 200Mb max
b. Software Uses – It is essential that the native file formats delivered can be
openly shared and software platform systems can export to IFC2x3 format for
information extraction, verification, archive and free model viewing purposes.
Inherent model data must be extractable in a format exchangeable with
Microsoft Excel for information exchange purposes.
18.6.4.8 Compliance Plan
A methodology for model delivery and data compliance procedures including
references to standards and compliance software should be outlined in the BEP as
a response. As a minimum reference should be made to
a. Quality Assurance/ Control procedures
b. Associated software
c. Security requirement assurances

Package BH-03
The Employer/ Engineer’s Information Manager shall be granted access to the

Contractor’s CDE to enable regular compliance monitoring and audits.
18.6.4.9 Geospatial Coordinates
Models of all disciplines shall be in geospatial coordinate system. General
considerations that need to be incorporated are as follows:
a. All Models (2D/3D) should be created with the geospatial project origin and
orientation using a conventional Cartesian axis and common unit of length.
b. Model should be created at 1:1
c. Units should be SI unit of measure
d. The accuracy achievable using the chosen units and origins shall be checked
by the contactor according with the chosen Authoring tool.
18.6.5 Software Platforms
The below table shows the Building Information Model as well as other software
Platforms to be used:
Software formats
Method of Data exchange Employer CDE
Format of 3D Graphical Data Exchange IFC2x3, native and NWC
Format of 2D Graphical Data Exchange PDF, DWG
Non-Graphical Data IFC2x3, XLSX
Documentation PDF, DWG
The ability of the contractor to use these platforms should be identified in the BEP.
18.6.6 Commercial Management
18.6.6.1 Information Exchange
At a project level, the frequency of required information exchanges shall be defined
in further detail within the project Master Information Delivery Plan (MIDP). Whilst
information can be shared at any time during a stage, formal published information
deliverables should be exchanged prior to the end of a stage to advise the decision
gateways, as indicated by the project MIDP.
Information deliverables required at each information exchange shall be as defined
by the project MIDP. Those information deliverables range from files that may
consist of any of the following:
a. Native and PDF documents
b. 3D Models – in their native discipline (un-federated) and in open standard IFC
format.
c. 2D Drawings – cut from the 3D models and

Package BH-03
d. other documents in PDF and DWG format

18.6.6.2 Roles and Responsibilities
The allocation of roles should be noted within the project BEP derived from PAS
1192-2:2013. The roles are not new appointments, rather roles that are applied to
named individuals working on the project to assign task ownership. These roles
may be transferred and migrated to different individuals as the project progresses.
The following roles in connection with BIM will be taken on directly by the
Contractor:
a. BIM Manager
b. BIM Coordinator
c. Technical Lead – BIM (one for each discipline)
d. BIM Engineer / Specialist (one for each discipline)
18.6.6.3 Standards and Guidance
The core documents and standards that are mandated to be used on the project
are:
a. PAS 1192-2:2013
b. PAS 1192-3:2014
c. BS 1192-4:2014
d. PAS1192-5: 2015
e. Supported by BS 1192:2007
18.7 Interface and Coordination
18.7.1 The Contractor shall to the satisfaction of the Engineer, coordinate, interface and
cooperate with all Stakeholders and Project Partners including all external Agencies
and Authorities.
18.7.2 The Contractor shall fully co-ordinate the design and construction of his Works with
Project Partners, but not limited to Viaduct, Track, Solar Panel, Depot, Rolling
Stock, Traction and Auxiliary Power Supply (including 3rd rail), Signalling and
Telecommunication, Automatic Fare Collection (AFC), Passenger Screen
Gates/Doors (PSG/PSD) and Vertical and Horizontal Transportation Systems
(VHTS).
18.7.3 The Contractor shall include and cooperate and coordinate by provision for the
Project Partners equipment movement and installation by providing suitable access
routes, staircases, cut/box outs, sumps, service corridors, cable troughs on the
viaduct and station area, raceways, conduits, fixtures, inserts, clearances etc.
18.7.4 Earthing and lightning protection shall be provided and fully coordinated with Project
Partners.
18.7.5 The track supporting structure will support ballast less track (long welded rail) which
will be laid later by Project Partners. Arrangements of inserts/ dowels required for
provision of such ballastless track will have to be incorporated in the deck in

Package BH-03
consultation with the Engineer where the ballastless track concrete is to be laid at
the top of the deck slab by Project Partner (Track Contractor).
18.7.6 Prior to the Taking-Over Dates, early agreed access shall be provided to other
Project Partners appointed by the Employer, to carry out their works. Material and
equipment supply delivery routes shall be coordinated and provided to the Project
Partners. The security of materials and equipment brought to the site by other
Project Partners shall be their responsibility.
18.7.7 The Contractor shall conduct and coordinate interface meetings intimated to the
Engineer, and adhere to the decisions taken at the meeting approved by the
Engineer.
18.7.8 Any coordination or interface disagreements with other Project Partners shall be
informed to the Engineer. If the Contractor despite having taken all reasonable
efforts cannot resolve such disagreements then the decision of the Engineer shall
be final and binding on the Contractor.
18.7.9 Access shall be provided to the staff and labour of the Project Partners appointed
by the Employer for carrying out their works and bringing materials and equipment
at the site. However, the security of materials and Equipment brought at the site will
be the responsibility of the respective Contractors.
18.8 Utility Diversions
18.8.1 Utility identification at foundation locations shall be carried out by the Contractor in
advance. The Contractor shall modify the reference structural design confirmed in
the Tender Drawings to save the utilities as directed by the Statutory Authority within
the accepted Lump Sum price. The relocation/diversion of the utilities shall be
undertaken after the approval of the Engineer, when no other option is available.
The removal/diversion plan shall be approved by the Utility owning agency.
18.8.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for design, diversion plan, getting approval, co-
ordination, supervision and execution of works pertaining to
relocation/shifting/removal with material approved by the utility owning Agencies of
all above ground utilities like electrical up to including 33kV OHT lines, street lights,
traffic signages, traffic signals, gantries, telecommunication, CCTV poles, high mast
lighting poles, statues, bus stops, existing median, railings etc., and storm water
drains/pipes & utility ducts to the satisfaction of respective Utility agencies. All
diversion plans shall be approved by the Engineer before submission to the
respective utility owning agencies. The payment for relocation/shifting/removal for
these utilities shall be included under Schedule ‘A’.
18.8.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for design, diversion plan, getting approval, co-
ordination, supervision and execution of works pertaining to
relocation/shifting/removal all below ground utilities, to the satisfaction of respective
Utility agencies. The payment for relocation/shifting/removal for these utilities shall
be entitled under Provisional Sums. Utility services that may require
removal/diversion while carrying out the scope of works under this may include, but
are not be limited to water, gas, electricity, telecommunication cables (including fibre
optic), military and security, police utilities, medical utilities, sewage system etc,.

Package BH-03
18.8.4 The works/ items shall be operated under this Provisional Sums as per the rate
based on concerned items as available in latest schedule of rates (SOR) for works,
with following sequential order of preference:
1. Delhi Schedule Rates (DSR) of CPWD as applicable at Bhopal.
2. Schedule of Rates of Road & Building(R&B) Department of Government of
MP (MP PWD).
3. Schedule of Rates of MP Public Health Engineering Department
(MPPHED).
4. Schedule of Rates of MP Power Management Co. Ltd. (MPPMCL).
If rate of any items to be executed is not available in the above list, then the rate of
such items shall be worked out by the Contractor as per PC 13.3.1(D) and obtain
Engineer’s approval. The Engineer’s decision in this matter would be final and
binding upon the Contractor.
18.8.5 The diversion of overhead and underground electric transmission lines above 33kV
shall be arranged by the Employer directly through the utility owning Agencies/
statutory authorities and shall be paid directly by the Employer.
18.8.6 The Employer will arrange for the removal/transplantation of trees identified by the
owning agencies. Tree cutting, relocation and plantation shall be paid for by the
Employer directly to the Authorities. However, grass, lawn, herbs, shrubs, plants
and others which are not to be transplanted/removed by the owning agencies shall
be removed by Contractor under Schedule ‘A’.
18.8.7 The Contractor shall ensure that any salvage materials are either returned to the
utility owning agencies or shall be disposed off upon approval by the utility owing
agencies.
18.8.8 The demolition, dismantling and disposal of building structures such details will be
advised progressively during the progress of the Contract work and the cost towards
the same is deemed to be included in the Schedule ‘A’.
18.8.9 Any incidental and unforeseen works under this Contract shall also be deemed to
be included in the Schedule ‘A’.
18.8.10 The Contractor shall remain responsible for any works carried out by his
Subcontractor, Vendors, Utility owning agencies within the right-of-way and/or the
construction site boundaries.
18.8.11 Utility Diversions include but are not limited to the following scope of work:
a. Verify the correctness of all drawings showing utilities provided by the
Employer, Engineer and Statutory Authorities;
b. Relocation/diversion of utilities as deemed necessary, and agreed by the
Engineer, to enable the execution of the Works;
c. Construction of temporary traffic diversions where the construction of the
works for the utility diversion interrupts existing public or private roads or right
of way;
d. Provision and submission to the Engineer and Statutory Authorities of

Package BH-03
AutoCAD drawings and diversion construction methodology showing details

of the utility locations and depth before and after relocation, supported by
photographs; and
e. Protection of utilities that are not to be diverted during the execution of the
Works as per the Employer’s Requirements.
18.8.12 In the process of either identifying, relocating or protecting the public utility services
located within the right-of-way and/or the construction site the Contractor shall:
a. Obtain all necessary approvals (NOC) from the relevant authorities to carry
out the investigations to identify the location of all existing public utilities within
the right-of-way and/or the construction site boundaries;
b. Provide accurate records of existing public utilities identified to the Engineer,
prior to commencement of the Works;
c. Provide accurate records of any additional public utilities encountered and
take all necessary steps to prevent damage to and to safeguard such
services;
d. Draft any utility diversion design plan in accordance with the applicable
standards as approved by the relevant Statutory Authorities;
e. Cooperate with any other Stakeholders involved so as to avoid interference
with other Project Partner Contractor operations e.g., an independently
appointed Enabling Works Contractor;
f. Cooperate with the public utility authorities to safeguard and minimise the
disruption of service;
g. Erect suitable barricades around all trenches dug during utility identification
or diversion (this is deemed to be part of the Lump Sum Schedule A cost);
h. Construct temporary traffic diversions where the construction of the works
interrupts existing public or private roads or right of way but only after first
obtaining approval from the relevant authorities;
i. Prepare shop drawings, approved by the relevant authorities and the
Engineer, before commencing any diversion of utilities;
j. Construct support and/or protection, as approved by the Utility Authority and
Engineer, for those utilities that do not require diversion during construction;
k. In the event of a service being interrupted as a result of damage caused by
the Contractor or Subcontractor, promptly notify the authority concerned and
inform the Engineer of the incident. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
costs for damage repairs that are required to restore the services and any
consequential damages;
l. Ensure that adequate insurance cover is in place at all times, as approved by
the Engineer, to cover all liabilities that may result as a consequence of
accidental disruption of any utility service;
m. Make substitute arrangements, as directed by the concerned Utility Authority,
until such time that any damage caused to utility services by the Contractor

Package BH-03
or Subcontractor has been repaired at the Contractors own expense; and

n. Submit a copy of all ‘As-Built Drawings’ to the relevant authorities and
Engineer and obtain a completion certificate from the relevant service
authority once of the awarded works related to removal, utility diversion,
relocation and protection have been completed.
18.8.13 The Employer retains the right to select and appoint the party responsible for
carrying out the Utility Diversions scope of work, either in its entirety or to allocate
certain parts of the scope of work.
18.8.14 Any delay in completion of these works shall not relieve the Contractor’s obligation
and it shall be at Contractor’s own risk and cost.
18.9 Project Time Requirements
18.9.1 Please refer to Contract Data at Annexure 1 to Part A of Volume II for Key Dates
with reference to the Commencement Date (CD).

Package BH -03
APPENDIX I – HEALTH AND SAFETY MANUAL

19 Purpose
This document titled ‘Construction Health & Safety Guideline’ sets the minimum
Health and Safety Standards that are to be adopted and implemented across all the
projects of the Bhopal and Indore Metro Programs. This document only provides an
outline and overview of the obligations, the detailed and specific health and safety
requirements are described in Indian Legislation.
20 Scope
This procedure applies to Metro Rail Projects and sub projects at Bhopal and
Indore, project information / records created regardless of format, which includes
information generated by the General Consultant, D&B Contractor(s) and 3rd
Parties.
21 Definitions
Table 1: Definitions
Term Definition
MPMRCL The Employer and Client
General Consultant Bhopal/Indore Metro Projects’ General Consultant

(DB E&C, Louis Berger and Geodata).
The Engineer The Delegated Client Representative to administer

the Contract
Initiator / Originator The person who starts the process.
Participant The person who is or may be involved in the

implementation of the procedure.
D&B Contractor The organization contracted by the Employer to carry

out the Project D&B works.
3rd Parties 3rd party Project stakeholders.
Accident An accident is an unplanned, uncontrolled event

giving rise to death, injury, occupational ill- health or
other loss.
Dangerous Occurrence Dangerous Occurrences are specific adverse events.

Dangerous Occurrences that must be reported.
Volume III – Health and Safety Manual Page 143 of 398

Package BH -03
Term Definition
Incident An incident is an unplanned, uncontrolled event which

under different circumstances, could have resulted in
an accident.
Near Miss A near miss is an unplanned event that does not result
in injury, illness or damage but under other
circumstances had the potential to do so. Other
familiar terms for these events are close call, near hit,
narrow escape or a near collision.
Project Partners The term ‘Project Partners’ used throughout this

document includes the Client, General Consultant,
other Consultants, Contractors, Subcontractor’s,
Suppliers and anyone else who undertake works on
the Bhopal and Indore Metro projects.
22 Responsibilities
22.1 Project Directors
a. Provide positive leadership on health and safety issues
b. Promote an enthusiastic health and safety culture that delivers positive
commitment to and engages all employees in continuous improvement in
health and safety performance
c. Keep abreast of developments of Indian health and safety legislation and
industry standards
d. Ensure that a health and safety management system is implemented within
their sphere of responsibility and monitor and review its effectiveness and take
necessary improvement action
e. Monitor that personnel under their control comply with their individual
responsibilities in health and safety matters
f. Ensure that the disciplinary process to address breaches of the health and
safety policy or management system is applied where necessary.
22.2 Senior Managers
a. Senior Managers are people in the organisation at any level above senior
supervisor and below director.
b. Provide positive leadership on health and safety issues within their area of
operation
c. Promote an enthusiastic health and safety culture that delivers positive
health and safety performance.

Package BH -03
d. Implement the business unit health and safety management system. In

particular:
i. Identify health and safety training needs and have the necessary
training arranged and when arranged, release those who require
training
ii. Make arrangements for health and safety induction training for all new
starters at the workplace under their control
iii. Implement operating procedures, including risk assessment
procedures, for the planning and control of activities associated with
identified risks
iv. Ensure that written method statements, risk assessments and/or health
and safety rules are brought to the attention of those affected
v. Appoint appropriate personnel to undertake health and safety duties
vi. Ensure that suitable arrangements are in place for the effective control
of changes to planned methods of work
vii. Keep abreast of developments in Indian H&S legislation and industry
standards
viii. Monitor and review the effectiveness of the health and safety
management system and report deficiencies
ix. Monitor that personnel under their control comply with their individual
responsibilities in H&S matters
x. Give personnel under their control, including contractors, clear
instructions as to their responsibilities to ensure correct working
methods
xi. Make adequate provision for dealing with safety, health or
environmental emergencies
xii. Promptly alert line and health and safety management to:
a. Significant injury to employees or those working under our
control
b. Reportable dangerous occurrences and learning events
c. Incidents that could lead to enforcement action
d. Enforcement notices served
e. Injury to a member of the public or a visitor
f. Where appropriate, be involved in the investigation and ensure
that the findings are reported
g. Report visits by members of relevant administrative authorities
e.g. Civil Defence (Fire Department)
h. Ensure that the health and safety manager/adviser is

Package BH -03
accompanied on workplace inspections. Following such

inspections take action agreed as necessary. Thereafter report
as requested on the action taken
i. Act immediately on any breach of health and safety rules or
procedures, unsafe situation or potential threat to the
environment that comes to their attention and, where necessary,
report such breaches
j. Ensure that the disciplinary process to address breaches of the
health and safety policy or management system is applied where
necessary
22.3 Designers
a. Ensure staff, are competent and adequately resourced to address the health
and safety issues likely to be involved in the design.
b. Consider hazards and risks when designing structures, equipment systems,
temporary works etc. and to those who:
i. Carry out construction work including demolition
ii. Maintain permanent fixtures and structure and clean windows, ceilings,
roofs etc.
iii. Use a structure as a place of work
c. When carrying out the design, provide adequate information about any
significant risks associated with the design and avoid foreseeable risk to those
involved by eliminating hazards and reducing the risk of those hazards that
remain.
d. Coordinate activities with that of others to improve the way in which risks are
managed and controlled.
22.4 Health and Safety Managers, Engineers and Officers
a. Provide positive leadership within their area of operation and promote the
adoption of best practice.
b. Promote an enthusiastic health and safety culture that delivers positive
health and safety performance
c. Keep abreast of developments in health and safety legislation and industry
standards
d. Monitor and report on the effectiveness of the health and safety management
system and progress against the health and safety performance standards
and make recommendations for improvement as appropriate.
e. Monitor and report on operational health and safety performance and make
recommendations for improvement and monitor to ensure that effective action
is taken

Package BH -03
f. Lead and provide functional management for any health and safety personnel
under their control
g. Assist with the identification of health and safety training needs, and monitor
delivery and recording
h. Monitor and report on the implementation of the approved health and safety
objectives
i. Produce health and safety performance reports as required
j. Promptly alert line and functional management to significant accidents and
incidents and where appropriate be involved in the investigation and ensure
k. Review accident and incident reports and investigation reports, identify any
trends and ensure that there is an appropriate response to prevent future
recurrence
22.5 Section, Site, Discipline Engineers and Foremen
a. Appreciate the responsibility allocated to individuals within the operative and
management structure
b. Set a good example and leadership by working safely on the site and wearing
the appropriate personal protective equipment
c. Ensure safety arrangements, including fire safety drills, are implemented
d. Ensure that only trained and authorised workers use plant and equipment and
that persons undergoing training do not operate plant and equipment unless
closely supervised by a competent person
e. Ensure that employees under their control attend induction training before
working on the site and that they are correctly supervised at all times
f. Ensure that plant and equipment under their control or brought to site by the
subcontractor has any necessary certificates of test, inspection and
examination and is safe to use
g. Ensure that clear instruction and information is given to persons under their
control
h. Carry out recorded safety inspections of site conditions
i. Ensure that persons under their control wear and use any personal protective
equipment correctly, to manufacturer’s instructions and to statutory and
company requirements
j. Ensure that employees under their control are given appropriate safety
information as required and that details of control measures from risk
assessments are fully explained
k. Ensure that any accident/incident is reported and that all accidents are
entered in the accident register
l. Ensure that access/egress routes are kept clear from obstruction, particularly

Package BH -03
escape routes and ensure that good housekeeping is observed at all times
m. Ensure that any plant/equipment for use by employees under their control is
checked to ensure any necessary guards or safety devices are checked and
fit for use by competent persons prior to use
n. Attend any meeting on safety issues as required and as applicable, co-
operate with all personnel on matters of health and safety
22.6 Supervisors
a. Supervisors are people at the first level in the organisation that have
responsibilities over the work of others.
b. Provide positive leadership on health and safety issues for the members of
the work team for which they are responsible.
c. Promote a positive attitude in the workforce and encourage behaviours that
protect both people and the environment.
d. Organise work to be carried out in accordance with relevant health and safety
risk assessments/ method statements.
responsibilities in health and safety matters.
f. Give personnel under their control, including contractors, clear instructions
about the required methods of work.
g. Ensure that all relevant personnel are involved in health and safety risk
assessments prior to any work activity commencing, and, where appropriate,
that method statements are available, understood and that any identified
control measures are implemented.
h. Where appropriate assess and implement any additional health and safety
controls required to address the needs of new employees, young persons,
non-English speaking workers, disabled persons, pregnant women, etc.
i. Monitor that risk assessments/method statements accurately reflect the health
and safety hazards present and ensure that any required changes are agreed
and implemented in accordance with the arrangements for control of changes
to planned methods of work.
j. Ensure appropriate arrangements are in place for two-way communication
and where appropriate deliver tool box talks to the work teams.
k. Identify any health and safety training requirements of personnel under their
control and advise appropriate management accordingly.
l. See that accidents and incidents are reported immediately to the relevant
manager.
m. Ensure that personal protective clothing and equipment is used where
identified as required and is properly maintained and stored.
n. Ensure that the plant and equipment supplied is appropriate for the work and

Package BH -03
has any necessary certification. Ensure that plant and equipment is

immediately put out of use if unsafe or presents a potential threat to the
environment.
o. Ensure that only authorised persons operate plant and equipment.
p. See that unattended plant, materials and premises are left in a condition that
does not present a risk to persons or the environment.
q. Ensure that the disciplinary process for breaches of health and safety
procedures and rules is applied where necessary.
r. Develop fire safety procedures, communicate with staff and carry out the
necessary training and fire drills with a frequency that is appropriate for the
size of the site and the duration of the construction operations.
22.7 All Employees
a. Set a good personal example on health and safety issues within your area of
operation.
b. Take care of your own health and safety whilst at work; ensure your activities
do not adversely affect the health and safety of others.
c. Co-operate in all matters of health, safety and make your contribution to
reducing accidents.
d. Ensure you have been fully briefed on, and have a good understanding of,
the task at hand. Always work in accordance with the instructions given and
any written health and safety risk assessments/method statements.
e. Report any conflict.
f. Never deviate from an agreed method of working unless the supervisor or
relevant manager has been notified and authorisation has been obtained.
g. Ensure that you have and use the correct access, tools, equipment and
personal protective equipment for the work.
h. Never undertake hazardous operations nor operate any items of plant or
equipment unless trained and authorised to do so.
i. Maintain a tidy workplace with an appropriate level of cleanliness.
j. Report to immediate supervisor any defects in plant or equipment or unsafe
methods of work and ensure that plant, equipment and premises are left in a
safe and secure state and place when unattended. Do not operate any item
of plant or equipment that has become defective.
k. Report to your immediate supervisor all potential hazards and incidents that
have or could have resulted in personal injury or environmental damage.
l. Report any work-related personal injury or disease to your immediate
supervisor and ensure that an entry is made in the accident book at your place
of work.
m. If you are asked to undertake a task that you feel is unsafe or for which you

Package BH -03
feel you do not have the appropriate knowledge or training, report this to your
immediate supervisor.
23 Legal and Other Requirements
a. All work is to be undertaken in compliance with the requirements of Indian
Law. If no local standard exists or the applicable standard is not specified, the
appropriate and compatible internationally recognised standard or code of
practice shall be adopted.
b. The hierarchy of standards is as follows:
i. Indian Standards (IN),
ii. Euro Norm (EN),
iii. British Standards (BS),
iv. International Standards and Codes of Practice
c. Alternative standards may be proposed if they can satisfactorily be
demonstrated that they are equivalent, in all respects, to the above-mentioned
standards. Where there is a discrepancy or a conflict, the higher or stricter
standards shall take precedence. Project Partners are to ensure that all
prescribed registers, certificates and records are maintained and available for
inspection at the relevant work locations by any authorised person.
24 Zero Harm
a. Madhya Pradesh Metro Rail is committed to ensuring the health and safety of
all personnel working on all the projects. All work shall be suitably planned
and implemented and safe equipment, arrangements and facilities shall be
provided. Madhya Pradesh Metro Rail’s goal is for Zero Harm by preventing
injury and ill health to Madhya Pradesh Metro Rail employees, Project
Partners, customers and the general public.
b. Zero Harm is defined as:
i. Zero fatalities
ii. Zero permanent disabling injuries
iii. Zero injuries to members of the public
iv. Zero long term harm to health
v. Accident Frequency Rate (AFR) of Zero
c. Project Partners shall actively promote and encourage high standards of
health and safety and shall develop and implement a strategy for achieving
Zero harm across all their sites and activities. All personnel working on the
project shall commit to and adopt the philosophy of Zero Harm.
24.1 Health and Safety Principles
a. Supporting Zero Harm are 5 key health and safety principles, these being:
i. All accidents are preventable.

Package BH -03
ii. Health and safety are led from the top down, and everyone is
responsible for health and safety.
iii. Positive behaviours are to be reinforced and negative behaviours are
to be challenged.
iv. Everyone has the right to stop work or to stop others from working if it
is unsafe, without fear of any action taken against that person.
24.2 Health and Safety Objectives and Key Performance Indicators (KPI’s)
a. Project Partners will set documented, measurable, annual health and safety
objectives targets and KPI’s. The objectives must be consistent with the
health and safety policy and a commitment to continuous improvement.
b. A management programme will be produced for achieving the objectives
setting out:
i. The designated responsibility for achievement of the objectives.
ii. The means and time-scale by which the objectives are to be
achieved Any appropriate improvement targets and associated
improvement plans.
iii. The programme is to be reviewed at regular intervals to ensure it is
up to date and that it addresses any changes that may have
occurred.
c. KPI’s will be reported in a format and timescale as directed by Engineer.
d. KPI’s will be regularly reviewed and updated accordingly to address changing
priorities and requirements of the MPMRCL program.
25 Health and Safety Management System (HSMS)
a. The health, safety and welfare of all personnel the general public and the
avoidance of damage to property are of paramount importance to MPMRCL.
b. Prime consideration shall be given by Project Partners to ensure that all
operations are conducted in such a manner as to eliminate the risks to as low
as reasonably practicable (ALARP) to persons, property and the environment.
c. Project Partners are to implement a HSMS that complies with Indian
Regulations and the requirements of ISO 45001:2018. The HSMS shall be
self-regulating, be primarily controlled and assessed by implementing an
internal audit process, in which MPMRCL shall be invited to participate
throughout. The overall philosophy for health and safety shall embody a
positive safety culture by continual improvement of the HSMS in delivery of
MPMRCL’s Health and Safety Policy of Zero Harm. Evidence shall be
provided showing that there are regular reviews of the performance of the
HSMS and improvement actions are implemented as necessary.
d. The hierarchy of health and safety documents in the HSMS are shown below.

Package BH -03
H&S Policy
Construction H&S Standards
H&S Plan
H&S Procedures
Guidance, Forms & Work

Instructions
25.1 Health and Safety Policy

a. MPMRCL is committed to delivering excellence to its stakeholders in all of
their activities from rail asset creation through to effective and efficient asset
management, by building, operating and maintaining a world class Metro.
Project Partners shall prepare a Health and Safety Policy in line with the
expectations of MPMRCL and include commitments to:
i. Embedding a positive health and safety culture.
ii. Setting health and safety objectives and targets.
iii. Providing adequate resources, training and the appointment of
competent staff.
iv. Complying with legislation and relevant codes and standards.
v. Implementing procedures and other business controls to ensure
business requirements are achieved both for internal activities and
external project delivery.
vi. Ensuring the suitability and effectiveness of suppliers and partners
in delivering requirements of the policy.
vii. Reviewing planned activities and performance against stated
objectives.
viii. Continually improving health and safety performance.
b. The Health and Safety Policy is to be signed by the most senior management
personnel declaring that health and safety shall be their number one priority
and as a minimum the policy will be reviewed annually. The Health and Safety
Policy is to be displayed on office and site noticeboards and be communicated
to all personnel.
25.2 Construction Health & Safety Standards

Package BH -03
Construction Health & Safety Standards set the minimum health and safety
standards that are to be adopted and implemented across all MPMRCL projects in
order to meet the requirements of the MPMRCL and Safety Policy. This document
only provides an outline and overview of the obligations. The detailed and specific
health and safety requirements are described in Indian Legislation.
25.3 Health and Safety Plan
a. Health and Safety Plans are to be broken down into two levels:
i. Level 1 - Project H&S Plan – produced by the Engineer
ii. Level 2 - Construction Phase H&S Plan – produced by the Contractor
b. Project Partners are to prepare a Health and Safety Plan (HSP) covering all
activities relevant to their project. The HSP is to focus on contract-specific
arrangements for the management of health and safety on site and be
developed to include details on:
i. Leadership and commitment
ii. Organisation, responsibilities, resources, standards and
documentation
iii. Risk management and controls
iv. Planning and operational controls
v. Implementation and performance monitoring
vi. Audit and review
c. The HSP is to be specific to one Contract. Where the Contract covers multiple
sites a master HSP is to be developed with separate supplement showing
site-specific information provided for each location. The suitability of the HSP
shall be regularly reviewed (at least quarterly) and a formal review is to be
carried out annually with the findings submitted to the Engineer.
25.4 Health and Safety Procedures
a. Project Partners are to develop project procedures detailing how health and
safety will be adequately managed across their scope of works. Project
procedures are to cover the design, construction and commissioning phases
of the works where appropriate. They shall align as a minimum with any
MPMRCL project procedures.
b. Health and safety procedures shall be regularly reviewed and up-dated to
reflect changes to work practices and changes to the site environment. Copies
of proposed changes are to be submitted to Engineer for review prior to
inclusion and implementation.
25.5 Guidance, Forms and Work Instructions
a. Guidance, forms and work instructions may be needed to supplement project
procedures, where these are required, they will be managed via the same
process as project procedures.

Package BH -03
b. A number of forms and templates will be mandated for use by MPMRCL in

order to standardise information and achieve consistency of data.
c. As a minimum the following forms will be used by all Project Partners:
i. H&S Leadership Tour Report (Monthly)
ii. H&S Inspection Report (Weekly)
iii. H&S Self-Assessment Checklist (Quarterly)
iv. H&S Flash Report Form (weekly)
v. H&S Dashboard H&S Report (monthly)
vi. Welfare Evaluation Checklist
vii. Site Welfare Checklist
viii. Accident and Incident Report
ix. H&S Enforcement Notices
x. KPI Reports
26 Management of Subcontractors
a. The Contractor and subcontractors and any person authorised by the
Contractor to work be on the site shall comply in every respect with the
requirements of the health and safety management system.
b. The Contractor shall ensure that proper and adequate provisions are included
in all subcontracts placed by him and in all subcontract documentation. The
health and safety standards of the prospective subcontractors including the
provided worker accommodation is to be assessed by the Contractor and
reviewed by the Engineer prior to the placing of the subcontracts.
c. The Contractor shall employ only subcontractors who work in accordance with
the requirements set out herein.
d. Contractors are to have arrangements for monitoring subcontractor
performance.
e. At all times the contractors are required to manage their subcontractors
effectively and remains accountable for the actions of their subcontractors.
27 Drugs and Alcohol
a. It is a MPMRCL requirement to maintain a workplace free of drugs and alcohol
abuse for the safety, productivity, and overall performance of its workforce. It
is illegal to have any alcohol in the blood whilst driving; and it is illegal to enter
a place of business whilst intoxicated or under the influence of drugs.
Accordingly, zero tolerance is the standard to be adopted.
b. Personnel must not:
i. Report for work or attempt to report for work having recently
consumed alcohol

Package BH -03
ii. Report for work or attempt to report for work, in an unfit state due to
the consumption of alcohol or use of any drug
iii. Be in possession of, or supply any drug of abuse in the workplace or
whilst at work Consume any drug of abuse or alcohol in the
workplace or whilst at work.
c. It is the responsibility of each individual working on the project to ascertain
whether any drugs or medicines that they may be prescribed or otherwise
consume will materially affect the performance of their duties and report it to
their immediate line manager or supervisor. Project Partners are to have
procedures in place for monitoring the use of drugs, illegal or otherwise and
the consumption of alcohol. In certain circumstances there may be a need to
a drug and alcohol screening program to be introduced, typically this would
cover:
i. Pre-employment testing
ii. Post incident
iii. For-cause
iv. Random
d. Searches may be conducted of property, project premises, and personal
effects of employees when management considers such searches
appropriate to validate safe and efficient operations. When searches occur,
they will be conducted in accordance with the site security policy and/or in
cooperation with local law enforcement, as may be applicable. Personnel
found under to be under the influence or in possession of alcohol; drugs or
any other substance which may impair their judgement will be immediately
removed from the site and shall not be employed again.
28 Risk Assessment and Controls
28.1 Risk Assessment
a. Project Partners are to ensure ‘suitable and sufficient’ risk assessments are
carried out, recorded and briefed to relevant groups or personnel prior to the
onset of the works. For a risk assessment to be suitable and sufficient it must:
i. Establish the risks arising from the work activity
ii. Be appropriate, given the nature of the work, and such that it remains
valid for a reasonable period of time
iii. Be proportionate to the level of risk and the nature of the work
iv. Identify and prioritise the control measures required to protect the
health and safety of the employees and others who may be affected.
b. Furthermore, to be 'suitable and sufficient' each risk assessment must take
account of any factors that could change during the course of the job, thereby
introducing additional hazards or increasing the level of risk arising from
existing hazards.

Package BH -03
c. Risk assessments must be undertaken by competent persons who have

knowledge and experience of the activity being assessed and the process
must start at the design stage and continue through the construction,
operation and maintenance phases as appropriate.
d. Documentation arising from risk assessments shall contain the proposed
resolution or mitigation measures necessary to reduce these risks to as low
as reasonably practicable.
e. Project Partners are to hold risk workshops at regular intervals to identify
health and safety risks and these are to be recorded in a Risk Register.
f. The findings of risk assessments shall be incorporated and attached at the
rear of all method statements. Risk assessments shall be reviewed
periodically and at least annually. They shall also be reviewed when there
have been changes in legislation or other guidance, designs, processes,
equipment, the work environment, after an accident or where there is reason
to believe they are no longer valid.
28.2 Controls
a. Having identified the hazards, suitable controls must be implemented to
mitigate the risk.
b. Controls measures identified must be implemented in line with the following
hierarchy of control and in many cases a combination of these will be needed:
i. Elimination – remove the hazard from the workplace
ii. Substitution – substitute the item with something less hazardous
iii. Engineering controls – enclose, isolate, use ventilation, mechanical
aids, machine guards etc.
iv. Administrative controls – provision of procedures, training, signage,
permits to work etc. Personal protective equipment (PPE) – PPE is
only to be used as a last resort
29 Construction Design Management (CDM)
a. The key aim of CDM is to integrate health and safety into the management of
the project and to encourage everyone involved in the project to work
together. Project Partners are therefore required to detail what arrangements
they will have in their HSP to:
i. Improve the planning and management of the project from the very
start involving subject matter experts to ensure that risks associated
with all aspects of business, particularly in terms of hazardous
activities are properly assessed
ii. Identify hazards early on, so they can be eliminated or reduced at
the design or planning stage so that the remaining risks can be
properly managed.
iii. Collaborate and performing a HAZOP study during the design and

Package BH -03
construction phase.
iv. Target effort where it can do the most good in terms of health and
safety; and
v. Discourage unnecessary bureaucracy.
b. Project Partners are to include details of how they are going to ensure safety
is considered at all stages of the design including opportunities for
construction teams to feed into the design process throughout its lifecycle.
Where this is achieved through constructability/buildability reviews an
invitation to attend such reviews is to be extended to the Engineer. Designers
(architects, engineers, contractors etc.) carrying out design work are to be
competent and adequately resourced to address the health and safety issues
likely to be involved in the design.
c. Designers must consider health and safety risks which are inherent during the
life cycle of the construction, operations, maintenance and eventually the
demolition stages and eliminate them or reduce them to as low as possible.
d. Designers are to undertake design risk assessments and record them in a
Design Risk Register. This register is to be provided to those who will
undertake further design work and carry out the construction works.
e. Further detail of design requirements will be shown in the relevant Design
Plan and Design Checking Plan produce by the Design & Build (D&B)
Contractor.
29.1 Temporary Works
a. Temporary works procedures are to be established in accordance with BS
5975:2008 Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the
Permissible Stress Design for Falsework. The design of temporary works,
such as falsework, formwork and scaffolding, also falls within the scope of
CDM.
b. Project Partners shall take reasonable steps to ensure co-operation between
permanent and temporary works designers, in particular to ensure that
arrangements are in place to ensure that designs are compatible and that the
permanent works can support any loadings from temporary works. Project
Partners are to ensure that everything used for and in connection with the
temporary works shall be fit for the purpose, be of adequate strength, and be
in a serviceable condition and in compliance with any relevant standard.
c. Project Partners shall submit details of any temporary works proposed to the
Engineer for review before commencing the work. Such details shall include,
but not be limited to design calculations and drawings. The submission to the
Engineer of any such details shall not relieve Project Partners of their
responsibility for sufficiency of the temporary works. A design brief is to be
prepared to serve as the starting point for subsequent decisions, design work,
calculations and drawings. The brief is to include all data relevant to the
design of temporary works.

Package BH -03
d. Any person involved in the design or coordination of temporary works is to

have relevant up to date training, relevant qualifications and suitable
experience appropriate to the complexity of the works. A Temporary Works
Coordinator (TWC) is to be appointed for all temporary works. The TWC is to
be responsible for the implementation of the design in accordance with
drawings and specifications and for the day to day management and
progress.
e. Where required the TWC will issue permits in accordance with the design and
procedures, where a permit is required no works are to commence until the
permit has been issued. Temporary works are not to be altered after the TWC
has checked and passed the structure until the loading phase has been
completed and the design allows for altering or dismantling.
f. Where the TWC requires assistance one or more Temporary Works
Supervisors (TWS) should be appointed. TWS are to have relevant up to date
training and both the qualifications and experience appropriate to the
complexity works similar to the TWC.
g. A method statement and permit to work is required for all temporary works
which shall be approved by independent engineer.
30 Lone Working
a. Lone working is when someone is working by themselves without close or
direct supervision. Project Partners are to avoid lone working wherever
possible. Where lone working cannot be avoided Project Partners are to have
a Lone Working Procedure that addresses the following as a minimum:
i. Specific risk assessment for the task
ii. Identify how the task is adequately controlled
iii. How individuals are supervised
iv. What additional training is required
v. What happens if the person becomes ill, has an accident or there is
an emergency
vi. Arrangements for regular communications and what is action is
carried out if the person at works does not call in or respond to calls.
31 Method Statements and Task Briefings
31.1 Method Statements
a. Method statements are an effective and practical management tool that will
be used to address health, safety and environmental issues involved in
carrying out the works. Method statements shall be logical construction
guides designed for use on site.
b. They shall contain a detailed risk assessment covering the task or operation;
a hazard analysis and methods for preventing injury, including engineering
controls and personal protective equipment.

Package BH -03
c. The technical scope of method statements is to be defined and approved and

given approval by the Engineer.
d. Method statements are to include drawings, calculations, standard operating
procedures and/or safe work instructions for equipment and processes where
necessary.
e. Where a method statement is required, no work is to commence without a
method statement being in place.
f. Project Partners are to develop a Method Statement Schedule to ensure
method statements are prepared in sufficient time to allow a review before the
proposed programmed start date; in general, a minimum review period of 14
days is to be allowed.
g. Method statements are to be dynamic documents and must be modified and
updated to address the ever-changing situation that occurs on site. Once the
work commences method statements are to be reviewed for their validity to
ensure the content accurately reflects the work being carried out, where
method of work differ the method statement is to be modified.
h. Significant changes to method statement are not to be implemented unless
they have been re-submitted for review by the Engineer.
i. The contents of method statements are to be briefed out to those personnel
responsible for the works and a copy kept on site at all times.
j. Where subcontractors and sub consultants are involved in the works, they are
to submit method statements and include risk assessment in accordance with
the above requirements.
k. Before the commencement of major works, a readiness review workshop is
to be held where the Contractor will be required to present and discuss key
issues with the Engineer.
31.2 Task Briefings/Safety Task Analysis Risk Reduction Talk (STARRT)
a. Task briefings/STARRT is to be used to support method statements and be
briefed by the work supervisor to the workforce before the start of each day
or new activity.
b. Supervisors are to discuss the hazards and controls associated with the task
or activity as well as other information such as emergency arrangements,
provision of welfare facilities, additional documentation, checks etc.
c. Task briefings/STARRT is to be given in the native language of the workers
and signed/acknowledged by all stating they have received and understood
the briefing.
d. Where necessary the supervisor is to stop the activity and re-brief workers
when controls are not being correctly implemented, when there is a change
in the previously briefed work methodology or where new hazards have been
identified.
e. A copy of the signed task briefing/STARRT is to be kept on site whilst the

Package BH -03
work is on-going and then returned to the Health and Safety Department.
Management are to randomly attend task briefings and undertake regular
checks of the documentation to ensure the process is being correctly
implemented.
f. Where work is not being carried out in accordance with the task
briefing/STARRT the work is to be stopped and workers re-briefed.
32 Competency and Training
32.1 Competency
Project Partners are to ensure they have processes and procedures in place to
ensure that everyone is competent for the role they are to fulfil, further details are
shown below.
32.1.1 Managers, Designers, Engineers and Supervisors
a. Managers, designers, engineers and supervisors are to hold qualifications
relevant to their discipline from an internationally accredited institution and
have appropriate experience for the role they are to fulfil. They are to fully
understand the health and safety requirements for the Contract and capable
of developing health and safety plans and procedures for construction.
b. Managers, designers, engineers and supervisors are to be able to read, write
and speak the language of those they are managing or supervising.
32.1.2 Health and Safety Staff
a. Project Partners are to provide an organisational chart showing the key
personnel who have responsibility for health and safety. Nominated health
and safety staff are to meet the Legal requirements and be appointed.
b. Managers shall have a minimum of 10 years and supervisors a minimum of 2
years relevant experience in the construction industry.
c. Project Partners are to ensure that their health and safety staff is provided
with the necessary authority to suspend any work where there is imminent
danger of an accident or injury.
d. Health and Safety Officers shall have no other duties, either on-site or off-site,
other than health and safety duties, and shall be exclusive to one site.
e. Project Partners shall ensure that each and every subcontractor employed on
the worksite appoints suitably qualified health and safety staff to ensure the
effective function of the health and safety discipline within the subcontractor’s
organisation.
32.1.3 Plant Operators and Drivers
Plant operators and drivers are to be in possession of a valid Indian driving license
and competence certificate issued by a third-party organisation for the category of
plant or vehicles being operated.
32.1.4 Operatives/Workers

Package BH -03
a. All operatives are to be competent for the role they are to fulfil. Specific
qualifications will be required for certain trades and job disciplines such as
electricians, welders, scaffolders, users of machinery and power tools,
working in confines spaces, first aiders etc. Where there is any doubt of
required competencies guidance is to be sought from the Engineer.
b. Evidence of competency is to be provided by certificate of competence held
in personnel files, by carrying competency cards and/or name displayed on
notice boards in the immediate work areas.
c. Project Partners are not to employ or request personnel to do work and
employees are not to carry out work if they do not hold the necessary
competencies to carry out the job.
32.2 Training
32.2.1 General Requirements
a. Training is fundamental in ensuring that each employee receives instructions
regarding work hazards and the corresponding controls to mitigate the
hazards. Project Partners are to develop a Training Matrix based on a
Training Needs Analysis of their workforce. The matrix is to detail positions
such as managers, supervisors, workers etc. and what courses are required
by each position and be submitted to the Engineer for review.
b. All training is to be conducted in the native language of the worker or be
suitably translated.
c. In order to confirm the effectiveness of any training, proof of learning is to be
conducted (practical or theory) after each course. To ensure training is
effective it is to be validated by monitoring and undertaking assessments on
site. As necessary, training content and methods of delivery are to be
modified to ensure it is effective and adds value. The Engineer has the right
to request the training records at any time in order to verify the effectiveness
of the health and safety inductions and the overall training programme.
32.2.2 Induction Training
a. Health and safety induction training must be delivered to all personnel before
starting work on site and refresher induction training at 12-month intervals.
The contents of the health and safety induction are to be submitted to the
Engineer for review.
b. Short term visitors are to be given an abridged version of the health and safety
induction and be escorted at all times whilst on site by a nominated member
of the Project Partners management team.
32.2.3 H&S Leadership Training
a. H&S leadership training shall be conducted for all managers who are working
on the project, inclusive of all subcontractors’ managers.
b. Content of H&S leadership training is to be agreed by the Engineer.
32.2.4 Safety for Supervisors Training

Package BH -03
a. Safety for supervisors training shall be conducted for all supervisors, including
subcontractor(s) supervisors.
b. Content of safety supervisors training is to be agreed by the Engineer.
32.2.5 Specialised Training
a. Specialised training designed to address specific health and safety
requirements will be required to be provided as necessary. Specialised
training would include but not be limited to:
i. Risk assessment
ii. Accident investigation
iii. Working in confined spaces (supervisory and man entry)
iv. Lifting operations
v. Banksmen
vi. Scaffolding
vii. Use of and changing abrasive wheels
viii. Operation of machinery such as drills, lathes, circular saws,
portable power tools, etc.
ix. Emergency preparedness and response
x. First aid, etc.
b. In general, specialised training is only to be undertaken by a competent third-
party organisation unless it can be proven that the in-house provider has the
necessary competencies. Specialised training being carried out in-house is to
be reviewed by the Engineer prior to implementation.
32.2.6 Tool Box Talks
a. Project Partners shall ensure that regular tool box talk is given to the
workforce (in general at least every 7 days). Tool box talks are to be short
duration and focus on just one topic to update/remind or inform staff and
workers about key health and safety messages.
b. Toolbox talks must be relevant and appropriate to the audience and given in
the workers language.
c. An attendance sheet is to be signed by all participants and a copy of the most
current tool box talk posted on the site noticeboard.
32.2.7 Training Records
Records of training and assessment including tool box talks are to be maintained
for review and audit. The monthly H&S Report is to include information on courses
and number of training hours completed during the reporting period.
33 Communication and Consultation
33.1 Communication

Package BH -03
a. Good health and safety rely on good written and oral communications. It is
even more important on the project where there is a multitude of different
nationalities and languages across individual workforces and projects as a
whole.
b. Because of the different levels of understanding and languages present,
Project Partners are to make every effort to communicate in the native
language of their workers. Communication across the project will be achieved
by a multitude of different mediums including:
i. Project progress meetings
ii. Health and safety meetings and forums
iii. Inductions and training
iv. Tool box talks and briefings
v. Display of information on notice boards
vi. Alerts, notices, posters etc.
c. A record of important communications is to be retained.
d. In addition to regular meetings, arrangements are to be in place to ensure
staff and workers have the opportunity to:
i. Be involved in the development and review of policies and
procedures and provide feedback on operational performance to
management
ii. Be consulted on changes that affect health and safety in their
workplace.
e. Receive information regarding:
i. Findings of inspections and audits
ii. Best practice
iii. New or additional hazards
iv. Accident investigation findings and corrective actions
v. Lessons learnt
33.2 Consultation
a. Project Partners have a duty to consult all their employees on matters of
health and safety. Consultation must involve two-way communication.
b. Passing relevant health and safety information to their employees and,
conversely, seeking and encouraging the opinions and views of employees
where appropriate.
c. Effective consultation is essential in highlighting potential problem areas,
finding solutions and therefore maintaining a healthy and safe place of work.
33.3 Third Party Consultation

Package BH -03
a. Project Partners will appoint a Stakeholder Manager and are to have

arrangements in place to address interface issues with other stakeholders and
third parties to ensure that all requirements are discussed, hazards eliminated
or controlled and that disruptions are minimised.
b. Where work is likely to affect or cause nuisance to local residents/public,
information is to be made available informing them of the nature of the works,
expected timescales and contact numbers in case of complaints.
33.4 Safety stand-down meeting
Project Partners will address the workforce after a major incident or fatality on site.
Top management should address and discuss lessons learned during the meeting
and encourage feed-back from the work force.
34 Health and Safety Meetings
a. Health and Safety Meetings are to be established to review performance and
to monitor the implementation of the health and safety policy, plans and
procedures; a senior manager is to chair health and safety meetings. Where
subcontractors are employed, a representative from the company must be in
attendance at all health and safety meetings.
b. A representative from Engineer may attend and observe health and safety
meetings.
c. Minutes of all meetings are to be produced and retained by the organisation
responsible for the meeting. In addition to planned health and safety
meetings, health and safety in general is to be the first agenda item for all
meetings. The minimum requirements including the type and frequency of
meetings and expected attendees shall be as per the instructions of the
Engineer/ Employer.
34.1 Health and Safety Committee
Project Partners are to have arrangements in place to consult with their workforce
on health and safety matters by establishing a Health and Safety Committee that
meets monthly and discusses recent and upcoming issues. Health and safety
committees shall have representation from both management and labour and as a
minimum there should be one representative from each department and are to be
chaired by a senior manager who has authority to implement actions arising from
meetings. As a minimum Health and Safety Committees are to meet monthly, have
a set agenda and produce and retain minutes of each meeting
34.2 H&S Leadership Forum
A H&S Leadership Forum will be established to provide strategic direction and
leadership, review performance and authorise H&S initiatives across the project.
The H&S Leadership Forum will consist of Project Directors from MPMRCL, the
Engineer and the Contractors and will meet as a minimum on a monthly basis.
35 Reporting & Statistics
Project Partners are to develop reporting arrangements in consultation with

Package BH -03
Engineer covering including submission of a H&S Flash Report, H&S Report and
Dashboard. The frequency and timescales of these reports will be in accordance
with Engineer’s requirements.
35.1 Weekly H&S Flash Report
a. A weekly H&S Flash Report is to be submitted by the Contractor no later than
08.00 every Sunday morning to Engineer. The format and content of this
report will be agreed between parties and may alter depending on
circumstances and needs. As a minimum the following will be reported:
i. Number of accidents, incidents and near misses reported in the week
ii. Number of hours worked (staff and labour) on the project Number of
staff and labour employed on the project
iii. Any achievements or concerns
35.2 Monthly Health and Safety Report
a. Contractors are to submit a monthly Health and Safety Report to the Engineer
by no later than the second day of each month (note some projects may have
differing submission date). The format and content of this report will be agreed
between parties but in general shall comprehensively address all relevant
aspects of health and safety and shall contain certain information and data as
directed by Engineer, for statistical analysis.
b. As a minimum the following is to be reported:
i. General overview
ii. Critical issues
iii. Accidents, incidents and near misses
iv. Numbers and types of health and safety inspections and audits
v. Achievements and accomplishments Health and safety data and
statistics
c. The Engineer will review and validate the contractor’s health and safety report
and submit to MPMRCL along with their own prepared health and safety
report by no later than the fifth day of each month.
35.3 H&S Dashboard
Each month statistical data is to be entered into a H&S Dashboard and be issued
by the Contractor to the Engineer.
36 Health and Safety Culture, Award and Recognition Schemes and Initiatives
36.1 Health and Safety Culture
a. Establishing a positive health and safety culture where all personnel can
contribute and ensure everyone goes home safely at the end of each day is
essential if good safety performance is to be achieved. Project Partners shall
develop a strategy to implement Zero Harm and continually improve the

Package BH -03
health and safety culture across their workforce.

b. Key factors in establishing and maintaining a health and safety culture
includes:
i. Strong, visible commitment for health and safety at all levels
ii. Good health and safety are treated as an investment not a cost,
Health and safety is part of continuous improvement
iii. Training and information are provided for everyone
iv. A system for workplace analysis and hazard prevention and control
is in place
v. Promotion of health and safety standards and procedures
vi. The organisation celebrates success.
36.2 Health and Safety Awards and Recognition Schemes
The establishment of a good health and safety culture and the achievement of good
health and safety performance are reasons to celebrate. Project Partners are to
develop a health and safety award and recognition scheme that will be implemented
across their Contract to recognise and reward contributions in keeping their
personnel safe and free from injury or ill health. A number of different types of
awards and recognition schemes may be introduced but it is expected that as a
minimum a monthly award ceremony be held where a senior manager discusses
achievements and awards are presented as applicable.
36.3 Health and Safety initiative
a. Consistent with developing a good health and safety culture is continual
improvement.
b. Project Partners are expected to have a programme of health and safety
initiatives and campaigns that will increase their workforce’s knowledge and
understanding of health and safety issues, address areas of poor
performance and strive for continual improvement.
37 Monitoring, Inspections and Audits
37.1 Monitoring
Project Partner’s management, supervisors, engineers and health and safety staff
are to carry out daily monitoring and observations of the workplace as they pass
through and record positive and negative observations as applicable. Supervisors
have a key responsibility for the health and safety of workers under their control and
are to continually assess and be constantly on the lookout for any hazard that might
arise in the work areas and take action where necessary. Supervisors should
ensure that workers are carrying out pre-operational checks and are alert for any
unsafe conditions and actions.
37.2 Inspections (Surveillances)
a. Project Partners are to develop a schedule of regular Inspections across all

Package BH -03
sites to assess compliance with legislation, conformance to health and safety

requirements and identify safe/unsafe acts, conditions and behaviours.
Health and safety inspections are to be recorded in an agreed format with
copies of the reports issued to the Engineer. Inspections carried out by the
Engineer will be copied to the relevant contractor as a minimum.
b. Results are to be analysed on a monthly basis to identify positive and any
negative trends. Where negative trends are identified. Improvement Plans are
to be developed to prevent recurrences.
37.3 Audits and Assessments
a. Project Partners shall develop an audit/assessment schedule to assess
compliance with legislation, conformance to health and safety standards and
to identify corrective and preventive actions. As a minimum, Contractors shall
conduct monthly internal health and safety audits on their health and safety
management system and the physical site conditions. Additionally, a
comprehensive H&S Self-Assessment shall be conducted across all sites
every 3 months and submitted to the Engineer. The Engineer is to be advised
in advance of all audits and assessments to be performed in order to have
the opportunity to attend and evaluate the thoroughness of the audit or
assessment.
b. The Engineer will conduct their own health and safety audits or assessments
to confirm the effectiveness of the contractor’s health and safety management
system. Corrective actions resulting from audits and assessments are to be
addressed holistically across the site and must be tracked until they are
closed. Those that remain open past their deadline date are to be recorded in
the monthly H&S Report.
37.4 H&S Leadership Tours
a. The Project Directors from the Engineer and Project Partners will undertake
a H&S Leadership Tours as a minimum every month. The aim of the H&S
Leadership Tour is for the Project Directors to engage with the workforce and
visibly demonstrate their commitment to H&S by visiting work sites to promote
the importance of H&S and to gain further insight into the H&S issues being
managed. To make the workplaces safer and more environmentally
sustainable through:
i. Accepting personal accountability for H&S management
ii. Recognising each individual’s ability to effect positive change in the
workplace, community and the environment
iii. Rewarding behaviours that enhance the safety and well-being of the
workplace, community and environment
iv. Accepting that everyone is empowered to stop work if it is unsafe
b. H&S Leadership Tours are to be recorded on a standardised template and
copies of the reports are to be issued to the Engineer, any findings are to be
followed up by the visiting Project Director(s).

Package BH -03
37.5 Statutory Inspection

a. Statutory inspection of plant and equipment will be carried out in accordance
with international best practice and local standards. Test and examinations
are to be carried out by a certified company and copies of certificates of
thorough test and examination to be held on site and available for inspection
at all times. In addition to the requirements for statutory inspections the
following equipment will be inspected by a competent person every three
months and marked with a colour code agreed by the Engineer:
i. All plant, equipment and machinery
ii. All lifting equipment and accessories such as cranes, lorry loaders,
MEWP, jacks, slings, chains, shackles etc.
iii. All vehicles (light and heavy)
iv. All electrical equipment such as distribution panels, cables, power
tools, electrical plugs etc.
v. All fire protection equipment such as fire extinguishers and hoses
vi. All fall protection equipment such as safety harnesses, lifelines etc.
vii. All portable ladders
a. A record of inspections by the competent person is to be maintained in the
main project offices. Plant and equipment that does not display the correct
colour-code is to be removed from service until such time that it has been
inspected and correctly marked.
38 Health and Safety Enforcement
a. Project Partners are to have enforcement and disciplinary procedures in place
that address non-compliance or wilful disregard to health and safety
standards. A register shall be kept on site of all issued improvement and
prohibition notices. Failure to manage health and safety matters effectively
will result in enforcement action being taken. Enforcement action will include
verbal and formal warnings and the issuances of Improvement and Prohibition
Notices as shown below.
Verbal Warning Breach of health and safety requirements that

does not pose a risk to personnel or property
Failure to action verbal warning

Written Warning
After 2 verbal warnings on same topic
Improvement Notice Contravention of health and safety requirements

that poses a risk
Imminent risk to personnel or environment

Prohibition Notice
Failure to address Improvement Notice

Package BH -03
Figure 1 Enforcement Action

b. The Engineer is responsible for issuing the following enforcement action.
i. Verbal warnings will be issued at the work site and recorded where
there a breach of health and safety is identified but it does not pose a
risk to personnel or property. Warning letters will be issued for failure
to take timely corrective action when issued with a verbal warning and
after two verbal warnings have been issued on the same topic.
ii. Improvement Notices will be issued if in the opinion of the issuer that
there has been a contravention of one or more contractual
requirements relating to health and safety or there is a failure to
address the requirements of a written warning.
iii. An Improvement Notice will require the responsible person
(organisation or individual) to take the necessary action or remedy the
contravention within a specified period of time. Failure to address the
requirements of an Improvement Notice will result in the issuing of a
Prohibition Notice.
iv. Prohibition Notices will be issued where there is an immediate or
imminent risk to the health and safety of personnel. On receipt of a
Prohibition Notice the receiver (organisation or individual) must stop
the work activity immediately and work shall not commence until
remedial actions have been taken to prevent a recurrence and these
have been signed off by the issuer or their designee.
c. The issue of a Prohibition Notice will prompt a review by the Engineer of the
organisation’s health, safety performance in order to identify deficiencies.
Organisations that receive more than one Prohibition Notice in any 6-month
period may be subject to further disciplinary action.
d. Personnel authorised to issue enforcement action will be nominated by the
Engineer Project Director.
e. Serious or repeated breaches of the health and safety responsibilities or
requirements, or other disregard for the health and safety of any person are
reasons for the removal from the site and will be prohibited from working on
other projects.
f. Where an activity poses a hazard to the safety of personnel or property;
activities shall be suspended. The suspension shall continue until the
Engineer is satisfied that corrective action has been taken to eliminate the
hazard that was the subject of the suspension.
39 Accident, Incident and Near Miss Reporting and Investigation
39.1 General
a. All accidents and incidents, dangerous occurrences, diseases and near
misses will be reported and investigated.
b. Accidents and incidents are classified and summarised in the Figure below.

Package BH -03
Minor (Level 1) Significant (Level 2) Major (Level 3) Fatal (Level 4)
Lost Time Incident {LTI}

Near Miss
(between 1 - 3 days)
Major Incident
No Treatment Dangerous Occurence Multiple Fatalites
First Aid Occupational Disease

LTI > 3 days
Medical Treatment Violence at Work
Property Damage Third Party Hospital Fatality

Major Pollution
Minor Pollution Significant Pollution
Figure 2 Accidents and Incidents Classification

39.2 Process
The following process will be followed in the event of an accident or incident
occurring.
Accident Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

or Incident •Emergency •Notify •Investigate •Report
Occurs Response
Figure 3: Process in Case of Accident or Incident

39.2.1 Step 1 - Emergency Response
a. Immediately after an accident or incident the following response is to be
implemented:
i. Call the emergency services if required
ii. Make the area safe and secure the scene of the incident Provide first
aid treatment Identify potential witnesses and take statements
iii. Take photos of the scene
iv. Preserve relevant evidence such as plant, equipment, tools, work
documents etc.
b. Where a person is taken to hospital for treatment the organisation of the
injured person must implement a process of case management. Case
management requires that personnel who go to hospital after being injured
are to be accompanied by a member of the employees’ organisation. This
person is responsible for ensuring the injured person receives prompt medical
treatment and is able to provide timely information back to management as to
the condition of the person under treatment.
39.2.2 Step 2 – Notification
a. All accidents and incidents must be notified to the Engineer as soon as

Package BH -03
possible and no later than 60 minutes after the accident or incident.

b. As a minimum the following information is to be reported:
i. Company/Project
ii. Time and Date Location
iii. A brief summary of the incident
iv. Name of any injured persons
v. Immediate actions taken to prevent a reoccurrence
c. Project Partners are to have arrangements in place to ensure reports are
escalated to senior management as appropriate. Escalation will be dependent
upon the seriousness of the accident or incident.
d. Where an accident results in a fatality the Police are to be notified
immediately.
e. The scene of the accident must be cordoned off, preserved and not interfered
with until the Police have arrived and taken control of the scene.
f. Project Partners are to have suitable arrangements in place to notify and
provide regular updates to next of kin in the event of a serious injury or fatality
occurring.
39.2.3 Step 3 – Investigation
a. The aim of any investigation is to identify how a similar accidents and
incidents can be prevented in the future by identifying the critical factors/root
cause of the accident or incident. Critical factors/route causes are identified
during the investigation phase by identifying the immediate and system
causes.
b. Investigations are to be carried out as soon as possible after the event so as
to allow the maximum amount of information to be obtained without it being
corrupted by time or other influences. The level of investigation is dependent
upon the severity or the potential severity of the accident or incident, as
previously defined.
c. Personnel responsible for investigating accidents and incidents are to have
been trained and be competent for the role they are to perform.
39.2.4 Step 4 – Reporting
a. An Initial Report is to be provided within 24 hours for all accidents and
incidents.
b. Investigation Reports are to be issued in line with the following requirements:
i. Minor (Level 1) – within 24 hours
ii. Significant, Major or Fatality (Level 2, 3 and 4) – within 7 days
c. Evidence found to be relevant to the investigation is to be submitted and along
with the investigation report.

Package BH -03
d. All investigation reports will be reviewed by the Engineer. Where the causes
of the accident/incident are not adequately identified or the actions or
recommendations from the investigation do not address the causes, the
report will be rejected and further investigation and submission will be
required.
e. The Engineer will hold an event review for all major and fatal accidents and
incidents.
f. Corrective actions are to be tracked and closed out in an agreed timescale.
39.2.5 Near Miss Reporting
a. A near miss is unplanned events that did not result in injury, illness or damage
but under other circumstances had the potential to do so. Other familiar terms
for these events are close call, near hit, narrow escape or a near collision.
b. Project Partners are to have a procedure for the reporting of near misses.
They are to encourage and educate their workforce on the importance of
reporting near misses and the fact that the reporting of near misses is viewed
as a positive action not negative and that no punitive action will be taken
against those who report near misses.
c. All near misses are to be reported as soon as possible but no later than 72
hours after then event.
d. Near misses are to be investigated in line with their potential severity and
remedial actions taken to avoid an actual accident or incident occurring.
40 Operational Controls
40.1 First Aid Provisions
a. Project Partners are to provide first aid provisions in accordance with Indian
Law.
b. First aid provisions are to include a sufficient number of trained personnel,
who are suitably trained, and certificated and first aid boxes and facilities
appropriate to the type of work being undertaken. The minimum first aid and
medical provisions are shown in the table below.

Package BH -03
Table 2: Minimum First Aid and Medical Provisions
Resource Number Requirement per shift
First Aid Boxes 1 Every group of 5 – 25 people
First Aiders 1 Every 50 people
Nurse & First Aid Room 1 Above 100 people
Doctor & Clinic 1 Above 500 people
c. First aiders are to be identifiable on site by a sticker on their safety helmet,

first aider on rear of hi-visibility vest or similar. Personnel are to be informed
of the first-aid arrangements, including the location of equipment and
personnel.
d. Arrangements for transporting injured persons to hospital are to be provided.
e. First aid rooms and clinics are to be hygienic, clean and well maintained, have
suitable ventilation, toilet facilities, hot and cold running water, air
conditioning, heating and be well lit. First aid rooms and clinics should be
noticeable and accessible by ambulance from the nearest site access road.
Easy wheelchair and stretcher access are advised. They are to have
emergency, medical equipment and sufficient medical consumables to treat
expected injuries and have a means of communication mobile phone/radio.
Emergency response equipment shall be checked before each shift and
medical equipment shall be maintained and calibrated as a minimum
annually.
f. All clinics are subjected to inspection and licensing by the relevant medical
authorities. All medical practitioners (site doctors/nurses or emergency
response technicians) shall hold a valid license.
g. Facilities and medical licenses shall be displayed in the clinic/first aid room.
Onsite medical services are to be made available to all site staff and workers
including MPMRCL and the Engineer’s staff, joint venture partners and
subcontractors.
h. Eye wash stations are to be provided in work areas and high-risk areas such
as workshops, battery charging, refuelling locations are to have facilities to
wash/douse parts of the body to removed harmful substances.
i. A register of all persons receiving first aid treatment is to be maintained.
j. Where treatment is the cause of a work-related accident or incident it must
also be reported to the Engineer.
40.2 Medical Requirements
a. Medical provisions are to be provided in accordance with Indian Law.
b. Project Partners are to ensure an initial baseline health assessment is

Package BH -03
conducted for all employees before mobilisation to site, to ensure their fitness
for work. An initial baseline medical is not equivalent to the test performed by
the medical commissioning, and can be performed by the site nurse or doctor.
An initial baseline medical shall include as a minimum, occupational health
and medical history questionnaire, blood pressure measurement, blood
glucose test and physical examination. Employees with abnormal parameters
shall be referred for further evaluation.
c. Subsequent health assessments are to be carried out at a frequency not
exceeding 24 months and more frequently for at risk or vulnerable employees.
In addition to regular health assessments for employees working with
hazardous chemical or who have been exposed to an occupational disease
such as noise induced hearing loss, hand arm vibration, respiratory injuries
etc. shall be carried out.
d. All assessments are to be carried out by a certified licensed doctor or nurse.
Contractors are to provide the following medical provisions:
i. Medicines to treat an illness or prevent the condition worsening
ii. Immunisation against infectious diseases Undertaking laboratory
analysis and x-rays as required
iii. Supervising and monitor the quality of the food and water provided
to employees
iv. Provide information, instruction and training on health awareness
v. Maternity care for female workers during the pregnancy period
e. Workers unfit for work or who have contracted an infectious disease are
prohibited from attending work and all instances of infectious diseases are to
be reported to the Engineer within 3 working days of the diagnosis.
f. Employees who have seen an off-site medical professional because of a
work-related injury or illness are to obtain a Return to Work authorisation
before returning to work and shall report to the site medical staff prior to
resuming duties. Site medical staff shall keep complete and accurate patient
records on site for any employees diagnosed with a chronic illness, sustained
an injury on duty or suffer from an occupational illness.
g. Medical records (including initial health assessment) are to be kept for each
employee, these records are to be kept as ‘confidential’; and may only be
viewed by medical professionals, and the individual upon request.
h. Project Partners shall develop a pandemic plan as and when required and
give consideration to isolation, transportation of infectious cases and
business continuity in case of an outbreak.
40.3 Emergency Preparedness
a. Contractors are to establish and implement an Emergency Preparedness and
Response Plan (EPRP) covering their sphere of operations. The EPRP is to
be developed using a template produced by the Engineer and be reviewed

Package BH -03
and approved by the Engineer.

i. The main objectives of the EPRP are to:
ii. To maintain a high level of preparedness
iii. To protect emergency responders, personnel and the community from
harm
iv. Prevent escalation of the emergency and minimise the consequences
v. Ensure assistance is provided as quickly as possible to those persons
affected by any incident or emergency
vi. Effectively manage and control any emergency
vii. Support emergency services with information, knowledge, skills and
equipment
viii. Provide relevant emergency training so that a high level of emergency
preparedness can be constantly maintained
ix. Ensure that vital information is communicated to relevant stakeholders
as soon as possible
x. Preservation of information and support any investigation
xi. Facilitate the efficient restoration so that normal operations can be
resumed
b. The EPRP is to identify the types of potential emergencies that may be
encountered during the construction phase of the works both for surface and
sub-surface emergencies and the relevant emergency response procedures
to be implemented in the event of an emergency.
c. The EPRP is to identify emergency resources including people, equipment,
facilities and materials. The type and scale of resources is to be consistent
with the potential emergencies envisaged, the location and scope of site
facilities and the competency and availability of external emergency services.
d. The contents of the EPRP must be clearly communicated to all personnel.
Personnel appointed to manage, supervise and react to emergency situations
are to undergo specific training to ensure they are competent and fully
understand their roles and responsibilities.
e. The EPRP is to include the arrangements for raising the alarm and
communicating with the emergency services and how information will be
passed between interested parties. Contractors are to liaise closely with the
emergency services to ensure that they are aware of site activities and the
potential risks involved. Joint training and drills will be conducted as agreed
between parties.
f. In the event of an emergency, information shall not be released to the media
or external agencies from within the Project without the express authorisation
from MPMRCL.

Package BH -03
g. Emergency exercises and drills are to be held as follows:

i. At least every 6 months for offices
ii. At least every 3 months for sites
iii. At least monthly for underground works
h. Records of exercises and drills are to be maintained and kept on site.
i. A post incident report is to be submitted to the Engineer providing details of
the incident and identifying any lessons learnt.
40.4 Fire
a. Contractors are to take undertake a fire risk assessment and take all
necessary precautions against fire as required by legislation and relevant
standards.
b. Emergency plans are to provide the arrangements and action to take in the
event of a fire.
c. Adequate firefighting equipment shall be provided and checked.
d. Fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas will be provided for all enclosed
temporary structures and permanent structures under construction. All such
areas will be kept free from obstructions at all times. Wherever possible in
permanent structures under construction the fire escape routes, exits and
assembly areas used will be those designed for use in the occupied structure.
Temporary fire protection equipment for the worksite including tunnels will be
provided for the duration of the contract.
e. Such equipment will be inspected and maintained in a serviceable condition
and will include but is not limited to:
i. Portable fire extinguishers
ii. Fire sand buckets
iii. Fire water storage and distribution systems (tanks, pumps, hoses
etc.)
iv. Fire suppression systems (i.e., automatic suppression systems)
v. Fire/smoke/gas detection systems
vi. Fire warning/alarm/emergency evacuation systems
vii. Emergency telephones/radios
viii. Emergency lighting
ix. Adequate and safe emergency exits
x. Warning signs and notices
xi. Assembly points
f. Portable fire extinguishers are to be provided as a minimum at the following
locations:

Package BH -03
i. Inside offices and stores

ii. Inside accommodation units, kitchens, dining rooms etc.
iii. At every electrical generator, transformer and main distribution
panel
iv. Inside or close to every piece of mobile plant and equipment
v. On locomotives
vi. Along the length of tunnels at pre-set distances/locations
vii. All locations where flammable materials are in use or being stored
viii. Where hot works is being carried out
ix. At designated smoking areas
g. Smoking on site and inside offices, temporary accommodation units, stores
etc. is prohibited. Designated smoking areas are to be set up outside of
buildings and in safe areas clear of any flammable or combustible materials.
Smoking areas will be cleaned on a daily basis and a suitable means of
extinguishing cigarettes is to be provided. Quantities of flammable materials
on site and particularly in work areas shall be kept to an absolute minimum
and shall be properly handled and stored.
h. Only approved containers, cans or portable tanks will be used for the storage
and handling of flammable liquids.
i. Flammable materials are to be stored in designated storage areas that are
located at least 20m away from other structures and areas where combustible
materials are stored.
j. Storage areas are to be freely ventilated to eliminate any possible build-up of
flammable vapour or gas and tanks and containers are to be located in
bunded areas capable of containing any spillage or leak.
k. Static, portable and mobile plant and equipment is not to be refuelled with the
engine running.
l. Fires and open type heating devices are prohibited on all sites and work
areas.
m. All hot works and welding operations will be carried out under a permit to work
system.
n. The following controls will be put in place:
i. All work activity will be coordinated with other activities in the area
ii. Work areas are to be cleared of all combustible and flammable
materials
iii. Fire blanket/fire retardant material will be used to cover any
combustible materials that cannot be cleared
iv. Fire extinguishers must be at the work area at all times

Package BH -03
v. A fire watch will remain in the work area of hot work activity for 30
minutes after work is completed
o. Regular inspections and monitoring of work sites, structures, accommodation
units is to be carried out to ensure that fire protection arrangements are
sufficient and being implemented. Firefighting equipment is to be checked
monthly by a competent person and tested in accordance with manufacturers
requirements.
p. As a minimum every 6 months and fire drill is to be carried out and recorded.
High risk areas such as tunnels will require more frequent drills.
q. Fire prevention training will be given to all employees; training will cover as a
minimum:
i. Significant finding of the fire risk assessment
ii. The measures taken to reduce the risk
iii. What personnel should do in the event of a fire
iv. The identity of people who are responsible for fire safety
v. Any special arrangements for serious or imminent danger to
persons from fire
r. Additional training will be required for those who are nominated as fire
wardens, fire fighters, responsible for checking firefighting equipment etc.
Further information on controls to prevent fires is covered in other sections of
this document. Separate specific fire precautions and procedures will be
developed by contractors who are working in tunnels or fitting out sub-surface
stations and facilities.
40.5 Compressed Gas Cylinders
a. Both full and empty cylinders must be stored in a secure compound that
provides protection from the elements, outside and clear of any buildings or
structures. They must be stored with their valves uppermost and have a cover
fitted on the valve.
b. Oxygen, LPG and acetylene cylinders are not to be stored together within 3m
of each other unless separated by a fire-resistant structure.
c. Gas cylinders are not to be stored below ground level or near to drains or
basements.
d. The type of gas is to be clearly marked on cylinders; they are to be secured
upright around the body using chains or other suitable material when being
stored or transported and when being used.
e. Securing gas cylinders around the neck or cap is prohibited. Gas cylinders
are not to be transported with regulators, gauges and hoses attached.
f. Cylinders will only be lifted in racks or in specially designed containers.
Cylinders are not to be lifted using the valve cap or by means of a magnet,
rope of chain slings.

Package BH -03
g. Gas cylinders are not to be placed where they may become part of any
electrical circuit and they are to be protected from extreme heat and from
being struck by moving equipment.
h. Non-return valves are to be provided at each blowpipe inlet connection and
as a minimum a flame or flashback arrestors is to be fitted at the pressure
regulator outlet valve. Valves are to be closed at all times when the cylinder
is not in use.
i. Torches will be ignited by friction lighters or other approved devices only.
j. Before starting work, cylinders, hoses and connections are to be checked
before use. Damaged or defective hoses or hose assemblies should only be
replaced or repaired by a competent person.
k. Oxygen cylinders are to be prevented for coming into contact or being
contaminated with oils and greases.
l. Arrangements must be put in place to control the risk of cylinder explosion in
the event of a regulators and for long lengths of hose flashback arrestors are
to be fitted on both the torch and the regulator. Fume extraction equipment or
the use of a filtered respirator is to be used where there is a risk from welding
fumes.
m. Gas torches are to be ignited by friction lighters or other approved devices
only.
n. When arc welding, welders must wear suitable eye protection that protects
against intense ultraviolet and infrared rays. In addition, personnel working in
close proximity must be protected from arc radiation by the use of screens,
shields or similar. Electrode holders are to have a fully insulated handle fitted
with a shield or barrier to prevent contact with the electrode or live parts of the
holder. Electrode holders are to be unplugged when not in use.
o. Welding leads are to be insulated, kept in good condition and protected from
damage.
p. Welding equipment is to be inspected before use and every 3 months by a
competent person.
q. A ‘hot works’ permit is to be issued for all cutting and welding operations.
40.6 Welding
Welding is only to be undertaken by certified persons who have been trained in the
type of welding to be carried out. Welders are to wear suitable personal protective
equipment such as gauntlets, welding aprons, welding face-shield, goggles or
glasses. Suitable precautions such as ensuring the welding area is free of
flammable and combustible materials are to be taken to prevent fires during all
welding operations. The cutting or welding of tanks or drums that contained
flammable materials is prohibited unless proper precautions have been taken (i.e.
the tanks or drum have been purged or is filled with water) and a suitable test has
been carried out to confirm it is safe to cut or weld. All gas cylinders are to be turned

Package BH -03
off when not in use and hoses are to be kept clear of sharp edges, abrasive surfaces
or where vehicles can run over them and damage them. All connections and
equipment are to be regularly checked for faults and leaks.
40.7 Electricity
a. All permanent and temporary electrical installations are to be designed,
installed, modified, maintained and repaired by a competent electrical person.
Any electrical systems, circuits, installations, equipment is to be safe for its
intended purpose and suitably inspected, tested and colour coded before it is
put into service and thereafter every 3 months by a competent electrical
person. Users of electrical equipment are to inspect them before use and
where a fault or damage is found the equipment is not to be used but tagged
and removed from service. All electrical equipment including portable
equipment and installations should be maintained so as to prevent danger.
Project Partners are to develop a portable appliance test (PAT) regime in
accordance with industry best practice and ensure the PAT is undertaken by
someone with the necessary knowledge and experience to interpret the
results.
b. Electrical hand tools and equipment are:
i. To be where possible 110-volt
ii. To be double insulated where 230-volt tools are used
iii. To have a sound casing with no loose or exposed cables
iv. To have and approve industrial type plug
v. To be in good condition and subjected to a preventative maintenance
schedule
c. Electrical equipment shall be suitable for its working environment (i.e.
compliance to BS 6164 for tunnels).
d. Only intrinsically safe equipment is to be used in workplaces where there is a
risk from explosion or ignition.
e. Electrical risk is to be reduced by using air, hydraulic battery-operated tools
whenever reasonably practicable.
f. Electrical circuits and equipment are to be suitably earthed when operational.
Temporary electrical equipment such as generators, welding units and
lighting towers must also have earth protection.
g. If equipment is operating at 230 volts or higher a residual current device
(RCD) is to be fitted. RCD’s are to be built in to the main switchboard or the
socket outlet. If RCD’s trip it is a sign there is a fault and the system must be
checked before resetting it.
h. Earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB) are to be fitted in accordance with
applicable codes and standards. As a minimum ELCB will be provided in all
toilets, washrooms and changing rooms and all areas where there is a moist
wet atmosphere where electrical equipment or portable electrical tools may

Package BH -03
be used.
i. Cables are to be suitable and be rated for the conditions they will be used for.
They are to be buried or slung above head height to protect them from
damage and reduce the likelihood of slips trips and falls.
j. Extension leads are to be of three core construction and fitted with a separate
earth conductor.
k. Electrical rooms, distribution boards, panels are to be locked at all times to
prevent unauthorised access and suitable signs are to be displayed warning
of the danger of electricity and where required who the competent person is
to be contacted in the event of a problem.
l. Work on electrical equipment will be only be carried out by competent
electricians and before any work commences the electrical equipment is to
be isolated, protected and a lock out tag out procedure implemented as
appropriate.
m. Work on exposed live parts of equipment is prohibited unless it is absolutely
unavoidable.
n. If it is unavoidable, a permit to work system and suitable precautions are to
be developed and implemented to prevent injury, both to the worker and
anyone else who may be in the area.
o. Arrangements for commissioning permanent electrical systems and
equipment will be developed by contractors and utility owner and submitted
to the Engineer for review.
p. A method statement and permit to work is required for all work on live
electrical systems and during any start up or energisation works.
40.8 Underground Services
a. Where possible underground services are to be diverted or isolated before
work commences. Where this is not practical a safe system of work is to be
developed.
b. Services encased in concrete must be isolated by the utility owner prior to any
breaking out works.
c. Before the commencement of any ground-breaking activities, service
drawings and information shall be obtained from relevant utility owners. In
addition, Project Partners will need to ensure that all necessary permissions
and non-objection certificates/permit are in place before work commences.
d. The safe system of work will include locating and marking of known services,
visually looking for obvious signs such as previously dug trenches, presence
of manholes, pits, sources of power such as street lighting transformers etc.
and checking the area using a cable avoidance tool (CAT). CAT must be used
in conjunction with a compatible generator and in all modes to locate
underground services (power and radio). Users of a cable avoidance tool are
to be trained and competent in their use. The CAT is to have an in-date

Package BH -03
calibration certificate and a copy is to be available on site for inspection

purposes.
e. A permit to dig system shall be established and implemented prior to any
ground-breaking activities. Operative are to be trained in safe digging
techniques and briefed on the hazards of digging around buried services.
Services that have been detected must be positively located by digging trial
holes at regular intervals so the alignment of services is clearly identified; trial
holes are to be hand dug using insulated hand tools. In general, the use of
picks, pins or forks to dislodge stone and to break up hard layers rock are
prohibited. Once services are exposed, they are to be treated as live and
adequately protected. Markers/warning signs are to be installed to warn of
underground services and all exposed/located services are to be marked on
plans/drawings/permits. Restrictions on the use of mechanical plant are to be
strictly adhered to. Where mechanical digging is to be carried out this must
be included in the method statement and authorised by the utility owner.
f. Strict adherence to safe working distances from pipes and cables is to be
observed.
g. Damage to any underground service is to be immediately reported to the
Engineer and the utility owner and an investigation carried out to determine
the cause(s).
h. A method statement and permit to work is required for all works involving
underground services.
40.9 Overhead Power Lines
a. Where work must be carried out close to overhead power lines or obstructions
and it is not practical to divert or isolate them, a safe system or work must be
implemented. It must be assumed unless proven otherwise that all overhead
services are live.
b. Owners must be contacted to determine the voltage the line carries and the
minimum safe clearance zone and their procedures for working in close
proximity to overhead power lines.
c. When working or passing under/close to overhead power lines the following
controls are to be implemented:
i. Barriers, signs and bunting is to be erected a minimum of 6 metres (or
greater depending on owners’ requirements) to warn personnel,
operators and drivers they are approaching overhead power lines
ii. Designated routes under overhead power lines are to be kept to a
minimum and have goalposts and signs on either approach with
barriers delineating the route.
iii. Goalposts are to be suitable for use and the top bar is to be at a height
that provides at least the minimum clearance required
iv. Goalposts, barriers and signs are to be regularly inspected and

Package BH -03
maintained to ensure they remain effective

v. All plant and vehicles that pass under or are required to work under
overhead power lines are to have clearly displayed in their cab the
maximum height of their vehicles, and the safe clearance zone
vi. The use of plant and equipment that may approach within the safety
clearance zone is to be avoided (i.e. use a dozer instead of an
excavator to move material)
vii. Where plant and equipment such as crane jibs have to be used, they
must be positioned so they cannot approach the safety clearance zone
and if this is not possible, limit devices are to be fitted
viii. The storage of materials and plant underneath overhead power lines in
prohibited
d. A method statement and permit to work is required for all work under
overhead power lines.
40.10 Excavations
a. Prior to excavation works a geotechnical survey is to be carried out to
determine soil characteristics, assess whether there is any contamination and
enable the design (diaphragm walls, slope batters/benching etc.) to be
determined.
b. Excavations are to be protected from collapse by being benched, sloped,
shored (i.e. diaphragm walls, secant piling etc.) as appropriate. Slopes,
benching and shoring are to be designed by a competent Temporary Works
Designer.
c. Drawings and the necessary licenses/permits/No Objection Certificates’ are
to be available on site and a permit to dig system shall be established and
implemented prior to any excavation.
d. All dewatering systems shall be designed and installed at locations where
excavations extend below the water table. Designs are to be specified and
prepared by a qualified engineer experienced in this type of work. The
drawings and design showing the type of dewatering and groundwater control
systems including proposals for discharge and the measures required to
prevent damage surrounding infrastructure are to be submitted to the
Engineer for review.
e. Project Partners are to provide instruction and training to workers in safe
digging techniques and a competent supervisor is to be appointed to
supervise all excavation works.
f. Continuous solid barriers (minimum height of 950mm) or an earth safety bund
is to be installed around all open excavations exceeding 1.2m in depth.
g. Suitable access/egress (steps, ramps, secured ladders) is to be provided at
regular intervals for all excavations not exceeding 15m lateral distance.
h. Excavated spoil for major excavations will be immediately removed from the

Package BH -03
works area, on smaller excavations where spoil is to be kept close by it must

be placed a minimum of two metres clear of the edge of the excavation, this
distance may need to increase depending on the overall depth and the
methods adopted to prevent collapses.
i. To prevent the risk associated with falling objects excavated materials, other
materials and equipment shall not be stored at the edge of any excavation.
j. A clear distance of 2m shall be maintained around all excavations. Where
there is a danger to the public, extra care shall be taken to properly cover all
temporary openings and adequately barrier and sign the excavation.
k. Flashing warning lights, signs and suitable lighting is to be installed where
required. Work shall not be carried out in an excavation unless the excavation
and any work equipment and materials which affect its safety, have been
inspected by a competent person:
i. At the start of each shift in which the work is to be carried out
ii. After any event likely to have affected the strength or stability of the
excavation
iii. After any material unintentionally falls or is dislodged
l. A copy of the completed inspection form is to be held on site and returned at
the end of each day for record keeping.
m. Excavations shall be kept clean and tidy at all times. Accumulated waste and
unused materials will be removed from excavations on a daily basis. All
excavations will be thoroughly cleaned prior to any backfilling operations
commencing.
n. Excavations are to be backfilled as soon as possible and not be left open any
longer than necessary.
o. A method statement and permit to work is required for all excavation works.
40.11 Tunnelling
All works associated with tunnelling shall be carried out in accordance with BS
6164:2011 Code of Practice for Safety in Tunnelling in the Construction Industry.
The requirements for tunnelling will be included within the Project Partners Health
and Safety Plans.
40.12 Confined Spaces
a. A confined space means any place, including any chamber, tank, vat, silo, pit,
trench, pipe, culvert, sewer, flue, well, TBM cutter head or other similar space
in which, by virtue of its enclosed nature, there arises a reasonably
foreseeable specified risk. A specified risk means the risk of:
i. Serious injury to any person at work arising from a fire or explosion
ii. The loss of consciousness of any person at work arising from an
increase in body temperature

Package BH -03
iii. The loss of consciousness or asphyxiation of any person at work

arising from gas, fume, vapour or the lack of oxygen
iv. The drowning of any person at work arising from an increase in the
level of liquid or
v. The asphyxiation of any person arising from free flowing solid or the
inability to reach a respirable environment due to entrapment by a free
flowing solid
b. Where any one of these criteria is applicable it can be defined as a confined
space, note, it is not necessary to have all criteria applicable.
c. Where working in confined spaces is unavoidable, entry will only be permitted
where a risk assessment has been provided and a competent person is
appointed to plan and directly supervise the work and a safe system of work
has been developed.
d. Any person that plans, supervises or enters a confined space is to have
received formal training in the safe methods of entry and working in a confined
space and the emergency and rescue arrangements by third party accredited
training organisation.
e. An attendant is to be at the opening at all times personnel are inside the
confined space.
f. Mechanical and electrical isolation of equipment is to be provided where there
is a risk of harm.
g. Sufficient ventilation is to be provided; this may be natural ventilation by
increasing the number of openings or by mechanical ventilation to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
h. Sufficient well-lit access/egress is to be provided. The access/egress must be
wide enough to allow workers wearing all the necessary equipment to climb
in and out easily and provide ready access and egress in the event of an
emergency.
i. Confined spaces are to be checked before entry to ensure they are free from
toxic and flammable vapours and that the air is fit to breathe. Testing is to be
carried out by a competent person with a suitable gas detector that is correctly
calibrated. Continuous monitoring is to be implemented where there is risk
that the atmosphere inside the confined space may change. Records of
monitoring are to be retained.
j. Breathing apparatus is to be provided when the air inside a confined space is
unfit to breath. Personnel required to wear breathing apparatus are to be
trained and competent in its use.
k. When working in flammable or potentially explosive atmospheres only non-
sparking tools, specially protected lighting and intrinsically safe equipment is
to be used. Every person that enters into a confined space will be given a
briefing by the appointed competent person covering the specific hazards of

Package BH -03
the work and the control measures to be implemented.

l. Persons entering into a confined space will wear a full body rescue harness
that is attached to a rescue line or tripod winch anchored outside the confined
space. Adequate communication arrangements are provided; checked before
entry and at regular intervals when anyone is inside a confined space.
m. Openings and areas around confined spaces are to be protected and suitable
signs displayed warning others of the danger.
n. Arrangements for emergency rescue and resuscitation of workers are to be
included within the safe system of work. A first aider is to be on site at all times
and rescuers are not to enter a confined space to rescue someone unless
they have been trained and have the correct rescue equipment. In the event
of an emergency Civil Defence is to be informed immediately.
o. A method statement and a permit to enter are required for all confined space
working.
40.13 Demolition
a. All demolition work is to be carried out in accordance with Indian Regulations
and be planned and carried out by trained demolition operatives under the
supervision of a competent person. Supervisors are to have knowledge of the
particular type of demolition being carried out, its hazards and how to control
them.
b. The demolition or dismantling of a structure or part of a structure shall be
planned and carried out to prevent danger so far as is reasonably practicable,
or reduce the danger to as low a level as is reasonably practicable. The
arrangements for carrying out demolition or dismantling work shall be
recorded in writing, prior to the commencement of the work. Before any
demolition works, the site is to be fully secured with signs displayed around
the perimeter informing personnel and members of the public of the dangers
on the site and that demolition is in progress.
c. A pre-survey is to be carried out and is to take into account:
i. The presence of adjoining or adjacent properties
ii. The type and structure of the buildings to be demolished
iii. The condition of structural members and the contribution of floors,
roofs, walls etc. to overall stability
iv. The need for temporary works or shoring
v. Presence of any tanks or vessels
vi. Overhead or underground services
d. Environmental considerations such as dust suppression, run off risks, etc.
e. Heath hazards such as asbestos, lead dust or paint, residues from previous
processes, contaminated land etc.

Package BH -03
f. The sequence of demolition is normally determined by the design of the

building and is generally demolished in reverse order of its construction.
Demolition should wherever possible involve methods that make it
unnecessary for persons to work at height. Where a balling machine,
pulverising grab, pusher arm or shears are to be employed there is to be
sufficient space for them to be used safely. The sequence of demolition is to
allow debris to be cleared on a regular basis so that floors do not become
overloaded and horizontal pressures on the walls are avoided.
g. A method statement and permit to work is required for all work involving
demolitions.
40.14 Working at Height
a. Wherever possible work at height is to be avoided, where it cannot be avoided
Project Partners are to ensure that:
i. All work at height is properly planned, organised and supervised by
a competent person
ii. Weather conditions are taken into account
iii. Those involved in the work are trained and competent
iv. The place where work at height is carried out is safe
v. Equipment is appropriately inspected
vi. The risk from falling objects are adequately controlled
b. When deciding what equipment to use when working at height, the type of
work and duration will generally determine the suitability of the equipment.
The following hierarchy is to be used when providing a safe place of work:
i. Edge protection with guard rails and toe boards
ii. General access scaffold
iii. Mobile scaffold towers
iv. Mobile Elevating Work Platform (MEWP)
v. Man basket
vi. Fall protection systems
vii. Ladders
40.14.1 Edge Protection
a. Edge protection is to meet the following requirements:
i. Be strong and rigid enough to prevent people from falling and be
able to withstand other loads likely to be placed on them
ii. Be fixed to a structure or part of a structure capable of supporting
them
iii. Guardrails to be a minimum of 950mm above any edge from which

Package BH -03
personnel are liable to fall

iv. Intermediate rails are to be positioned to ensure the any gap does
not exceed 470mm
v. Toe boards are to be fitted and extend 150mm above the platform
b. Barriers other than guard rails and toe boards can be used so long as they
are at least 950mm high secure and provide an equivalent standard of
protection against falls and materials rolling or being kicked from edges.
40.14.2 General Scaffolds
a. Scaffolds are to be designed, erected, altered and dismantled by a competent
person and supervisor and be designed and erected in accordance with
Indian regulations.
b. Scaffolders are to adopt methods of work to prevent falls during erection and
dismantling by using the advanced guard rail system. Where this is not
practical, safety harnesses are to be worn to provide a means of fall arrest.
c. All scaffolds are to be braced; platforms are to be a minimum of 3 boards wide
and securely tied or otherwise supported to prevent movement.
d. All openings in the platform are to be protected to prevent unintentional falls.
e. Scaffold boards are to be sound and free from splitting, twists and knots.
f. Scaffolds’ are to have suitable stair or ladder access onto the working
platform. In general the use of ladder access should be restricted to short
term scaffolds, long term scaffolds are to be supplied with staircase access.
g. System scaffolds are to be erected in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
h. Scaffold platforms are to be kept clean and tidy and are not to be overloaded.
i. Scaffolds are to be inspected by a certified scaffold inspector:
i. Before use
ii. After substantial alteration
iii. After any event likely to have affected its stability
iv. At regular interval not exceeding 7 days
j. Scaff tags are to be fitted to the scaffold showing the date of the last
inspection. Unsafe scaffolds are to show a red Scaff tag.
40.14.3 Mobile Tower Scaffold
a. Tower scaffolds are to be erected and dismantled by a competent person in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Tower scaffolds are to be erected on firm level ground with the wheels or feet
properly supported.
c. The height to base ratio of tower scaffolds is to be in accordance with

Package BH -03
manufacturer’s instructions.
d. Safe access is to be provided to and from the work platform.
e. Climbing up the end frames is not safe except where:
i. The frame has an appropriate designed built-in ladder
ii. A purpose made ladder can be attached safely on the inside
f. Tower scaffolds are to be fitted with guard rails, a fully boarded platform and
toe boards.
g. Tower scaffolds are not to be moved whilst personnel or materials remain on
the platform.
h. Tower scaffolds are to be inspected by a competent person:
i. Before first use
ii. After substantial alteration
iii. After any event that may have affected its stability
iv. If it remains in place longer than 7 days it should be inspected every
7 days
i. A Scaff tag is to be fitted to the tower scaffold showing the date of the last
inspection. Unsafe mobile scaffolds are to show a red scaffold tag.
40.14.4 Mobile Elevating Work Platform (MEWP)
a. MEWP is a generic term for lifting platforms and in general is covers:
i. Vertical scissor lift
ii. Self-propelled articulated boom
iii. Vehicle mounted boom
iv. Trailer mounted boom
b. When using a MEWP, the work must be properly planned and all hazards
considered.
c. The use of MEWP’s is to be avoided where there are overhead cables,
dangerous machinery, on unsuitable ground, and during periods of inclement
weather.
d. A MEWP is only to be used as a working platform and the operators must
remain inside the basket at all times.
e. Climbing on guard rails, using step-ups inside the basket or climbing outside
the basket is prohibited.
f. MEWP’s are to be inspected before use and formally every 6 months and a
current report of thorough examination and test is to be available on site.
g. MEWP’s are only to be operated by a trained operator who holds the
necessary competency card covering the type of MEWP being operated.

Package BH -03
h. Operators are to wear a safety harness with a short restraint lanyard clipped
onto a recognised anchor point when inside the basket.
i. A barrier is to be provided to prevent MEWP being struck by passing
traffic/vehicles and to prevent personnel from entering the immediate work
area.
j. MEWP’s have a specific safe working load (SWL) and this must be marked
on the basket and not exceeded.
k. Materials may be placed inside the basket as long as the SWL is not
exceeded. As a rule of thumb, the use of an articulated MEWP for lifting and
installation long or heavy items is to be avoided due to the possibility of
bounce and the boom structure flexing, in these circumstances a scissor lift
is the right equipment to be used.
40.14.5 Man Baskets/Platforms
a. The raising and lowering of personnel by work equipment that is not
specifically designed for the purposes should only be undertaken in
exceptional circumstances, when it is not practical to gain access by less
hazardous means.
b. Although equipment such as fork-lift trucks, telescopic handlers and cranes
are primarily designed for the purpose of handling materials, when fitted with
a suitably designed man basket or working platform they can provide a safer
alternative to other means of access (such as a ladder). It should be
recognised, however, that such an arrangement will not provide the same
level of safety as purpose-built equipment such as a MEWP.
c. Before using a man basket/platform a specific risk assessment is to be carried
out, a method statement prepared and a lift plan developed.
d. All man baskets/platforms are to be inspected before use and formally
thereafter every 6 months by a third-party engineer. A current report of
thorough examination and test is to be available on site.
e. Man baskets/platforms are to have their safe working load (SWL) marked on
the basket access gates are to open inwards and be able to be secured at all
times when someone is inside the basket.
40.14.6 Forklift Man Basket
a. Personnel are not to be free lifted on the forks of a forklift truck or in the bucket
of any item of plant.
b. Where personnel are to be lifted by a forklift truck a properly maintained
purpose-built working man basket/platform is to be used.
c. All man baskets/platforms are to be inspected before use and formally every
6 months by a third-party engineer. A current report of thorough examination
and test is to be available on site.
d. Man baskets/platforms are to have their safe working load (SWL) marked on
the basket access gates are to open inwards and be able to be secured at all

Package BH -03
times when someone is inside the basket.

e. Any man basket or platform is to be compatible with the lift truck on which it
is fitted to ensure its security and stability in use and it is to be effectively
secured to the truck's elevating carriage or fork to prevent it being displaced.
f. Personnel carried on a platform are to be prevented from reaching any
dangerous parts (e.g., the chains of truck) by effective screens or guards.
They are also to be protected against any overhead hazards that might exist
(e.g., coming into contact with rafters in the ceiling).
g. The operator is to scotch or lock out the tilt mechanism when the equipment
is to be used with a working platform and a suitable means of communication
between the operator and platform is to be provided.
40.14.7 Cranes
a. Cranes used to lift personnel are to be adequate and suitable for the task,
have a free-fall capability lock-out and should be used equipped with
appropriate devices such as a hoisting limiter, lowering limiter, rated capacity
indicator and rated capacity limiter. The carrier should be adequately attached
to the crane (e.g., by a shackle or a hook with a latch).
b. The crane and carrier should be inspected every day by a competent person.
The crane and associated equipment should be suitably de-rated and the
crane should be operated in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer.
40.14.8 Fall Protection Systems
a. The use of personal fall protection systems is only to be used to prevent or
minimise the consequences of a fall when collective preventative measures
(i.e., scaffold, MEWP etc.) are not reasonably practicable. There are several
types of personal fall protection systems, however the main two likely to be
used across the project are fall restraint and fall arrest systems. Fall restraint
systems prevent a person from physically getting to a place where they could
fall whereas a fall arrest system only limits the height or consequences of a
fall. Therefore, the use of fall restraint is to be given a higher priority over fall
arrest when planning and implementing fall protection systems. Workers who
set and use fall protection systems are to be adequately trained and
competent and are to be closely supervised. A rescue plan showing how a
person(s) will be recovered in the event of a fall is to be included in method
statements.
b. Rescue operation is to be carried out and supervised by competent persons.
c. Enforcement action will be taken where rescue plans have not been provided
or found to be inadequate.
40.14.9 Safety Harnesses and Lanyards
a. Before the use of safety harnesses are authorised Project Partners are to
ensure that no other means of fall protection is available.

Package BH -03
b. Where a safety harness is to be worn it is to be a full body harness and fitted

with an energy absorbing lanyard unless the situation dictates otherwise.
c. The use of safety belts is prohibited.
d. Safety lanyards/harnesses must be worn and attached when working at a
height of over 2m and there is a risk of a fall.
e. Where the working height is under 6m or within a MEWP the shock absorber
must be disengaged or clipped back on itself.
f. A single energy absorbing lanyard is to be used when the area of work is
close to a suitable anchor point; these lanyards are permitted to be used as
a restraint lanyard.
g. Double lanyards are to be used when it is necessary to move around a
structure that does not have another method of fall protection fitted. The user
is to ensure that each lanyard is attached in turn ensuring the second lanyard
is attached before the first one is removed. Twin lanyards have two lanyards
attached to a single shared energy absorber to give added protection in the
event of a fall. They are used in similar situations as the double lanyard.
h. Whenever a safety harness is used, an anchorage point of suitable strength
is to be provided and be able to withstand the snatch to load of a fall.
i. Lanyards are to be kept as short as possible and not hooked around any
sharp edges such as those found on steel girders unless softeners have been
provided.
j. When using an energy absorbing lanyard, it is essential that sufficient
clearance is allowed for the deployment of the energy absorber.
k. As a rule of thumb to determine the safe distance use the following
calculation: User height + lanyard length + extension (energy absorber) +
safety margin = 2m + 2m + 1.75m + 1m = 6.75m
l. In order to ensure the potential fall distance is kept to minimum lanyards
should be connected to a fixed point above head height wherever possible.
m. Personnel are to be trained in the risks of using a safety harness, how to
correctly fit the harness and where the lanyard is to be attached to.
n. Safety harnesses and lanyards are to be inspected before use by the user
and every 3 months by a competent person.
o. Damaged safety harnesses and lanyards are to be removed from service and
destroyed.
40.14.10 Ladders
a. Wherever possible a work platform or other mean should be provided before
ladders are used. In general ladders should only be used:
i. In one position for a maximum of 30 minutes
ii. For light duty work

Package BH -03
iii. Where three points of contact can be maintained

iv. Where the work does not require the person to overreach
b. Ladders are to meet a recognised international standard such as BS EN 131
Ladders; the use of site-made ladders is prohibited. Where there is a risk of
electrocution the use of aluminium ladders is prohibited, only timber or glass
reinforced ladders are to be used.
c. Ladders are to be tied or footed at all times and extend 1m above any stepping
off point.
d. Ladders are to be inspected before use and have an identification plate
showing the asset number and date of last quarterly inspection.
40.14.11 Suspended Access Cradles
a. Suspended access cradles are to be installed and thoroughly examined and
tested every six months to ensure that they are suitable for their intended
purpose.
b. A certificate of thorough examination and test is to be on site before any cradle
is used.
c. Cradles are only to be used by suitably trained and certified competent
persons and are to display its safe working load; loads are to uniformly
distributed and not be overloaded. Before use checks are to be carried out by
the operator and a weekly inspection by a competent person is to be carried
out and recorded.
d. Operators are to wear and attach safety harnesses to an independently
anchored safety line. A rescue plan is to be developed and be in place for
rescuing the operator(s) if there is a fault whilst at high level.
e. Cradles are not to be operated where there are expected high winds or other
extremes of weather that would cause a safety hazard.
f. At the end of the shift the cradle is to be cleared of all tools and equipment,
the power switched off and isolated and the cradle secured to prevent access
to vandals or trespassers.
40.14.12 Floor and Wall Openings
a. All openings in floors, walls, platforms, walkways etc. are to be protected
against a person or vehicle from falling.
b. Floor and wall openings are to be protected using covers of adequate strength
to withstand the expected load that will be imposed and securely fixed.
c. A suitable sign is to be displayed to warn personnel of the dangers and the
requirement not to remove covers unless other arrangements have been put
in place to protect the opening.
d. Penetrations in walls such as those provided for lift shafts, door openings etc.
are to be closed with suitable strength material or have fixed protective
barriers around the penetration with a sign warning personnel of the danger

Package BH -03
of falling.
e. Where personnel need to work adjacent to unprotected openings and
penetrations, they are to be protected from falling (i.e. fall restraint system).
f. Tools and equipment are to be kept clear and the work area directly beneath
the activity is to be cordoned off.
g. Openings and penetrations are to be inspected daily to ensure they remain
protected.
40.14.13 Roof Work
a. Work on roofs and leading edges requires careful planning.
b. A safe system of work is to be developed, including measures to mitigate the
distance and consequences of a fall.
c. A safe and secure mean of access is to be provided onto roofs. General
access scaffolds or mobile tower stairways will provide a suitable access.
d. Where personnel can fall, suitable edge protection and work platforms are to
be provided to prevent a fall occurring.
e. Where the provision of edge protection or adequate platforms cannot be
provided safety nets or other soft-landing systems such as inflatable bags are
to be used to minimise the consequences of a fall. If nets are used, they must
be installed by a competent rigger and fitted as close under the work surface
as possible. Materials are to be securely stored to prevent them falling or
introducing a slip, trip and fall hazard and areas below roof works are to be
cordoned off and warning signs erected to prevent personnel being injured
from falling materials.
f. No materials are to be thrown from roofs. Only enclosed chutes or containers
lowered to the ground are to be used to dispose of materials from roofs.
g. When work is required to be carried out on fragile roofs, the work should be
carried out from underneath. Where this is not possible the use of a MEWP
will allow work to be carried out without the need to stand on the roof.
h. If access onto the roof cannot be avoided, edge protection is to be installed
and staging should be used to spread the load.
i. Fragile materials are to be covered or barriers installed with signs displayed
to prevent access.
j. Where the risks of falling from roofs remain, personnel are to wear a safety
harness that is connected to an anchorage point or safety line that is capable
of taking the imposed load.
k. A method statement and permit to work is required for all roof works.
40.15 Lifting Equipment and Lifting Operations
a. Lifting equipment includes any equipment used for lifting or lowering loads
and includes tower cranes, portal or gantry cranes, mobile cranes, lorry

Package BH -03
loaders (i.e. HIAB), forklifts and lifting accessories such as chains, slings,
shackles etc.
b. All lifting equipment shall be suitable for the load it is lifting, fit for purpose,
and inspected daily before use and formally every 12 months for cranes and
every 6 months for lifting accessories and equipment used to lift personnel. A
current report of thorough examination and test is to be available on site at all
times.
c. Crane operators are to hold an Indian driving license and a competency card
issued by a third-party organisation for the category of crane being operated.
d. All lifting equipment is to be suitably marked with its safe working load and
have a unique identify number and cranes are to be fitted with a fully
functioning rated capacity indicator.
e. Cranes are to be erected/set up by trained personnel and suitably supervised.
f. All lifting operations are to be planned by a trained and qualified appointed
person and supervised by a qualified lift supervisor.
g. The safe system of work will include the provision of a risk assessment,
method statement and a suitable lift plan. Wind measuring devices i.e.
anemometers to measure wind speed shall either be at ground level or fixed
on a mobile crane.
h. Critical lifts include any tandem lift, lifting a load over buildings or close to
overhead electrical power lines and where the SWL exceeds 75% of the rated
capacity of the crane. Lift plans for critical lifts are to be reviewed by the
Engineer.
i. Lifting accessories (chain/web/SWR slings, shackles, eye bolts etc.) are to be
inspected before use, suitably marked with its safe working load and have a
unique identify number.
j. Damaged lifting accessories are to be removed from service and returned to
the store for repair or to be destroyed.
k. Lifting accessories when not in use are to be suitably stored and not left in a
place where they are exposed to the elements or can be easily damage.
l. Slinger/signallers (riggers) are to be trained and competent and check all
lifting accessories and the security of the load before lifting.
m. Before any lift takes place, the ground conditions are to be assessed to
ensure it is capable of taking the imposed load and a check is to be made to
ensure there are no voids, tunnels, shafts, recently dug ground etc.
n. Outriggers are to be deployed in accordance with the designated lift plan
and/or the manufacturer’s instructions.
o. Suitable arrangements are to be in place so that the crane operator,
slinger/signaller and supervisor are able to communicate with each other.
p. Personnel are to be prevented from entering the lifting zone and no loads are

Package BH -03
to be lifted directly over personnel. Lifting zones are to be cordoned off using
as a minimum soft barriers and warning signs displayed.
q. Lifting operation is to be suspended during inclement weather when wind
speeds reach 32kph (20mph) or in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
r. When there is a risk of contact with overhead electrical power lines the work
area is to be protected as shown in Overhead Power Lines section of this
document.
s. Loads are to be controlled by use of tag lines and slinger/signallers are to
keep body parts especially toes/feet/hands/fingers clear of any load.
t. A method statement and lift plan are required for all lifting operations.
40.15.1 Tower Cranes
a. Effective planning of a tower crane erection, dismantling or alteration is
essential if the operation is to proceed safely, effectively and without incident.
b. As part of the planning process a risk assessment is to be carried out to
identify the hazards associated with the proposed operation. Once the risk
assessment has been carried out, the appointed person should ensure that a
full method statement document is prepared, detailing the safe system of work
for the installation operation.
c. Siting of the tower cranes should take account of all the factors that could
affect its safe operation, in particular the following:
i. The crane standing and support conditions
ii. The presence and proximity of other hazards
iii. The effect of wind during in-service and out-of-service conditions
iv. The adequacy of access to allow the placing or erection of the crane
in its working position and for dismantling and removing the crane
following completion of lifting operations
d. The Appointed Person should ensure that the loads imposed by the crane can
be sustained by the ground or any means of support, by obtaining the
assessment of a competent person.
e. The presence of proximity hazards such as overhead electric lines or cables,
nearby structures, other cranes, vehicles being loaded or unloaded, stacked
goods and public access areas including highways must be considered.
f. Tower cranes are only to be operated by a competent operator who holds the
necessary licenses and certificates.
g. When personnel are required to work on cranes for inspection, maintenance
or other reasons, a system should be in operation to ensure that:
i. They are not endangered by movement of the crane
ii. A safe working place and access is provided

Package BH -03
h. Where loads have to be handled in the vicinity of persons, extreme care

should be exercised and adequate clearances allowed. The route of the load
should be planned to prevent lifting over persons.
i. When a tower crane is to be left unattended for even a short period, it is
essential that the following precautions are carried out:
i. Ensure no load is left on the hook, and all chains, slings, etc. are
removed
ii. Put the crane out of service in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
iii. In nearly every case, this involves turning the jib downwind and
taking some action to ensure that the slew brake is left off, so that
the crane is free to slew in the wind.
iv. Where a crane is out-of-service on a site where it can collide with
another crane that is still working, measures are put in place to
prevent collision
v. In the case of luffing jib and similar cranes, observe the
manufacturer’s instructions concerning the angle of the jib for out-of-
service purposes
vi. Secure rail travelling cranes to the rails, to make sure that in the event
of a high wind the crane cannot be blown accidentally along the rails.
When left for long periods (e.g. overnight), cut off the power supply
to the crane and secure and lock the door of the cab. When a power
supply has to be maintained overnight for cab or control cabinet
heaters, lights, etc., make separate arrangements for the isolation of
the power supply to the machinery
j. Arrangements should be made for the rescue of personnel from the tower
crane including:
i. From the cab of the crane in the event of a medical or other
emergency
ii. If a person wearing fall arrest equipment falls from the jib and is left
suspended below the jib
k. Fire extinguishers should not be provided or used in the cabs of tower cranes
as the confined nature of such cabs exposes the user to the risk of suffocation.
l. It is essential that tower cranes are fitted with anemometers or other wind-
speed monitoring devices. These should have their indicators located in clear
view of the crane operator.
m. A working space limiter should be fitted to prevent a fixed load attachment
and/or parts of the crane from entering a prohibited space.
n. An anti-collision device is to be fitted and used to prevent a fixed load
attachment and cranes or parts of cranes from colliding when they are
manoeuvred simultaneously in the same space.

Package BH -03
40.15.2 Overhead Travelling Cranes

a. Overhead travelling cranes (OHT) includes overhead gantry and portal
cranes. Operators for OHT must be trained, competent and authorised to
operate the type of equipment in use.
b. Fixed stairways and proper platforms combined with safe walkways both on
the crane and gantry is to be provided.
c. OHT are to be fitted with a device to prevent over-hoisting and over-lowering
and these are to be properly maintained and tested daily by the crane
operator.
d. A safe system of work is required not only for the crane operator, maintenance
and inspection staff and for any other persons working on or near the OHT or
its tracks.
40.15.3 Hoists (passenger and goods)
a. The erection, extension and dismantling of hoists must only be carried out by
trained competent erectors under the direction of a competent supervisor. All
hoists must be thoroughly examined by a competent person:
i. Before first use on site
ii. After substantial alteration, modification or repair
iii. After any exceptional circumstance, such as accidental overloading,
and
iv. At least every six months if used for carrying passengers, or
v. At least every 12 months if used for carrying goods.
b. A copy of the current examination and test certificate is to be on site.
c. Hoists will only be operated by persons who have been trained how to use of
the hoist. The operator should:
i. Know the rated load of the hoist
ii. Be able to accurately assess the weight and distribution of any load
brought on to the hoist, and therefore identify if it is overloaded
iii. Have access to accurate wind-speed figures and be aware of any
limitations placed on the hoist
iv. Be able to lower the hoist to the next landing in the event of a power
failure (passenger carrying hoists only)
v. Carry out daily pre-use checks and weekly inspections, and take
the appropriate follow-up action as necessary
d. The freestanding height of the hoist mast is never to be exceeded and is to
be tied to the building in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
e. Enclosures and gates must have a minimum height of 2m unless a lesser

Package BH -03
height is adequate to secure the safety of personnel.

f. Hoist platforms are to be sound and maintained in good condition. The
platform must display the safe working load and on goods hoists a notice
prohibiting passengers must also be displayed.
g. Gates must be fitted at all levels where access is required and all gates must
be closed except when loading and unloading.
h. An overrun device must be fitted just above the highest platform position or
near the top of the mast and hoists must be fitted with an arrestor device to
support the platform or cage.
i. Controls for passenger hoists are to inside the cage and for goods hoists
outside the cage.
j. Hoist operators are to be trained and be certified for the type of hoist in use.
k. All loads on the platform must be secured and there should be no projections.
l. Hoists that are designated for the carriage of goods only must not be used for
carrying passengers.
m. In high winds hoists are to be used in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Where winds are in excess of recommended limits the
hoist platform is to be lowered to the ground and the main supply isolated.
40.16 Steelwork
a. A competent designer must design the erection sequence of steelwork so that
at all times the structure remains stable from when the first piece of steelwork
is put into position until it is completed.
b. Temporary supports such as bracing, guys or stays must be used during the
erection of any structure which may be unstable or liable to collapse before it
is completed.
c. Where any work is carried out which is likely to adversely affect the
foundations or stability of any existing building or structure all practicable
precautions such as shoring, must be taken.
d. Assembly of steelwork components or making connections should be planned
so that steelworkers can do as much of the work as possible at ground level.
Where steelworkers have to work at height, provision must be made for safe
access to the connecting points and any other working places. Wherever
possible, steelwork should be marked as an aid to identification and assisting
the steel erectors where components fit.
e. Potentially hazardous site features such as overhead electric cables must be
taking into consideration when planning the work.
f. Erection of steelwork is only to be carried out by trained and experienced
personnel.
g. Where steelwork is being erected the areas directly beneath and the
immediate vicinity is to be free of personnel to prevent personnel being struck

Package BH -03
by any falling materials or objects.

h. Platforms, gangways, floors and other places must not be obstructed by loose
materials and materials must be stacked safely.
i. The delivery, storage and erection of steelwork must be properly planned with
a suitable and sufficient risk assessment and approved method statement for
the activities.
40.17 Plant and Vehicles
a. All plant and vehicles used on site will be suitable for the works being
undertaken and less than 7 years old.
b. Project Partners will make arrangements to ensure that all mobile plant and
vehicles are checked on entering the site to ensure they are in good working
order.
c. Plant and vehicles shall be inspected daily and thereafter in accordance with
current legislation.
d. Plant and vehicles that are found to be defective will be removed from service
and sent for repair.
e. Maintenance of plant and vehicles is to be carried out in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
f. Plant and vehicles where appropriate are to have a current certificate showing
the date of the last thorough examination and test issued by a third-party
organisation.
g. A copy of all certification is kept in the cab of the plant or vehicle with a copy
filed in the site offices.
h. All drivers, operators and users of mechanical plant and equipment are to be
competent and must hold an Indian driving license and be certified by a third-
party organisation for the category of plant or equipment they are operating.
i. Speed limits are to be set and monitored, seat belts are worn by all drivers
and operators, have an unobstructed view out of the windscreen and side
windows and that they prohibit the use of mobile phones whilst
driving/operating.
j. Passengers are only to be carried on plant and vehicle where a dedicated
seat is provided.
k. All earthmoving plant is to be fitted with a roll over protection structure (ROPS)
and falling objects protection structure (FOPS).
l. Plant and vehicles are also to be fitted with mirrors, reversing alarms and a
flashing amber beacon. The flashing amber beacon and headlights are to be
switched on at all times when driving or operating on site.
m. Plant and vehicles are to park in a secure area, clear of emergency route on
firm level ground.

Package BH -03
n. When not in use all buckets, forks etc. are to be grounded, switched off, keys
removed, parking braking applied and secured.
o. Where there is a risk of plant of vehicles moving wheels are to be chocked.
p. Operators and drivers are to wear mandatory PPE when they are out of their
vehicles.
q. Free climbing onto the back of delivery vehicles/dump trucks vehicles is to be
prevented by providing suitable access/protection facilities (i.e. tarping/un-
tarping stations/fall protection etc.).
r. Plant and vehicle being delivered or moved around site are to be secured to
the bed of the low loader using chains or other such suitable means.
40.17.1 Piling
a. For all types of piling it is essential that a suitable working platform is provided.
Before a piling rig is set up a Working Platform Certificate is to be issued
confirming that the platform has been properly designed and constructed. The
integrity of the platform is to be preserved by regular maintenance.
b. Piling rigs and lifting accessories are to have a current certificate of thorough
examination and test (12 monthly for piling rigs/lifting equipment and 6
monthly for lifting accessories).
c. A thorough examination and test is also required for all pile test equipment
and other equipment such as concrete pumps.
d. Personnel involved in piling operations are to be trained and competent in the
type of piling being carried out.
e. Piling rig operators are to have a certificate of competency for the piling rig
being operated and all piling operations are to be under the supervision of a
competent supervisor.
f. A permit to dig/pile system is to be used and prior to any piling, a check of the
area is to be carried out to ensure there are no basements, cellars etc. and
that all underground services have been located and marked.
g. Piles and other materials are to be stacked safely, circular materials such as
pile casings and cages are to be chocked to prevent rolling.
h. Safe access is to be provided to all areas and work areas around piling rigs
are to be cordoned off to prevent unauthorised access from personnel and
vehicles.
i. Housekeeping around all piling areas including where pile cages are being
constructed are to be kept clean and tidy at all times and arisings from piling
are to be removed at regular intervals.
j. All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of polymer on the
site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring, discarded polymer shall
be removed from the site without undue delay and disposed of in accordance
with local authority requirements.

Package BH -03
k. Personnel are to wear PPE including gloves and ear protection. Suitable
welfare facilities are to be provided at or close to the work site.
l. A suitable method of breaking down piles is to be used to prevent/reduce the
likelihood of hand arm vibration. Hydraulic pile cutters/breakers and passive
and active systems are to be considered before the use of manual breaking.
m. Open boreholes are to be covered and protected to prevent anything or
anyone falling or the pile casing (if used) is to be left a minimum of 1m above
ground level.
n. A method statement and permit to work system is required for all piling
operations.
o. A lifting plan is required for lifting pile cages, casings and other materials.
40.18 Machinery and Equipment
a. Machinery such circular saws, drills, lathes, bench grinders etc. are only to be
operated by trained competent personnel.
b. All machinery is to be installed by a competent person and inspected before
use by the operator. They are to be fitted with suitable guards and interlocks
to prevent body parts from coming into contact with moving parts.
i. The hierarchy of protection to be implemented is as follows:
ii. Fixed enclosing guarding
iii. Other guards or protection devices, such as interlocked guards
iv. Protection appliances, such as jigs, holders and push-sticks
v. The provision of information, instruction, training and supervision.
c. All machinery is to be fitted with an emergency stop button or other such
device where it is easily accessible. Signs are to be displayed warning
personnel of dangers of machinery and any controls required (i.e. mandatory
wearing of safety glasses). Fixed machinery is to be secured to prevent
movement during operation and use. Vices, jigs, push sticks and other similar
devices are to be used to secure/guide materials.
d. When using machinery, operators are to wear suitable PPE.
e. Extraction systems or local exhaust ventilation systems are to be fitted to
machinery where there is a risk to respiratory systems and where required air
surveillance is to be carried out to confirm levels of contamination are below
acceptable levels.
f. Whenever maintenance work is being carried out the machinery or equipment
must be isolated and de-energised.
40.19 Hand and Power Tools
40.19.1 Hand Tools
a. Hand tools are to be used for their intended purpose; be the correct tool, size

Package BH -03
and type for the job and be inspected for damage and wear before use.
b. Any damaged tools are not to be used and removed from use until repaired.
c. Hand held tools such as chisels and saws are to be kept sharp, free from
mushroom heads and placed in a safe place when not in use.
d. The manufacture and use of site-made tools is prohibited.
40.19.2 Power Tools
a. Personnel using power tools are to carry a competency card showing they
have been trained and are authorised to operate the type of power tool in use.
b. All power tools are to be inspected before use and every 3 months by a
competent person. Any power tool found damaged is to be removed from
service and returned to the store for repair.
c. Power tools are to be suitable stored in a dry well-ventilated area when not in
use.
d. Suitable PPE is to be worn to prevent injury from flying fragments, ejected
material or ill health from noise, dust etc.
e. Controls are to be in place to prevent personnel operating power tools for long
periods of time where there is a risk of hand arm vibration syndrome.
f. Guards are to be fitted to protect moving or exposed parts and are to be
correctly adjusted, be able to return to the closed position (i.e. on circular
saws) and not removed whilst the tool is connected or in operation unless
designed to do so.
g. Power tool shall be operated on a work bench.
h. Handles are to be fitted where appropriate such as on drills and be held with
both hands to prevent kick-back or an anti-twist device is to be fitted.
i. Power tools are to be regularly maintained and before any maintenance is
carried out, they are to be switch off and where appropriate removed from
their prime energy source (i.e. remove plug from electrical socket).
j. All electrically powered tools are to be double insulated.
k. An approved earth leakage device is to be used to protect electrical tools, with
the device positioned at the supply source and are to have a portable
appliance test every 3 months, the tool is to be tagged with a record of the
test.
l. Portable tools such as hand-held grinders; circular saw and drills are to be
fitted with switches, levers, triggers that require constant pressure for
operation and automatically stops when released.
m. The use of a device that prevents the release (i.e. lockable trigger switch) is
prohibited.
n. Angle grinders and similar tools are to be fitted with the correct blade for the
material to be cut and the rated speed of the blade/wheel is to be checked

Package BH -03
before use to confirm that it is equal or greater than the maximum speed of
the grinder. Cutting blades are to be inspected for integrity before use.
o. Tools are to be fitted with an extraction system or a wet cutting suppression
system where there is a risk of harmful airborne dusts.
p. The use of petrol/fuel driven tools is prohibited when working in enclosed or
confined spaces.
q. Fuel driven tools are to be re-fuelled in an area clear of the work area and
free from other flammable materials, using an approved fuel container. Fuel
containers are to be re-sealed and returned to a safe storage area after re-
fuelling has been completed.
40.19.3 Pneumatic Tools
a. Compressed air used for cleaning purposes is to have a reduced pressure
not exceeding 2 bar. The use of compressed air for cleaning or blowing dust
from any part of the body is prohibited.
b. Air lines are to have ‘whip checks’ fitted at all tool and hose connections to
protect the user and those in the immediate vicinity if connections become
separated.
c. Air hoses with an internal diameter greater than 12.5mm must have a safety
excess flow valve installed at the source of the air supply to reduce pressure
in case of failure. Adequate arrangements must be in place to protect
personnel from the risk from noise and vibration when using pneumatic tools.
d. A safety clip or retainer must be installed to prevent attachments such as
chisels on a chipping hammer from being ejected during tool operation.
40.19.4 Cartridge Operated Tools
a. Cartridge operated tools are used to drive fixing devices into a base material
using either cartridges or a gas canister providing the propellant. The tool,
type of cartridge or fuel cell, type of fixing and the base material must all be
compatible.
b. Cartridge operated tools are potentially lethal if they are used recklessly or
incompetently and therefore Project Partners are to ensure that users are
provided with adequate information, instruction, training and supervision to be
able to carry out any work safely.
c. The primary factors which will ensure the proper and safe use of cartridge
tools are:
i. Competent and responsible users
ii. The compatibility of the base material, the type of fixing and the
cartridge strength Restricting access to the work area during fixing
activities
iii. The provision and use of appropriate PPE (high impact eye
protection and hearing protection)

Package BH -03
iv. Carrying out activities in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions for safe use
v. Using cartridge-operated tools that comply with the
manufacturer’s instructions
d. Cartridge tools must not be used in areas where a flammable atmosphere or
risk of dust explosion may exist.
e. All cartridge operated tools must incorporate a contact pressure safety device,
which prevents them being fired unless the muzzle is pressed hard against
the workface. They should always incorporate a drop-firing safety device
which prevents the tool from firing when it is dropped onto a hard surface.
f. It should only be possible to fire the tool when it is correctly pressed against
the work surface.
g. Cartridges are designed for specific brands or types of tool and are not
interchangeable, even if they are of a similar type or appearance.
h. Loading of tools should be carried out immediately prior to use. Once the tool
is loaded, it must never be pointed towards other people or at any part of the
operator's body. Unused cartridges must be removed from the tool as soon
as possible.
i. Proper controls must be put in place to account for all dispensed and unused
cartridges.
j. Unused, or unserviceable cartridges which cannot be fired, are hazardous
and in no circumstances should be exposed to fire or heat or be subject to
mechanical impact.
k. In the event of a misfire, the cartridge operated tool should be kept pressed
in position against the workface for at least 30 seconds, to allow for any
delayed detonation. Following this time period, the cartridge must then be
removed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
l. Cartridges which have misfired should be stored in a metal box and returned
to the supplier.
m. Cartridge-operated tools and cartridges should be stored in a place which is
secure, dry and cool.
i. The issue of such tools and cartridges should be strictly controlled.
ii. The following points should be clearly noted and understood:
iii. Cartridge operated tools should only be stored in an unloaded state
iv. Different strengths of cartridge should be clearly identified and kept
separate
v. The use of different makes of equipment on one site should be
limited as far as possible
vi. The manufacturer's instructions on the safe use of the cartridge tool

Package BH -03
should be available.
40.20 Safe Movement of Plant and Vehicles on Site
a. Man/machine interface is a key issue on construction sites.
b. The main hazards associated with man/machine interface are:
i. Personnel being struck by plant and vehicles
ii. Personnel being crushed by plant and vehicles
iii. Collision between plant and vehicles
c. The layouts of sites are to be properly designed in order to manage the
separation of personnel and plant and vehicles. Where possible one-way-
systems, and drive through loading and unloading areas are to be provided.
Movement of plant and vehicles are to be minimised through appropriate
measures including:
i. Controlling entry into sites by barriers and gates
ii. Providing parking spaces clear of work areas
iii. Locating main loading and unloading areas on the outside of
construction sites
iv. Providing pedestrian only areas from which vehicles are completely
excluded
v. Installing safe designated pedestrian routes to work locations
vi. Providing safe vehicle routes around site
vii. Excluding personnel from work areas where plant and vehicles are
operating
viii. Install barriers and signs to warn and prevent personnel entering
restricted zones
ix. Position banksmen or spotters in safe areas to warn other
personnel not to enter into restricted zones
x. Approach plant and vehicles from the front when there is a need
speak with a driver. Drivers and operators must stop their plant or
vehicle when they see someone in their work zone
d. Speed restriction must be introduced and imposed and traffic calming
measures such as installing speed bumps are to be used to control speed on
site. Speeding on site is to be monitored and arrangement must be in place
to deal with offenders.
e. Plant and vehicles are not to position themselves so when they move, they
form a crush zone (i.e. when an excavator or a crane slews close to a fixed
structure). A minimum safe clearance of 600mm is to be provided at all times.
Where a crush zone is unavoidable personnel are to be prevented access by
the installation of suitable barriers and the display of warning signs.

Package BH -03
f. Designated bus stops in safe areas are to be provided to ensure the safety of
personnel when they are getting on/off buses.
g. Where reversing of plant and vehicles is unavoidable the following controls
are to be implemented as a minimum:
i. Reversing alarms and lights are to be working at all times
ii. Mirrors are to be fitted and kept clean
iii. Operators and drivers are to have an unrestricted view when
reversing
iv. Operators and drivers are to look in the direction of travel where
possible (i.e. when reversing a pickup look out the rear window when
reversing)
v. When reversing up to excavations or loading areas use stop
blocks/logs as a last resort use banksmen to control reversing
vehicles
40.20.1 Use of Banksmen/Flagmen
a. The wholesale use of banksmen/flagmen to control plant and vehicles is to
be avoided wherever possible. The main reason for this is that using
banksmen/flagmen exponentially increases the risk to these individuals.
b. If possible, remove the need for reversing altogether by setting up one-way
systems but where the use of banksmen cannot be avoided a specific risk
assessment must be completed.
c. Banksmen must:
i. Have undergone training (theory and practical) and be assessed as
competent to fulfil their duties
ii. Wear hi-visibility vests
iii. Be visible to the operator or driver at all times (if the operator or
driver loses eye contact, they must stop immediately)
iv. Be protected by standing is a safe position (i.e. on a raised platform
behind a concrete jersey barrier)
v. Control, direct and approach plant and vehicles from the front
driver’s side
vi. Provide clear signals that are understood by operator or the driver
vii. Drivers/operators are to immediately stop if they lose sight of the
banksmen or other personnel approach or walk in to the immediate
vicinity where they are operating.
40.20.2 Traffic Management
Before any work in, or affecting the use of any road, footpath or right of way
commences detailed plans shall be prepared and shall show position of ramps,

Package BH -03
traffic signs, cones, barriers, demarcation posts and tape, flashing lights and any
other traffic control devices. The plans are to be submitted to the Engineer for review
and shall be approved by the Traffic Police. All traffic diversions shall be installed,
operated and maintained in accordance with the approved Traffic Plans.
40.21 Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO)
a. LOTO procedures are to be developed to prevent injuries from unexpected
energisation, activation or unintentional release of energy during initial start-
up, maintenance or repair of equipment or machinery.
b. Procedures are to cover:
i. Preparation for shutdown
ii. Shutdown
iii. Isolation
iv. Applying LOTO devices
v. De-energisation or release of stored energy
vi. Verification Release from lock out
vii. Testing on energised equipment
c. All potential sources of hazardous energy such as gravity, electrical,
mechanical, pneumatic, pressure etc. must be considered when determining
LOTO procedures.
d. If an energy isolation device is capable of being locked out then it must be
locked and tagged. If it is not capable of being locked out it must be tagged
out.
e. Only authorised personnel are permitted to perform LOTO procedures and
when locking out plant and equipment each person must apply their own lock
and retain the key.
f. Where more than one person is working on the same system each person
must apply their own lock to a multi-lock hasp.
g. Locks are only to be removed by the person who attached the lock;
procedures are to cover the arrangements for removing another people’s lock
when they are unable to do it themselves.
h. Locks and tags are to be specific for the task. Locks are to be standardised
for each department or trade and tags must be durable and include the words
‘Do Not Operate’. The use of ‘Out of Service’ tags must not be used for LOTO
purposes.
i. A method statement and permit to work is required for all works involving
LOTO.
40.22 Asbestos
a. The use of asbestos containing materials (ACM) is prohibited on the program.

Package BH -03
Although ACM are prohibited contractors may inadvertently come into contact
with ACM during certain phases of the works such as during demolition of
building and removal or diverting of services.
b. Where there is a possibility of exposing or coming into contact with ACM, a
survey or surveys are to be carried out. There are three main types of survey
and these are:
i. Type 1 – Presumptive Survey
ii. Type 2 – Sampling Survey
iii. Type 3 – Full Access
c. A suitable and sufficient risk assessment must be carried out before carrying
out any work that may expose personnel to ACM and a site-specific method
statement prepared and submitted to the Engineer for review. Unless
otherwise authorised, only licensed contractors will undertake work that
involves exposure to ACM.
d. Personnel who work with or are exposed to asbestos must be provided with
adequate information, instruction and training so they are able to understand
the risks associated with asbestos and the necessary precautions to be
adopted.
e. A monitoring programme is to be set up to record the efficiency of the control
measures in reducing or preventing exposure to asbestos. Employee’s
exposure should be measured by personal sampling. Where air monitoring is
carried out only accredited laboratories must be used.
f. Personnel who are exposed to asbestos above the action level are required
to undergo medical health surveillance; medical records are to be kept for 40
years following the last entry.
g. All forms of asbestos including any contaminated clothing worn during the
removal of ACM are to be double bagged, marked and disposed of at a
specialist waste disposal site in accordance with local regulations.
h. A method statement and permit to work is required for all works involving
asbestos.
40.23 Permit to Work
a. Permit-to-work (PTW) is a formal recorded process and is used to control
work that is identified as potentially high risk. A PTW will be issued but not
limited to the following activities:
i. Working in all confined spaces
ii. Hot works (welding, flame cutting, grinding etc.)
iii. Work on high voltage electrical equipment or other works on
electrical equipment that may give rise to danger such as working
under live overhead power lines
iv. Work involving the use of hazardous substances including use of

Package BH -03
radioactive materials and explosives

v. Working with asbestos
vi. Demolition work
vii. Diving operations
viii. TBM Cutter Head Interventions
ix. Pressure testing of pipelines or systems
x. During any excavation or breaking ground
xi. Controlling access to complete or specific areas
xii. Any other clearly dangerous circumstances where formal
coordination of people and precautions is necessary in order to
secure safety
b. A competent person is to be assigned responsibility and ensure an
appropriate PTW system is introduced and suitable procedures are to be
established and maintained. Procedures are to cover as a minimum:
i. When PTW are required
ii. Work planning and risk assessment
iii. Essentials of the PTW system (permit authorisation, issue, display,
suspension, hand- back)
iv. Roles and responsibilities of those involved
v. Training and competence
vi. Monitoring, audit and review
c. Permits are to be numbered sequentially and recorded in a PTW Register.
d. Personnel who are responsible for issuing, supervising and using PTW
systems are to be trained and competent in their use. PTW are to be displayed
at the site or in a recognised location near to the site (i.e. in the control room),
a copy is also to be held with the issuing authority.
e. Permits are to be closed out or suspended at the end of the duration specified
on the permit, where work is to continue as new permit is to be issued.
f. Management is to ensure that the controls included in the PTW system are
adequately implemented by undertaking regular monitoring and inspections
of the workplace.
g. A method statement is required for all works where a permit will be issued.
40.24 Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH)
a. The use of hazardous substances must be considered during the design
stage by designers and by procurement staff before ordering.
b. Designers and procurement staff must liaise with health and safety staff to
determine whether a safer alternative to what is being proposed is available.

Package BH -03
c. All hazardous substances that are to be used are to be recorded in an

inventory, not to be brought onto site unless a material safety data sheet
(MSDS) has been provided and must not be used until a specific COSHH
assessment has been carried out.
d. When planning the use of hazardous substances, the following hierarchy of
control is to be used:
i. Elimination
ii. Substitution
iii. Provision of engineering controls
iv. Administrative controls (procedures, training)
v. Use of PPE
e. Stores for hazardous substances are to be well-ventilated, protected from the
elements, clear of any ignition sources and at least 10m from any water
source. They are to be bunded to prevent leaks and spills contaminating the
surrounding area and are to be secured to prevent unauthorised use.
f. Suitable signs are to be displayed warning personnel of the hazards.
g. Substances that are not compatible are not to be stored together such as
flammable gas and oxidising agents.
h. An inventory of MSDS is to be readily available and containers used for
storing, handling, transporting and dispensing hazardous substance are to be
suitable for use and have a label showing it contents.
i. Decanting hazardous liquids into plastic bottles is prohibited.
j. Spill kits are to be positioned in areas where hazardous substances are stored
and used and any leaks or spills are to be cleaned up immediately. Containers
outside bunded areas are to be placed on drip trays and when dispensing,
funnels or jugs are to be used.
k. Fire extinguishers are to be available at storage areas and where hazardous
substances are in use.
l. Eating, drinking and smoking are prohibited in areas where hazardous
m. PPE must only be provided as a last resort and where provided it must provide
suitable protection against the hazard the individual may be exposed to.
Respiratory protective equipment (RPE) will be required in addition to PPE
where there is a risk from fumes, dusts, vapours and these cannot be
controlled by engineering controls or where engineering controls do not offer
sufficient protection.
n. A health surveillance programme is to be established for personnel who have
been exposed to hazardous substances and records are to be maintained.
Where there is a risk to personnel from hazardous substances in workplaces
a surveillance programme is to be implemented.

Package BH -03
o. Equipment used is to be suitable, be calibrated and operated by a competent

person. A record of all surveillance tests and results is to be retained.
p. Personnel are to be provided instruction, information and training on
hazardous substances.
40.25 Storage and Handling of Materials
a. Materials shall be stored in a secure designated location that has a stable,
level base.
b. Materials and equipment must be securely stacked in a neat and orderly
manner so they are not able to fall or be easily dislodged and can be easily
retrieved without risk of damage of injury to personnel. Personnel should not
have to climb onto stockpiles to attach/un- attach loads.
c. Bearers are to be placed beneath loads for ease of unloading and loading
when using mechanical equipment such as forklifts and for attaching slings
and other lifting accessories. Items that are likely to move/roll such as pipes
are to be chocked at each level with suitable materials.
d. Sufficient space/walking routes is to be provided around materials and items
are not to protrude or obstruct designated walkways.
e. Hazardous materials must be stored in tanks, drums or containers that are of
sound construction, securely sealed, clearly labelled and be protected in
bunds capable of retaining 110% capacity of the total volume of the largest
container.
f. Loose drums and containers are to be stood in a drip tray.
g. Flammable and hazardous substances are to be stored separately from other
dangerous substances that are incompatible (i.e. oxidizers and corrosive
substances must be stored separately).
h. Storage areas are to be kept clean and tidy at all times, have adequate
lighting and firefighting equipment and have sufficient signs displayed to warn
personnel of the dangers and restrictions (i.e. no smoking or naked flames).
i. Wherever possible materials are to be moved using mechanical means such
as a forklift, crane, and lift trollies etc. to avoid manual handling injuries.
j. Sharp edges must be protected and personnel must wear suitable PPE when
handling materials and substances.
k. Care must be taken when removing packing materials and secure fastenings
such as banding wire to avoid the contents from sliding, falling or collapsing.
l. When moving materials personnel must be clear of any loads and materials
must be secured to any vehicle to prevent movement during transit.
m. The storing of materials in and around partially and fully constructed tunnels,
stations, buildings and other structures must be avoided wherever possible.
Where this is not feasible only the amount of material needed for the shift
should be stored and appropriate arrangements must be made to

Package BH -03
prevent/fight the outbreak of a fire.

40.26 Housekeeping
a. Sites are to be kept clean and tidy and free from slip, trip and fall hazards.
b. All personnel are to be trained in the importance of good housekeeping and
managers and supervisors must undertake regular monitoring and inspection
of the workplace.
c. Workplace are to be left clean and tidy at the end of each shift and where
there is an accumulation of materials throughout the shift, at regular intervals
as required to maintain a clean and safe site.
d. Buildings under construction and nearing completion must ensure that all
combustible and flammable materials are removed at the end of each shift.
e. Nails are to be removed from timber as soon as possible, where this is not
practical, they are to be flattened and placed in a safe area (barrier and signs)
until nails can be removed at a later time.
f. Materials are to be stored so as they do not pose a risk to personnel stacking,
removing or walking by (further guidance is given in the materials storage and
handling section).
g. All spills are to be cleaned up immediately using absorbent material.
h. Cables/hoses/other trailing leads are to be protected, buried or secured above
head height to avoid a slip trip, fall hazard.
i. Waste is to be placed in designated containers and covered to protect against
high winds, pests or risk of fire. Waste containers are to be emptied on a
regular basis to prevent a build-up of material.
j. Loose or light materials that are stored on roofs or open spaces are to be
secured to prevent them from inclement weather.
40.27 Night Work
a. Before any work at night commences authority is to be sought from the
Engineer and suitable arrangements are to be in place.
b. It is well known that working nights can affect a person’s health if it is not
managed correctly. A key factor to manage is fatigue, as a fatigued person
will have reduced alertness, poor and slow perception and more likely to
suffer or cause and accident. Suitable arrangements must be in place to
ensure night work is carried out safely and without risk to those working, the
following areas must be considered;
i. The risks of shift work and the benefits of effective management
ii. What systems will be introduced to manage the risk of shift work
iii. Assessing the risks associated with shift work
iv. The actions to be taken to reduce the risks

Package BH -03
c. Area and task lighting are to be provided for all work areas and activities and
the minimum illumination is shown in the table below.
d. Illumination levels are to be checked using a lux meter during the shift and
records kept.
e. Metal halide and conventional tungsten or tungsten halogen lighting should
be used. The use of high-pressure sodium lighting should be avoided due to
the potential fire risk.
f. Only competent electricians are to install lighting.
g. Personnel who are required to transport, position, raise and lower mobile
lighting towers are to be trained and supervised.
h. The recommended minimum levels of illumination to be provided are shown
in Table 3 below.
Table 3: Recommended Minimum Levels Of Illumination
Purpose Governing Factor Lux Level
Security Depending on risk 5 - 30
Emergency Lighting For escape & standby 20 – 50
Movement & Handling Movement of people, equipment, materials 30
Stores & Yards Goods Storage 30
Site Entrances General Access 30
General Work Areas Rough work, site clearance 50
Craft Work General Concrete, Architecture works 100
Site Welfare Rooms All rooms 150
Fine Works Cutting work, detailed work, Testing 300
Site Offices At work station location 500
i. All lights including a flashing amber beacon on plant and vehicles are to be
operational at all times they are working or moving around site. Plant and
vehicles that have defective lighting are to be removed from use until repairs
have been carried out. Designated walking routes and work areas are to be
adequately lit and personnel are to be excluded from work areas or be
protected against being struck by plant or vehicles.
j. A method statement is required for all night works.

Package BH -03
40.28 Climatic Conditions

a. The arrangements for managing extremes of weather are to be included
within the contractors HSP. Extremes of weather will include as a minimum:
i. High temperatures and humidity
ii. High winds
iii. Dust storms
iv. Heavy rain and flooding
b. A Summer Working Plan is to be submitted to the Engineer by the 31st March
of each year showing how they intend to prevent and manage heat stress
injuries to their workforce.
c. A monsoon preparation plan is to be submitted to the Engineer prior the
monsoon season of each year.
d. Controls for preventing heat stress injuries are to include:
e. Reducing the length of exposure and increase the number of rest breaks
i. Providing cool, shaded rest areas
ii. Providing plenty of cool drinking water
iii. Assessing the requirements to provide rehydration and/or oral
hydration supplements to replace minerals and salts lost through
sweat
iv. Providing training, instruction and information for all project
personnel on how to prevent heat stress injuries the symptoms and
the treatment
v. Identifying workers who are more susceptible to heat stress injuries
(i.e., those who have previously suffered a heat stress injury)
vi. Monitoring the health of workers (supervisors to check their workers
every hour for signs of heat stress)
f. Project Partners are to ensure their workforce consumes a healthy breakfast
before starting work and where necessary additional nutritional breaks are
provided.
g. Working restrictions during high winds (i.e., when to stop lifting operations),
dust storms and heavy rain and floods are to be covered either in the Health
and Safety Plan or specific project procedures.
40.29 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and Work Clothing
40.29.1 PPE
a. PPE should only be used as a last resort but where a risk has been identified
by a risk assessment and it cannot be adequately controlled by other means
which are equally or more effective, Project Partners must provide and ensure
that employees use suitable personal protective equipment.

Package BH -03
b. Whenever PPE is to be issued, Project Partners must ensure that their

employees have been given adequate and appropriate information,
instruction and training to enable them to understand the risks being protected
against, the purpose of the PPE and the manner in which it is to be used.
c. PPE to be provided must comply with relevant legislation and meet
recognised Indian standards.
d. PPE must be issued and replaced when no longer serviceable free of charge.
The following PPE is mandatory and is to be worn at all times on site
(including visitors):
i. Safety helmet (see below for colour scheme)
ii. Safety glasses (shaded for outdoor work and clear inside structures
and during non- daylight hours)
iii. Safety boots
iv. Orange hi-visibility vest
v. Hi-visibility overalls for working in tunnels
e. Additional PPE will be provided as required after risk assessment.
f. The following safety helmet colour coding is to be used by across the
program:
i. White - MPMRCL and the Engineer’s staff
ii. Yellow – Contractor management and supervisory staff
iii. Green – Contractor Safety staff
iv. Blue – Contractor General labourers
v. Red – Contractor Banksmen/slinger/rigger
g. Other coloured hats may be used to denote other trades as long as the above
colours are not used.
h. The wearing of standard sunglasses and prescription glasses that do not
meet safety standards are prohibited.
i. Where a risk assessment identifies additional hazards, for example working
below ground, or in confined spaces, Project Partners will provide their staff
with suitable safety equipment and training to ensure that they can safely
undertake the task.
j. PPE is to be correctly worn at all times and the wearing of it is to be strictly
enforced by managers and supervisors.
k. Contractors are to maintain, inspect and replace damaged PPE and provide
suitable dry, clean and well-ventilated areas for its storage.
40.29.2 Work Clothing
a. All personnel are to wear clothing appropriate for the work being performed.
The wearing of shorts or sleeveless shirts is prohibited across the program.

Package BH -03
b. Clothing contaminated with grease, oils, fuels and other hazardous

substances is not to be worn.
40.30 Safety Signs and Signals
a. Safety signs are to be displayed where the risks to health and safety cannot
be avoided by other means.
b. Safety signs are to be pictorial wherever possible and where lettering is used
it must be in Hindi, English, the native language of the workers on site.
c. The colours and shapes of safety signs are to be consistent with BS
5499:2006 Code of Practice for Safety Signs including Fire Safety Signs.
d. Safety signs are to be regularly cleaned and inspected to ensure they have
not faded, been damaged or have been removed.
e. Where hand signals are used, they are to be consistent with the code of
signals shown in BS 6736:1986 Code of Practice for Hand Signalling or BS
7121: 2006 Safe Use of Cranes.
f. There may be situations where the hand signals are insufficient to meet
communication needs. In these cases, additional signals such as lights, pull
cords etc. can be used based on existing signalling practice.
g. Where flags are used as a signal a red flag will signal ‘stop’ and a green flag
indicates ‘safe to proceed’.
h. Irrespective of which signals are used, personnel need to be trained in their
use and clearly understand their meaning.
40.31 Working Over or Adjacent to Water
a. Working over water is not restricted to working close or at to coastal area but
also included locations such as:
i. Rivers, nallas and streams
ii. Lakes or lagoons
iii. Water storage areas
iv. Sewerage plants
v. Sediment ponds
b. Where there is a risk of falling into water, a fixed barrier must be installed and
signs displayed warning personnel of the danger, this includes structures and
scaffolding or any other place of work. Precautions must also be in place to
protect members of the public and especially children from entering the work
site and falling into the water.
c. Plant, equipment and vehicles are to be kept a safe distance from the water’s
edge and lone working over or adjacent to water is prohibited.
d. Suitable lighting is to be provided for the whole of the period of work. Lighting
must be adequate for night work and must illuminate the immediate

Package BH -03
surrounding area and water surface. Lighting must not interfere with shipping
or navigation.
e. The use of electrical equipment is to be strictly controlled and steps taken to
ensure that leads are not long enough to touch the water.
f. Personnel must wear a personal floatation device where there is a risk of
falling into water and drowning, otherwise lifebuoys with a suitable lifeline
must be installed along the water’s edge.
g. Where transport by water is required arrangements must be made for safe
landing stages and life jackets. Boats that are used are to be of suitable
construction, under the control of a competent person, not overloaded and
properly maintained.
h. Emergency procedures are to be developed and include arrangements for
man overboard, rescue of injured persons from vessels and provision of
suitable resources such as a rescue boat, equipment and the requirements
for regular drills and exercises.
i. Specific training is to be provided for boat operatives, rescue teams and
supervisors. Personnel are to be instructed as to the means of raising the
alarm and what to do in the event of an emergency.
j. Suitable security arrangements are to be in place to prevent the theft of
rescue equipment and boats outside of working hours. Adequate welfare and
first aid facilities are to be provided and personnel must be provided
instruction, information and training on the risks of biological hazards such as
leptospirosis and tetanus.
k. A method statement is required for all works involving working on or adjacent
to water.
40.32 Welfare Facilities
a. Contractors must provide suitable and sufficient welfare facilities as soon as
work on site commences (i.e., mobilisation phase) until work is fully
completed. Everyone on site must have access to adequate toilet and
washing facilities, a place for preparing and consuming refreshments and
somewhere for storing and drying clothing and personal protective
equipment.
b. Welfare facilities are to be conveniently available to people working on the
site.
c. Toilets need to be in close proximity to where the work is being done and
washing facilities should be as close as possible to the toilets. Washing
facilities also need to be close to canteens and rest rooms so that people can
wash before eating.
40.32.1 Toilets
a. Suitable toilet facilities shall be provided.
b. Toilets must be adequately ventilated, lit and maintained in a clean condition.

Package BH -03
c. WC must be partitioned from each other and have doors with fastenings.
Urinals must be suitably screened.
d. The numbers of toilets required will depend on the number of people working
on the site and the different locations where work is taking place (see table
below). Additional separate WC facilities must be provided for female staff.
e. Septic tanks shall be of a sufficient size/quantity to cope with the planned
peak workforce and arrangements shall be made for septic tanks to be
emptied on a regular basis to prevent overflowing.
f. Project Partners are to employ a dedicated cleaning team to ensure that
toilets remain clean and hygienic.
Table 4: Numbers of Toilets Required (Male)
Number on Site Number of Number of Number of

(Male) WC Urinals Washbasins
1 – 25 1 1 1
26 – 50 2 2 2
51 - 75 3 3 3
76 - 100 4 4 4
Table 5: Numbers of Toilets Required (Female)
Number on Site Number of Toilets Number of Washbasins

(Female)
1 - 10 2 2
40.32.2 Washing Facilities

a. Every site where anyone is employed for more than four consecutive hours
must have suitable washing facilities.
b. Washing facilities are to be provided next to toilets, changing rooms and rest
areas, they are to include:
i. A supply of hot and cold running water
ii. Soap or other means of cleaning
iii. Towels or other means of drying
iv. Sufficient ventilation and lighting
v. Sinks large enough to wash face, hands and forearms
c. Showers are to be provided for work where personnel are at a higher risk of
being contaminated such as handling hazardous substances, during

Package BH -03
demolition work.
d. Specialist facilities are to be provided for certain activities such as when
working with lead, asbestos or tunnelling in compressed air.
40.32.3 Rest Facilities
a. Project Partners are to provide sufficient and conveniently accessible mess
area for all workers on site.
b. Mess areas shall only be located within suitable buildings/structures, be
enclosed, free of dust/sand ingress and be air conditioned.
c. Mess areas shall be fitted with tables and benches and the consumption of
food is to be restricted to the mess area.
d. Where food is brought to site a suitable well-ventilated room is to be provided
along with racks or similar to store food and prevent it from becoming
contaminated or spoiled.
e. Fire protection equipment is to be installed in all rest areas as appropriate.
f. Eating and resting beneath or close to plant and vehicles or on the open
worksite is prohibited.
40.32.4 Drinking Water
a. Containers used for storing and dispensing drinking water are to be regularly
cleaned, clearly marked ‘drinking water’, sealed and annotated with the date
and time it was filled and protected from the elements as much as possible.
b. Employees are to be provided with cups or a personal water bottle, the use
of empty drinks bottles is prohibited.
c. During the high summer season contractors are to determine the necessity
for additives to replace lost electrolytes. Where additives are provided the
container must be clearly marked.
d. Water is to be protected from contamination and is to be tested monthly by a
recognised laboratory.
e. Filters on coolers are to be checked and changed as required.
f. Water tankers delivering potable water are to be registered with the local
authorities. Potable water tankers are only to be used for their intended
purpose; they are not to be used to for dust suppression by filling them with
other than potable water.
40.32.5 Smoking Areas
a. Smoking is prohibited in all areas, including but not limited to:
i. Eating and rest areas
ii. Office and inside buildings
iii. Accommodation and kitchens
iv. Stores and storage areas

Package BH -03
v. Refuelling areas
vi. At all work sites
vii. Inside plant, vehicles and controls rooms
b. Designated smoking areas are to be set up outside of buildings and in work
areas in a safe area clear of any flammable or combustible materials.
Smoking areas will be cleaned on a daily basis and a suitable means of
extinguishing cigarettes is to be provided.
40.33 Worker Welfare Accommodation
a. All workforce accommodation is to be constructed and operated as a
minimum in accordance with the requirements of Indian Law.
b. Worker welfare accommodation is to be built of good quality materials and be
maintained to a high standard. They must include provisions for social
services, first aid and medical and adequate recreational facilities both indoor
(TV, internet, games etc.) and outdoor (cricket pitch, football pitch etc.).
c. Project Partners are to undertake self-certification inspections on a monthly
basis for those worker accommodations that are assessed as non-compliant
and every 3 months for worker accommodation that is assessed as compliant
and issue a report on the findings to the Engineer.
d. Where worker accommodation fails to meet the required standards an
Improvement Plan must be developed and submitted to the Engineer for
approval and its implementation closely monitored with regular updates
provided. Failure to implement the Improvement Plan will result in further
action being taken offenders.
40.34 Noise and Vibration
a. Where there is a risk of exposure to high noise and vibration levels an
assessment must be carried out and recorded.
b. Where noise and vibration levels exceed the statutory exposure action and
limit levels, controls must be introduced to mitigate the potential damage to
persons health. The table below shows the exposure action level and
exposure limit values for both noise and vibration.
Table 6: Exposure Action Level and Exposure Limit Values for Both Noise and
Vibration
Exposure Action Exposure Limit Level

Activity
Level (EAL) (EAV)
Noise 80 Db(A) 85 dB(A)
Vibration 2.5 m/s² 5 m/s²
c. The above figures are for an 8-hour working day. Where shifts are longer than
8 hours then the action levels must be reduced accordingly.

Package BH -03
d. The exposure action level is a level at which certain actions must be taken
and the exposure limit value is the level at which personnel must not be
exposed to. If noise or vibration levels are above the limit value, protection
must be provided and the levels must be reduced below the limit value where
possible.
e. Where the noise and vibration levels exceed the exposure action level an
assessment is to be carried out and recorded by a competent person.
f. Instruments used for measuring noise and vibration levels are to be calibrated
and operated by a competent person.
g. Exposure to noise is to be reduced in other ways other than by providing
hearing protection.
h. The following hierarchy is to be used for controlling noise and vibration:
i. Elimination
ii. Substitution
iii. Engineering controls
iv. Personal protective equipment (last resort)
i. When personnel are at risk of exposure to high noise and vibration levels they
must be provided with suitable information, instruction and training and
undergo health surveillance to assess and determine any loss of function.
40.35 Manual Handling
a. Wherever possible, manual handling is to be avoided by using mechanical
means (i.e. crane, forklift, trolley etc.). Lifting aids such as kerb lifters,
manhole lifters, suction pads used for carrying and fitting glazing etc. must be
provided as appropriate.
b. Where manual handling cannot be avoided the risk of injury must be reduced
as far as possible by undertaking an assessment and identifying suitable
controls.
c. Manual handling training is to be provided to all personnel either during the
health and safety induction or as a separate session. Training is to include
the risks, good handling techniques and the use of mechanical aids.
d. Personnel are to wear safety boots to protect feet and safety gloves to prevent
injuries from cuts, sharp edges, contact with hot and cold surfaces etc.
40.36 Security
a. Security of construction sites is an important aspect in preventing
unauthorised access, trespass and unwanted theft from the site. Contractors
are to provide adequate security on sites 24/7, 365 days per year.
b. Due to the complexity and diversity of construction site activities, successful
security will require a site security plan in advance of occupying the site.
c. The Contractor shall undertake risk assessments to determine specific

Package BH -03
threats and hazards at their sites.

d. Typical threats for a construction site include:
i. Theft of plant and equipment
ii. Theft of fuel
iii. Theft of materials from the site
iv. Vandalism
v. Arson Alcohol/drugs on site or camp
vi. Breaches of security into existing buildings or adjacent areas
vii. Labour unrest, workplace violence
viii. Intruders and trespassers
40.36.1 Requirements
a. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the arrangements for securing
their construction sites and work areas against unauthorised access or
trespass. The arrangements are to include consideration of the following
paragraphs and shall be communicated to security staff.
b. Construction sites are to be fully hoarded with a secure, appropriate
fence/barrier around the boundary and/or perimeter. Standardised signs
warning of the dangers of construction sites and prohibiting unauthorised
access is to be clearly displayed in English and Hindi as a minimum around
the perimeter.
c. The number of access routes should be kept to a minimum and a gate or
barrier should be provided to enable security officers to control the flow of
traffic and be able to secure the site/office/compound during non-working
hours.
d. An access control system using an access/identity card or similar is to be
installed and all authorised personnel and visitors are to show their
access/identify cards when entering the site or premises; they are also to
show their card upon request.
e. A log of security incidents and visitors including deliveries to site is to be
maintained and submitted to the Engineer upon request.
f. The entry of vehicles and plant is to be controlled by issuing a vehicle pass
which is to be displayed in the front windscreen/dashboard. Vehicles without
a vehicle pass are to be issued a temporary pass; these are to be returned
on leaving the site or premises. Security staff should direct visitors to
designated car parks and observe compliance with site safety rules. (e.g.
appropriate PPE).
g. Sufficient lighting is to be installed to ensure adequate illumination of the site
and the use of CCTV and other monitoring systems is to be considered as
part of the overall security system.

Package BH -03
h. Suitable accommodation is to be provided to security personnel including the

provision of air conditioning in security huts and access to toilets and washing
facilities.
i. A vehicle is to be provided for use by the security team as required.
j. Only trained security personnel will be used as members of the security team.
These are to be secured through a locally licensed security company. Security
personnel are to be identifiable by wearing a uniform and ID security badges.
Security staff shall be able to liaise with police and emergency services as
required.
k. When determining the requirement manning levels, the following is to be
considered:
i. Size and geographical location of the site
ii. Design and layout (e.g. single or multi-level)
iii. Length of boundaries, perimeter protection, hoardings
iv. Security of boundaries and ease of access
v. Number of workers on site at different times
vi. Access points for workers and deliveries
vii. Location of secure compounds
viii. Emergency procedures for evacuation of personnel
ix. Working hours for security officers and the provision of breaks and
rest periods
l. For safety reasons a minimum of two security officers are to be on duty at any
one time.
m. The Contractor is to appoint a competent and qualified Security Manager or
Supervisor who will control and manage the security function on behalf of the
Contractor.
40.37 Health and Safety File
a. The object of the Health and Safety file is to store information needed to allow
future construction work (including cleaning, maintenance, alterations,
refurbishment and eventually demolition) to be carried out safely. The file is
to be specific to the Contract and not contain any unnecessary generic
information.
b. Project Partners are to prepare, a health and safety file covering their works.
Work on the file is to start early and incorporate appropriate information from
the initial/concept/detailed design through the construction phase and
finishing with the testing and commission phase of the works. The file must
be reviewed and updated as the project progresses and be handover over at
the end of the Contract.
c. The level of detail should allow the likely risks to be identified and addressed

Package BH -03
by those carrying out the work. The contents of the health and safety file are
to be determined by the Engineer.
40.38 Health and Safety Penalty & Awards
a. MPMRCL is safety conscious organization, any reportable accident (fatality /
injury) results in loss of life and/or property damage. These accidents not only
result in loss of life but also damage the reputation of MPMRCL. Most of the
accidents are avoidable and caused preliminary due to Contractors'
negligence. Hence MPMRCL shall recover the cost of damages from the
contractors for every reportable incident (fatality / injury).
b. In addition, every MPMRCL work site is exposed to public scrutiny as the work
is executed just on the right-of-way. Any unsafe act I unsafe condition
observed by public further damages our reputation. Because of the non-
voluntary compliance of contractors to the condition of contract on Safety &
Health and Environment, MPMRCL has been forced to establish safety-
enforcing organisation. The cost of establishing such organisation is to be
recovered from Contractor/s for all safety violations observed at sites.
c. The table given at clause 40.45 bellow indicates the Safety, Health and
Environment violation (unsafe act / unsafe condition) and charges to be
recovered from Contractors. In addition to above, penalty imposed by any
government authority, statutory bodies etc. for Safety, Health and
Environment violation (unsafe act / unsafe condition) shall be recovered from
the Contractor.
40.39 Undermining nearby structures
a. Make sure excavations do not affect the footings of scaffolds or the
foundations of nearby structures. Walls may have very shallow foundations,
which can be undermined by even small trenches.
b. Decide if the structure needs temporary support before digging starts.
Surveys of the foundations and the advice of a structural engineer may be
needed.
40.40 Drilling & Blasting Operations
a. The Contractor shall ensure that all blasting operations will only be permitted
following consultations with the relevant authorities and subsequent issuing
of the permission to blast permits. The Engineer will give his consent in writing
before any blasting operations take place.
b. All blasting shall be conducted under the direct supervision of a Licensed
Shotfirer.
c. The Contractor shall develop safety procedures and methods of working to
be adopted during the course of station building & tunnelling operations.
These procedures shall include but not be limited to methodology for -
controlled blasting procedures, Blast design for opening face & for regular
blast, Transportation of Explosives and other accessories Pre-split blast
design near sensitive structures, design and monitoring of ground vibrations,

Package BH -03
prevention of Structural damage due to ground vibrations, air overpressure,

flyrock & Flyrock Control during rock excavation for underground stations.
d. Statuary Compliances and other legal requirements shall include but not
limited to :
i. All necessary permissions for blasting operations to be complied
with.
ii. Use only DGMS approved blasting accessories like exploder,
ohmmeter etc.
iii. Do not keep explosives and detonators in the same container or
magazine.
iv. Do not use damaged/deteriorated explosives and accessories.
v. Barricade the blasting site by marking the four corners with red
flags.
vi. Misfires need to be dealt as per statutory regulations by the shot
firer.
vii. The appointed Shot-firer should have valid license issued by
Controller of Explosives.
viii. Sentries/ Wtch & Ward should be posted to guard all possible
entries to the danger area.
ix. Smoking and the use of naked flame, electric arc welding, oxy-
acetylene cutting etc., should not be allowed within a distance of at
least 10m from explosives materials, in stores, during transport and
at the blast site
e. Contractor shall ensure the safety of the structures and proper
implementation of the controlled blast design including muffling and
documentation.
f. Contractor shall ensure to contain the fly rock and vibration within threshold
limits during blasting operations. The precautionary measures but not limited
to following shall be ensured by contractor:
i. Sufficient technical personnel having experience in executing
controlled blasting to be deployed at the site.
ii. Adequate number of equipment’s, operators to be deployed at the
site to carry out the work.
iii. Adequate number of link mesh, blasting rubber mats/thick steel
plates, sand bags and old tyres to be mobilized at the site.
iv. Crane/earth moving equipment’s (with wire ropes and D-slings) to
be used at the site to handle blasting rubber mats.
v. Adequate number of skilled and unskilled laborers to be made
available at the site to carry out the blasting work.

Package BH -03
40.41 Work Adjacent to Live Railways

Whenever work is to be conducted in close proximity to the live railways then the
following measures shall need to be addressed:
a. The rules provided by the Indian Railway shall be followed.
b. No persons are allowed to encroach onto the railway unless specific authority
has been given by the Railway Authorities.
c. Adequate protection in accordance with the Indian Railway requirements shall
be followed. (Provision of Block Inspectors, Flagmen and Lookouts).
d. All persons shall wear high visibility clothing at all times.
e. Any induction training requirements of the Indian Railway shall be strictly
observed.
40.42 Work Adjacent to Live Roadways
Whenever working adjacent to any live roadways then the following aspects shall
be considered.
a. Close liaison with the Police and Municipal Authorities.
b. Production of an agreed traffic management scheme in accordance with the
local traffic laws. Allow adequate provision for road users such as temporary
barriers, signs, lights and road markings.
c. The provision and wearing of high visibility clothing by all personnel engaged
in the activities.
d. Traffic Marshals shall be appointed and deployed to ensure that all road
movement is carried out safely.
40.43 Medical Staff
a. A qualified Doctor, Nurse and assistant Nurse shall be in attendance at the
first aid base during all times when work is being undertaken on the site.
40.44 Ambulance
a. A fully equipped ambulance, as may be applicable, and driver shall be
provided at the first aid base during all working hours. The ambulance shall
be equipped with emergency life support equipment suitable for application in
construction site accidents.
40.45 Launching Operation & Segment Casting
a. Launching operation is a skilful operation and requires systematic methods
and competency, the Contractor shall take utmost precaution at all stages
like; planning, establishing casing yard, casting segments, transporting
segments, fabrication and erection of launching girders, launching of
segments, pre-stressing, auto launching of girders and dismantling of
launching girders.
b. The Contractor shall prepare Method Statement for the launching operation.

Package BH -03
The Contractor shall submit for approval of the Engineer a full description of
his proposed erection method including sequence of erection, use of
temporary supports, connection details and erection diagram and design
calculations covering various stages of erection process. The Safety
precautions shall be observed during the launching and span erection
operation:
i. The adequate working platforms and fall protection anchorage
arrangement shall be provided in launching girder.
ii. Adequate lighting arrangements shall be provided for optimum
illumination.
iii. The workmen engaged in reinforcement and concreting work shall be
provided with necessary PPE’s including hand protection gloves for the
segment casting works.
iv. Multi-Axle Trailers and Trucks shall be used for transport of segments
shall have valid registration, Valid Driving licence, Fitness certificate
and pollution under check certificate.
v. The transport drivers shall be trained on defensive driving.
vi. The drivers shall undergo medical examination including eye check-up.
vii. Necessary approval shall be taken from the Engineer before starting
the transportation of precast concrete segments.
viii. The launching girder shall have a dedicated engineer with necessary
crew in each duty shift.
ix. The entire area of influence shall be barricaded during erection and
dismantling operations of launching girder.
x. Close supervision shall be provided by the dedicated LG engineer of
contractors during the Segment unloading from trailer/trucks, lifting of
segments, shifting of segments, segment gluing operations.
xi. Auto launching operations shall be undertaken after approval from the
Employer’s representative.
xii. The stability of launching girder shall be ensured after completion of
auto launching operation.
xiii. The vertical deflection of launching girder shall be monitored at all
critical stages with and without loads and after every auto launching
operation.
xiv. A register containing all important operational details from erection to
dismantling of launching girders shall be maintained and made
available to Engineer whenever called for.
xv. Test certificate for all lifting gears including Mac-alloy / Stressing bars
shall be maintained.
xvi. Adequate illumination shall be maintained in the launching and erection

Package BH -03
operation.
xvii. The drinking water & toilet facilities shall be maintained to workmen
engaged for launching and span erection process.
xviii. Adequate access ladders / stairways shall be maintained for safe
ascending /descending of workmen / engineers.
S. Topic Unsafe Act / Unsafe Condition Deductible

No. Amount
1. Safety & Not complying to the minimum Rs. 2,00,000 per

Health manpower requirements as month
Organisation mentioned in clause 1.3, 1.6, 5.1 in
respect of Key personnel of Safety &
Health Organization
2. Safety & Failed to formulate or conduct SHE Rs.1,00,000 for

Health and Committee meeting for any month as per the first violation
Environment clause 16 & 16.1 and Rs.5,00,000
(SHE) for the
committee subsequent
violations
3. ID card Non-adherence of clause 7 Rs.1,00,000 for

first violation and
Non-adherence of clause 7.2, 7.4
Rs.2,00,000 for
Non-adherence of clause 14 subsequent
violations
4. Safety & i) Not complying to the requirements as Rs.50,000 for first

Health Training mentioned in conditions of contract on violation on and
Safety & Health regard to: Rs.1,00,000 for
subsequent
a) Supervisor/engineer/manager
Vol III, H&S violations
manual Clause training not conducted as per
– 14.2 clause 14.2.3, 14.2.4
b) Skill development training not
conducted as clause 4.2.2,
14.2.5
c) Training room with basic amenities
not available
d) Top management behavior-based
Safety & Health training conducted

Package BH -03

No. Amount
as per clause 14.2.3
e) Driver/Operator training from OEM
as per clause
f) Non-Compliance of Clause
5. Safety and i) Not complying to the requirements as Rs.1,00,000 for

Health mentioned in conditions of contract first violation and
Statuary clause 19, 19.1, 19.2 & 19.5 Rs. 2,00,000 for
subsequent
Inspection
violations
6. Safety and Internal Audit: Rs.50,000 for first

Health Audit violation and
Not conducted as per Safety and Health Plan
Vol III, H&S Rs.1,00,000 for
as per clause 19.3.9
Manual Clause subsequent
– 19.3 violations.
Comprehensive H&S audit Not conducted as Rs.1,00,000 for

per Safety and Health Clause 19.3.9 first violation and
Rs.2,00,000 for
subsequent
violations.
7. Injury and
Incidence Refer Vol III, Clause 5.5.4
8. Housekeeping i) Noncompliance of clause 22.26 Rs.10,000 per

single violation
Clause 22.26 ii) Housekeeping maintenance register
Compounded to a
Vol III H&S not properly maintained up to date
maximum of
manual
iii) Surrounding areas of drinking water Rs.1,00,000 at
tanks / taps not hygienically cleaned / any single
maintained clause 22.32.4 instance
iv) Office, stores, toilet/ urinals not
properly cleaned and maintained.
v) Required dustbins at appropriate
places not provided/ not cleaned.
vi) Stairways, gangways, passageways
blocked.
vii) Timber with protruding nails left as

Package BH -03

No. Amount
such clause 22.26
viii) Openings unprotected clause 22.14.12
ix) Unused surplus cables / steel scraps
lying scattered clause 22.25
x) Excavated earth not removed within a
reasonable time.
xi) Truck carrying excavated earth not
covered / tires not cleaned.
xii) Vehicles / equipment’s parked / placed
on roads obstructing free flow of traffic
xiii) Wooden scraps, empty wooden cable
drums lying scattered clause 22.25
xiv) Water stagnation leading to mosquito
breeding
xv) Disposal of debris in unsafe manner
clause 22.26
9. Working at i) Not using or anchoring Safety Belt as

Height/ per clause22.14.9
Ladders and
ii) Absence of life line or anchorage
Scaffolds
point to anchor safety belt as per
Vol III, H&S clause
manual clause
iii) Non-compliance of clause 22.14.10
22.14, 11.1
iv) Using Bamboo ladders are Prohibited.
v) Painting of ladders
vi) Improper usage (less than 1m
extension above landing point, not
maintaining 1:4 ratio)
vii) Aluminum ladders without base
rubber bush
viii) Usage of broken / week ladders
ix) Usage of re-bar welded ladders
x) Improper guardrail, toe board, barriers
and other means of collective
protection
xi) Improper working platform

Package BH -03

No. Amount
xii) Working at unprotected fragile
surface
xiii) Working at unprotected edges
xiv) Non usage of MEWP clause
22.14.4
10. Lifting i) Non availability of fitness certificate Rs. 25,000 per

appliances and as per clause 22.15. b single violation
gear Compounded to a
ii) Documents not displayed on the
maximum of
Vol III, H&S machine or not available with the
Rs.2,00,000 at
manual clause operator as per clause 22.15
any single
22.15
iii) Maximum Safe Working Load not instance
written on the machine as per clause
22.15. d
iv) Non-compliance
v) Non-compliance of 22.15
vi) Automatic safe load indicator not
provided or not in working condition
as per clause 25.8
vii) Age of the operator less than as per
requirement or without any license
and noncompliance of other item as
per clause 22.15. c
viii) Non-compliance of 22.15
ix) Non-compliance of any of the items
mentioned regarding rigging
requirements as per clause 22.15
x) Failure to submit method statement in
case of all critical lifting clause 22.15.t
xi) Person riding on crane.
xii) Non- availability of helper as per
clause
xiii) Creating more noise and smoke
xiv) Absence of portable fire extinguisher
in driver cabin
xv) Fail to guard hoist platform

Package BH -03

No. Amount
xvi) No fencing of hoist rope movement
area
xvii) Hoist platform not in the horizontal
position
xviii) Usage of Prohibited Cranes
11. Launching Non-adherence of any of the provisions Rs. 2,00,000 for

operation mentioned in clause 22.16 first violation and
Rs. 4,00,000 for
subsequent
violations.
12. Construction i) Non- Compliance of Clause 22.18 For item i)

Plant and
ii) Non- Compliance of Clause 22.17
Machinery
Rs.10,000 per
single violation
Compounded
to a maximum
of Rs.1,00,000
at any single
instance
For item ii)
Rs. 25,000 for

first violation and
Rs. 50,000 for
subsequent
violations
13. Site Electrical i) Non-compliance of clause 22.7 Rs.10,000 per

safety single violation
ii) Exposed electric lines (fermentative
Compounded to a
damage) and circuits in the
maximum of
workplace.
Rs.1,00,000 at
iii) Inserting of bare wires into the socket any single
iv) Improper grounding for the electrical instance
appliances
v) Electrical cables running on the
ground

Package BH -03

No. Amount
vi) Non-compliance clause 22.9
vii) Usages of prohibited Electrical
Appliances
viii) Noncompliance clause 22.9
ix) Noncompliance clause 22.8
14. Hand tools and i) Non-compliance of clause 22.29 Rs.10,000 per

Power tools single violation
Compounded to a
maximum of
Rs.1,00,000 at
any single
instance
15. Gas Welding/ i) Wrong colour coding of cylinder. Rs. 25,000 per
Cutting Vol III, single violation
ii) Cylinders not stored in upright
H&S manual Compounded to a
position.
clause 22.5 maximum of Rs.
iii) Flash back arrester, non-return valve 1,00,000 at any
and regulator not present or not in single instance
working condition.
iv) Fail to put cylinders in a cylinder
trolley.
v) Damaged hose.
vi) Using domestic LPG cylinders
vii) Fail to store cylinder 6.6m away from
fire prone materials
viii) Fail to use hose clamps
ix) Fire extinguisher not placed in the
vicinity during operation
x) Non-compliance clause 22.5
16. Electric Arc i) Voltmeter and Ammeter not Rs.10,000 per

Welding provided/not working or found single violation
damaged. Compounded to a
Cutting Vol III,
maximum of
H&S manual ii) Improper grounding and return path.
Rs.50,000 at any
clause 22.6
iii) Damaged welding cable single instance

Package BH -03

No. Amount
iv) Bare openings in the cable.
v) Non-availability of separate switch in
the transformer
vi) Non-availability of main switch control
to switch off power to the welding unit.
vii) Usage of reinforcement rod as return
conductor
viii) Damaged holder
ix) Fire extinguisher not placed in the
vicinity during operation.
17. Fire precaution i) Smoking and open flames in fire Rs. 10,000 per
prone area single violation
Cutting Vol III,
Compounded to a
H&S manual ii) Not proper ventilation in cylinder
maximum of Rs.
clause 22.4 storage area.
50,000 at any
iii) Absence of fire extinguishers single instance.
iv) Fire extinguishers not refilled once in
a year.
v) Fire extinguisher placed in a not
easily accessible location
vi) Non-compliance clause 22.4
18. Excavation, i) Non-compliance of clause 22.11 Rs. 25,000 per

Tunnelling, single violation
ii) Non-compliance of clause 22.12
confined space Compounded to a
and Demolition iii) Non-compliance of clause 22.13 maximum of Rs.
iv) Non- compliance of clause 22.10 1,00,000 at any
single instance.
19. Work permit i) Non-compliance of clause 22.23. a Rs.50,000 per

system first violation and
ii) Non-compliance of clause 22.23. b
Rs.1,00,000 for
Clause 22.23
iii) Non-compliance of clause 22.23.c subsequent
iv) Non-compliance of clause 22.23. g violations
20. Traffic i) Non-compliance of clause 22.20 Rs.10,000 per

Management single violation
ii) Non-compliance of clause 22.20.2
Compounded to a
Clause 22.20.2
maximum of

Package BH -03

No. Amount
Rs.1,00,000 at
any single
instance
a) Barricades Rs.10,000 per

single violation
i) Not Cleaned
Compounded to a
ii) Not in alignment maximum of
iii) Not numbered Rs.1,00,000 at
any single
iv) Not painted instance
v) Red lights/ reflectors not working
vi) Damages not repaired
vii) Not secured properly
viii) Barricade inspector not employed
ix) Protruding parts / portions repaired
x) Barricades maintaining register not
properly maintained up to date
xi) Non-Compliances of clause 40.10
b) Contractor Vehicles Clause 22.20 Rs.10,000 per

single violation
i) Over loading of vehicles
Compounded to a
ii) Unfit drivers or operators maximum of
iii) Unlicensed vehicles Rs.1,00,000 at
any single
iv) Absence of traffic marshals instance
v) Absence of reversing alarm
vi) Absence of fog light (at winter)
vii) Power / hand brakes not in working
condition.
viii) Provision of helper on construction
vehicle
c) Water Logging on roads/ non-cleaning Rs.10,000 on first

of tyres of dumpers and transit mixers observation and
Rs. 1,00,000 on
i) Water Logging on the Roads
subsequent
ii) Non-cleaning of tyres of dumpers and observation
transit mixers before leaving the site

Package BH -03

No. Amount
and thereby creating a traffic safety
hazard to road users.
21. Batching plant Non-adherence of any of the provisions Rs. 1000 per
/ Casting yard mentioned in clause 22.21 single violation
Clause 22.21 and Compounded
to a maximum of
Rs.1,00,000 at
any single
instance
22. PPE Clause i) Not having Rs. 1000 per

22.29 Vol III single violation
ii) Not wearing (or) using and kept it
H&S manual and Compounded
elsewhere
to a maximum of
iii) Using damaged one Rs.1,00,000 at
iv) Using wrong type any single
instance
v) Using wrong colour helmet or helmet
without logo
vi) Using for other operation (e.g. Using
safety helmet for storing materials or
carrying water from one place to
other)
vii) Not conforming to BIS standard
viii) Non-compliance of clause 22.29.1
23. Occupational i) Fail to conduct Medical examination Rs.10,000 per

Health Vol III to workers 22.2.b single violation
H&S manual Compounded to a
ii) Absence of ambulance van & room
Clause 22.2 & maximum of
22.1.d
22.1 Rs.1,00,000 at
iii) Workers not having valid ID card or any single
blood group not mentioned 22.2.b instance
iv) Absence of first-aid person in work
site 22.1.b
v) Absence or inadequacy of first-aid
box
vi) Misuse of first -aid box
vii) First-aid box not satisfy the minimum
Indian standard

Package BH -03

No. Amount
viii) Smoking inside the construction site
ix) Drink and drive or work Clause
9
x) Fumigation/ insecticides not sprayed
to prevent Mosquito breeding
24. Labour i) Inadequate no. of toilets Clause

Welfare 22.32.1
measures
ii) Toilets not cleaned properly 22.32.1
Clause 22.32
iii) Absence of water facilities for toilets
and washing places 22.32.1
iv) Toilet placed more than 500m from
the work site 22.32
v) Accommodation not provided as per
BOCWA (clause 22.33)
vi) Absence of drinking water 22.32.4
vii) Excessive Noise and vibration
22.34
viii) Canteen not provided 22.32
ix) Non adherence of Labour welfare
provisions of BOCWA
x) Fail to register establishment and
display the registration certificate at
workplace
xi) Absence of workers register and
records
xii) Absence of muster roll and wages
register
xiii) Fail to display an abstract of
BOCWA and BOCWR
xiv) Non maintenance /improper
maintenance of statutory registers.
xv) Delay or non -filling of
forms/challans
xvi) Non-reporting of any accident to the
labour welfare department

Package BH -03
d. Without limiting to the unsafe acts and or conditions mentioned above in the
Engineer shall have the right to deduct charges for any other unsafe act and
or condition depending upon the gravity of the situation on a case-to-case
basis. The charges shall be in comparison with that of the similar offence
indicated in above table.
e. Stoppage of work
The Engineer have the right to stop the work at his sole discretion, if in his
opinion the work is being carried out in such a way that it may cause
accidents and endanger the safety of the persons and / or property, and /
or equipment. In such cases, the contractor shall be informed in writing
about the nature of hazards and possible injury / accident.
The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until he has complied with each
direction to the satisfaction of Engineer.
The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages / compensation for
stoppage of work, due to safety reasons and the period of such stoppage of
work shall not be taken as an extension of time for Completion of the Facilities
and will not be the ground for waiver of levy of liquidated damages.
The Engineer shall have the right to stop the work if the Contractor is working
without license or has failed to comply provisions relating to wages, provident
fund and ESI for the workers consecutively for three months.
f. H&S Awards & Recognition Schemes Clause 18, 18.1 & 18.2
The following categories may be considered for awards and accordingly
schemes must be developed.
i. For every safe million man hours working without any reportable
incidents.
ii. Zero fatality contracts.
iii. 100% adherence to voluntary reporting of all accidents throughout
the currency of contract.
iv. Safest project team of the year.
v. Best SHE team of the year.
vi. Safest Contactor of the year.
vii. Best statutory compliance and welfare facility.

Package BH-03
APPENDIX II – QUALITY MANUAL

1 Purpose
This document titled ‘Construction Quality Guideline’ sets the minimum Quality
Standards that are to be adopted and implemented across all the projects of the
Bhopal and Indore Metro Programs. This document only provides an outline and
overview of the obligations, the detailed and specific quality requirements are
described in Indian Legislation.
2 Scope
a. This procedure applies to Metro Rail Projects and sub projects at Bhopal and
Indore, project information / records created regardless of format, which
includes information generated by the General Consultant, D&B Contractor(s)
and 3rd Parties.
b. MPMRCL contracts complete packages. These packages consist in detail
engineering, construction/production, quality planning, assurance and control
and at last quality verification.
c. MPMRCL requires the fulfilment of the MPMRCL CMS Quality Policy, the
quality objectives and the project quality plan(s) throughout the lifecycle of the
contracted work
3 Definitions
Term Definition
Bhopal/Indore Metro Projects’ General Consultant (DB E&C,

General Consultant
Louis Berger and Geodata).
The Delegated Client Representative to administer the

The Engineer
Contract
Participant The person who is or may be involved in the implementation of

the procedure.
D&B Contractor The organization contracted by the Employer to carry out the
Project D&B works.
Volume III – Quality Manual Page 240 of 398

Package BH-03
Term Definition
The term ‘Project Partners’ used throughout this document

includes the Client, General Consultant, other Consultants,
Project Partners
Contractors, Subcontractor’s, Suppliers and anyone else who
undertake works on the Bhopal and Indore Metro projects.
4 Responsibilities
a. Provide positive leadership on quality issues.
b. Promote an enthusiastic quality culture that delivers positive commitment to
and engages all employees in continuous improvement in quality
performance.
c. Keep abreast of developments of Indian quality legislation and industry
standards.
d. Ensure that a quality management system is implemented within their sphere
of responsibility and monitor and review its effectiveness and take necessary
improvement action.
responsibilities in quality matters.
f. Ensure that the disciplinary process to address breaches of the quality policy
or management system is applied where necessary.
4.2 Senior Managers
b. Provide positive leadership on quality issues within their area of operation.
c. Promote an enthusiastic quality culture that delivers positive commitment to
and engages all employees in continuous improvement in quality
performance.
d. Implement the business unit quality management system. In particular:
i. Identify quality training needs and have the necessary training arranged
and when arranged, release those who require training.
ii. Make arrangements for quality induction training for all new starters at
the workplace under their control.
iii. Implement operating procedures, for the planning and control of
activities associated with identified risks.
iv. Ensure that written method statements, risk assessments and/or quality
rules are brought to the attention of management.

Package BH-03
v. Appoint appropriate personnel to undertake quality duties.

vi. Ensure that suitable arrangements are in place for the effective control
of changes to planned methods of work.
vii. Keep abreast of developments in Indian quality legislation and industry
standards.
viii. Monitor and review the effectiveness of the quality management system
and report deficiencies.
ix. Monitor that personnel under their control comply with their individual
x. Give personnel under their control, including contractors, clear
instructions as to their responsibilities to ensure correct working
methods.
4.3 Designers
a. Ensure staff, are competent and adequately resourced to address the quality
issues likely to be involved in the design.
b. Consider quality when designing structures, equipment systems, temporary
works.
c. When carrying out the design, provide adequate information about any quality
risks associated with the design.
d. Coordinate activities with that of others to improve the way in which quality is
managed and controlled.
4.4 Quality Managers and Officers
b. Promote an enthusiastic quality culture that delivers positive commitment to
and engages all employees in continuous improvement quality performance.
c. Keep abreast of developments in quality legislation and industry standards.
d. Monitor and report on the effectiveness of the quality management system
and progress against the quality performance standards and make
recommendations for improvement as appropriate.
e. Monitor and report on operational quality performance and make
recommendations for improvement and monitor to ensure that effective action
is taken.
f. Lead and provide functional management for any quality personnel under
their control.
g. Assist with the identification of quality training needs, and monitor delivery
and recording.
h. Monitor and report on the implementation of the approved quality objectives.

Package BH-03
i. Produce quality performance reports as required.

j. Promptly alert line and functional management to significant quality issues
and where appropriate be involved in the investigation and ensure that the
findings are reported.
k. Review quality reports, identify any trends and ensure that there is an
appropriate response to prevent future recurrence.
management structure.
b. Set a good example and leadership on the site.
c. Ensure that only trained and authorised workers use plant and equipment and
that persons undergoing training do not operate plant and equipment unless
closely supervised by a competent person.
d. Ensure that employees under their control attend quality induction training
before working on the site and that they are correctly supervised at all times
e. Ensure that materials, plant and equipment under their control or brought to
site by the subcontractor has any necessary certificates of test, inspection
and examination and is safe to use
f. Ensure that clear instruction and information is given to persons under their
control.
g. Carry out recorded quality inspections of site conditions.
h. Attend any meeting on quality issues as required and as applicable, co-
operate with all personnel on matters of quality.
4.6 Supervisors
b. Provide positive leadership on quality issues for the members of the work
team for which they are responsible.
d. Monitor that personnel under their control comply with their individual
e. Give personnel under their control, including contractors, clear instructions
about the required methods of work.
f. Identify any quality training requirements of personnel under their control and
advise appropriate management accordingly.
g. See that all quality issues are reported immediately to the relevant manager.
4.7 All Employees

Package BH-03
Set a good personal example on quality issues within your area of operation.
ii. Euro Norm (EN),
v. Alternative standards may be proposed if they can satisfactorily be
demonstrated that they are equivalent, in all respects, to the defined
standards. Where there is a discrepancy or a conflict, the higher or
stricter standards shall take precedence. Project Partners are to ensure
that all prescribed registers, certificates and records are maintained and
available for inspection at the relevant work locations by any authorised
person.
6 Quality Objectives
a. Quality objectives must be defined and made available for all internal and
external stakeholders. The completion of the quality objectives must be
checked on a regular basis and the measures must be adopted accordingly
in line with the MPMRCL’s Quality Strategy and to achieve Right the First
Time.
b. These quality relevant objectives (KPI) will be defined by the MPMRCL’s
Executive Management and Program Team as appropriate.
c. Quality goals which are applicable to each program and/or project contract
and particular type of work will be defined by the Project Partner with
agreement of the Engineer.
7 Quality Standards, Codes and Specifications
a. Quality standards, codes and specifications must be defined during design
and engineering by the engineering disciplines (infrastructure and civil works,
system, rolling stock, operation and maintenance) for the different packages.
b. The program will comply with all pre-defined international codes and
standards which satisfies the requirements of ISO 9001:2015 and deliver a
state-of-the-art metro railway.
8 Tender and Procurement
a. Quality during tendering and procurement will be ensured by the following
measures:

Package BH-03
i. All tendering documents must fulfil the requirements of ISO 9001:2015.

ii. All program partners. must be certified according to ISO 9001:2015.
The certification must include the scope of services being provided to
MPMRCL and include the specific project location.
iii. Basic quality requirements for all tendered parts must be defined
(during design and engineering) with documentation by engineering
discipline (e.g. infrastructure and civil works, system/MEP, rolling stock,
operation and maintenance).
iv. Define selection criteria based on selected capabilities and
experiences.
v. Define pre-qualification in line with MPMRCL processes and
procedures.
vi. Detailed quality requirements must be defined by program partners
according to the complexity of their scope of supply (to be defined
during procurement Process).
vii. Potential program partners must provide a provisional quality plan
according to the complexity of their scope of supply (to be defined
during procurement). This provisional quality plan must be submitted
together with the bidding documents.
viii. Ongoing improvements of quality requirements (e.g. change of
standards) by the MPMRCL program and potential program partners
must be incorporated throughout the project lifecycle.
ix. Tendering documents must be approved by engineering discipline,
where applicable (e.g. infrastructure and civil works, system , rolling
stock, operation and maintenance).
9 Design and Engineering
a. The contractor must define:
i. Design and engineering stages.
ii. Review, verification and validation appropriate to each design and
engineering stage.
iii. Responsibilities and authorities for design and engineering.
iv. Inputs, related to the contract requirements, must be defined as there
are:
v. Functional and performance requirements:
• Applicable statutory and regulatory requirements.
• When applicable, information derived from previous similar
designs.
• Other requirements essential for design and engineering.

Package BH-03
b. The Contractor shall ensure that the Design and engineering outputs must:
i. Define relevant standards, codes and specifications.
ii. Meet the project requirements.
iii. Define testing/inspection procedures as appropriate.
iv. Provide appropriate information and documentation (e.g. for
purchasing,
v. Construction/production, testing, training, operation, maintenance etc.).
vi. be verified/checked at each stage by an independent Design
Verification Engineer (DVE) in order to:
• evaluate the ability of the results or design and engineering to
meet requirements.
• identify any problems and propose necessary actions.
c. Design and engineering changes must be identified and records maintained.
d. Design and engineering changes must be reviewed, verified and validated as
appropriate, and approved by DVE before submission to the Engineer.
e. Changes must be explicitly mentioned in order to highlight that the initial
requirements have been altered.
f. During testing phase special attention should be paid to changes (of scope or
quality requirements) to the project.
g. All defined quality relevant measures must be integrated in the contractor’s
Quality Management Plan (QMP).
h. Design and engineering documents must be checked, evaluated and
validated by DVE before submission to the Engineer to obtain their approval
for construction/production. These checks, evaluations and approvals must
be documented and reported (communicated). The quality of the design work
must be validated by the DVE at each stage of design submission through
different platform other than used by Designer.
10 Construction
a. To ensure adequate quality planning during the construction phase the
following measures are foreseen:
i. Program Partners must have a validated QMP
ii. Copy of the contractor’s current QMP
iii. Schedule showing all foreseen tests/inspections
iv. Schedule to perform audits in the contracted work
v. Procedure describing the handling of corrective action
vi. Procedure describing non-conforming items

Package BH-03
vii. Process for continuous improvement.

b. Program Partners must accomplish their work according to their validated
QMP and have to:
i. Fulfil quality requirements.
ii. Accomplish the work according to the relevant standards, codes and
specifications.
iii. Document and report the accomplished work.
iv. Train their personnel and assess their competencies.
v. Fulfil the requirements related to the contracted work.
vi. Perform and document planned tests/inspections.
vii. Deliver as-built-drawings to MPMRCL.
viii. Demonstrate the traceability of all quality relevant issues.
ix. Preserve products.
x. Control the monitoring and measuring equipment, including
documentation.
xi. Perform and document internal audits.
xii. Handle non-conformities according to the related procedure.
Nonconformities must be demonstrated to MPMRCL
propositions/solutions resulting from nonconformities
xiii. Carry out a continuous improvement (corrective and preventive action)
with documentation. Solutions resulting from the continuous
improvement process must be analysed
c. The Engineer will, as regularly as deemed appropriate, monitor work samples
with a frequency to ensure quality:
i. By inspecting the contractor’s work on site.
ii. Verify the contractor’s work according to the QMP.
iii. Perform and document planned tests/inspections.
iv. Verify the as-built-drawings of the contractor.
v. Analyse and approve changes within the contract.
vi. Pay special attention to project changes (scope or requirements) during
test phase.
vii. Perform internal audits for each applicable contract.
viii. Analyse non-conformities with the contractor and approve solutions.
ix. Analyse solutions resulting from the continuous improvement process
of the contractor within the contract and approve them.
x. Testing

Package BH-03
d. To ensure adequate quality planning during the test phase the following
measures are foreseen:
i. Involving of end-user
ii. Organisation of test performance
iii. Definition of test results
iv. Test scheduling
v. Definition of any quality procedures during test performance
vi. Training of personnel, as required
vii. Test documentation.
e. Performing quality assurance during the testing phase will be guaranteed by
the following measures:
i. Definition of functions
ii. Observance and fitting of new designed functions with documentation
iii. Observance and fitting of functions which caused problems during
design and
iv. Engineering or construction phase with documentation
v. Observance and fitting of functions which have been changed or
optimised during design and engineering or construction phase with
documentation
vi. Testing documentation in general.
f. MPMRCL contracts complete packages. These packages consist in detail
engineering, construction/production, quality planning, assurance and control
and at last quality verification.
g. MPMRCL requires the fulfilment of the MPMRCL Quality Policy, the quality
objectives and the project quality plan(s) throughout the lifecycle of the
contracted work.
11 Commissioning and Handover
a. To ensure adequate quality planning during the commissioning and handover
phase the following measures are foreseen:
i. Involving of end-user
ii. Organisation of commissioning procedures
iii. Definition of commissioning results
iv. Commissioning scheduling
v. Definition of specific quality procedures for commissioning process
vi. Training of personnel
vii. Commissioning documentation

Package BH-03
viii. As-built-drawings must be prepared and supplied upon completion.

b. To ensure adequate quality assurance during the commissioning and
handover process a number of measures have to be foreseen. These
measures include, but are not limited to a general check of project, project
packages and interfaces, including check of:
i. Documentation
ii. Materials
iii. Buildings and installations
iv. Earthworks
v. Concrete works
vi. Structural works
vii. Waterproofing
viii. Painting and coating
ix. Operation processes and procedures
x. Training processes
xi. Regular testing and inspection processes and equipment
xii. Emergency and escape procedures and equipment.
12 Operations and Maintenance
a. Quality planning during operation and maintenance will be guaranteed by
adopting the following measures:
i. Operation ability must be demonstrated and documented.
ii. Operating rules must be defined.
iii. Roles and responsibilities must be defined.
iv. Operation personnel must be trained, including the certification of the
trainees.
v. New personnel must be trained according to the job-requirements
before starting. Fulfilling of the job-requirements must be demonstrated
and documented.
vi. All training measures must be planned.
vii. Required, adequate documentation (operation and maintenance
manual) must be available.
viii. Inspections must be planned.
ix. Precautionary maintenance must be planned.
x. Inspection and maintenance personnel must be trained.
xi. Inspection and maintenance tools must be available.

Package BH-03
xii. Spare parts must be available.

xiii. Inspection and maintenance documentation must be available.
xiv. Operation and maintenance procedures must be defined.
b. To ensure adequate quality assurance during operation and maintenance the
following measures are foreseen:
i. Operational ability procedure
ii. Personnel training documentation and planning procedure
iii. Inspection planning and documentation procedure
iv. Maintenance planning and documentation procedure.
13 Training
a. To ensure adequate quality planning for the training the following measures
are foreseen:
i. Operation personnel must be trained according to a pre-defined training
schedule with demonstration of the fulfilling (e.g. examination,
depending on the job description) of the requirements.
ii. Inspection and maintenance personnel must be trained according to a
pre-defined training schedule with demonstration of the fulfilling (e.g.
examination, depending on the job description) of the requirements.
iii. New personnel must be trained according to the job requirements
before starting. Fulfilling of the job requirements (e.g. examination,
depending on the job description) must be demonstrated and
documented.
b. To ensure adequate quality assurance for the training the following measures
are foreseen:
i. Personnel ability procedure
ii. Personnel training documentation and planning procedure.
14 Closing
a. To ensure adequate quality planning for the closing process of the contract
the following measures are foreseen:
i. Operation ability must be demonstrated over a pre-defined period
ii. Tests and inspections must be finished and documented
iii. Personnel must be trained.
b. To ensure adequate quality assurance for the closing of the project all
previous quality planning, assurance and control measures must be closed.
Therefore, all project elements must be checked to ensure the required
documentation is available and handed over to MPMRCL. For example:
i. Tendering and Procurement

Package BH-03
ii. Contracting
iii. Design and Engineering
iv. Construction
v. Testing
vi. Commissioning and Handover
vii. Operation and Maintenance
viii. Training.
c. A completion list will be implemented and all missing documentation must be
compiled within an adequate timeframe. The contract will be closed when
MPMRCL gives a written confirmation of the final acceptance of all
deliverables before handover to the operator.
15 Quality Surveillance, Non-Conformities and Improvement
a. The Quality Manager (QM) must conduct internal audits at planned intervals
to determine whether the QMP:
i. Conforms to the planned arrangements and to the requirements of
MPMRCL
ii. Is effectively implemented and maintained.
b. An audit program must be planned, taking into consideration the status and
importance of the processes and areas to be audited, as well as the results
of previous audits. The audit criteria, scope, frequency and methods must be
defined. An audit schedule must be prepared.
c. If non-conforming project execution is detected the following measures are
required:
i. Take action to eliminate the detected non-conformity
ii. Authorise its use, release or acceptance under concession by a
relevant authority
iii. and, where applicable, by MPMRCL
iv. Take action to preclude its original use or application
v. Take action appropriate to the effects or potential effects of the non-
conformity, if the non-conforming project execution is detected after
beginning of operation.
d. When non-conforming project execution is corrected it must be subject to re-
verification to demonstrate conformity to the requirements.
e. Records on the nature of non-conformities and any subsequent actions taken,
including concessions obtained must be maintained.
f. The QM must continually improve the effectiveness of the QMS through the
use of the quality policy, quality objectives, audit results, analysis of data,

Package BH-03
corrective and preventive actions and project quality reviews.

g. The QM must take action to eliminate the causes of non-conformities in order
to prevent recurrence. Corrective actions must be appropriate to the effects
of the nonconformities encountered and include, but are not limited to:
i. Reviewing non-conformities
ii. Establish the causes of non-conformities
iii. Evaluating the need for action to ensure that non-conformities do not
recur
iv. Assessing and implementing corrective action
v. Recording the results of action taken
vi. Reviewing the effectiveness of the corrective action taken.
h. The QM must determine action to eliminate the causes of potential
nonconformities in order to prevent their occurrence. Preventive actions must
be appropriate to the effects of the potential problems, at least:
i. State potential non-conformities and their causes
ii. Evaluating the need for action to prevent occurrence of non-
conformities
iii. Set and implement the needed action
iv. Records of results of action taken
v. Reviewing the effectiveness of preventive action taken.
16 Quality Monitoring and Reporting
a. To ensure the effectiveness of the quality monitoring and reporting MPMRCL
will implement a quality committee who will meet regularly. This quality
committee will analyse and report to the management team of the MPMRCL
program the following matters at least (not limited to the list below):
i. Minutes of the previous meeting/review of pending actions and
decisions
ii. Quality key issues
iii. Project status
iv. Project documentation and reporting
v. Inspection and testing
vi. Surveillance
vii. Non-conformities and improvement
viii. Audits
ix. Next meeting

Package BH-03
APPENDIX III – ENVIRONMENT MANUAL

1 Purpose
This document titled ‘Environmental Manual’ sets the minimum Standards for
environmental protection that are to be adopted and implemented across all the
projects of the Bhopal and Indore Metro Programs. This document only provides an
outline and overview of the obligations, the detailed and specific requirements for
environmental protection are described in Indian Legislation.
2 Scope
This procedure applies to Metro Rail Projects and sub projects at Bhopal and
Indore, project information / records created regardless of format, which includes
information generated by the General Consultant, D&B Contractor(s) and 3rd
Parties.
3 Definitions
Term Definition
Bhopal/Indore Metro Projects’ General Consultant

General Consultant
(DB E&C, Louis Berger and Geodata).
The Delegated Client Representative to administer

The Engineer
the Contract
Participant The person who is or may be involved in the

implementation of the procedure.
D&B Contractor The organization contracted by the Employer to carry

out the Project D&B works.
The term ‘Project Partners’ used throughout this

document includes the Client, General Consultant,
Project Partners other Consultants, Contractors, Subcontractor’s,
Suppliers and anyone else who undertake works on
the Bhopal and Indore Metro projects.
Auditor Person with the competence to conduct an audit.
Volume III – Environment Manual Page 253 of 398

Package BH-03
Term Definition
Noise levels in Decibels (referenced to 20 micro-

A – weighted Pascal) as measured with A-weighting network of
standard sound level meter, abbreviated dB (A).
Action to eliminate the cause of a detected

Corrective action
nonconformity
Measure on a logarithmic scale of the magnitude of a

particular quantity (such as sound pressure, sound
Decibel
power) with respect to a standardized reference
quantity.
Level of a steady noise which has the same energy as

the fluctuating noise level integrated over the period of
Energy Equivalent measurement. Lmax is the maximum Noise Level
Level (Leq) during the period of measurement. L10 and L90 are the
percentile exceeding levels of sound which are
exceeded 10% and 90% of the time of measurement.
Any solid, liquid or gaseous substance present in such

Environmental Pollutant concentration as may be or tend to be injurious to
environment.
Presence in the environment of any environmental

Environmental Pollution
pollutant.
Surroundings in which an organization operates,

Environment including air, water, land, natural resources, flora,
fauna, humans, and their interrelation
Element of an organization’s activities or products or

Environmental Aspect
services that can interact with the environment
Any change to the environment whether adverse or

Environmental Impact beneficial, wholly or partially resulting from an
organization’s environmental aspects
Overall environmental goal, consistent with the

Environmental
environmental policy that an organization sets itself to
Objective
achieve.
Environmental Measurable results of an organization’s management

Performance of its environment aspects

Package BH-03
Term Definition
Overall intentions and direction of an organization

Environmental Policy related to its environmental performance as formally
expressed by top management, under signature
Detailed performance requirement applicable to the

organization or parts thereof that arises from the
Environmental Target
environmental objectives and that needs to be set and
met in order to achieve those objectives
Person or group concerned with or affected by the

Interested Party
environmental performance of an organization.
Systematic, independent and documented process for

obtaining audit, evaluating it objectively to determine
Internal audit the extent to which the environmental management
system audit criteria set by the organization are
fulfilled.
Ministry of Environment
Government of India is abbreviated as MoEF
and Forest
Use of direct or indirect reading field instrumentation

Monitoring to provide information regarding the levels of
pollutants released during construction
Any unwanted sound disturbance of the environment

Noise
around the area of construction operations.
Nonconformity Non-fulfilment of a requirement.
Annoyance, which results from any construction

activity that affects the material comfort and quality of
Nuisance
life of the inhabitants of the area surrounding the
construction site.
Action to eliminate the cause of a potential

Preventive Action
nonconformity.
Use processes, practices, techniques, materials,

products, services or energy to avoid, reduce or
Prevention of pollution control the creation, emission or discharge of any type
of pollutant or waste, in order to reduce adverse
environmental impacts.

Package BH-03
Term Definition
Procedure Specified way to carry out an activity or a process.
Abbreviated as RPM and is particulate matter with

Respirable Particulate
size less than 10 μm and is measured in μg/m3
Matter /PM10
(microgram per cubic meter)
Suspended Particulate Abbreviated as SPM and measured in μg/m3

Matter (microgram per cubic meter)
Unwanted surplus substance arising from the

application of all construction operations and any
Waste
substance or articles, which is required to be
disposed.
4 Responsibilities
a. Provide positive leadership on environmental issues
b. Promote an enthusiastic environmental awareness culture that delivers
positive commitment to and engages all employees in continuous
improvement in the protection of environment.
c. Keep abreast of developments of environmental legislation and industry
standards
d. Ensure that an environmental management system is implemented within
their sphere of responsibility and monitor and review its effectiveness and
take necessary improvement action
responsibility’s environmental matters
f. Ensure that the disciplinary process to address breaches of environmental
policy or management system is applied where necessary.
4.2 Senior Managers
b. Provide positive leadership on environmental issues within their area of
operation.
c. Promote an enthusiastic environmental awareness culture that delivers
improvement in the protection of environment.
d. Implement the business unit environmental management system. In
particular:

Package BH-03
i. Identify environmental training needs and have the necessary training

arranged and when arranged, release those who require training
ii. Implement operating procedures, including risk assessment
procedures, for the planning and control of activities associated with
identified risks
iii. Ensure that written method statements, risk assessments take into
consideration the likely environmental impacts and suitable mitigation
measures are suggested for the adverse impacts
iv. Appoint appropriate personnel to undertake site inspections for
addressing any environmental issues
v. Ensure that suitable arrangements are in place for the effective control
of changes to planned methods of work
vi. Keep abreast of developments in Indian environmental legislation and
industry standards
vii. Monitor and review the effectiveness of the environmental management
system and report deficiencies
viii. Make adequate provision for dealing with environmental emergencies
ix. Promptly alert line and environmental management to:
• Reportable significant environmental incidents
• Incidents that could lead to enforcement action
• Enforcement notices served
• Where appropriate, be involved in the investigation and ensure
• Report any visits by members of relevant administrative
authorities
• Ensure that the environmental manager / advisor is accompanied
on workplace inspections. Following such inspections, take
actions agreed as necessary. Thereafter report as requested on
the action taken
• Act immediately on any breach of environmental rules or
procedures, unsafe situation or potential threat to the
environment that comes to their attention and, where necessary,
report such breaches
• Ensure that the disciplinary process to address breaches of the
environmental policy or management system is applied where
necessary
4.3 Designers
a. Ensure staff, are competent and adequately resourced to address the

Package BH-03
environmental and sustainable development issues likely to be involved in the

design.
b. When carrying out the design, ensure that the environmental and sustainable
development aspects required for obtaining the Leadership in Engineering
and Environmental Design (LEED) certifications are taken into consideration
and are duly addressed
4.4 Environmental Managers and Officers
b. Promote an enthusiastic environmental awareness culture that delivers
improvement in environmental protection.
c. Keep abreast of developments in environmental legislation and industry
standards
d. Monitor and report on the effectiveness of the environmental management
system and progress against the environmental performance standards and
make recommendations for improvement as appropriate.
e. Monitor and report on implementation of environmental protection measures
and make recommendations for improvement and monitor to ensure that
effective action is taken
f. Lead and provide functional management for any environmental personnel
under their control
g. Assist with the identification of environmental training needs, and monitor
delivery and recording
h. Monitor and report on the implementation of the approved environmental
objectives
i. Produce environmental performance reports as required
j. Promptly alert line and functional management to significant incidents and be
involved in the investigation and ensure that the findings are reported
k. Review incident reports and investigation reports, identify any trends and
ensure that there is an appropriate response to prevent future recurrence
management structure
b. Set a good example and leadership by working safely on the site and wearing
the appropriate personal protective equipment
c. Ensure environmental protection measures are implemented.
d. Ensure that employees under their control have necessary training on
environmental aspects and that they are supervised for proper

Package BH-03
implementation of required procedures on site at all times

e. Ensure that clear instruction and information is given to persons under their
control
f. Carry out recorded environmental inspections of site conditions
g. Ensure that environmental incidents are reported and that all incidents are
entered in the incident register in an approved format
h. Ensure that good housekeeping is observed at all times at all workplaces and
sites.
i. Attend any meeting on environmental issues as required and as applicable,
co-operate with all personnel on matters of environmental protection
4.6 Supervisors
b. Provide positive leadership on environmental issues for the members of the
work team for which they are responsible.
d. Organise work to be carried out in accordance with relevant environmental
impact assessments/ method statements.
e. Give personnel under their control, including contractors, clear instructions
about the required environmental protection measures to be implemented
during the execution of work.
f. Monitor that personnel under their control comply with the implementation of
the required environmental protection measures during the execution of
works.
g. Ensure that for the execution of works, where appropriate, method statements
are available, understood and the identified environmental control measures
if any, are implemented.
h. Ensure appropriate arrangements are in place for two-way communication
and where appropriate deliver tool box talks to the work teams on
environmental aspects.
i. Identify any environmental training requirements of personnel under their
control and advise appropriate management accordingly.
j. See that environmental incidents are reported immediately to the relevant
Manager.
k. Ensure that the plant and equipment supplied is appropriate for the work and
has any necessary certification. Ensure that plant and equipment is
immediately put out of use if unsafe or presents a potential threat to the
environment.

Package BH-03
l. Ensure that only authorised persons operate plant and equipment.

m. See that unattended plant, materials and premises are left in a condition that
does not present a risk to persons or the environment.
4.7 All Employees
a. Set a good personal example on environmental protection issues within their
area of operation
b. Take care of their own health and safety whilst at work; ensure their activities
do not adversely affect the health and safety of others and the environment.
c. Co-operate in all matters of environmental protection and make their
contribution to reducing adverse impacts on the environment.
d. Ensure they have been fully briefed on, and have a good understanding of,
the task at hand. Always work in accordance with the instructions given and
any written environmental risk assessments / method statements.
e. Report any conflict.
f. Never deviate from an agreed method of working unless the supervisor or
relevant manager has been notified and authorisation has been obtained.
g. Ensure that they have and use the correct access, tools, equipment and
personal protective equipment for the work.
h. Never undertake hazardous operations nor operate any items of plant or
equipment unless trained and authorised to do so.
i. Maintain a tidy workplace with an appropriate level of cleanliness.
j. Report to immediate supervisor any defects in plant or equipment or unsafe
methods of work and ensure that plant, equipment and premises are left in a
safe and secure state and place when unattended. Do not operate any item
of plant or equipment that has become defective.
k. Report to your immediate supervisor all potential hazards and incidents that
have or could have resulted in personal injury or environmental damage.
ii. Euro Norm (EN),

Package BH-03
c. Alternate standards may be proposed if they can satisfactorily be

demonstrated that they are equivalent, in all respects, to the above-mentioned
standards. Where there is a discrepancy or a conflict, the higher or stricter
standards shall take precedence. Project Partners are to ensure that all
prescribed registers, certificates and records are maintained and available for
inspection at the relevant work locations by any authorised person
d. The following is the list of some Indian legal Acts relating to Environmental,
which need to be complied with but not limited to:
i. Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 (as amended in
2003)
ii. Air (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act, 1981 (as amended in 1987)
iii. Environment Protection Act, 1986 (as amended in 1991) and Rules
1986
iv. The Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000
v. Notification on Control of Noise from Diesel Generator (DG) sets, 2002
(as amended in 2011)
vi. The Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary
Movement) Rules, 1989 (as amended in 2019)
vii. Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989
(as amended in 2004)
viii. Municipal Solid Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2000 (as
amended in 2016)
ix. Notification, Central Ground Water Board, Act January 1997 (as
amended in 2000)
x. Motor Vehicles Act as amended in 2019, The Central Motor Vehicles
Rules, 1989 (as amended in 2019)
xi. Indian Explosives Act. 1884, along with the Explosives substance Act
1908 (as amended in 2001) and the Explosives Rules 1983 (as
amended in 2002)
xii. The Public Liability Insurance Act 1991 (as amended in 1992) and
Rules 1991 (as amended in 1993)
xiii. Child Labour (Prohibitions & Regulations) Act, 1986 (as amended in
2016)
xiv. and Rules 1950 (as amended in 2017)
xv. Recycled Plastic Usage Rules, 1998 (as amended in 1999)
xvi. Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001
xvii. Fly ash utilization notification, Sept 1999 as amended in August 2003
xviii. Construction & Demolition Waste Management Rules 2016

Package BH-03
6 Environmental Objectives and Key Performance Indicators (KPI’s)

a. Project Partners will set documented, measurable, annual environmental
objectives targets and KPI’s. The objectives must be consistent with the
environmental policy and a commitment to continuous improvement.
b. A management programme will be produced for achieving the objectives
setting out:
i. The designated responsibility for achievement of the objectives.
ii. The means and time-scale by which the objectives are to be achieved.
Any appropriate improvement targets and associated improvement
plans.
iii. The programme is to be reviewed at regular intervals to ensure it is up
to date and that it addresses any changes that may have occurred.
c. KPI’s will be reported in a format and timescale as directed by Engineer.
d. KPI’s will be regularly reviewed and updated accordingly to address changing
priorities and requirements of the MPMRCL program.
7 Environmental Management System (EMS)
a. The health, safety, welfare of all personnel, the general public and the
avoidance of damage to property and environment are of paramount
importance to MPMRCL.
b. Prime consideration shall be given by Project Partners to ensure that all
operations are conducted in such a manner as to eliminate the risks to as low
as reasonably practicable (ALARP) to persons, property and the environment.
c. Project Partners are to implement an Environmental Management System
(EMS) that complies with ISO 14001. The EMS shall be primarily controlled
and assessed by implementing an internal audit process, in which MPMRCL
shall be invited to participate throughout. The overall philosophy for
environment protection shall embody a positive culture by continual
improvement of the EMS in delivery of MPMRCL’s Environmental Policy.
Evidence shall be provided showing that there are regular reviews of the
performance of the EMS and improvement actions are implemented as
necessary.
d. The structure of a typical environmental Management System (EMS) certified
to ISO 14001 is shown in fig.1

Package BH-03
Management Review Environmental Policy
Continual improvement
Plan Implementation & Operation
Fig. 1: EMS Structure

e. The hierarchy of environmental documents in the EMS are shown in Fig 2
Environmental Policy
Construction Environmental
Standards
Environmental Management Plan
Environmental Procedures
Guidance, Forms, & Work

Instructions
Fig. 2: Hierarchy of Environmental Documents

7.1 Environmental Policy
a. MPMRCL is committed to delivering excellence to its stakeholders in all of
their activities from rail asset creation through to effective and efficient asset
management, by building, operating and maintaining a world class Metro.
Project Partners shall prepare an Environmental Policy in line with the
expectations of MPMRCL and include commitments to:
i. Embedding a positive environmental protection culture.
ii. Setting environmental objectives and targets.
iii. Providing adequate resources, training and the appointment of
competent staff.
iv. Complying with legislation and relevant codes and standards.
v. Adopt Environment friendly construction methods and practices so as
to cause minimum inconvenience to public and protect ecological
degradation
vi. Ensuring the suitability and effectiveness of suppliers and partners in
delivering requirements of the policy.

Package BH-03
vii. Create assets that are aesthetically appealing optimizing the use of
energy and causing minimum impact on environment
viii. Conserve and enhance green cover through transplantation of trees
and compensatory afforestation
ix. Make all efforts to create environmental awareness amongst
Employees, Project Partners and Metro Users
x. Strive for continual improvement in environment policies, process and
procedures
b. The Environmental Policy is to be signed by the most senior manager
declaring that environmental protection shall be their number one priority and
as a minimum the policy will be reviewed annually. The Environmental Policy
is to be displayed on office and site noticeboards and be communicated to all
personnel.
7.2 Construction Environmental Standards
a. Construction Environmental Standards set the minimum environmental
standards that are to be adopted and implemented across all MPMRCL
projects in order to meet the requirements of the MPMRCL and Environmental
Policy. This document only provides an outline and overview of the
obligations. The detailed and specific requirements for environmental
protection are described in Indian Legislation.
7.3 Environmental Management Plan
a. Environmental Management Plans are to be broken down into two levels:
i. Level 1 - Project Environmental Management Plan – produced by the
Engineer
ii. Level 2 - Construction Environmental Management Plan – produced by
the Contractor
b. Project Partners are to prepare an Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
covering all activities relevant to their project. The EMP is to focus on contract-
specific arrangements for the management of environment on site and be
developed to include details on:
i. Leadership and commitment
ii. Organisation, responsibilities, resources, standards and
documentation
iii. Environmental aspects & Impacts
iv. Environmental mitigation measures
v. Planning and operational controls
vi. Implementation and performance monitoring
vii. Audit and review

Package BH-03
c. The EMP is to be specific to one Contract. Where the Contract covers multiple
sites a master EMP is to be developed with separate supplement showing
site-specific information provided for each location. The suitability of the EMP
shall be regularly reviewed (at least quarterly) and a formal review is to be
carried out annually with the findings submitted to the Engineer.
7.4 Environmental Procedures
a. Project Partners are to develop project procedures detailing how
environmental protection will be adequately managed across their scope of
works. Project procedures are to cover the design, construction and
commissioning phases of the works where appropriate. They shall align as a
minimum with any MPMRCL project procedures.
b. Environmental procedures shall be regularly reviewed and updated to reflect
changes to work practices and changes to the site environment. Copies of
proposed changes are to be submitted to Engineer for review prior to inclusion
and implementation.
7.5 Guidance, Forms and Work Instructions
a. Guidance, forms and work instructions may be needed to supplement project
procedures, where these are required, they will be managed via the same
process as project procedures.
b. A number of forms and templates will be mandated for use by MPMRCL in
order to standardise information and achieve consistency of data.
c. As a minimum the following forms will be used by all Project Partners:
i. Environmental Leadership Tour Report
ii. Environmental daily site observation checklist
iii. Environmental weekly site inspection checklist
iv. Environmental weekly inspection reports
v. Environmental performance Report (monthly)
vi. Environmental incident Report
vii. Environmental enforcement Notices
viii. KPI Reports
8 Management of Subcontractors
a. The Contractor and subcontractors and any person authorised by the
Contractor to work on the site shall comply in every respect with the
requirements of the environmental management system.
b. The Contractor shall ensure that proper and adequate provisions are included
in all subcontracts placed by him and in all subcontract documentation. The
EMS compliance of the prospective subcontractors to be assessed by the
Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer prior to the placing of the
subcontracts.

Package BH-03
c. The Contractor shall employ only subcontractors who work in accordance with
the requirements set out herein.
d. Contractors are to have arrangements for monitoring subcontractor
performance.
e. At all times the contractors are required to manage their subcontractors
effectively and remain accountable for the actions of their subcontractors.
9 Environmental Risk Assessment and Controls
9.1 Risk Assessment
a. Project Partners are to ensure ‘suitable and sufficient’ environmental risk
assessments are carried out, recorded and briefed to relevant groups or
personnel prior to the onset of the works. For a risk assessment to be suitable
and sufficient it must:
i. Establish the risks arising from the work activity
ii. Be appropriate, given the nature of the work, and such that it remains
valid for a reasonable period of time
iii. Be proportionate to the level of risk and the nature of the work
iv. Identify and prioritise the control measures required so as to
minimize or prevent adverse impacts.
b. Furthermore, to be 'suitable and sufficient' each risk assessment must
consider of any factors that could change during the course of the job, thereby
introducing additional hazards or increasing the level of risk arising from
existing hazards.
c. Environmental Risk assessments must be undertaken by competent persons
who have knowledge and experience of the activity being assessed and the
process must start at the design stage and continue through the construction,
operation and maintenance phases as appropriate.
d. Documentation arising from risk assessments shall contain the proposed
resolution or mitigation measures necessary to reduce these risks to as low
as reasonably practicable.
e. Project Partners are to hold risk workshops at regular intervals to identify
environmental risks and these are to be recorded in a Risk Register.
f. The findings of risk assessments shall be incorporated and attached at the
rear of all method statements. Risk assessments shall be reviewed
periodically and at least annually.
9.2 Controls
a. Having identified the hazards, suitable controls must be implemented to
mitigate the environmental risks.
b. Controls measures identified must be implemented in line with the following
hierarchy of control and in many cases a combination of these will be needed:

Package BH-03
i. Elimination – remove the hazard from the workplace

ii. Substitution – substitute the item with something less hazardous
iii. Engineering controls – enclose, isolate, use ventilation, mechanical
aids, machine guards etc.
10 Method Statements
a. Method statements are an effective and practical management tool that will
be used to address health, safety and environmental issues involved in
carrying out the works. Method statements shall be logical construction guides
designed for use on site.
b. They shall contain a detailed risk assessment, environmental impact
assessments covering the task or operation; a hazard analysis, and methods
for preventing injury, impacts mitigation measures including engineering
controls and personal protective equipment.
c. The technical scope of method statements is to be defined and approved and
given approval by the Engineer.
d. Where a method statement is required, no work is to commence without a
method statement being in place.
e. Project Partners are to develop a method statement schedule to ensure
method statements are prepared in sufficient time to allow a review before the
proposed programmed start date; in general, a minimum review period of 14
days is to be allowed.
f. Method statements are to be dynamic documents and must be modified and
updated to address the ever-changing situation that occurs on site. Once the
work commences method statements are to be reviewed for their validity to
ensure the content accurately reflects the work being carried out, where
method of work differ the method statement is to be modified.
g. Significant changes to method statement are not to be implemented unless
they have been re-submitted for review by the Engineer.
h. The Project Partners Environmental Manager will be one of the signatories to
the Method Statement, after assessing and verifying the environmental
impact of the prepared construction activity and ensuring that effective control
measures will be in place, timely.
i. The contents of method statements are to be briefed out to those personnel
responsible for the works and a copy kept on site at all times.
11 Competency and Training
11.1 Competency
a. Project Partners are to ensure they have processes and procedures in place
to ensure that everyone is competent for the role they are to fulfil, further
details are shown below.

Package BH-03
11.1.1 Managers, Designers, Engineers and Supervisors

a. Managers, designers, engineers and supervisors are to hold qualifications
relevant to their discipline from reputed institution and have appropriate
experience for the role they are to fulfil.
b. Managers, designers, engineers and supervisors are to be able to read, write
and speak the language of those they are managing or supervising.
11.1.2 Environmental Staff
a. Project Partners are to provide an organisational chart showing the key
personnel who have responsibility for environmental management.
b. Managers shall have a minimum of 10 years and supervisors a minimum of 2
years relevant experience in the construction industry.
c. Project Partners shall ensure that each and every subcontractor employed on
the worksite appoints suitably qualified environmental staff to ensure the
effective function of the environment discipline within the subcontractor’s
organisation.
11.2 Training
11.2.1 General Requirements
a. Training is fundamental in ensuring that each employee receives instructions
regarding work hazards and the corresponding controls to mitigate the
hazards. Project Partners are to develop a Training Matrix based on a
Training Needs Analysis of their workforce. The matrix is to detail positions
such as managers, supervisors, workers etc. and what courses are required
by each position and be submitted to the Engineer for review.
b. All training is to be conducted in the native language of the worker or be
suitably translated.
c. In order to confirm the effectiveness of any training, proof of learning is to be
conducted (practical or theory) after each course. To ensure training is
effective it is to be validated by monitoring and undertaking assessments on
site. As necessary, training content and methods of delivery are to be modified
to ensure it is effective and adds value. The Engineer has the right to request
the training records at any time in order to verify the effectiveness of the health
and safety inductions and the overall training programme.
11.2.2 Environmental Leadership Training
a. Environmental Leadership training shall be conducted for all managers who
are working on the project, inclusive of all subcontractors’ managers.
b. Content of Environmental Leadership training is to be agreed by the Engineer.
11.2.3 Supervisors Training
a. Environmental awareness training shall be conducted for all supervisors,
including subcontractor(s) supervisors.

Package BH-03
b. Content of supervisors training is to be agreed by the Engineer.

11.2.4 Specialised Training
a. Specialised training designed to address specific environmental measures
will be required to be provided as necessary. Specialised training would
include but not be limited to:
i. Hazardous waste management
ii. Incident investigation
iii. Spill control
iv. Waste management
v. COSHH handling and storage
vi. Dust control
vii. First aid, etc.
b. In general, specialised training is only to be undertaken by a competent third-
party organisation unless it can be proven that the in-house provider has the
necessary competencies. Specialised training being carried out in-house is to
be reviewed by the Engineer prior to implementation.
11.2.5 Training Records
Records of training and assessment are to be maintained for review and audit. The
monthly Environmental Report is to include information on courses and number of
training hours completed during the reporting period.
12 Communication and Consultation
12.1 Communication
a. Good management of environment relies on good written and oral
communications. It is even more important on the project where there is a
multitude of different Nationalities and languages across individual workforces
and projects as a whole.
b. Because of the different levels of understanding and languages present,
Project Partners are to make every effort to communicate in the native
language of their workers. Communication across the project will be achieved
by a multitude of different mediums including:
i. Project progress meetings
ii. Environmental meetings
iii. Training
iv. Display of information on notice boards
v. Alerts, notices, posters etc.
c. Receive information regarding:
i. Findings of inspections and audits

Package BH-03
ii. Best practice

iii. New or additional hazards
iv. Accident investigation findings and corrective actions
v. Lessons learnt
12.2 Consultation
a. Project Partners will appoint a Stakeholder Manager and are to have
arrangements in place to address interface issues with other stakeholders and
third parties to ensure that all requirements are discussed, hazards eliminated
or controlled and that disruptions are minimised.
b. Where work is likely to affect or cause nuisance to local residents/public,
information is to be made available informing them of the nature of the works,
expected timescales and contact numbers in case of complaints.
13 Environmental Meetings
a. Meetings are to be established to review performance and to monitor the
implementation of the environmental policy, plans and procedures’
Environmental meetings can be independent or clubbed with health & safety
meetings; a senior manager is to chair the meetings. Where subcontractors
are employed, a representative from the company must attend at all meetings.
b. A representative from Engineer may attend and observe health and safety
and environmental meetings.
c. Minutes of all meetings are to be produced and retained by the organisation
responsible for the meeting.
14 Reporting
a. Project Partners are to develop reporting arrangements in consultation with
Engineer. including submission of a weekly environmental site inspection
reports, environmental monitoring results, environmental incident reports etc.
The frequency and timescales of these reports will be in accordance with
Engineer’s requirements.
14.1 Monthly Environmental Report
a. Contractors are to submit a monthly Environmental Report to the Engineer by
no later than the second day of each month. The format and content of this
report will be agreed between parties but in general shall comprehensively
address all relevant aspects of environment and shall contain certain
information and data as directed by Engineer, for statistical analysis.
b. As a minimum the monthly report may include but not limited to the following:
i. Executive Summary
ii. Brief mention of construction activities
iii. Monitoring results

Package BH-03
iv. Interpretation of monitoring results, significance and influencing

factors
v. Graphical representation of monitored results over past four
reporting periods.
vi. Raw material consumption details such as electricity, diesel, water
vii. Generation of scrap during the month and sold to authorised
recyclers
viii. Generation of other type of waste and sold to respected
authorised buyers.
ix. Measures to control spills
x. Action taken on recommendation under site inspection
programme or specific directions.
xi. Summary of complaints, results of investigations and follow-up
action
xii. Trainings conducted
c. The Engineer will review and validate the Contractors monthly environmental
report and submit to MPMRCL no later than the fifth day of each month.
15 Inspections and Audits
15.1 Inspections (Surveillances)
a. Project Partners are to develop a schedule of regular daily/weekly and
monthly inspections across all sites to assess compliance with legislation,
conformance to environmental standards and implementation of suitable
mitigation measures. Environmental site inspections are to be recorded in an
agreed format with copies of the reports issued to the Engineer.
b. Regular Inspections, weekly/monthly will be carried out by the Engineer.
Generally, all the areas of the construction sites are covered in a month.
Observations from these inspections are captured in a report and will be
copied to the relevant contractor as a minimum for necessary actions.
c. The observations are to be discussed in the Environmental meetings.
Corrective and Preventive actions suggested by Engineer from observations
made in the previous inspections are reviewed and validated. Results are to
be analysed on a monthly basis to identify positive and any negative trends.
Where negative trends are identified Improvement Plans are to be developed
to prevent recurrences
15.2 Audits and Assessments
a. Project Partners shall develop an audit/assessment schedule to assess
compliance with legislation, conformance to environmental standards and to
identify Corrective and Preventive actions. As a minimum contractor shall
conduct internal audits on their environmental management system across all

Package BH-03
sites every 3 months and submit to the Engineer. The Engineer is to be

advised in advance of all audits to be performed in order to have the
opportunity to attend and evaluate the thoroughness of the audit or
assessment.
b. The Engineer will conduct their own environmental audits or assessments to
confirm the effectiveness of the Contractor’s Construction Environmental
Management Plan and that the required mitigation measures are routinely
implemented and environmental standards are maintained. Corrective actions
resulting from audits and assessments are to be addressed holistically across
the site and must be tracked until they are closed. Those that remain open
past their deadline date are to be recorded in the monthly Environmental
Report.
16 Environmental Enforcement Notices
a. Project Partners are to have enforcement and disciplinary procedures in place
that address non-compliance or wilful disregard to environmental protection
standards.
b. The Engineer is responsible for issuing the following enforcement action.
i. Improvement Notices will be issued if in the opinion of the issuer that
there has been a contravention of one or more contractual requirements
causing significant adverse impact on environment.
ii. An Improvement Notice will require the responsible person
(organisation or individual) to take the necessary action or remedy the
contravention within a specified period of time. Failure to address the
requirements of an Improvement Notice will result in the issuing of a
Prohibition Notice.
iii. Prohibition Notices will be issued where there is an immediate or
imminent risk to the environment. On receipt of a Prohibition Notice the
receiver (organisation or individual) must stop the work activity
immediately and work shall not commence until remedial actions have
been taken to prevent a recurrence and these have been signed off by
the issuer or their designee.
c. Personnel authorised to issue enforcement action will be nominated by the
Engineer Project Director.
17 Incident Reporting and Investigation
17.1 General
a. The Project Partners shall report all environmental incidents to Engineer and
the relevant Authorities. Reports of all the incidents - Corrective Actions and
Preventive Actions (CAPA) reports with close-out evidences of the incidents
shall be prepared. The CAPA reports are made available to the Engineer’s
Assistant as and when required
b. All incidents, dangerous occurrences will be reported and investigated.

Package BH-03
c. Incidents are classified into different tires according to their significance:

• Tire A: Minor
• Tire B: Medium
• Tire C: Major
d. The Project Partners and along with the Engineer is responsible for ensuring
that the local authorities are contacted in the event of Tire C Major incident.
Upon notification of an incident, the Project Partners are responsible for
ensuring all necessary response procedures are implemented.
e. In the event of Tire B Medium incident, the Project Partner is responsible for
ensuring that the incident responses are implemented. The incident
investigation is to be completed, corrective action plan is prepared, signed off
and implemented.
f. In response to an event of Tire A Minor incident, the Project Partner
Environmental Manager will be solely responsible for ensuring that the
incident response plan is prepared and implemented.
g. The below Table 2 shows the categorization of environmental incidents:
Table 9: Categorization of Environmental Incidents
Tire Definition Example
Small, containable spills within the site

Minor Incident boundary
One that is easily
Minor nuisance but controllable and
brought under
Tire A preventable from re-occurrence
control and
prevented from Minimal environmental damage but
re-occurring controllable and preventable from re-
occurrence
Medium Incident.
Uncontrollable spills within the site
One that will need
boundary
to be brought
under control and Excessive uncontrollable incidents which
Tire B prevented from are likely to cause nuisance or when a
re-occurrence in complaint is received
consultation with
None rectifiable environmental damage
the Environmental
and likely to occur
Manager
Major incident Uncontainable or controllable spills

outside the site boundary or which affect
Tire C One which cannot
local authorities
be controlled by
the project or that Excessive uncontrollable incidents which

Package BH-03
Tire Definition Example

effects local will re-occur to cause danger, nuisance,
authorities or numerous complaints or significant impact
independent to organisations involved in the
parties construction phase
Massive loss of biodiversity at the site
which will re-occur to cause impacts to
biodiversity
18 Environmentally Friendly Construction Practices

18.1 General
Project Partners /Contractors/Sub-contractors shall implement the following (but not
limited to) friendly construction practices during the construction phase of the project
18.2 Containment of Air Pollutant
During Transport of Material
a. Precautions to be taken to minimise visible particulate matter from being
deposited upon public roadways as a direct result of the operations.
Precautions include removal of particulate matter from equipment before
movement to paved streets or prompt removal of material from paved streets
onto which such material has been dropped.
b. All construction equipment should be washed clean of visible dirt/mud before
exiting the construction sites. Any deposition of material on public streets by
construction equipment should be removed by manual sweeping, or by
deploying electro – mechanical devices.
c. Wash pit or a wheel washing and/or vehicle cleaning facility at the exits from
work sites such as construction depots and batching plants shall be installed
d. Vehicles with an open load carrying area used for moving potentially dust-
producing materials shall have properly fitting side and tailboards. Materials
having the potential to create dust shall not be loaded to a level higher than
the side and tail boards, and shall be carried in vehicles fitted with covers.
At Dumping Sites
a. The excavated materials to be placed in the designated dumping/disposal
areas.
b. Materials to be placed in such a manner that will minimise dust production.
Material shall be stabilised each day by watering or other accepted dust
suppression techniques.
c. The heights from which materials are dropped shall be the minimum practical
height to limit fugitive dust generation.
d. During dry weather, dust control methods such as water sprinkling must be
used daily especially on windy, dry day to prevent any dust from blowing.

Package BH-03
During rains, the stockpile may be covered with tarpaulin or similar material
to prevent run off.
e. Water sprinkling to be provided at any time that it is required for dust control
use.
f. Dust control activities shall continue even during work stoppages.
At Construction Site
a. The Contractor shall under Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
obtain Consent to Establish (CTE) and Consent to Operate (CTO) from the
Madhya Pradesh Pollution Control Board for establishing the Batching Plant
and for construction of Viaduct along the project alignment.
b. Water to be sprayed at construction sites as required to suppress dust, during
handling of excavation soil or debris or during demolition.
c. Effective water sprays shall be used during the delivery and handling of all
raw sand and aggregate and other similar materials, when dust is likely to be
created and to dampen all stored materials during dry and windy weather.
d. Areas within the site such as construction Depots and Batching Plants, where
there is a regular movement of vehicles shall have an approved hard surface
that is kept clear of loose surface material.
e. Unless the Engineer has given consent otherwise, all motorized vehicles on
the Site to be restricted to a maximum speed of 15 kilometres per hour and
confine haulage and delivery vehicles to the designated roadways inside the
site.
f. At the Batching plant the following additional conditions shall be complied
with:
• Prevention of dust nuisance at all times as a result of the construction
activities.
• Concrete Batching plant and Crushing plant sites and ancillary areas to
be frequently watered to minimise any dust emission.
g. Hoardings to be arranged securely around all construction work sites during
the main construction activity, to contain dust within the site area and also to
reduce air turbulence caused by passing traffic. The hoarding shall be safely
secured to the ground to prevent from toppling with minimum gap between
the base of hoarding and ground surface.
During Drilling and Blasting
a. Water spray should be used to control dust during breaking of rock/concrete.
b. During blasting operations, appropriate precautions should be taken to
minimise dust such as the use of blast nets, canvas covers and watering.
c. Wire mesh made of heavy-duty tyres or sand bags should be used over blast
area on each shot to prevent flying rock and reduce dust.

Package BH-03
d. Blasting technique should be consistent not only with nature and quantity of
rock to be blasted but also the location of blasting.
e. Due preference to be given to explosives with better environmental
characteristics.
f. Vibration shall be monitored during blasting and values shall not exceed the
standards.
18.3 Containment of water Pollution
a. Temporary open storage of excavated materials proposed to be used for
backfill on site should be covered with tarpaulin or similar fabric during rainy
season or at any time of the year when rainstorms are likely. Washout of
construction or excavated materials should be diverted to drainage system
through appropriate sediment traps.
b. Polymer slurries or other grouts used in diaphragm wall construction piling
and other concrete works should be collected in a separate slurry collection
system. If reuse is not practicable then it should be disposed of at nearest
landfill site after obtaining permission from agency owning the landfill and
under the conditions imposed by the agency concerned.
c. Wastewater arising from site offices, canteens or toilet facilities constructed
at site are to be discharged or directed into sewers after obtaining prior
approval of agency controlling the system.
d. Oil separator/interceptors shall be provided at Batching Plant and
construction Depot location for vehicle maintenance to prevent the release of
oils and grease into the drainage system. These shall be cleaned on a regular
basis.
e. A Spill Prevention and Control Procedure shall be prepared to identify project
components such as storage areas, storage tanks that could allow discharge
of oil grease or hazardous materials to the drainage system or ultimately in
any water body during spillage.
f. Surface run-off from construction Depots and Batching Plants should be
discharged into storm drains via adequately designed sand/silt removal
facilities such as sand traps silt traps or sediment basins.
g. Construction works should be programmed to minimize soil excavation works
in rainy seasons (July to September). If excavation in soil could not be
avoided in these months or at any time of year when rains are likely, for the
purpose of preventing soil erosion, temporarily exposed slope surfaces
should be covered e.g. by tarpaulin, and temporary access roads should be
protected by crushed stone or gravel, as excavation proceeds. Arrangement
should always be in place to ensure that adequate surface protection
measures can be safely carried out well before the arrival of rains.
h. Measures should be taken to minimize the ingress of rainwater into trenches.
If excavation of trenches in wet seasons is necessary, they should be dug
and backfilled in short sections. Rainwater pumped out from trenches or

Package BH-03
foundation excavation should be discharged into storm drains via silt removal
facilities.
i. Open stockpiles of construction materials (e.g. aggregates, sand and fill
material) on sites should be covered with tarpaulin or similar fabric during
rainstorms. Measures should be taken to prevent the washing away of
construction materials, soil, silt or debris into any drainage system.
j. Manholes should always be adequately covered and temporarily sealed so
as to prevent silt, construction materials or debris from getting into the
drainage system, and to prevent storm run-off from getting into sewers.
Discharge of surface run-off into sewers must always be prevented in order
not to unduly overload the sewerage system.
k. Groundwater pumped out of wells, etc. for the lowering of ground water level
in basement of foundation construction, and groundwater seepage pumped
out of tunnels under construction should be discharged into storm drains after
the removal of silt in silt removal facilities.
l. Wastewater from Concrete Batching & Precast Concrete Casting and that
generated from the washing down of mixer trucks and drum mixers and
similar equipment should wherever practicable be recycled. The discharge of
wastewater should be kept to a minimum.
m. The section of construction road between the wheel washing bay and the
public road should be paved to reduce vehicle tracking of soil and to prevent
site run-off from entering public road drains.
n. Surface run-off should be segregated from the concrete batching plant and
casting yard area as much as possible and diverted to the storm water
drainage system. Surface run-off contaminated by materials in a concrete
batching plant or casting yard should be adequately treated before disposal
into storm water drains.
18.4 Containment of Noise and Vibration
18.4.1 Noise
a. Construction of facilities and structures would require the use of equipment,
which may generate high noise levels and adversely affect noise sensitive
receivers.
b. In assessing the impact of construction noise and hence its containment, the
nature and level of activities that generate noise, the pathway through which
noise travels, the sensitivity of the receptor, and the period of exposure should
be considered.
c. Environmental noise is measured in decibels (dB). To better approximate the
range of sensitivity of the human ear to sounds of different frequencies, the
A-weighted decibel scale (dBA) was devised. As the human ear is less
sensitive to low frequency sounds, the A-scale de-emphasizes these
frequencies by incorporating frequency weighting of the sound signal. When
the A-scale is used, the decibel levels are represented by dBA.

Package BH-03
d. On this scale, the range of human hearing extends from about 3 dB(A) to
about 140 dB(A). A 10-dB(A) increase is judged by most people as a doubling
of the sound level.
e. To the extent required to meet the noise limits reasonable efforts to be made
to include noise reduction measures listed below to minimize construction
noise emission levels. Noise reduction measures – include, but not limited to
the following:
I. Minimize the use of impact devices, such as jackhammers, and
pavement breakers.
II. Where possible, use concrete crushers or pavement saws for tasks
such as concrete deck removal and retaining wall demolition.
III. Equip noise producing equipment such as jackhammers and
pavement breakers with acoustically attenuating shields or shrouds
recommended by the manufacturers thereof, to meet relevant noise
limitations.
IV. Pneumatic impact tools and equipment used at the construction site
shall have intake and exhaust mufflers recommended by the
manufacturers thereof, to meet relevant noise limitations.
V. Provide mufflers or shield panelling for other equipment, including
internal combustion engines, recommended by manufacturers
thereof.
VI. Employ prefabricated structures instead of assembling on-site.
VII. Use construction equipment manufactured or modified to dampen
noise and vibration emissions, such as:
i. Use electric instead of diesel-powered equipment.
ii. Use hydraulic tools instead of pneumatic impact tools.
f. Maximize physical separation, as far as practicable, between noise
generators and noise receptors. Separation includes following measures:
i. Provide enclosures for stationary items of equipment and barriers
around particularly noisy areas on site.
ii. Locating stationary equipment so as to minimize noise and vibration
impact on community.
g. To the extent feasible, configure the construction site in a manner that keeps
noisier equipment and activities as far away as possible from noise sensitive
locations and nearby buildings. Plant and equipment known to emit noise
strongly in one direction should where possible, be oriented in a direction
away from noise sensitive receptor and reduce the number of plant and
equipment operating in critical areas close to noise sensitive receptors.
h. Scheduling truck loading, unloading, and hauling operations so as to minimize
noise impact near noise sensitive locations and surrounding communities.

Package BH-03
i. Minimize noise intrusive impacts during most noise sensitive hours.

ii. Plan noisier operations during times of highest ambient noise levels.
iii. Keep noise levels relatively uniform; avoid excessive and impulse
noises.
i. Equipment and plant are not to be kept idling when not in use.
j. Use only well-maintained plant at site, which should be serviced regularly.
k. Maintain equipment such that parts of vehicles and loads are secure against
vibrations and rattling.
l. Grading of surfaced irregularities on construction sites to prevent the
generation of impact noise and ground vibrations by passing vehicles.
m. Schedule work to avoid simultaneous activities that both generate high noise
levels.
n. The construction of temporary physical noise barriers.
o. If back-up alarms are used on construction equipment, their noise emission
level near noise sensitive receptors such as residences, schools, hospitals
and similar areas where quiet is essential, should be regulated, especially at
night time.
p. Select truck routes for muck disposal so that noise from heavy-duty trucks will
have minimal impact on sensitive land uses (e.g., residential).
q. Conduct truck loading, unloading and hauling operations in a manner such
that noise and vibration are kept to a minimum.
r. Route construction equipment and vehicles carrying soil, concrete or other
materials over streets and routes that will cause least disturbance to residents
in vicinity of work.
s. Avoid operating truck on streets that pass by schools during school hours.
t. The maximum permissible sound pressure level for new generator sets (up
to 1000 KVA) run on diesel, shall be 75 dB(A) at one metre from the enclosure
surface.
u. For existing diesel generator sets, the noise from the DG set shall be
controlled by providing an acoustic enclosure or acoustic treatment of the
room for DG sets. Such acoustic enclosures/acoustically treated rooms, shall
be so designed for minimum 25 dB(A) insertion loss or for meeting the
ambient noise standards, whichever is on higher side.
18.4.2 Vibration
a. Vibration consists of rapidly fluctuating motions with an average motion of
zero. During vibration the oscillatory waves propagate from the source
through the ground to adjacent buildings.
b. Vibration from construction projects is caused by general equipment
operations, and is usually highest during pile driving, soil compacting, jack

Package BH-03
hammering and construction related demolition activities.

c. Although the vibration is sometimes noticeable outdoors, it is almost
exclusively an indoor problem.
d. Vibration energy spreads out as it travels through the ground, losing its
strength the further it goes. High frequency vibrations dissipate much
quicker than low frequency vibrations, which can travel further.
e. Construction equipment usually operates in the mid- to upper- frequency,
which has less potential to damage structures. Earthquakes produce
vibrations at very low frequencies, resulting in a higher potential for structural
damage.
f. The primary concern is that the vibration can be intrusive and annoying to
building occupants.
g. Buildings founded on the soil in the vicinity of the construction site respond to
these vibrations, with varying results ranging from no perceptible effects at
the lowest levels, low rumbling sounds and feelable vibrations at moderate
levels and slight damage at the highest levels
h. Ground vibrations from construction activities very rarely reach the levels that
can damage structures, but can achieve the audible and feelable ranges in
buildings very close to the site.
i. There are several different ways to quantify vibration amplitude. One such is
the peak particle velocity (PPV) which is defined as the maximum
instantaneous positive or negative peak of the vibration signal
j. Although peak particle velocity is appropriate for evaluating the potential of
building damage, it is not suitable for evaluating human response. Because
the net average of a vibration signal is zero, the root mean square (rms)
amplitude is used to describe the "smoothed" vibration amplitude
k. The root mean square of a signal is the square root of the average of the
squared amplitude of the signal. The average is typically calculated over a
one-second period. The rms amplitude is always less than the PPV and is
always positive
l. The PPV and rms velocity are normally described in inches per second in the
USA and meters per second in the rest of the world
m. Although it is not universally accepted, decibel notation is in common use for
vibration. Decibel notation acts to compress the range of numbers required to
describe vibration
n. Vibration velocity level in decibels is defined as:
V
LV =20 log 10 ( )
Vref
where "Lv" is the velocity level in decibels, "v" is the rms velocity amplitude,

Package BH-03
and "Vref" is the reference velocity amplitude.

o. A reference must always be specified whenever a quantity is expressed in
terms of decibels. The accepted reference quantities for vibration velocity are
1x10-6 inches/second in the USA and either 1x10-8 meters/second or 5x10·8
meters/second in the rest of the world.
p. The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has studied the effects of
construction vibration and these are Tabulated below in Table- 10:
Table 10 Effects of Construction Vibration
Peak Particle
Effects on Humans Effects on Buildings
Velocity (in/sec)
<0.005 Imperceptible No effect on buildings
0.005 to 0.015 Barely Perceptible No effect on buildings
0.02 to 0.05 Level at which No effect on buildings

continuous vibrations
begin to annoy in
buildings
0.1 to 0.5 Vibrations considered Minimal potential for damage

unacceptable for people to weak or sensitive
exposed to continuous structures
or long-term vibration
0.5 to 1.0 Vibrations considered Threshold at which there is a

bothersome by most risk of architectural damage
people, however to buildings with plastered
tolerable if short term in ceilings and walls. Some risk
length to ancient monuments and
ruins
1.0 to 2.0 Vibrations considered U.S. Bureau of Mines data

unpleasant by most indicates that blasting
people vibration in this range will not
harm most buildings. Most
construction vibration limits
are in this range.
3.0 Vibration is unpleasant Potential for architectural

damage and possible minor
structural damage
q. various types of construction equipment have been measured under a wide

variety of construction activities with an average of source levels reported in

Package BH-03
terms of velocity levels as shown in Table- 11 below.

Table 11 Vibration Source Levels for Construction Equipment (From
measured data)
PPV at 25 ft Approximate Lvx

Equipment
(in/sec) at 25 ft
Pile Driver (impact) upper range 1.518 112
typical 0.644 104
Pile Driver (sonic) upper range 0.734 105
typical 0.170 93
Clam shovel drop (slurry wall) 0.202 94
Hydro mill (slurry wall) in soil 0.008 66
in rock 0.017 75
Large bulldozer 0.089 87
Caisson drilling 0.089 87
Loaded trucks 0.076 86
Jackhammer 0.035 79
Small bulldozer 0.003 58
X RMS velocity in decibels (VdB) re 1 µinch/second
r. Although the table gives one level for each piece of equipment, it should be
noted that there is a considerable variation in reported ground vibration levels
from construction activities. The data provide a reasonable estimate for a wide
range of soil conditions
s. Construction vibration should be assessed in cases where there is a
significant potential for impact from construction activities
t. Such activities include blasting, pile driving, demolition and drilling or
excavation in close proximity to sensitive structures
u. The vibration level limits at work sites adjacent to the alignment shall conform
to permit values of peak particle velocity as give in Table- 12.
Table 12 Permitted Values of PPV

Package BH-03
Max. PPV
SI.
Condition of Structure
No.
in mm/sec inch/sec
1. Most structures in "good condition" 25 0.98
2. Most structures in "fair condition" 12 0.47
3. Most structures in "poor condition" 5 0.12
4. Water supply structures 5 0.12
5. Heritage structures/bridge structures 5 0.12
v. Table-13 below can be utilized to find corresponding values of Vibration

Velocity Level Vdb and RMS Vibration velocity amplitude in mm/s or inch/sec.
Table 13 Ground Borne Vibration
RMS Vibration velocity RMS Vibration RMS Vibration velocity

Level VdB ref 1x10-6 in/s velocity in/s mm/s
100 0.1 2.54
90 0.0316 0.80
80 0.01 0.254
70 0.00316 0.080
60 0.001 0.0254
50 0.000316 0.0080
w. The following steps may be taken by the contractor to reduce construction

vibration:
i. Design considerations and project layout:
• Route heavily loaded trucks away from residential streets, if
possible. Select streets with fewest homes, if no alternatives
are available.
• Operate earthmoving equipment on the construction lot as far
away from vibration-sensitive sites as possible.
ii. Sequence of operations:
• Phase demolition, earthmoving and ground-impacting
operations so as not to occur in the same time period. Unlike
noise, the total vibration level produced could be significantly

Package BH-03
less when each vibration source operates separately.

• Avoid night-time activities. People are more aware of vibration
in their homes during the night-time hours
iii. Alternative construction methods:
• Avoid impact pile driving where possible in vibration-sensitive
areas. Drilled piles or the use of a sonic or vibratory pile driver
causes lower vibration levels where the geological conditions
permit their use.
• Select demolition methods not involving impact, where
possible. For example, sawing bridge decks into sections that
can be loaded onto trucks results in lower vibration levels than
impact demolition by pavement breakers, and milling
generates lower vibration levels than excavation using clam
shell or chisel drops.
• Avoid vibratory rollers and packers near sensitive areas
18.5 Containment of Waste
a. Careful design, planning and good site management can minimise waste of
materials. Regular maintenance and cleaning of the waste storage areas to
be ensured.
b. Construction activities are expected to generate a variety of waste such as:
i. General refuse
ii. Construction waste including waste from excavated material
iii. Chemical waste and
iv. Hazardous waste
c. Handling and disposal of such waste may cause environmental degradation
and nuisance. To prevent it, such waste has to be handled and disposed
properly. As such, transportation and disposal of all waste shall be strictly
managed.
18.5.1 General Refuse
a. Each worksite would generate general refuse including paper and food waste.
There is likely to be a concentration of such waste at batching plants on major
worksite. The storage of general refuse has the potential to give rise to
negative environmental impacts.
b. Handling and disposal of general refuse should cope with the peak
construction workforce during the construction period. Provided the refuse is
stored and transported in accordance with good practice and disposed at
licensed landfills, the negative environmental impacts would be minimal.
c. General refuse should be stored in enclosed bins or units separate from
construction and chemical wastes. An authorised waste collector should be

Package BH-03
employed to remove general refuse from the site, on a daily basis to minimise
odour, pest and litter impacts.
d. Office waste can be reduced through recycling of paper if volumes are large
enough to warrant collection.
18.5.2 Construction Waste
a. Construction waste would mainly arise from the project construction activities
and from the demolition of existing structures where necessitated. It includes
unwanted materials generated during construction, rejected structures and
materials, materials that have been over-ordered and materials, which have
been used and discarded such as:
i. Material and equipment wrapping packaging material
ii. Unusable/surplus concrete/grouting mixes
iii. Damaged/contaminated/surplus construction materials; and
iv. Wood from formwork and false work.
b. Also, demolition of buildings and houses to accommodate station buildings
and construction depots will generate concrete rubble, plastics, metal, glass,
asphalt from surfaces, wood and refuse.
c. Waste from excavation would comprise soil, rubble, sand, rock, brick etc.,
majority of which may be used for filling purpose.
d. Prior approval to be obtained from concerned Local Authorities for identifying
suitable sites for disposal of Muck/Debris. Engineer may assist if necessary,
in coordinating with Local Authorities/ concerned Govt. Departments in
identifying the disposal locations.
e. The Muck / Debris to be disposed only at the identified, designated disposal
sites.
f. It has to be ensured that the disposal sites identified are away from residential
areas and do not require any kind of displacement.
g. The transfer and disposal of surplus soil may create air pollution. It needs to
be ensured that the routing to the site does not pass through busy traffic
areas, educational institutions, Hospitals, Office areas, Market areas etc.
h. The timing of muck is also an important factor and it is preferred that the muck
/debris are transported and disposed during the night hours.
i. Mechanized/Manual wheel washing facility shall be arranged at each site.
Wheel washing of all waste transporting vehicles shall be done before exiting
the site.
j. Proper arrangements to be made within site for temporary storage of muck
and for drying the same before loading onto the trucks for transporting to
disposal facility.
k. Areas for temporary shaded storage of debris shall be specified and arranged

Package BH-03
within the site. Heaps of storage of debris shall be avoided at site and it should
not be visible from outside. Debris should not be stored for a longer duration,
it shall be disposed as early as possible, if not on daily basis by the contractor.
l. Certain measure such as maintaining cleanliness at disposal sites, controlling
the height from which soil is dropped, stockpiling of muck with suitable slope
in the designated locations, availability of water and personnel at all times at
dumping sites to minimise dust suppression, availability of necessary
equipment for filling of muck in dumping site in layers and for mechanically
compaction etc., are to be ensured.
m. In case of identifying or noticing any physical change in the muck during
excavation, it will be required to test the soil quality including heavy metals. If
the soil is contaminated, the portion of the contaminated muck is to be isolated
and brought to the notice of Engineer for necessary actions / instructions for
safe disposal.
n. Debris shall not be mixed with muck at any cost, separate storage area within
site shall be ensured.
o. Suitable inert Construction and Demolition (C & D) Waste (Debris) should be
recycled or reused wherever possible. Where waste generation is
unavoidable then the potential for recycling or reuse should be explored.
p. Only the authorised waste collectors to be allowed to collect the specific
category of waste and transport the wastes to the appropriate disposal points.
q. It has to ensured that appropriate measures are employed to minimise
windblown litter and dust during transportation of wastes by either covering
the trucks or transporting wastes in enclosed containers.
18.5.3 Chemical Waste
a. Chemical waste is likely to be generated by construction activities. For those
processes, which generate chemical waste, it may be possible to find
alternatives, which generate reduced quantities or even no chemical waste,
or less dangerous types of chemical waste.
b. Containers used for the storage of chemical waste should:
i. be suitable for the substances they are holding, resistant to corrosion,
maintained in good condition, and securely closed.
ii. be of adequate capacity and display a label in English and Hindi as to
the contents, quantity and safe method of disposal in accordance with
instructions contained in Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS.
c. The storage area for chemical waste should:
i. be clearly labelled and used solely for the storage of chemical waste;
ii. be enclosed on at least three sides;
iii. have an impermeable floor and bunding, of capacity to accommodate
110% of the volume of the largest container or 20% by volume of the

Package BH-03
chemical waste stored in that area, whichever is the greatest;

iv. have adequate ventilation;
v. be covered to prevent rainfall entering; and
vi. be arranged so that incompatible materials are adequately separated.
d. Disposal of chemical waste should be via a licensed waste collector; duly
authorized by MoEF or State Pollution Control Board as the case may be.
License of the waste collector shall be shown to the Engineer on demand.
e. An inventory of chemicals, solvents and adhesives to be maintained. Disposal
of excess material to be minimised, reuse when applicable and dispose of
chemical waste properly. A plan that identifies proper ventilation is to be
developed. Protective clothing and personal protective equipment shall be
used.
f. A nodal person to be designated who shall maintain the above information
and conduct periodic inspections.
18.5.4 Hazardous Waste
a. Classification of waste as Hazardous shall be in accordance with Hazards
Waste (Management & Handing) Rules 1989, and 2003 or its latest
amendment.
b. The hazardous waste generated as a result of construction activities to be
identified. If such waste is generated then necessary ‘authorisation’ according
to Form 1 of the Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules 1989 &
2003 or its latest amendment to be obtained from the State Pollution Control
Board and dispose the same only to currently authorised recyclers (a list of
which can be obtained from State Pollution Control Board) under intimation to
the Engineer.
c. Hazardous waste would mainly arise from the maintenance of equipment.
These may include, but not be limited to, the following:
i. Used engine oils, hydraulic fluids and waste fuel;
ii. Spent mineral oils/cleaning fluids from mechanical machinery;
iii. Scrap batteries or spent acid/alkali; and
iv. Spent solvents/solutions, some of which may be derived, from
equipment cleaning activities.
d. For disposal of waste requiring special attention agreement has to be in place
with authorised agencies dealing with the same.
e. The environmentally hazardous waste shall be stored on an impermeable
surface with containment bunding to retain leaks, spills and ruptures.
f. Waste oil and chemical containers shall be delivered to the storage yard. The
responsibility of properly storing and handling waste oil/waste chemical
containers unit for such a time until they are transported to the chosen

Package BH-03
disposal area or waste oil containers lies with the contractor.

g. All waste collection containers shall be of appropriate size with a closed lid.
Each container will be clearly labelled both with a colour code system and
labelled in Hindi and English. Original labels of empty containers should be
completely covered over and the contents of the type of waste stored in the
used containers clearly indicated.
18.5.5 Storage and Segregation of Waste
a. Disposal and collection points should be established around all construction
work sites. The waste containers should be at least 50L/100L
b. The burning of refuse at construction sites is not permitted.
c. A contract with Municipal Corporation of Bhopal to be entered to collect waste
from Construction depots, Labour Colony etc. and dispose it at their landfill or
a designated area as per the existing norms.
d. It has to be ensured that construction and demolition material are properly
segregated into re-usable and non-reusable materials, and transfer of these
materials to low laying areas or landfills, depending on the type of material
and the percentage of inert material.
e. Segregation of Waste should be done on site. All construction waste including
debris should be sorted on site into inert and non-inert components as given
in Table 14 below. Different areas of the worksites should be designated for
such segregation and storage wherever site conditions permit.
Table 14: Storage & Segregation of Waste
Waste Container Colour Code Sign
Landfill / Biodegradable Green Waste
Recyclable Blue Paper & Plastic
Burning / Combustible Red Burning
Scrap Metal Brown Metal

f. On-site measures promoting proper segregation and disposal of construction
waste should be implemented e.g. provide separate containers for inert
(rubber, sand, stone etc.) and noninert (wood, organics etc.) wastes. The inert
waste should be used on site before disposed of at filling area and the non-
inert waste should be sorted for re-use or recycling before being transported
to landfills.
g. Non-inert materials such as wood, glass and plastic are acceptable for
disposal to a landfill as a last resort if these can no longer be reused or
recycled.
18.5.6 Reuse and Recycle

Package BH-03
a. Some good quality reusable topsoil is expected from site clearance works.
This can be locally stockpiled and used later in final landscaping works, thus
saving on costs for such works and transportation and environmental impacts
of disposal.
b. The design of formwork should maximise use of wooden panels so that high
reuse levels can be achieved. Alternatives such as steel formwork should be
considered to increase the potential for reuse.
c. Construction waste should be recycled as much as possible on-site. Proper
segregation of waste types on site will increase the feasibility of certain
components of the waste stream by recycling contractors.
d. Excavated materials are usually inert such as soil and rock, and can normally
be reused on site or in public filling areas. The excavated material may have
to be temporarily stockpiled on-site for subsequent re-use.
e. Steel and other metals should be recovered from the construction waste and
recycled as far as practical. If possible, scrap steel mills can use steel bars.
19 Housekeeping
a. Sites are to be kept clean and tidy and free from slip, trip and fall hazards.
b. All personnel are to be trained in the importance of good housekeeping and
managers and supervisors must undertake regular monitoring and inspection
of the workplace.
c. Workplace are to be left clean and tidy at the end of each shift and where
there is an accumulation of materials throughout the shift, at regular intervals
as required to maintain a clean and safe site.
d. Buildings under construction and nearing completion must ensure that all
combustible and flammable materials are removed at the end of each shift.
e. Nails are to be removed from timber as soon as possible, where this is not
practical, they are to be flattened and placed in a safe area (barrier and signs)
until nails can be removed at a later time.
f. Materials are to be stored so as they do not pose a risk to personnel stacking,
removing or walking by (further guidance is given in the materials storage and
handling section).
g. All spills are to be cleaned up immediately using absorbent material.
h. Cables/hoses/other trailing leads are to be protected, buried or secured above
head height to avoid a slip trip, fall hazard.
i. Waste is to be placed in designated containers and covered to protect against
high winds, pests or risk of fire. Waste containers are to be emptied on a
regular basis to prevent a build-up of material.
j. Loose or light materials that are stored on roofs or open spaces are to be
secured to prevent them from inclement weather.

Package BH-03
19.1 Prevention of Mosquito Breeding

a. Measures shall be taken to prevent mosquito breeding at site. The measures
to be taken shall include, but not limited to, the following:
i. Construction run of shall not be allowed to stagnate at work sites
specially at construction depots and batching plant locations, by
executing and efficient drainage system and/ or levelling off low lying
areas;
ii. Empty cans, oil drums, packing and other receptacles which may
retain water shall be deposited at a central collection point and shall
be removed from the Site regularly;
iii. Still waters shall be treated at least once every week with oil in order
to prevent mosquito breading;
iv. Equipment and other items on the Site, which may retain water, shall
be stored, covered or treated in such a manner that water could not be
retained.
b. Posters in both Hindi and English which draw attention to the dangers of
permitting mosquito breeding shall be displayed prominently on the site.
20 Welfare Facilities
a. Contractors must provide suitable and sufficient welfare facilities as soon as
work on site commences (i.e. mobilisation phase) until work is fully completed.
Everyone on site must have access to adequate toilet and washing facilities,
a place for preparing and consuming refreshments and somewhere for storing
and drying clothing and personal protective equipment.
b. Welfare facilities are to be conveniently available to people working on the
site.
c. Toilets need to be in close proximity to where the work is being done and
washing facilities should be as close as possible to the toilets. Washing
facilities also need to be close to canteens and rest rooms so that people can
wash before eating.
20.1 Toilets
a. Suitable toilet facilities shall be provided.
b. Toilets must be adequately ventilated, lit and maintained in a clean condition.
c. WC must be partitioned from each other and have doors with fastenings.
Urinals must be suitably screened.
d. The numbers of toilets required will depend on the number of people working
on the site and the different locations where work is taking place (see table
below). Additional separate WC facilities must be provided for female staff.
e. Septic tanks shall be of a sufficient size/quantity to cope with the planned
peak workforce and arrangements shall be made for septic tanks to be

Package BH-03
emptied on a regular basis to prevent overflowing.

f. Project Partners are to employ a dedicated cleaning team to ensure that
toilets remain clean and hygienic.
Table 1510: Numbers of Toilets Required (Male)
Number on Site Number of Number of Number of

(Male) WC Urinals Washbasins
1 – 25 1 1 1
26 – 50 2 2 2
51 - 75 3 3 3
76 - 100 4 4 4
Table 16: Numbers of Toilets Required (Female)
Number on Site Number of Toilets Number of Washbasins

(Female)
1 - 10 2 2
21 Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH)

a. The use of hazardous substances must be considered during the design
stage by designers and by procurement staff before ordering.
b. Designers and procurement staff must liaise with health and safety and
environmental staff to determine whether a safer alternative to what is being
proposed is available.
c. All hazardous substances that are to be used are to be recorded in an
inventory, not to be brought onto site unless a Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) has been provided and must not be used until a specific COSHH
assessment has been carried out.
d. When planning the use of hazardous substances, the following hierarchy of
control is to be used:
i. Elimination
ii. Substitution
iii. Provision of engineering controls
iv. Administrative controls (procedures, training)
v. Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
e. Stores for hazardous substances are to be well-ventilated, protected from the
elements, clear of any ignition sources and at least 10m from any water

Package BH-03
source. They are to be bunded to prevent leaks and spills contaminating the
surrounding area and are to be secured to prevent unauthorised use.
f. Suitable signs are to be displayed warning personnel of the hazards.
g. Substances that are not compatible are not to be stored together such as
flammable gas and oxidising agents.
h. An inventory of MSDS is to be readily available and containers used for
storing, handling, transporting and dispensing hazardous substance are to be
suitable for use and have a label showing it contents.
i. Decanting hazardous liquids into plastic bottles is prohibited.
j. Spill kits are to be positioned in areas where hazardous substances are stored
and used and any leaks or spills are to be cleaned up immediately. Containers
outside bunded areas are to be placed on drip trays and when dispensing,
funnels or jugs are to be used.
k. Fire extinguishers are to be available at storage areas and where hazardous
l. Eating, drinking and smoking are prohibited in areas where hazardous
m. PPE must only be provided as a last resort and where provided it must provide
suitable protection against the hazard the individual may be exposed to.
Respiratory Protective Equipment (RPE) will be required in addition to PPE
where there is a risk from fumes, dusts, vapours and these cannot be
controlled by engineering controls or where engineering controls do not offer
sufficient protection.
n. A health surveillance programme is to be established for personnel who have
been exposed to hazardous substances and records are to be maintained.
Where there is a risk to personnel from hazardous substances in workplaces
a surveillance programme is to be implemented.
o. Equipment used is to be suitable, be calibrated and operated by a competent
person. A record of all surveillance tests and results is to be retained.
p. Personnel are to be provided instruction, information and training on
hazardous substances.
22 Landscape and Aesthetics
a. Demonstrate evidence that the landscape and aesthetics quality during
construction have been considered and appropriate actions have been taken
to mitigate negative impacts due to construction.
b. The construction of metro system will have negative but temporary impacts
on the landscape and aesthetics due to loss of amenities and tress. Large-
scale construction activity will impact negatively on roadside areas and
residential communities immediately adjacent to the construction sites.
c. Tree surveys to be undertaken for all the trees existing within the right-of-way

Package BH-03
and take prior approval from the Engineer before cutting the trees which
cause obstruction to the construction works. The Employer or Engineer may
arrange permission from State Forest Department / relevant Department for
cutting back or removal and or transplantation of trees which are deemed to
be affected by the right-of-way (i.e., within the limits of permanent works)
construction works.
d. Replanting of tree saplings as per the State Forest Department norms for the
trees cut/removed is the responsibility of the Project Partners including
identifying suitable locations for sapling plantations. This additional landscape
treatment is likely to result in long-term beneficial impact to the environment.
e. Light used for construction lighting can illuminate adjacent areas in undesired
ways. Such lighting and glare shall be prevented from striking adjacent areas,
where feasible, through directional shielding.
f. The other measures include but not limited to:
i. Erection of decorative screen hoarding prominently displaying the logo
of MPMRCL.
ii. Careful positioning of construction equipment.
iii. Eliminating the possibility of stockpiles of material from being visible
to public.
iv. Strategically placing hi-visibility site markings at construction sites
indicating Facilities,
v. Offices and Stores.
g. Adequate and properly managed parking of vehicles at Construction Depots
and Batching plants.
h. Consent for height of stacks of Diesel Engines with rating more than 800 KV
shall be obtained by the Contractor from statutory Government agency.
Where the calculated height of stack is obtrusive and does not blend with the
neighbourhood, the contractor will provide either alternative sucrose of power
or provide a solution that is acceptable to the Engineer. This may include but
not limited to providing appropriate cladding for the stack.
23 Archaeological and Historic Resources
a. During the construction period, archaeological or historic resources may
potentially be affected by direct or indirect construction activity. The project
construction activity potentially requiring measures for protecting
archaeological or historic resources to be initiated with prior approval of the
Employer.
b. Prior to the initiation of construction, MPMRCL intends to review a resource
protection plan for historic structures where it appears, they may be affected
by the project. This plan will be developed by the Project Partners in
consultation with The Archaeological Survey of India (ASI).

Package BH-03
c. The plan will identify the sensitive resources as well as specify the
construction monitoring requirements. These requirements may include
ground vibration monitoring and recording any components inadvertently
subjected to impact.
d. In the event the project will affect a previously unidentified historic property,
work in the area of discovery shall cease until actions that will take into
account the effect of the undertaking on the property can be implemented.
The Ministry of Environment and MPMRCL shall determine how to proceed.
24 Environmental Monitoring
24.1 General:
The Contractor’s Environmental Team shall carry out the monitoring of
environmental impacts during construction. Representative sensitive receivers in
the vicinity of the works shall be monitored for air quality, noise, water and soil
impacts.
The Contractor’s monitoring programme is summarised in Table –17.
Table –17
Summary of Contractor’s Environmental Monitoring Programme (Tentative)
Attribute Parameter Frequency Locations and number
Air i) Particulate Matter (size One 24 hours To be determined by the

less than 10µm) or sample every Contractor and approved by
(PM10) Month at each the ’Employer's
identified location. Representative, based on
ii) Particulate Matter (size
air sensitive receptors, but
less than 2.5µm) or
at least all metro station
(PM2.5)
sites, Batching Plant site
and sensitive locations such
as residential areas,
educational institutions,
Noise Day Time (6 AM – 10PM) Once fortnightly hospitals, archaeological
(when noise- site etc., are to be
Lmax, Leq, L10, L90
generating monitored
activities are
Night Time (10PM – 6AM) underway
Lmax, Leq, L10, L90
Duration During Civil Construction During Civil Construction

of
Monitoring
by
Contractor

Package BH-03
The above indicated Contractor’s Environmental Monitoring Programme is

mandatory and any additional monitoring, with respect to additional locations,
frequency, parameters and monitoring of environmental attributes viz., surface
water & ground water, soil etc., as directed by the Employer’s Representative, will
have to be undertaken by the Contractor.
24.2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring:
a. Construction activities that will generate dust impacts include Batching Plants,
excavation, material handling and stockpiling, vehicular movement, and wind
erosion of unpaved work areas.
b. The Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) prepared by the
Contractor shall establish procedures to monitor impacts on ambient air
quality and measures to control air pollution including dust suppression due
to construction activities at work sites.
c. The Employer’s Representative shall monitor Contractor’s performance of
tasks specified and will inspect necessary records, reports and procedures
related to the control of air quality given in CEMP.
d. Information gathered on Ambient Air Quality Monitoring will be catalogued
and maintained by the Contractor and shall be available for review by the
Employer’s Representative.
e. The exact location of the air monitoring stations located near air sensitive
receptors adjoining the construction sites, such as residences, schools, and
hospitals and placement of monitoring equipment shall be agreed with the
Employer’s Representative prior to commencement of air monitoring
programme.
f. The Contractor should ensure that the monitoring stations should be free from
local obstructions or sheltering, availability of AC power point and suitable
access at each air monitoring station.
g. Should impact monitoring record dust levels which are:
h. Indicative of a deteriorating situation such that closer monitoring is reasonably
indicated, or
i. When in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative additional
measurements are required in view of deteriorating air quality;
j. Then, the Employer’s Representative may require the Contractor to increase
the frequency of impact monitoring at any one or more of the monitoring
stations until the results indicate an improving and acceptable level of air
quality.
k. The Contractor shall keep records of ambient air quality monitoring (including
location, date, time). The Contractor shall submit monitoring results in the
Monthly Environmental Report to the Employer’s Representative. The results
should represent a statistical evaluation of data by calculating maximum,
minimum, mean, for valuation of trends, and comparison with emission

Package BH-03
standards.
l. The National Ambient Air Quality Standards stipulated by the Central Pollution
Control Board, New Delhi, 18th November 2009 to be adopted and followed
by the Contractor for the methods of measurement, Limits (Concentration in
Ambient Air) for PM10 and PM2.5 or any other air pollutant as may be required
by the Employer’s Representative etc., for the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring.
m. Where the Employer’s Representative determines that the recorded
particulate matter – PM10 and/or PM2.5 level is significantly greater than the
Limit levels, the Employer’s Representative may direct the Contractor to take
effective remedial measures including, but not limited to, reviewing dust
sources and modifying working procedures.
n. Where the recorded baseline levels exceed the ambient air quality standards,
then at such locations the limit level is the recorded base line. Contractor shall
take all effective remedial measures to contain the levels to their baseline
value as a result of his activities.
o. The Contractor should inform Employer’s Representative of all steps taken to
investigate cause of non-conformance and immediate action taken to avoid
further occurrences through written reports and proposals for action.
24.3 Noise and Vibration
a. The activities which are expected to cause noise during the construction
include noise from construction equipment, activities such as portal
construction, earthwork excavation, concreting, removal of spoil, movement
of construction vehicles & delivery vehicles travelling to and from the
construction and disposal sites etc.
b. The level of impact of these noise sources depends upon the noise
characteristics of the equipment and activities involved in the construction
schedule, and the distance from noise sensitive receptors.
c. The Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) prepared by the
Contractor shall establish procedures to monitor construction noise and
determine when to apply measures to control noise pollution due to
construction activities at works site.
d. The CEMP will provide site description, define acceptable noise monitoring
equipment, provide monitoring locations and operating procedures for noise
equipment and indicate reports and record keeping on noise monitoring data.
e. The Employer’s Representative shall monitor Contractor’s performance of
tasks specified, and will inspect necessary records, report and procedures
related to the control of noise.
f. Noise monitoring shall be carried out at noise sensitive receptor locations
within 200 feet of the construction site once each fortnight and Construction
noise measurements shall coincide with daytime and night-time periods of
maximum noise generating construction activities.

Package BH-03
g. The appropriate parameter for measuring construction noise impacts shall be

the equivalent A-weighted sound pressure level (Leq) measured in decibels
(dB). The two statistical sound levels L10 and L90; the level exceeded for 10
and 90 percent of the time respectively, shall also be recorded during
monitoring. The L90 may be considered as the ambient level into which the
L10 as average peak level intrudes. The Lmax, Leq, L10 and L90 values will be
reported in the noise measurement form along with allowable noise limit. The
duration of monitoring shall be on hourly basis for 24hours.
h. In no case shall the Contractor expose the public to construction noise levels
exceeding 90 dB(A) or to impulsive noise levels with a peak sound pressure
level exceeding 140 dB(A) as measured on an impulse sound level meter.
i. Limit for construction noise is based on the existing ambient noise levels
(baseline) in areas adjoining the construction sites. If the measured noise
levels exceed the baseline noise limits, the noise levels shall be reduced by
appropriate abatement measures.
j. The noise levels emanating from any source during construction, shall not
exceed 10 dB(A) or more above existing ambient pre-construction (Baseline)
noise levels when measured at a point outside the premises of the location of
source. The same may be varied from time to time by and at the sole
discretion of the Employer’s Representative.
k. The Ambient Air Quality Standards in respect of Noise stipulated under Noise
Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 amended in 2017 as given in
Table 18 below shall be adopted and followed by the Contractor
Table- 18
Allowable construction noise
Category of Area /
Area Code Limits in dB(A) Leq *
Zone
Day Time Night Time
(A) Industrial area 75 70
(B) Commercial area 65 55
(C) Residential area 55 45
(D) Silence Zone 50 40
Note:
Day time shall mean from 6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m.
Night time shall mean from 10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m.
l. The ground borne noise levels within building structures due to tunnel boring

Package BH-03
machine and any other underground and tunnelling construction activities

shall not cause interior noise levels to exceed the levels given below as
measured in the inside of the affected noise sensitive structure:
Residential: Lmax 55 dB(A)
Commercial: Lmax 60 dB(A)
m. At the surface of the construction site during night time hours, the Contractor
shall use only equipment that operating under full load meets the noise limits
specified in Table -19, if a sensitive receptor would be affected.
Table - 19
Noise emission limits for construction equipment measured at 50 feet from
construction equipment*
Equipment Category Lmax Level dB(A)
Air Compressor 81
Backhoe 80
Compactor 82
Concrete Mixer 85
Concrete Pump 82
Concrete Vibrator 76
Crane 83
Generator 81
Impact wrench 85
Jack Hammer 88
Front End Loader 85
Paver 89
Pile Driver (Sonic) 96
Pneumatic Tool 85
Pump 76
Rail saw 90

Package BH-03
Equipment Category Lmax Level dB(A)
Rock Drill 98
Roller 74
Saw 76
Shovel 82
Spike Driver 77
Tie Cutter 84
Tie Handler 80
Tie Inserter 85
Truck 88
Table based on US EPA “Noise from construction

equipment and operation, building construction and
home appliances NTID 300.1” measured data from
Railroad construction equipment
n. The adjustments for close in equipment noise measurement shall be made in

accordance with Table - 20
Table – 20
Adjustments for close in equipment noise measurements
(Measurement Values to be subtracted from Measured Sound)
Level to Estimate Sound

Distance (Feet)
Level at 50 Feet dB(A)
19-21 8
22-23 7
24-26 6
27-29 5
30-33 4
34-37 3
38-42 2

Package BH-03
43-47 1
48-50 0
o. Should the impact monitoring record noise levels which are:

indicative of a deteriorating situation such that closer monitoring is reasonably
indicated, or
when in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative additional
measurements are required in view of deteriorating noise environment,
p. then, the Employer’s Representative may require the Contractor to increase
the
q. frequency of monitoring at any one or more of the monitoring stations until the
results
r. indicate an improving and acceptable level of noise.
s. The Contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative of all steps taken
to investigate cause of non-conformance and immediate action taken to avoid
further occurrences through written reports and proposals for action.
t. The Contractor shall submit a copy of monitoring results. The results should
represent a statistical evaluation of data for evaluation of trends and
comparison with noise emission standards.
u. Where the Employer’s Representative determines that the recorded Noise
level is significantly greater than the acceptable levels, the Employer’s
Representative may direct the Contractor to take effective remedial measures
including, but not limited to, reviewing noise sources and modifying working
procedures.
v. Protection against the effects of occupational noise exposure should be
provided when the sound levels exceed those shown in Table No. 7 below
when measured on the A-scale of a standard sound level meter at slow
response.
w. When employees are subjected to sound levels exceeding those listed in the
Table No. feasible administrative or engineering controls should be utilized.
x. If such controls fail to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table,
personal protective equipment shall be provide and used to reduce sound
levels within the levels of the table.- 21
Table – 21
Permissible Noise Exposures
Duration per day, Sound level

Hours (slow Response)

Package BH-03
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1½ 102
1 105
¾ 107
½ 110
¼ or less 115
Notes:
1. No exposure in excess of 115 dBA is to be permitted.
2. For any period of exposure falling in between any figure and the next higher
or lower figure as indicated in column (1), the permissible sound pressure
level is to be determined by extrapolation on a proportionate basis.
y. When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise
exposure of different levels, their combined effect should be considered,
rather than the individual effect of each. Exposure to different levels for
various periods of time shall be computed according to the formula as given
below.
Fe = (T1/L1) +(T2/T2) +…+(Tn/Ln) where,
Fe= the equivalent nose exposure factor.
T= the period of noise exposure at any essentially constant level.
L = the duration of the permissible noise exposure at the constant level (from
Table)
If the value of f exceeds unity (1) the exposure exceeds permissible levels.
z. A sample computation showing an application of the above formula is as
follows. An employee is exposed at these levels of these periods:
110 dB(A) 1/4 hour.
100 dB(A) 1/2 hour.
90 dB(A) 11/2 hours.
Then,

Package BH-03
Fe = (1/4/1/2) + (1/2/2) +(1 1/2/8)

Fe = 0.500 +0.25 +0.188
Fe = 0.938
aa. Since the value of Fe does not exceed unity, the exposure is within
permissible limits.
bb. The vibration level limits at work sites adjacent to the alignment shall conform
to permit values of peak particle velocity as give in Table No. 22
Table - 22
Permitted Values of PPV
Sl. No. Condition of Structure Max. PPV in mm/sec
1. Most structures in “good condition” 25
2. Most structures in “fair condition” 12
3. Most structures in “poor condition” 5
4. Water supply structures 5
5. Heritage structures/bridge structures 5
When Diesel Generator (DG) Sets are used for operation of equipment and
machinery, then Ministry of Environment and Forest notification dated 17th May
2002, issued under Environment Protection Act (Protection) Rules, 1986, on noise
limits shall apply.
25 Sustainable Development & Environmental Considerations
25.1 General
a. The Contractor shall consider the Five Pillars of environmental sustainability
in all aspects of the development and operation of the station:
i. Energy Efficiency
ii. Material and Resource Conservation
iii. Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ)
iv. Best Operations and Maintenance
v. Water Conservation and Site Management
b. The goal, in the application of these pillars, is to create an environmentally
responsible mass transit system that is appreciably ahead of current
standards and practices when compared with a similar transportation system.
The Metro Stations created by this effort shall become a model for a healthier
and ecologically responsible environment where the people enjoy the benefits
of a “green” environment.”

Package BH-03
c. By applying such strategies to the design of Metro Stations, the designer shall
demonstrate the improvements and efficiencies of the design compared to
existing standards or practice with respect to the Five Pillars.
25.2 Environmental Certification
The Project Partners shall obtain Platinum certification for the project under the
Leadership in Indian Green Building Council (IGBC). The Contractor shall adhere
with the policy, rules, norms, requirements and methods of the Confederation of
Indian Industry’s (CII) Indian Green Building Council (IGBC) Green Mass Rapid
Transit System (MRTS) Rating Version 1.0 Abridged Reference Guide for individual
use.
25.3 Energy Efficiency
The ways in which energy is expended shall be examined from the earliest stages
of design through the daily operation of the system. Compliance with Energy
Conservation Building Code (India), 2007 shall be the minimum requirements.
25.3.1 Respond to Demand
Optimize energy consumption by designing systems and operational strategies that
respond to changes in demand. Metro Stations generally have peak patronage
levels twice a day, with less patronage at off-peak times. Systems should be
designed and operated to mimic the patronage curve or occupant load, producing
energy savings in comparison to designing them for peak loading only.
Strategies
i. Station Configuration: Respond to Demand: Vertical Circulation Elements
ii. Entrances: Showcase Sustainability: Entrances
iii. Lighting: Showcase Sustainability – Lighting
25.3.2 Maximize Energy Performance
Employ available technologies and design/operational strategies that will provide a
net reduction of 30% in the amount of energy consumed by an equivalent Metro
Station that only conforms to the minimum statutory and regulatory requirements.
Strategies
i. Station Configuration: Elevator and Escalator Resource Conservation
ii. Station Configuration: Respond to Demand: Vertical Circulation
Elements
iii. Communications: Communications Technology Review
iv. Lighting: Increase Natural Light
v. Lighting: Lighting Energy Consumption Level
vi. Signage: Technology Review
vii. Signage: Reduce Energy Consumption

Package BH-03
25.3.3 Utilize Thermal Assets

Reduce energy consumption by utilizing the thermal mass to aid environmental
control. Elements, such as the concourses, platforms, tracks, major structural
elements, and the surrounding earth, can be used as thermal batteries for
anticipated cooling and heating loads. Thermal mass storage can be used to reduce
energy consumption consumed in environmental control, even when it is not
capable of carrying the whole load.
Strategies
i. Ventilation and Energy Conservation: Thermal Mass Storage
ii. Ventilation and Energy Conservation: Geothermal Heat Pumps
25.3.4 Reduce Equipment Energy Consumption
Use energy models to determine energy loads and to evaluate opportunities for
reducing energy consumption as well as operational costs. All equipment to be of
the highest energy star rating available in accordance with BEE Standards under
Indian Energy Conservation Act (2017)
Strategies
ii. Ventilation and EC: Ventilation Equipment Energy Consumption Level
iii. Communications: Communications Technology Review
iv. Communications: Reduce Thermal Pollution from equipment
v. Lighting: Reduce Lighting Energy Consumption Level
vi. Lighting: Integration of Emergency Fixtures
vii. Signage: Technology Review for Lowest Consumption Technology
25.3.5 Reduce Energy consumption
a. Encourage On-Site Energy Production - Reduce the demand for energy by
employing the use of renewable energy sources supplied within the project
site. An example would be providing photovoltaic panels at entrances, roof,
etc.
b. Meet 10% of the peak load of the station complex by renewable energy
sources.
c. Encourage Clean Energy Sources - Encourage the use of energy sources that
produce little or no pollution.
Strategies
ii. Ventilation and EC: Ventilation Equipment Energy Consumption Level
iii. Communications: Choice of Communication Equipment and Thermal
Pollution from Equipment

Package BH-03
iv. Lighting: Lighting Fixtures

v. Signage: Choice of Signage Equipment to reduce energy
consumption
vi. Entrances: Showcase Sustainability – Entrances
vii. Lighting: Showcase Sustainability – Lighting
25.4 Material and Resource Conservation
a. Selection of building material is important in sustainable design because of
the extensive network of extraction, processing, and transportation steps
required for processing them. Activities to create building materials pollute the
air and water, destroy natural habitats, and deplete natural resources. These
are also factors in the products transportation and the final disposal of the
materials.
b. Salvaged, recycled content, local and renewable materials minimize the
impact of natural resource consumption.
25.4.1 Efficient Material Use
Plan an efficient layout that minimizes the amount of material used over the entire
project.
Strategies
i. Station Configuration: Optimize Vertical Circulation Elements
ii. Station Configuration: Efficient Space Planning
iii. Utility and Systems Interface: Optimize Plant Room
iv. Utility and Systems Interface: Integration of Utilities
v. Communications: Communications Technology Review
vi. Communications: Equipment Obsolesce
vii. Materials and Finishes: Integration of Noise Attenuation with Structure
viii. Acoustics: Integration of Noise Attenuation with Structure
ix. Signage: Technology Review
25.4.2 Encourage Collection of Recyclables
Reduce the amount of material waste generated by encouraging recycling,
providing facilities and supporting public education strategies and signage.
Strategies
i. Operations and Maintenance: O&M Plan to Address Recycling
ii. Signage: Signage to Support Recycling Initiatives
iii. Furniture, Fixtures and Fittings (FF&E): Showcase Sustainability –
FF&E
iv. Institute an effective Solid Waste Management Program at the

Package BH-03
Stations
25.4.3 Institute an effective Solid Waste Management Program
a. Ensuring public awareness and stiff enforcement can result in proper and
adequate solid waste management system. An integrated solid waste
management program that complies with published and/or appropriate
national and local solid waste management requirements to be put in place.
The Program must allow for an effective management of solid waste in a way
that is protective of human health and the environment, while making the
station aesthetically more pleasing and acceptable to travellers and staff. The
Program shall include:
i. Segregating, (separate collectors for paper, plastics and other
recyclable waste streams) storing, transporting, recycling, treating,
and disposing of solid waste.
ii. Storage shall be reduced where applicable by the use of compactors.
iii. Incentives for solid waste reduction and for use of recycled and
environmentally friendly/preferable material
iv. Responsibilities for the different elements of the solid waste
management program
v. Goals for future reduction in the rate of solid waste generated by using
the 3R formula (Reduce, Reuse, Recycle).
b. The numbers, sizes, and locations of receptacles for segregated solid waste
would be in accordance with the minimum requirements included in the
Municipal Solid Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 2000, Ministry of
Environment and Forests, Government of India, and the information collected
during the operation of the station.
25.4.4 Reuse Construction Waste and Conserve Resources
Minimize construction waste and conserve resources. Direct all usable waste
materials into the construction process and all recyclable waste materials into the
manufacturing process.
Strategies
i. Materials and Finishes: Selection of Finish Materials
25.4.5 Specify Products with Recycled Content
Reduce the use of raw materials by specifying recycled products or those with
recycled content.
Strategies
i. Station Configuration: Choice of Escalators and Elevators
ii. Communications: Choice of Communication Equipment
iii. Materials and Finishes: Selection of Finish Materials

Package BH-03
iv. Lighting: Lighting Fixtures

v. Signage: Choice of Signage Equipment
vi. Institute an effective Solid Waste Management Program at the
Stations which includes a component for all recyclable waste.
25.4.6 Eliminate Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs)
Reduce ozone depletion by eliminating the use of refrigerants and solvents that
contain CFCs and the use of insulation materials that employ CFCs in their
production.
25.4.7 Specify Local/Regional Materials and Equipment
Reduce the environmental impact associated with the transportation of building
materials by specifying those that have been manufactured locally.
Strategies
i. Materials and Finishes: Selection of Finish Materials
ii. Lighting: Lighting Fixtures
iii. Signage: Choice of Signage Equipment
iv. FF&E: Showcase Sustainability – FF&E
v. FF&E: Choice of Furniture, Fixtures and Fittings
25.4.8 Encourage Links with Alternative Transportation
Limit the use of non-renewable fuel sources and associated pollution by
encouraging walking, bicycle riding, and the use of vehicles powered by alternative
sources.
Strategies
i. Entrances: Intermodal Connections
ii. Entrances: Showcase Sustainability – Entrances
iii. FF&E: Showcase Sustainability – FF&E
iv. Power sources in parking area for electric cars.
v. Parking for bicycles
25.5 Indoor Environmental Quality
Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) strategies include issues related to indoor air
quality (IAQ), such as ventilation effectiveness and control of contaminants,
illumination, acoustics, vibration, occupant control of building systems and day
lighting. All of these issues have the potential to enhance the indoor environment
and optimize the health, comfort and productivity of building occupants.
25.5.1 Effective Ventilation
Employ design strategies to provide fresh air intakes that enhance the health and
productivity of the Metro Station environment.

Package BH-03
Strategies
i. Ventilation and EC: Natural Ventilation
ii. Ventilation and EC: Respond to Demand: Ventilation –Including use
of CO2 sensors in air tempered spaces.
iii. Ventilation and EC: Station and Facility Management System
iv. Ventilation and EC: Air Filtration
25.5.2 Specify Low VOC Emitting Materials
Specify materials and finishes, including flooring and furniture, that contain no
known carcinogens, have low levels of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), are
nontoxic and chemically inert, to reduce the amount of indoor air contaminants that
may be irritating or unhealthy to occupants.
Strategies
i. Operations and Maintenance: Maintenance Materials
ii. Ventilation and EC: Inert Materials
iii. Materials and Finishes: Selection of Finish Materials
iv. Signage: Choice of Signage Equipment
v. FF&E: Choice of Furniture, Fixtures and Fittings
25.5.3 Control Chemical and Pollutant Sources
Develop methods to prevent the risk of chemical or other pollutants from being
introduced into the Metro Stations. These methods include both measures
employed in the design of the system and strategies used in the operation and
maintenance of the system. In addition to ensuring compliance with the applicable
emissions standards, provisions must also be made to minimize the environmental
and health impacts of these pollutants by appropriate and available active or
passive operational controls.
Strategies
i. Entrances: Walk-Off Grilles
ii. Ventilation and EC: Air Intake Location at least 8 m away from any
potential source of air contaminants.
25.5.4 Maximize Day lighting
Implement strategies to maximize daylight. Where possible, integrate indoor space
with the outdoor environment to improve the environment for occupants.
Strategies
i. Entrances: Entrance Orientation
ii. Entrances: Show case Sustainability – Entrances
iii. Materials and Finishes: Increase Natural Light

Package BH-03
iv. Lighting: Increase Natural Light

v. Lighting: Show case Sustainability – Lighting
25.5.5 Reduce Noise and vibration.
The impacted areas and the degree of noise and vibration impact shall be clearly
delineated in the environmental documents, such as the Environmental Analysis or
the Environmental Assessment Statement. The noise and vibration data shall be
collected on site by taking measurements using acceptable equipment and data
collection protocols. Appropriate prediction models shall be used, where necessary,
to predict the noise and vibration levels from future operations. The environmental
document will also identify any mitigation measures to meet the requisite noise and
vibration standards in place. Minimize the amount of noise and vibration generated
by selecting quieter equipment and technologies.
Strategies
i. Ventilation and EC: Noise Attenuation
ii. Materials and Finishes: Integration of Noise Attenuation with Structure
iii. Acoustics: Integration of Noise Attenuation with Structure
iv. Acoustics: Rubber sound absorbing pads below rails and sleepers in
station areas.
25.6 Operations and Maintenance
a. Modern Metro Stations are highly complex structures, both physically and
technologically. They must serve the needs of the traveling public during
normal and emergency situations and must be operable and maintainable
with minimal resources.
b. A holistic approach requires a design strategy that optimizes energy
efficiency. Efficient operations and maintenance will require performance
monitoring coupled with active progressive maintenance programs. These will
need to take advantage of the data that is available from each of the systems,
and be centrally monitored. Therefore, the materials and finishes in the
stations must be durable and easily maintained and allow repair/replacement
with minimal shutdown of service.
25.6.1 Specify Low Maintenance Materials
Specify materials that require minimal maintenance during lifespan to conserve
cleaning resources and enhance durability. Painted surfaces are discouraged at
new stations, and materials shall have a minimum life cycle of 35 years (50 years
where possible). Materials should be locally sourced where possible.
Strategies
i. Operations and Maintenance: Maintenance Materials
ii. Materials and Finishes: Selection of Finish Materials
iii. Signage: Selection of Materials

Package BH-03
iv. FF&E: Choice of Furniture, Fixtures and Fittings

25.6.2 Commission Systems and Equipment
Ensure that the building systems operate efficiently as intended through periodic
testing and calibration.
Strategies
i. Ventilation and EC: Station and Facility Management System
ii. Communications: Commissioning Communication Systems
25.6.3 Station Systems Monitoring
a. Provide a permanent monitoring system to provide feedback for the
comparison, management and optimization of equipment for energy
efficiency.
b. Provide an ongoing system to guarantee accountability for maintaining
performance standards in the operation and maintenance of the Metro
Stations.
Strategies
i. Operations and Maintenance: Performance Monitoring
ii. Ventilation and EC: Station and Facility Management System
iii. Utilities and Systems interface: Station Systems Monitoring – Utilities
iv. Communications: Performance Monitoring – Communications
25.6.4 Selection of Materials
Select durable and easily maintainable finishes. Select maintenance materials (e.g.,
lubricants) that are environmentally friendly.
Strategies
i. Operations and Maintenance: Maintenance Materials e.g.
Biodegradable Lubricants for Escalators and Elevators,
ii. Cleaners and solvents for maintenance
iii. Communications: Choice of Communication Equipment e.g. UPS
system
iv. Lighting: Lighting Fixtures and Lamps
25.6.5 Prevent Collection of Dust
Design forms and equipment that require minimal cleaning.
Strategies
i. Materials and Finishes: Design for Ease of Maintenance
26 Environmental – Penalties
26.1 The following table indicates the Environmental violation and charges to be

Package BH-03
recovered from contractors.
SL.
Topic Violation Deductible Amount
No.
1. Contractor's a. Not engaging key Environmental Rs. 2,00,000/- for first

Environment personnel for the entire duration of month and Rs. 4,
Organization contract and its extension 00,000/- for subsequent
months
2. External a. Not carrying out External Rs. 1,00,000/-for first

Environmental Environmental Audit violation and Rs. 2,00
Audit ,000 / - subsequent
violation
3. Environmental a. Surrounding areas of drinking Rs. 10,000/- for violation

Sanitation water tanks/ taps not of any single item
hygienically cleaned /
maintained
b. Office, stores, toilet/ urinals not
properly cleaned and
maintained
c. Water stagnation leading to
mosquito breeding
4. Containment of Air
Pollution
5. a. Wheel washing facility not Rs. 25,000/- on single

provided at exit gates of violation compounded to
casting yard, batching plant a maximum of Rs.
and underground station 100,000/ - at any single
sites instance
b. Casting yard and batching
plant not provided with hard
surface and access roads
and internal circulation roads
not maintained properly
c. Conveyor belt used for
carrying aggregate not
covered
m. Storing aggregates and
sand in open

Package BH-03
SL.
No.
n. Over speeding of construction
vehicles
o. Operating vehicles,
machineries and other
equipment without valid PUC
p. Truck carrying Material/ muck/
soil/ C&D waste (debris) not
covered/ tyre not
cleaned/washed while leaving
site
q. Vehicles / equipment of
contractor or sub-contractor
parked /placed on road
obstructing free flow of traffic
r. Deposition of
material/muck/soil on public
streets
s. Dumping sites not barricaded
t. Toe dust along the barricade
not cleaned regularly
u.
6. Containment of a. Transit Mixer (TM) washing Rs. 25,000/- for violation

Water Pollution facility not provided at casting of any single item
and Conservation yard/batching plant compounded to a
of Water maximum of Rs.
b. Drainage system not
1,00,000/- at any single
maintained at casting yard or
instance
and batching plant
c. Not providing treatment
facility before discharge of
muck slurry into drainage
system
d. Washout of construction or
excavated materials directly
diverted to drainage system
e. Not installing Rain Water
Harvesting (RWH) System at
Batching Plant and Casting

Package BH-03
SL.
No.
Yard
f. Spillage or dumping of Poly-
mud slurry or other grouts
onto public road or any other
ecologically sensitive
location
g. Rain Water Harvesting
system not functional
h. Discharge of de-watered
water from underground
construction work to drains
without prior approval of the
Employer
7. Containment of a. Not providing noise barrier of Rs. 25,000/- for violation

Noise required height near noise of any single item
sensitive receptors such as
residences, schools, hospitals
and similar areas
b. Breaching allowable noise
limits of equipment given in
this document
c. Not adhering to noise limits for
DG sets
8. Containment of a. Material Safety Data Sheet Rs. 25,000/- for violation

Waste for material/ chemicals/ of any single item from a)
substances used not to n) compounded to a
provided maximum of Rs. 1,00,0
00/ - at any single
b. Not following waste disposal
instance
mechanism in accordance with
this document
c. Discharging of Poly-mud
slurry or other grouts
drainage directly in to
drainage system
d. Burning of refuse at
construction site
e. Not disposing C&D waste

Package BH-03
SL.
No.
by authorized means
f. Disposal of C&D waste along
the river bed/water body,
natural drainage and wet
land
g. Separate hazardous waste
storage area not provided
I. Drip pans of suitable
size not provided
II. Not providing
designated areas for
storage of wastes
with signages.
III. Not following
segregation of waste
m. Not maintaining separate
scrap yard
n. Not displaying C&D waste
board as per the C&D waste
Management Rules
9. Environmental a. Air monitoring not Rs. 25,000/- for violation

Monitoring implemented as per of any single item
requirement given in this compounded to a
document maximum of Rs.
1,00,000/- at any single
b. Noise monitoring not
instance
implemented as per
requirement given in this
document
c. Carrying out monito ring
through un-approved
laboratories
d. Not keeping records of
monitoring
e. Not maintaining Type I or
Type II integrating sound
level meter with proper
calibration certificate at all

Package BH-03
SL.
No.
time
f. Not verifying the correctness
of monitoring data submitted
by monitoring lab
g. Not ensuring calibration of air
monitoring instruments used
by monitoring agency
h. Not ensuring calibration of
noise monitoring instrument
used by monitoring agency
26.2 The Engineer at his discretion may inform the Contractor, the quantum of penalty
imposed on the contract for violation of environmental requirements on monthly
basis. The contractor shall not transfer the penalty to its sub-contractor.
26.3 In case of violation of environmental requirement s at a particular location, the
Contractor shall be issued Yellow Card on first violation in addition to the penalty
imposed. This warning card shall be withdrawn after satisfactory compliance of the
violation.
26.4 Red card shall be issued in case of repeat environmental violation carried out at the
same location. The construction head of the contractor may be demobilized in case
of fifth Red Card issue for similar violation at the location. In the fifth violation of
environmental requirements at the same location, responsibility of the Contractor's
staff will be fixed by the Contractor's by the Contractor's management and the
person found responsible for repeated violation may be demobilized from site.
However, the employer reserves the right to fix the responsibility on the person
heading the contract.

Package BH-04
APPENDIX IV - PROJECT INTERFACE MATRIX

Interface RACI Matrix
Metro Track Rolling Civil Works Contractor

Type Scope of Services / Works System Work Stock Orange Line Orange Line Blue Line Depot
Contractor Contractor Contractor Elevated Underground Elevated
A Civil Works Underground station & Tunnel Sections

1 Electrical & Mechanical (E&M)
Low voltage electrical distribution Lead Interface 1
Lighting Lead Interface 1
Lightning protection Lead Interface 1
Station HVAC Lead Interface 1
Interface Interface
Drainage system Lead
2 2
Fire fighting Lead Interface 1
Interface
Plumbing Lead
2
Building Automation System (BAS) Lead Interface 1
Fire and Life Safety Lead Interface 2
Volume III – PROJECT INTERFACE MANUAL Page 316 of 398

Package BH-04

Interface
2 Rooms for Metro Systems equipment Lead
1
Interface Interface
3 Cable routes and ducts Lead
1 2
Interface
4 Conduits for cables under track Lead Interface 2
2
Construction & maintenance shafts Interface

5 Lead
(for Metro Systems) 1
Interface
6 Earthing and Bonding Lead
2
B Civil Works Elevated & At-Grade sections
Low voltage electrical distribution Lead Interface 1 Interface 1

Lighting Lead Interface 1 Interface 1
Lightning protection Lead Interface 1 Interface 1

Station HVAC Lead Interface 1 Interface 1

Package BH-04

Interface Interface
Drainage system Lead Lead
2 2
Fire fighting Lead Interface 1 Interface 1
Interface
Plumbing Lead Lead
2
Interface
2 Rooms for Metro Systems equipment Lead Lead
1
Interface Interface
3 Cable routes and ducts Lead Interface 2
1 2
Interface
4 Conduits for cables under track Lead Interface 2 Interface 2
1
Construction & maintenance shafts Interface

5 Lead Lead
(for Railway Systems) 1
Interface
6 Earthing and Bonding Lead Interface 2 Interface 2
2
C Civil Works Depots and Workshops

Package BH-04

Interface
Low voltage electrical distribution Lead
1
Interface
Lighting Lead
1
Interface
Lightning protection Lead
1
Interface
Station HVAC Lead
1
Interface Interface
Drainage system Lead
2 2
Interface
Firefighting & Detection System Lead
1
Interface
VHTS Provisions Lead Lead Lead Lead
2
Interface
Plumbing Lead
2
Rooms for Railway Systems Interface

2 Lead
equipment 1

Package BH-04

Interface Interface
3 Cable routes and ducts Lead
1 2
Interface
4 Conduits for cables under track Lead Interface 2
1
5 Earthing and Bonding Lead Interface 2
D Track Works
Interface
1 Slab track, switches and crossings Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
1
2 Recesses for point machines Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Interface
3 Buffer stops Lead Interface 2
2
4 Switch machines Lead Interface 2
5 Slab end anchor blocks in earthworks Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Interface
6 Shear connector Lead Lead
1
7 Track support level in stations Lead Interface 2

Package BH-04

Interface
8 Earthing and Bonding Lead Interface 2
2
E Metro Systems
Interface Interface
1 Signalling System Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
2 1
2 Telecommunications Systems
Fiber optic backbone system Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
TETRA Radio System Lead Interface1 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2

Automatic fare collection Systems Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Public and Safety Radio systems Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Access Control System Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Passenger Information System Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Safety and security System Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2

Fire Detection Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Other Telecommunication equipment Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2

Package BH-04

3 Energy
Interface
Bulk Power Substations (RSS) Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 1
2
Medium voltage cable networks Lead Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1
Station Power Supply system Lead Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1
Uninterruptible power supplies Lead Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1
Interface
Traction Power Supply system Lead Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1
1
Interface
Third Rail Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 1
1
4 SCADA
Bulk Power Substations Lead Interface 1
Station Power Supply / Traction

Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Power Supply
SCADA Cabling Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
Communications networks Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2

Package BH-04

Servers Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
BAS Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Lead
Interface Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2

5 Tunnel ventilation system Lead
2
Miscellaneous services like ETS,

6 Lead Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1
OCC/BCC works
Interface
7 EMC requirements Lead Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 2
1
Interface
8 Stray current corrosion protection Lead Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2
2
Interface
9 Earth Mat Lead Lead Lead Lead
1
10 Platform Screen Doors Lead Interface 1 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 2 Interface 1
F Rolling Stock
Interface
1 Wheel - rail compatibility Lead
1

Package BH-04

Interface
2 Wheel guide force of leading axle Lead Interface 2 Interface 2
1
Interface
3 Standard axle configuration Lead Interface 2 Interface 2
1
Interface
4 Braking and traction forces Lead Interface 2 Interface 2
1
Interface
5 Shape factor for standard vehicles Lead Interface 2 Interface 2
1
On-board equipment Railway

6 Lead Interface 2
Systems
Interface
7 Service trains Lead
2
G Fire and Life Safety
Interface
1 Emergency service communication Interface 1 Interface 2 Lead Interface 2 Interface 2
2
Legend:
Lead : Responsible for leading the interface coordination with the Engineer's representative, accommodating the design requirements of
"Interface 1" and "Interface 2" parties into their construction or equipment
Package BH-04
Interface - 1: Exchange of information necessary to specify the interface

Interface - 2: Incorporate requirements, provide openings, build in parts, conduits, etc. (to be provided by the originator) if not already specified
elsewhere in the contract.

Package BH-03
APPENDIX V - Interfaces between Civil Contractors and Rail Project Partners:

This section describes the interface responsibilities and obligations of the design & build contractor (henceforth called civil contractor) with other
system contractors like Power Supply & Traction, S&T, PSD, AFC, Escalators, Lifts and Track Work etc. and vice versa. Civil Contractor shall
raise the “Request for Information of all System requirements” to System Contractors at the beginning of Project and finalize the “Detail
Interface Documents-DID” capturing the following as a minimum and submit the signed-off DID to Engineer-in charge (Employer)
SN Scope Lead (Systems) Contractors Underground Civil Contractor
1 Rolling Stock (RS) Contractor Civil Contractor (Station & Tunnel)
RS shall ensure compliance as per stipulations of

Structure Gauge and Kinematic
1.1 Contract and SOD in respect of Static gauge, KE, To ensure Civil Constructions are as per the SOD.
Envelope (KE)
and other clearances.
Rolling Stock (RS) Contractor Civil Contractor (ECS/TVS)
a) Shall give the details of vehicle design

addressing: a) Shall incorporate the data provided by RS in his
Train detail geometry and aeraulic performances SES and CFD simulations.
Train motors and auxiliary services characteristics b) Shall check that his installation (e.g., jet fans) do
and heat release Speed on the reliable time table not infringe the SOD and revise his design
1.2 Design Stage accordingly.
Train fire data (Fire Heat Release Rate) Other
relevant data c) Contractor to incorporate the data provided by
b) Shall give details of the gauge shell design RS Contractor in his ECS Design TVS to maintain
the air temperature to ensure the Rolling Stock Air
c) Shall give details of the on-board environmental Conditioning.
conditions and auxiliary system characteristics
Position & size of trackway ventilation openings

Location of air-conditioner on cars shall be
1.3 Condenser outlet OTE/UPE) shall be interfaced. (SEM requirements
provided
in trackway ventilation duct)
Volume III – Project Interface Manual Page 326 of 398

Package BH-03
Inputs for SES/IDA (CFD simulations) shall be Shall coordinate for the requirements to perform
1.4 SES/IDA Inputs (CFD simulations)
provided the CFD simulations
Shall include the details in SES/IDA simulation

stud.
Shall provide that Max. Heat load of Condenser Heat release rate from train such as AC, brake and
1.5 Heat and Fire Loads
outlet and the total fire load of the train regenerative braking energy is required as IDA
input, to carry out simulation, Similarly for SES
simulation
Shall participate/attend test run and do

1.6 Construction / Installation Stage Shall be required to conduct test run with the train
modifications, if required.
Shall be required to conduct integrated tests with Shall coordinate with contractor-B to complete
1.7 Testing & Commissioning Stage
all systems testing and commissioning work
2 Signalling & Train Control (S&TC) Contractor Civil Contractor (Station & Tunnel)
Furnish exact sizes, weight and fixing

arrangements.
2.1 Equipment Fixings on viaduct Provisions to be made for fixings.
The Contractor shall also carryout erection of
signalling equipment on tunnels as necessary.
Design:
Design:
Layout of rooms at the station – Confirm basic room sizes.
2.2 Develop location, room layout with dimensions of
S&TC equipment room, UPS Furnish equipment dimensions, weights, colours S&TC equipment room, UPS room and station
room, and Station control room. and access dimensions. Furnish equipment control room in relation to the entire station and
foundation/ mounting details; Confirm room facilities layout; Develop routing of cable ducts /
finishes; Furnish cabling requirements including

Package BH-03
destinations, sizes, quantities and cable loadings conduits / hangers / trays within and between
of cable ducts / conduits / hangers / trays within S&TC, UPS and station control rooms.
and between S&TC equipment room, UPS room
Furnish details of architectural finishes and
and station control room. Furnish requirements of
building materials of the entire station.
cable bores on walls / floor penetrations, complete
with pipe, sleeves for routing of all types of cables Design details to be worked out in interface with
S&TC design requirements.
Furnish requirements of EMC/EMI and fire
separation for cabling Furnish air-conditioning /
ventilation, lighting and power socket
requirements; Confirm fire safety provisions;
Review the design from Designated Tunnel
Construction Contractor(s).
Construction:
Foundations for S&TC equipment’s, UPS and
battery racks. Cable ducts / conduits / hangers / Construction:
trays within S&TC equipment room, UPS room.
Rooms complete with structures, false flooring,
Install all S&TC equipment; Install UPS and false ceiling, finishes, ventilation, fire protection,
battery backup; Install S&TC cables; Install power doors, louvers, lighting and power sockets. Cable
distribution cables from UPS to all S&TC ducts / conduits / hangers / trays between S&TC
equipment’s in equipment rooms, Station Control equipment room, UPS and station control room.
Room. Seal the gaps after cable installation work.
Cast in cable ducts on walls /floor penetrations,
complete for routing of all types of cables
Design: Design:
2.3 Cabling infrastructure for S&TC
Trackside: Furnish sectional details of tunnel /guide ways
including structure of gauge, architectural finishes

Package BH-03
Furnish dimensions, weight minimum bending and building materials; Furnish details of
radius supporting and mounting details of cables, architectural finishes and building materials of the
Cu- cable, Outdoor / indoor S&TC cable, Furnish & entire station; Develop routing of Cable ducts /
confirm size, cable loadings and location of Cable conduits / hangers / trays for S&TC cables
ducts / conduits / hangers / trays for S&TC cables throughout the station and each tunnel /guide way
along each track in the tunnel / guideways. Furnish
Design details to be worked out in interface with
requirements of EMC/EMI and fire-separation for
cabling. Review the design from Designated
Tunnel Construction Contractor(s). Construction:
At Stations: Cable ducts / conduits / hangers / trays for routing
all type of cables for S&TC systems throughout the
Furnish dimensions, weight minimum bending
station and into tunnels / guideways.
radius supporting and mounting details of cables
for S&TC; UPS power supply / earth distribution,
furnish destination of each cable, Furnish &
confirm size, cable loadings and location of Cable
ducts / conduits / hangers / trays for routing S&TC
cables throughout the Furnish requirements of
EMC/EMI and fire separation for cabling
Construction Contractor(s).
Construction:
Install cables for all S&TC.
Design:
2.4 Track side S&TC Equipment’s. Design:
Furnish the exact sizes, weight and fixing
arrangements of the line side equipment’s like

Package BH-03
signal units, track circuit/axle counter units, Provision of space & cast in fixing arrangements
junction boxes, etc. for lineside equipment’s like signal units, track
circuits/axle counter units, junction boxes, etc.
Construction Contractor(S). Design details to be worked out in interface with
Construction:
Construction:
Install cables for all S&TC systems.
Provide the Cast in fixing arrangements for lineside
Install all line side equipment’s like signal units, equipment’s.
track circuits/axle counter units, junction boxes,
etc.
Design: Design:
Furnish the locations, dimensions & load for Design details to be worked out in interface with
Antenna mounting Tower Structure for Train Radio S&TC design requirements.
2.5 Train Radio Antenna system equipment.
Construction:
Construction:
Antenna mounting Tower Structure for Train Radio
Install tower & Radio antennae and feeder cables. equipment.
Design:
Furnish weight, dimensions, colours, access Design:
dimension and mounting details of
2.6 Station Control Room Design details to be worked out in interface with
workstations/control panels/ Radio access unit for
all S&TC equipment. S&TC design requirements.
Construction:

Package BH-03
Furniture for mounting workstations/control panels/

Radio access unit for all S&TC equipment.
Design:
Design:
Provision of Earthing at station in Furnish requirements for clean earth and main
Design details to be worked out in interface with
S&TC equipment rooms, Station earth review the design from Designated Tunnel
2.7 Control room, UPS/Battery room. Construction Contractor(S).
Construction:
Earthing bus along the tunnel/ box Construction:
wall. Earthing points separate for clean earth and main
Set up the earth bus inside S&TC equipment
earth at stations & tunnel.
rooms, Station control room, UPS/Battery room.
Interface of S&TC System with Tunnel Ventilation (TVS) System – Underground Section only
1. The S&TC System shall prevent any train from leaving a station for the following scenarios:
a) When the tunnel limit (ventilation shaft ahead) for that section is exceeded. For example (a) if the limit is set to zero and there is one train
ahead within the tunnel section between two tunnel ventilation fans (b) if the limit is set to one and there are two trains ahead within the
tunnel section between two tunnel ventilation fans.
b) When an emergency train stop command has been issued through the S&TC system to a train ahead in the tunnel limit.
2.8 c) When S&TC system detects that a train ahead in the tunnel limit has remained stationary for more than a time interval, which shall be
user configurable.
In case the distance between two underground stations is long, there may be additional ventilation shafts in between two stations. The
S&TC contractor shall interface with the Tunnel Ventilation System contractor to finalize the number and location of the additional shafts.
2. It shall be possible for the controller from OCC to remove and restore the above restriction section by section.
3. The S&TC System shall provide an alarm to the SCADA system controlling the Tunnel Ventilation System.

Package BH-03
4. The two contractors shall jointly develop detailed interface document covering the hardware interface, list of messages, type and format
of message to be displayed and the protocols to be followed for exchange of data between the two systems. The detailed interface
document shall be submitted for review of the Employer. The S&TC contractor as a Lead Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive
Operating Modes and Principles Document (OMPD) and the Tunnel Ventilation System contractor shall assist the S&TC contractor.
Signalling & Train Control (S&TC) Contractor Civil Contractor (Station Civil Works)
Providing opening in structures for

various system cables from tunnel Shall interface with Civil Contractor for exact sizes Shall provide necessary openings cable crossing
2.9
to Station & platform to Station of openings required for signalling cables. from Station to tunnels and vice-versa.
equipment rooms
Layout of Equipment and Cable Confirm basic room sizes; floor load capacity and
Provide rooms complete with provisions structures
2.10 Ducts in Technical Rooms and room finish; Furnish equipment layouts within the
as per signalling requirements.
throughout Stations. rooms;
Furnish weight, dimensions, colours and mounting

Provision to be made by according to Signalling
2.11 Station Control Room Equipment. details of work Stations/control panels and other
requirements
Signalling equipment's.
Shall furnish and confirm sizes and bending radius Shall provide for openings and necessary cut outs
2.12 Cables
of main cable duct. for cables entry and exit in civil structure
Furnish exact sizes, weight and fixing Provisions to be made for fixings in accordance
2.13 Equipment Fixings in Stations
arrangements of equipment of any signalling. with information provided by the signalling.
Access for transportation of Shall provide the access so that construction

2.14 Identification of area and confirmation.
materials. activities after access period are not hampered.
S&T Contractor Civil Contractor (Station E&M works)

Package BH-03
Shall confirm electrical load requirement for the

Shall provide min. two (2) circuit breakers at
Provision for power supply of signalling equipment and shall co-ordinate with
2.15 essential low voltage switchboard and lay min. two
signalling equipment E&M contractor. S&T UPS shall be provided by
(2) cables from ASS to signalling(S&T) UPS.
S&T Contractor
Shall provide all the E & M services (e.g., lighting,

Provision for E&M service in Shall confirm requirement for lighting, HVAC, in small power, HVAC, Fire Alarm, firefighting & Gas
2.16
signalling technical rooms. signalling technical rooms. Flooding, earthing, drainage etc. in technical
rooms
Shall make necessary provisions for main and

Shall interface with E&M Contractor for earthing clean earth bars as required by Signalling upto the
2.17 Provision for earthing system
requirement for Signalling equipment. technical rooms(inside) i.e. SER, UPS, PSD, AFC,
GSM etc.
Shall supply and provide all primary cable trays I

concealed conduits/ raceways and necessary
provisions up to the entry point in the wall in
Shall provide details of cable numbers, sizes,
system rooms for S&T, UPS, GSM, PSD, AFC,
2.18 Cable routes in Stations. weights, routing (origin I destination) and
cables as per requirement. Secondary cable
separation from power cables to E&M.
containments/ducts/ raceways etc within the rail
system rooms shall be provided by the respective
project partners
S&T Contractor Civil Contractor (Station Finishes Works)
Layout of Equipment and Cable Confirm basic room sizes; floor load and room Shall prepare the Finishes works accordingly.
2.19 Ducts in Technical/Equipment finish; Shall provide false floor, false ceiling, painting, Fire
Rooms and throughout Stations. Furnish equipment layouts within the rooms; doors, etc

Package BH-03
Confirm fire safety provisions; Furnish weight,

dimensions, colours and mounting details of work
Station/control panels and other signalling
equipment

2.20 Equipment fixing Provisions to be made for fixing.
arrangements of Stations.
Shall provide information for provisions for Shall prepare, platform, with provisions as per
2.21 Station area
Signalling equipment's location. information provided by the Signalling
Shall provide for opening and necessary cut-outs

Furnish and confirm sizes, bending radius of main
for cables entry and exit in finishes works. Ensure
2.22 Cables cables and cable routes. Coordinate with Finishes
that the finishes work are coordinated with the
for laying of cables prior to finishing works.
cable laying.
S&T Contractor Civil Contractor (TVS/ECS Works)
1. The Signalling System shall prevent any train 1. TVS/ECS Contractor shall provide details of
from leaving the Station for the following scenarios Ventilation Shaft and Ventilation fans locations to
S&T Contractor as per requirement.
(a) When the tunnel limit (ventilation shaft ahead)
for that section is exceeded. For example
(Indicative)
Design/Installation/Testing &
2.23 (i) if the limit is set to zero and there is one train
Commissioning Stage
ahead within the tunnel section between two
tunnel ventilation fans
(ii) if the limit is set to one and there are two trains
ahead within the tunnel section between two
tunnel ventilation fans.

Package BH-03
(b) When an emergency train stop command has

been issued through the Signalling system to a
train ahead in the tunnel limit
(c) When Signalling system detects that a train
ahead in the tunnel limit has remained stationary
for more than a time interval, which shall be user
configurable
2. The Signalling contractor shall Coordinate with
the tunnel ventilation contractor to finalize the 2. TVS/ECS Contractor shall Coordinate with
number and location of the additional shafts. Signalling Contractor & provide required details
3. The Signalling System shall provide alarms to
the TVS/ECS SCADA system controlling the
Tunnel Ventilation System. 3. TVS/ECS Contractor shall Collect alarms from
Signalling Contractor & implement in TVS/ECS
4. It shall be possible for the controller from SCADA Controlling system
OCC/BCC to remove and restore the restriction
section by section. 4. Shall Coordinate with Signalling Contractor
5. The Signalling and TVS/ECS contractors shall

jointly develop detailed interface document
5. The Signalling and TVS/ECS contractors shall
covering the hardware interface, list of messages,
jointly develop detailed interface document
type and format of message to be displayed and
covering the hardware interface, list of messages,
the protocols to be followed for exchange of data
type and format of message to be displayed and
between the two systems. The detailed interface
the protocols to be followed for exchange of data
document shall be submitted for review of the
between the two systems. The detailed interface
Employer.
document shall be submitted for review of the
6. S&T Contractor will prevent the entry of train in Engineer/Employer.
“No stopping Zone” in Full Supervision/ATO mode

Package BH-03
such that no train or a part of a train stops within

the “No stopping Zone” during normal operations.
6. TVS shall interface with S&T contractor to
7. Shall design the telecom connectivity provide chainages and other necessary
arrangements between different stations and the information about “No Stopping Zone”.
OCC and BCC including the required
7. Shall advise the details of connectivity required
communication switches at the CER to meet TVS
between different stations and the OCC and BCC
requirements
8. Shall advise the location of communication
switches and the inter connectivity hardware
details B for Connecting the TVS system
8. Shall plan for installation of necessary hardware
9. Shall cater for the required band width and and cabling from the location of communication
availability of the data connection on the FOTS for switches to the workstations and PLC’s for TVS
meeting the inter-site connectivity requirements
including NTP for the TVS system up to the
communication switches at the CER at all 9. Shall advise the characteristics of the data
underground stations including OCC and BCC, for connections including NTP between inter site
the control and monitoring arrangements to be PLC‟s for the TVS for all underground station
installed by TV including OCC and BCC for the control and
10. At the depot, shall design dedicated circuit monitoring arrangements
breakers and terminal connectors for TVS SCADA
equipment to accommodate electrical loads
required by TVS SCADA equipment in the OCC 10. At depot, shall provide electrical loads required
and CER. Same for BCC and CER from S&T UPS for non- mechanical TVS SCADA
equipment such as workstations and servers.
11. Shall design train movement on the policy that Same for BCC
a second train can enter a ventilation zone
provided the train ahead is approaching the station

Package BH-03
and is on move. However, during emergency and 11. Shall provide demarcation of ventilation zone
congested conditions there will be one train per
ventilation zone
12. Shall accommodate the space for the HMI of
TVS SCADA and cabling of TVS at OCC and BCC
theatre duly taking this into account in the
ergonomics study 12. Shall provide the necessary dimensions for the
HMI of TVS SCADA and cabling of TVS at OCC
13. Shall accommodate the space for Main PLCs and BCC theatre
for TVS at the CER in the OCC and BCC building
13. Shall provide the necessary dimensions for the
14. Shall provide the telecom connectivity Main PLC’s for TVS at the CER in the OCC and
arrangements between different stations and the BCC building
OCC and BCC at the CER to meet the necessary
control and monitoring requirements of TVS 14. Shall supply, install the data switches required
for TVS, for control and monitoring
15. Shall monitor
15. Shall install TVS SCADA system and data
switches if required at OCC and BCC theatre and
the intra-site cabling from the communication
16. At the OCC & CER and BCC & CER, S&T
switches up to the PLCs of the TVS
shall provide terminal connections of S&T UPS.
16. Shall connect power cables from SCADA
17. Shall provide the necessary furniture’s in the
equipment to designated systems.
OCC and BCC theatre to accommodate TVS
SCADA system 17. Shall monitor.
18. Shall attend the joint test and validate the
results. S&T shall show data connections in O&M
Manual. 18. Shall jointly test the control and monitoring
arrangements of TVS between OCC, BCC and

Package BH-03
different stations. TV shall show data connections

in O&M Manual.
Control signal for location of stopping trains at Receipt of signal from OCC.
Automatic Congestion and fire congestion (stopping of train for more than 2 min
2.24 Track way and tunnel ventilation Control shall be
mode operation from OCC at particular location) mode and Fire alarms to be
sent to OCC/TVS SCADA according to Signalling system requirements
Shall provide the information/data in TCP-IP

format only for interface with BAS. Shall coordinate for requirements,
2.25 Communication Standard Signalling to provide the information/data in Shall also jointly decide on the protocol (bit-by-bit)
Modbus/BACnet protocol in Bit-by-Bit/TCP-IP for TCP/IP interface
format for interface
Allocation of IP Address for station shall be Shall coordinate and provide complete IP details to
2.26 IP Address
provided S&T of their existing network for IP planning
Shal provide heat load requirements of their

2.27 Equipment Room equipment in their rooms. Shall coordinate for provision of S&T
Shall share room layout for installation of FCU’s
Bandwidth shall be agreed by NP-SCADA and

Telecom jointly as per network requirements
2.28 OCC Interface Telecom would create a VLAN on the IP backbone Shall coordinate for their requirements
for use ECS/TVS for building their IP network.
Redundant FO (fibre Optic) port (Working+
Standby) for NP SCADA at station OCC for

Package BH-03
connectivity from station to station and from station

to OCC respectively separate for each line
Required bandwidth at least 50Mbps exclusive
channel to be provided
Shall incorporate the No-Stop zone chainage

2.29 No-Stop Zone Shall provide the No-Stop zone chainage to S&T
information provided by ECS/TVS in their software
S&T After Completing cables lying will give

clearance for completing fire sealing in cut-out. No
cable laying to be carried out by S&T after fire
2.30 Fire Sealing sealing works. Shall coordinate for the same
Any rework required will be done at the risk and

cost of S&T
The S&T Contractor as a led shall prepare the

Operating modes and Principle document. The document shall establish the Shall (ECS/TVS) Provide inputs required by S&T
2.31
Document (OMPD) principles related to system and interface design for preparation of Document
under normal, degraded and emergency mode.
Brackets /hangers are to be provided on tunnel

wall for laying of optical fibre cable, emergency
telephone cables, CCTV cables, GSM, Signalling
S&T Contractor shall coordinate for the
Tunnel brackets/Primary Cable cables.
2.32 Requirements
Trays Primary cable tray connectivity is to be provided
from S&T brackets in tunnel to S&T cable trays in
the nearest S&T shaft. Cable tray inside the shaft
will be provide by E&M Contractor.

Package BH-03
Data/power cable tray connectivity to be provided

in Mid shaft at all levels with connectivity from S&T
brackets in tunnel, as per approved drawings.
For cut-outs less than 200mm, fire sealing shall be
done after clearance from S&T.
Permanent power for GSM operator equipment,
E&M to lay the power cable up to the termination
point in GSM room.
Coordination of drainage pipes and equipment at Civil Contractor to provide information to S&T
Drainage systems - Drainage
2.33 crossing areas with other conduits (shafts, Systems on the location of drainage man holes in
pipes inside the track bed
recesses, turnout areas). tunnels sections
3 PST Contractor Civil Contractor (Tunnel works)
Provide vertical stirrups/connection (shear

PST shall provide details and install the third rail. connector) in RCC track plinths/track slab
3.1 Provision of Third rail Shall coordinate for delivery Shall provide suitable access form transport of
of third rails in tunnel. third rails inside the tunnels and underground
stations.
Arrangement for carrying power Shall furnish Design to E&M Contractor for Cable Shall supply and install as per requirements of
and control cables on the containment, Sizes of Cut outs, inserts, etc. to be PST Contractor except 33KV cable brackets.
tunnels/stations installed.
Providing openings for passing cables as per
3.2 Design: requirement of PST Contractor.
Installation of 33
KV, 750 V cables, traction return Shall provide weight & dimensions of the cables.
cables and PLC cable for ETS Construction: Construction:

Package BH-03
Connection and other control a. Shall supply & install 33KV, 750 V, return cables Shall design & provide and install cable path
cables, earth strips/earth cables in (including metallic support, brackets, cable trays
and PLC cable for ETS connection, other control
station and tunnel area. etc.) as per requirement inclusive of cable shaft
cables, earth strips/earth cables in station and between the two corridors.
tunnel area.
Shall construct appropriate passages/trenches
b. Shall co-ordinate and give requirements to the
ducts with necessary cable support arrangement
UG Stations & Tunnel contractor for the cable including all fire separation requirements.
path, gallery size, route alignment and mounting
Shall provide suitable opening and HDPE pipe for
requirements for 33 KV,750 V, return cables and
carrying cables inside ASS /TSS and at track
PLC cable for ETS connection in the tunnel.
crossings as per requirement.
c. Shall confirm the requirements for passages for
Shall take into consideration the bending radius of
cable crossing and alignment of cables in station cable and covering of cables in public places.
area.
d. Shall co-ordinate with UG Stations & Tunnel
contractor for provision of opening and HDPE
pipes of adequate size to carry the cables inside
ASS/TSS and at track crossings.
e. Shall witness installation of cable duct trenches,
troughs.
Earthing connections. Shall provide the necessary earthing connections Provide earth terminals for connection by PST for
between SEC/BEC/ITL etc. and the earth
Earthing, bonding, and stray terminals. Earthing, bonding and stray current protection
3.3 current protection Arrangements arrangements.
inside the tunnel portion / in the BEC: Buried Earth Conductor OPC: Overhead
Underground Stations Protection Conductor ITL: Integral Transverse Link

Package BH-03
Design: Construction:
a. Shall provide schematic arrangement of Shall install all necessary support arrangement for
earthing, bonding and stray current protection earth cable in both tunnels.
management in the tunnel and stations.
B Shall provide schematic of structure earth Shall provide structure earth terminals of tunnel
terminals, stray current collection mesh in track segments for connection to earth cable.
slab.
c. Shall provide schematics of track to structure
Shall provide path and cable support for
conductance measurement and witness the actual connecting station earth mats to earth cable.
field measurement.
Construction:
Shall connect various structures at station and
d. Shall install earth cable in both tunnels. inside tunnel to Earth Cable as per schematic.
e. Shall connect structure earth terminals of tunnel Shall associate with Traction and Power supply to
verify the earthing-bonding of structure as per
segments to SEC/BEC cable by suitable cable as approved scheme.
per approved design.
Shall provide stray current collection mesh in the
f. Shall interface with SB & Tunnel Contractor for
track slab as per requirements.
the requirement of support inside tunnels or at
stations. Shall perform measurement of track to structure
resistance insulation as per acceptance criteria
g. Shall coordinate with SB & Tunnel Contractor
jointly agreed and signed with PST Contractor.
for measurement of Track to structure resistance
insulation as per acceptance criteria jointly agreed Coordinate for requirements of stary current
and signed. monitoring scheme.

Package BH-03
Electrical and physical clearances

3.4 Shall respect the given clearances. Shall respect the given clearances.
as specified in SOD
Power requirements and arrangements for tunnel

Lighting and Maintenance Sockets shall be E&M Contractor shall design and install with power
furnished by E&M Contractor. PST contractor will feeding, lighting and sockets from Station DB.
Tunnel Lighting/Maintenance provide auxiliary supply i.e. (415v) to E&M panels. Shall interface with PST for installation Station DB
3.5
Sockets Further it will be E&M scope for distribution of shall feed power to tunnel lighting/Maintenance
power. sockets loads. Shall interface with PST for their
requirements
PST contractor will not have any scope in this.
PST Contractor Civil Contractor (Station Civil Works)
Providing opening in structures for Shall provide necessary openings for cable
Shall interface with Station Civil Contractor for
various system cables from tunnel crossing from Station to tunnel and vice-versa.
3.6 exact cut out sizes of openings required for Power
to Station & platform to Station
cables and other DC and control cables From Platform to ASS and ASS/TSS room.
equipment rooms
Providing electrical and

Shall co-ordinate with the Civil works Contractors Shall ensure that the clearances as per SOD are
3.7 mechanical clearances for third
to ensure compliances of clearances as per SOD respected and there are no infringements.
rail.
PST shall provide necessary interconnections

between earth terminals given by Civil Works Shall provide necessary continuity of all the
Contractor and earth conductors (BEC, Station metallic
3.8 Providing earthing connections. earth terminals etc.). structure (roof structure, platform, reinforcements,
The Civil Contractor shall provide the earth mesh building reinforcements etc.) and provide earth
at each Station including earth connections for terminals to PST.
PST

Package BH-03
Shall provide necessary fixation arrangement for

Shall provide ASS room complete in all respects,
transformers, panels and other equipment etc.
including flooring,
Shall do the cable management in the space
Shall provide the necessary cut-outs for cables
available under the false floor or in the false roof. entry and exit, cable tray arrangement as per
design of PST contractor.
Installation of 33 KV cables, 750 V cables, traction
return cables, SEC and PLC control cables for Shall interface for fixation of equipment on the
ETS connection with SCADA RTU floor.
Auxiliary Sub Station (SPS) be PST contractor shall review lighting layout and Station building contractor shall submit lighting
substituted by Auxiliary Sub calculations submitted by E&M contractor and calculations and supply, Install all lighting fixtures
Station (SPS) or Auxiliary Sub coordinate for fixing of lighting fixtures after in coordination with PST contractor. Ventilation
3.9
Station cum Traction Sub Station equipment installation. fans shall be supplied and installed by station
room (TPS) building contractor.
PST contractor to submit heat dissipation
Lighting and ventilation for ASS, calculations to station building contractor. Design:
ASS+TSS
Design: Shall design adequate ventilation and lighting
system for ASS/TSS.
Shall provide heat load for electrical equipment
inside ASS/TSS.
Construction: Construction:
Shall interface with UG Stations & Tunnel Shall provide for special requirements or preferred
Contractors for any special requirements or
locations of lights, fans, exhaust fans and other
preferred locations of lights, fans, exhaust fans,
services.
ventilation ducts and other services.
Provision of openings in slabs etc. Shall interface with Civil Contractor to ensure Shall provide openings in Civil structures, building
3.10
for cable entry and cable exit. correct and adequate cable routings, openings etc. etc. for cable entry/exit.

Package BH-03
The construction should take into consideration

cable bending radius, cable fastening
arrangements and suitable provision to cover the
cables in public places.
Civil contractor will provide a construction schedule
at every level so that PST contractor will freeze its
requirements with all dimensions and numbers.
Shall supply necessary fixtures, inserts, etc. Shall install fixtures (Base frame & GI strips etc.)
Inserts, fixtures & fittings for Shall witness the installation of fixtures by Civil provided by PST.
3.11 installation of equipment, hooks Contractor. The design, supply & installation of lifting hooks
etc. will be done by station civil Contractor as per the
Requirement for lifting hooks will be given by PST
Contractor requirement of PST Contractor.
Shall provide the access so that construction

Access for transportation of activities after access period are not hampered.
materials. Shall provide the construction schedule at different
levels so that interface for Access could be done.
Shall provide the access hatch (cut-outs) as per

PST Contractor to interface and give their the requirement of PST Contractor.
Delivery route for shifting of
3.13 requirement for access hatch (cut outs) for shifting After delivery of equipment’s PST will contractor
ASS/TSS equipment’s
of equipment’s in ASS/TSS room. will confirm its delivery items & Civil contractor will
close the Hatch (cut -outs) accordingly.
PST Contractor Civil Contractor (Station E&M works)

Package BH-03
Shall co-ordinate with Civil Contractor and connect

Shall provide the earthing mesh/ electrodes as per
all its equipment to the earth terminals (MET)
approved design and provide earth terminals
3.14 Station building earthing works provided by the E & M Contractor.
(MET) in ASS/TSS rooms to PST for his earthing
An ICS will be signed by both PST and civil
requirements.
contractor for the same.
Shall Design, supply and install cables, complete

with connections on either end. Shall interface with
the Civil Contractor for their requirements.
Shall provide the detailed cable tray layout
Installation of cable supports/trays, drawings.
cable ducting, raceways for Shall supply and install the cable trays, cable
Shall interface with UG Stations & Tunnel ducting, race ways for HV, LV and control cables
3.15 carrying the HV, LV and control
Contractors for cable trays required for LV and HV
cables in ASS rooms and station Shall interface with the PST for their requirements.
area cables inside ASS & TSS.
Shall provide the details of cables such as weight,
dia, no. of cables/runs, voltage level, minimum
bending radius required etc to UG (E&M)
Contractor.
Shall provide the 0.415 kV bus duct/cables Shall provide the terminals in the LT Switchboard
including connection from Auxiliary transformer to for terminating the 0.415 kV outgoing bus
ASS Interface for terminating inside the LT Switchboards (Supply of Main MDB duct/cables coming from the auxiliary transformer.
3.16 by the E&M Contractor)
0.415 kV cables Civil contractor shall make provisions for fixing of
Shall provide the electrical interlocking between ETS boxes in platform including cable tray for lying
the breakers on the either side of the transformer. of cable by PST contractor.

Package BH-03
Shall coordinate with the Civil Contractor for these

requirements
PST works include Auxiliary substations up to the
provision of transformer including incoming
busduct/cable feeder arrangement & termination
up to the Main LT Distribution Boards
Shall provide all the E & M services (e.g. lighting,

Shall interface with E & M Contractor for services
E & M Services in technical rooms small power, Ventilation, Fire Alarm, firefighting &
3.17 to be provided in ASS rooms. Gas flooding of PST
including ASS earthing, drainage etc. in technical rooms including
equipment’s is scope of PST contractor.
ASS.
Shall provide battery, battery charger, DC DB etc.

110V DC control supply for all the for 110V DC control supply for his equipment and
Shall interface with PST for 110V DC control
3.18 HV and LV equipment, panels etc. LV equipment/ panels provided by Civil Contractor
supply to his equipment in ASS rooms.
in ASS in the ASS (PST battery and charger is designed
for their equipment’s only)
RTU equipment including communication links to

TER etc. will be supplied and erected
The ASS. Switching station rooms will be
Installation of RTU Equipment in Shall interface with UG (E&M) contractor for cable
3.19 constructed by the contractor as per the layout
UG Sections routes, tray requirements in ASS room to SER & given by Traction contractor
TER room & cables connecting to ETS at
platforms and other locations.
Earthing Arrangements inside

3.20 The Traction Contractor to share details Shall install as per approved drawings
tunnel portion

Package BH-03
Connections to Earth plates, as per designs and The Earthing bars embedded in concrete and earth
3.21 Earthing in RAMP portion
specifications plates will be provided as per approved design
At transition of tunnel towards rail

Shall interface with for provisions of side railing At transition of tunnel towards rail corridor where
corridor where viaduct height is
3.22 with concertina wires at transition of tunnel viaduct height is low, Contractor shall provide the
low, side railing with concertina
towards rail corridor where viaduct height is low side railing with concertina wires
wires to be provided
PST contractor shall interface with E&M contractor Brackets in tunnel and cable tray in under-ground
ASS/TSS Requirements in tunnel for the tunnel brackets requirements. station (ASS/TSS/Under croft etc.) of respective
3.23
sections section are to be provided by E&M contractor
within contract boundary.
Civil contractor need to make necessary

arrangement and cable tray access for laying of
cable by PST contractor.
PST contractor shall indicate locations of ETS
boxes in cross passages, station area & station Location of air jet nozzle openings and TVS
control room (SCR). Booster fan shall be coordinated with Traction
Contractor.
ETS in cross packages & Station Shall provide ETS load, cable route & cable
3.24 details. Avoid obstructions of airflow by cable and supports
area, SCR room.
Shall install PLC cable from Ass or ASS/TSS RTU Shall provide niche in walls or support in
to ETS equipment. structure/columns of stations to accommodate ETS
equipment and emergency telephone.
Shall provide emergency 230V LT supply at ETS
equipment location indication lamp.

Package BH-03
Shall provide cable route and install support

(metallic tray, conduit etc.) for PLC cable from
SCADA RTU to ETS.
All cable support infrastructure shall be provided
with necessary earthing arrangements.
Shall interface with Civil Contractor, supply and

install warning notices, sectioning lay-outs to
passengers and O&M personnel as per statutory Shall interface with PST and provide suitable
requirements in accordance with technical arrangements for fixation of warning notices in
specification. Station premises.
3.25 Provision of statutory warning Shall supply and install Caution Labels on third rail
notices etc. for presence of 750 V covers and coordinate, inform for locations of third
DC traction electrification rail warning and indicator boards for all other Shall supply and install all warning and indicator
locations. boards at all other location (except third rail) as per
drawings and specifications provided by PST
Shall furnish the relevant drawings and Contractor.
specifications.
Shall review the fixing arrangement.
PST Contractor Civil Contractor (ECS/TVS works)
Location of air jet nozzle openings and TVS Location of air jet nozzle openings and TVS
Booster fan shall be coordinated with Civil Booster fan shall be coordinated with Traction
3.26 TBF Location and Nozzle Layout Contractor (ECS/TVS works). Contractor.
Avoid obstructions of airflow by cable and Avoid obstructions of airflow by cable and
supports. supports.

Package BH-03
Contractor will lay the Earthing conductor Contractor shall lay the jumper and connect both
3.27 Earthing of TBF and Nozzle throughout the UG Corridor, Necessary jumper side to ensure proper Earthing connections.
and clamp shall be provided Double Earthing of the Equipment to be ensured
Shall provide the heat load in ASS/TSS rooms and

3.28 Heat Load coordinate for the layout of FCU’s and required Contractor shall coordinate for the same
ventilation
Shall advise the ECS for any requirements or

preferred fans and exhaust fans,
Ventilation in ASS/TSS Ventilation cooling/Airconditioning Contractor shall provide ventilation arrangements
3.29
in ASS &SSP/SP as per requirement
Shall provide heat load calculation to Ug (E&M)
contractor.
PST Contractor Civil Contractor (Station Finishes Works)
Shall provide necessary fixation arrangement for Shall prepare interface for fixation of equipment on
transformers, panels other equipment etc. the floor.
Shall provide necessary interface requirements for Shall prepare ASS room complete in all finish’s
finishes: paint, doors, windows, etc. respects, including flooring, doors, , windows and
interior finish etc.
Shall provide necessary interface requirements
3.30 Auxiliary Substations. Shall provide the necessary cut-outs for cables
holes for cabling and duct in dividing wall
entry and exit as per the requirement of PST
Construction: Contractor.
Shall supply, transport and install ASS & TSS Construction:
Equipment including Transformers, rectifiers, 33
kV Switchgear, HSCB etc as per Specifications. Shall construct ASS & TSS rooms keeping in view
the specific requirements of Traction and Power

Package BH-03
Shall provide dimensions and weights of various supply contractor regarding passages, ingress /
egress routes, door size, knock out panels, floor
Equipment.
openings etc. for access of heavy equipment’s
Shall provide equipment layout drawing. Shall forming permanent works.
provide necessary foundations for transformers,
Shall provide ASS/TSS room complete in all
panels other equipment etc. Alternatively, the
respects, including flooring, lighting, ventilation,
Contractor can provide suitably designed anchor-
power sockets, access doors, rolling shutters,
fasteners to fix transformers, 33kV panels, Battery
windows, ventilators and interior finish, but
chargers etc to the basic floor/pedestal.
excluding foundations for transformer and panels.
Shall coordinate with UG Stations & Tunnel
Contractors for suitable design of ASS & TSS Shall provide lifting hooks in ASS/TSS rooms as
rooms to ensure smooth passage for carrying the per
equipment’s inside ASS & TSS. requirements of Traction and Power Contractor.
Shall coordinate with UG Stations & Tunnel Shall make provision for passage/crossing of
Contractors for suitable openings for cable and various cables in the station along the walls, under
earthing connections and cable entry from viaduct the platform copings etc. for cable entry from
viaduct cable duct to ASS/TSS room. Shall provide
cable duct to ASS/TSS room.
cut-outs in floor for cable entry.
Shall confirm the fire safety provisions.
Shall provide suitable fire safety provisions.
Shall arrange material handling equipment at his
own cost or hire the same from UG Stations & UG contractor shall provide necessary temporary
Tunnel Contractor and pay necessary hiring
openings /cut out for lowering of PST contractor
charges.
equipment’s in to ASS, TSS rooms and on to track
and shall close the temporary openings/cut out
after PST contractor completes his works.

Package BH-03
Shall interface with Civil Contractor, supply and

Provision of statutory warning install warning notices, sectioning lay-outs to Shall interface with PST and provide suitable
3.31 notices etc. for presence of 750 V passengers and O&M personnel as per statutory arrangements for fixation of warning notices in
DC traction electrification requirements in accordance with technical Station premises.
specification.
Shall co-ordinate with Civil Contractor and install Shall provide access to PST to install electric wire
3.32 Conduits/hangers
before finishing works conduits/hangers.
Construction:
Shall co-ordinate with UG Stations & Tunnel
Construction:
contractor for provision of suitable sockets for
temporary power. Shall provide temporary power as per requirement.
Temporary Power for Installation, Shall pay to the UG Stations & Tunnel contractor
3.33
testing & commissioning for the power consumption.
Note: If temporary power is not available from UG
Shall provide suitable meters for calculating the
Stations & Tunnel Contractor, then Traction and consumption.
Power supply contractor shall make his own
arrangement.
Associate with UG Stations & Tunnel contractor for Responsible for MDB testing including ACB
3.34 MDB Testing
ACB testing. testing.
Design:
3.35 Protection system Shall design a comprehensive protection system in
coordination with UG Stations & Tunnel contractor. Construction:

Package BH-03
Construction: Shall coordinate and provide details of protection

design used for low voltage system.
Shall design and provide all protective devices for
Shall supply and install CTs in MDB panel as per
Auxiliary Transformer protection.
the requirement given by Traction and Power
Shall coordinate and provide details of CTs to be supply
installed in MDB for various protections e.g. contractor.
differential, REF protections to UG Stations &
Tunnel contractor. Shall provide potential free contacts for power
SCADA connection by Traction and Power supply
Display of Status of LV ACB in MDB on OCC/BCC
Contractor for display of LV ACB in MDB to
SCADA.
OCC/BCC SCADA.
Inter-tripping between main LV Construction: Construction:

Circuit Breakers and the 33 kV
3.36 Shall provide and connect wire for inter-tripping Shall provide necessary
Feeder Circuit Breakers of the circuits as per requirements shown in
Auxiliary Transformer specifications. terminals to facilitate inter tripping.
Design: Design:
Shall design, review, and provide the earthing Shall prepare the layout for earth mat as per
design calculations to the UG Stations & Tunnel calculations provided and site conditions.
Contractor. Construction:
3.37 Earthing in ASS and ASS/ TSS
Construction: Shall install the earth mat according to approved
Shall associate during the installation of earth mat. design.
Shall jointly check the resistance of the earth mat Shall install Earth Bus / METs (main earth
after installation. terminals

Package BH-03
Shall provide and connect various equipment’s to connected to the earth mats) inside ASS and TSS
Earth Bus/METs inside ASS/TSS with GI/Copper to
strips.
facilitate the connection of equipment’s.
Provide ACBs requirements in the design of MDB

as per auxiliary load. Adequate space for
accommodating the ACBs shall be provided.
Supply and install ACBs/Bus coupler in the MDB.
Traction contractor will review the design in
respect downstream protection design. Connection of both sides of ACBs is also in the
scope of E&M contractor.
3.38 ACBs in MDB
Control wiring from ACBs to an earmarked terminal
Provide I/O list for SCADA and functional
strip for accessing these signals for SCADA
interlocking. Tentative list of I/O list.
connectivity.
Provision of scheme in MDB panel for SCADA as
per the requirements suggested by Traction
contractor.
Shall install the platform insulation membrane

Shall associate during the installation of platform according to manufacturer’s
methodology/approved design.
insulation membrane.
3.39 Platform insulation membrane Shall check the resistance of the platform
Shall supervise the checking of resistance of the insulation membrane after installation under the
platform insulation membrane after installation. supervision of Traction and Power supply
contractor.

Package BH-03
Providing emergency supply (DG, UPS) feeder in

Cable laying from designated LV panel to ACDB at emergency panel or other suitable point.
3.40 LV Power Supply to ACDB at ASS
ASS Installing cable support from LV panel to ACDB in
ASS
Shall coordinate and inform locations & relevant

Third rail disconnection switch in Shall provide space/niches and foundation for
3.41 Drawings.
tunnel box switches in tunnel area and crossovers.
Shall supply and install the equipment.
Providing 230VAC emergency power supply to

control & link to central Fire alarm system.
3.42 ASS/TSS Fire Protection Provide local gas extinguisher system.
Room Gas flooding system as per requirements to
be provided.
4 Telecom Contractor Civil Contractor (Station & Tunnel)
Design:
Design: Shall design the entire station layout plan
Layout preparation and incorporating locations & dimensions of TER,
Shall furnish the location & dimensions of TER,
construction of TER, SCR, TMR, Telecom shaft (from concourse to street
TMR & Telecom shaft (from concourse to street
Telecom shaft (from concourse to level as well as from platform to concourse level,),
level as well as from platform to concourse level),
4.1 street level as well as from Telecom GSM Room etc. including false flooring,
TMR, Telecom shaft, Telecom GSM room etc.
platform to concourse level), false ceiling and lighting etc.
Telecom Maintenance room Shall furnish the required details of false floor,
(TMR), Telecom GSM room etc. false ceiling and lighting etc. of TER, and GSM Design details to be worked out as per interface
room. with Telecom design requirements.
Construction:

Package BH-03
Shall furnish the required details as per approved Shall construct the TER, TMR, Telecom shaft
design. Shall coordinate closely with Civil (from concourse to street level as well as from
contractor to ensure the requirements at site. platform to concourse level), Telecom GSM Room
etc. including false flooring, ceiling and lighting etc.
Shall execute the work based on approved design.
NOTE:
There should not be any water flow or drainage
pipe passing through TER, SCR.
Design:
Shall design the details of space on outer edge of
Provision of space on outer edge tunnel wall and of cut and cover portion for GSM
of tunnel wall and of cut and cover Shall furnish the required details and install the Mobile Cellular & TETRA Cable.
4.2
portion for GSM Mobile Cellular & required brackets. Construction:
TETRA.
Shall provide the space on outer edge of tunnel
wall and of cut and cover portion for GSM Mobile
Cellular & TETRA cable.
Design:
Shall design the Cross over pipes, required for
laying of TETRA, GSM Mobile Cellular, OFC and
4.3 Provision of Cross over pipes Shall furnish the required details. any other Telecom cables from under craft to the
outer edge of tunnel wall in station Box area and
throughout tunnel (if required) for each tunnel as
per Telecom requirements.

Package BH-03
Construction:
Shall construct the Cross over pipes, required for
laying of TETRA, GSM Mobile Cellular, OFC and
any other Telecom cables from under craft to the
outer edge of tunnel wall in station Box area for
each tunnel as per Telecom requirements.
Furnish all the details required to prepare the Design:

primary and secondary fixtures of PIDS display. Shall design the primary and secondary fixture
Shall install PIDS display secondary fixture at requirement to mount platform level PIDS display.
Primary and secondary fixture for platform level. Construction:
4.4 overall Telecom system at entire
station. Shall install speaker, CCTV, clock fixture at entire Shall construct platform level primary fixture based
station. on design to mount PIDS display.
Shall coordinate/ support and witness the load test Shall perform the load test for PIDS display in
and ensure the display load safety. presence of Telecom contractor.
Design:
Shall furnish weight, dimensions, colours and Shall incorporate the details of architectural
mounting details of public address loudspeakers, finishes, acoustic treatment and building materials
ambient noise sensors. of the entire station on design. Shall design the
Installation of all Telecom RCP drawings complying required NRC value of
4.5 Furnish the required NRC value of material to fulfil
equipment throughout the station. material to fulfil the STIPA requirement.
the STIPA requirement. Confirm standard of
acoustic treatment of areas of coverage by PAS Shall incorporate the locations of all Telecom
throughout the station. equipment for entire station area
Construction:

Package BH-03
Shall furnish the location, weight, dimensions, Shall provide the false ceiling for entire station
colours and mounting details of all Telecom buildings and concourse area as per approved
Equipment for entire station area. design.
Shall install all Telecom equipment at the Shall provide the space cut-outs/ provisioning etc.
designated locations of entire station area. at the ceiling/ wall finishes for mounting public
address loudspeakers.
Shall repaint/ refurbish the surrounding area after
equipment installation with same color code. Shall provide space to allocate all Telecom
equipment i.e. CCTV, speakers, access control
card reader, PSB telecom control panel, help point
etc. at entire station area.
Shall provide the space for wall mount field switch
rack as proposed by Telecom contractor.
Design:
Shall design the slab/furniture based on the
interface Telecom and other designated contractor
Shall furnish weight, dimensions & colors of HMI
to place all the Telecom HMI and equipment inside
and mounting details of all Telecom equipment to
SCR.
be installed in SCR.
4.6 SCR slab/furniture Construction:
Shall install all Telecom equipment within SCR in
close coordination with all relevant system Shall provide slab/furniture with holes for cable
contractor, civil design and/or construction entry/exit, floor cable containment/duct throughout
contractor. the SCR for Telecom cable routing and mounting
arrangement for installation of all Telecom
equipment to be installed in SCR in consultation
with Telecom.

Package BH-03
Design:
Shall design the space in tunnels for emergency
telephone at cross passages and GSM Mobile
Shall furnish the required details. Cellular/TETRA Repeaters.
Provision of space for emergency
(Preferably be provided in cross passage). Cross
telephone at cross passages and
4.7 over pipes are required at Cellular and TETRA
GSM Mobile Cellular/ TETRA Shall coordinate closely with Civil Architecture/
repeater location as per Telecom contractor and/or
Repeaters. Finishes contractor to ensure the requirements at GSM Mobile operator requirements.
site.
Construction:
Shall provide the location as per the approved
design.
Design:
Provision of space on outer edge Shall design the details of space required for outer
of tunnel wall for installation of Shall furnish the required details. edge of the tunnel for laying of LCX cables for
4.8 stand-Offs for laying of LCX GSM Mobile Cellular & TETRA.
Shall coordinate closely with Civil contractor to
cables, for GSM Mobile Cellular & ensure the requirements at site. Construction:
TETRA.
Shall provide the space for laying of LCX cables
for GSM Mobile Cellular & TETRA.
Shall identify the Access control doors at each and Design:

individual station. Shall convey all the Access
control door details to the contractor. Shall design Access control doors considering
4.9 Access control door design.
Access control equipment sizes and location.
Shall furnish the flush mount arrangement details
for access control reader including the locations. Construction:

Package BH-03
Shall execute the work based on approved design.

Proper door alignment shall ensure by the civil
Shall install all the Access control equipment
contractor.
based on access control system design.
Shall construct the flush mount arrangement for
access control reader at entire station area.
Shall make required provision in door design and
construction for access control system to function
smoothly
Design:
Shall design the location and size of signage in
coordination with Telecom contractor to avoid any
blockage of visibility of PIDS display, clock display,
Signage placement and CCTV cameras.
Shall ensure the proper allocations of signage to
4.10 (*May be covered in signage avoid any blockage of visibility of PIDS display, Construction:
contract, if not covered in civil clock display and CCTV cameras.
contract.) Shall provide the signage as per proposed design
and coordinate with Telecom contractor.
NOTE: In case of conflict between Telecom
equipment and signages, issue shall be resolved
jointly while complying norms.
Temporary power supply for Shall coordinate with the station Contractor for Shall provide temporary power supply as per
installation, testing and provision of suitable sockets for temporary power. requirement.
4.11
commissioning (AC single phase/3 Shall pay to the civil contractor for power Shall provide suitable meters for calculating the
phase consumption. consumption.

Package BH-03
4 Telecom Contractor Civil Contractor (Tunnel Civil works)
Furnish exact size weight of equipment and

detailed fixing arrangements. e.g. Tetra
4.12 Equipment Fixings Provisions to be made for fixings.
Repeaters, GSM Repeaters Help points, CCTV.
Leaky Cable, OFC etc
Telecom Contractor Civil Contractor (Station Civil Works)
Providing opening in structures for

Shall provide necessary openings in structure for
various system cables from tunnel Shall interface with Civil Contractor for exact sizes
4.13 cable crossing from Station to tunnel and vice-
to Station & platform to Station of openings required for telecom cables.
versa.
equipment rooms
Layout of equipment and Cable Confirm basic room sizes; floor load and room Shall prepare the Civil works accordingly.
4.14 Ducts in Technical Rooms in all finish; Furnish equipment Layouts within the Shall provide rooms complete with provisions in
Stations. rooms; structures.

Provisions to be made for fixings. Shall provide all
arrangements of the Station equipment e.g., CCTV
drop-down support including bolts, nuts etc. to hold
4.15 Equipment Fixings cameras, PIDS, PA system, clocks, Tetra
telecom equipment's from suspension members
Repeaters, GSM Repeaters Help points, CCTV.
provided by civil contractor.
Leaky Cable, OFC etc
Furnish and confirm sizes and bending radius of Shall provide for openings and necessary cut-outs
4.16 Cables
cables for main cable duct. for cables entry and exit in civil structure.
Furnish weight, dimensions, colours and mounting

details of Workstations/ control panels/ Radio Provision to be made according to telecoms
4.17 Station Control Room Equipment
access unit, Equipment Racks and other telecom requirements.
equipment's.

Package BH-03

Furnish details of Repeaters location for fixing, Shall provide for openings and necessary cut outs
4.19 Repeaters cable routes to TER and bending radius of cables for cable entry in the civil structure and location for
any other requirements. different Repeaters.
Telecom Contractor Civil Contractor (Station & Tunnel E&M works)
Furnish the location & dimensions of TER, TMR &

Telecom shaft etc. including general lighting, air
Provisioning of raw power and conditioning, ventilation and power socket etc.
general lighting, air-conditioning & Shall design and provide power and general
Telecom contractor shall provide the Heat
ventilation and power sockets etc. lighting, air-conditioning & ventilation and power
4.20 dissipation loads of their respective equipment’s
at the station - TER, SCR, sockets etc. inside TER, TMR, SCR & Telecom
TER room for design of the Air conditioning and
Telecom Maintenance Room shaft (lighting).
Ventilation System by E&M Contractor.
(TMR), Telecom shaft etc.
Review design & coordinate closely with E&M
contractor to ensure the requirements at site.
Furnish and confirm sizes dimension, weight, and

Shall design and construct the Cable
bending radius supporting and mounting details for
hangers/conduit for Telecom cables throughout the
all type of Telecom cables such as Fibre Optic
tunnel & design the routing of cable trays / trunking
Cabling infrastructure inside tunnel cable, LCX, copper cables, outdoor Telecom for entry/exit of Telecom cables from tunnel to
4.21 cables etc. inside tunnel. Furnish size and location
for Telecom. station building.
of tunnel crossing cable ducts.
Shall ensure the EMC separation for different
Furnish and review requirements of EMC
system cables at tunnel.
separation for different system cables.

Package BH-03
Furnish dimensions, weight, and minimum bending

radius, supporting and mounting details for all
Telecom cable and for interface cables with the
other systems like RS, S&TC, L&E, PSD, Power
SCADA, BMS, AFC etc.
Furnish the cable tray requirement for the
preparation of GAD, GFC & CSD including
destination and size of cable hanger, trays, conduit Shall design the Cable hangers, cable trays as per
for all Telecom equipment up to TER and from approved design for routing Telecom cables
TER to other required designated rooms for throughout the station. Provide conceal conduit for
routing of all type of Telecom cables. Shall closely laying of Telecom cables in various station
Cabling infrastructure for overall
4.22 coordinate with DDC and civil contractor to fulfil locations/rooms to the extent of the requirement
Telecom system at entire station.
the conceal conduit requirement. furnished by Telecom contractor, prior to the
Furnish and review the EMC parameters on finishing/completion of station room/wall.
design to fulfil Telecom requirement and ensure Shall fulfil the requirements of EMC for cabling.
the same at site.
Install cables for entire Telecom system and the
cables required for interfacing with the other
systems.
Construct all cable duct, cable trays, cable
hangers, conduit, within the TER including cable
tray riser.

Package BH-03
Shall design and provide the main & clean earthing

up to TER. Earthing points separate for clean earth
Provision of Earthing at stations in Furnish the requirements and review the drawing. and main earth at Station according to approved
4.23 equipment rooms and earthing drawings.
Shall extend Main & Clean earth to the respective
bus along the tunnel. racks/equipment’s from TER MET. Shall install earth METs (main earth terminals
connected to earth mats) as per Telecom
contractor requirement.
In absence of Power availability from E&M,

Temporary power supply for Telecom contractor shall make its own/suitable If temporary power supply available with E&M
installation, testing and arrangement for Power requirement. For contractor then shall be provided to Telecom
4.24
commissioning (AC single phase/3 installation and testing, Energy meter and cable contractor on chargeable basis with mutually
phase. requirement shall be arranged by Telecom agreed rates.
contractor.
Shall interface PA with fire alarm to broadcast fire

alert and emergency site evacuation massage in
conjunction with synchronised PIDS System in
stations. Shall interface, design and provide Fire alarm
control panel (FACP) to fulfil the necessary
Telecom system interface with fire
4.25 Shall interface ACIDS with fire alarm to disable the physical interface and functional requirement to
alarm system.
door locks in case of any fire in any of the fire facilitate suitable interface of PA/PIDS, CCTV,
zone. ACIDS with Fire alarm system.
Shall interface CCTV with fire alarm to bring the
operator’s attention to highlight the fire zone.

Package BH-03
Shall validate the interface design and design the

connectivity arrangements.
Shall provide the cable connectivity from BMS
LAN connectivity for BMS and/or Shall provide the redundant LAN connectivity of and/or TVS equipment up to Telecom interface
4.26 appropriate band width up to interface device for
TVS at station and OCC &BCC. device (switch/port) at station TER and Depot
BMS. Shall provide the redundant LAN CER.
connectivity of appropriate band width up to
interface device for TVS, if required.
Shall seal the gaps or cut outs of cable tray entry

Shall fill the common cut outs for cable / cable tray
and exit in their respective system dedicated
entry and exit that are used by multiple system
rooms or shafts and any specific cutouts asked by
4.27 Sealing of cutouts contractors such as Signalling / Telecom / PSD /
the Telecom contractor, after cable installation
L&E / Traction / AFC etc. with fire resistant
work, with fire resistant material approved by
material, sealant etc.
Engineer/ Employer.
Telecom Connectivity Shall coordinate with the Telecom contractor for

Shall provide the Telecom connectivity required
4.28 arrangement between connectivity arrangement between different
between different stations and the OCC and BCC
Stations/OCC/BCC stations and the OCC and BCC.
Telecom contractor to provide the approved Room E&M contractor to install the AC units and piping
Layout of the Telecom Rooms in
4.29 layout to E&M contractor for placement of AC units connections in the telecom rooms as per the
the station
and the water piping. approved Layout of Telecom Contractor.

Package BH-03
Shall provide lighting, ventilation and power socket

including primary conduits/raceways in the
Power supply requirement,
Telecom equipment room until the entry point of
Electrical load, Alarms Shall provide details of power supply
4.30 each rail systems rooms. Secondary cable
requirements for Telecom requirements, electric load requirements.
containments/ducts/raceways etc within the rail
Equipment.
system rooms shall be provided by the respective
project partners.
Shall Interface with E&M Contractor for Fire Safety Shall provide Fire detection suppression (Gas
4.31 Fire safety requirement
requirements. Flooding) system in the Telecom equipment room.
Shall interface with Civil contractor to provide Shall provide the Air conditioning system for
4.32 Air conditioning requirements details of the heat load of telecom equipment and Telecom equipment room to achieve the designed
installation of air-conditioning equipment. room environment condition.
Provision of communication Shall make provision for dark fibre as per Civil Shall define dark fibre requirement for exchange of
4.33
channels. Contractor's requirements E&M data.
Shall ensure compatibility of this equipment as per

Communications protocol Shall make provision of TDS connectivity and mutually agreed communication protocol. Supply
4.34 including TDS connectivity interface for mutually agreed communication and install the data/ OFC cables up to the TDS
protocol protocol Rack patch panel in TER from E&M BAS station
server/ switch.
Shall supply, design and install suitable networking

Provision of LAN/WAN with all equipment’s i.e., data cables, servers, Routers,
networking equipment’s i.e., Data Shall provide necessary IP address scheme and switches, Racks, patch panels etc from E&M
4.35
Cables, Routers, switches, Racks, dark fibre (BAS) Station server for LAN/WAN connectivity
patch panels etc from station to station and Depot through Telecom
dark fibre.

Package BH-03
Shall provide the necessary arrangement for time

Synchronization with time distribution system for time synchronization. Shall Shall ensure compatibility of this equipment as per
4.36
distribution system define necessary protocol for interface with E&M communication protocol.
equipment.
Shall coordinate with the communication system

Shall provide the Civil Contractor with details of for earthing system arrangement Shall make
4.37 Provision for earthing system earthing requirement (main and clean earth) for necessary provisions for main & clean earth as
Telecom equipment. required by Telecom, upto the technical
rooms(inside) i.e., TER, UPS, PSD, AFC, GSM etc
Shall interface with the Civil contractor for

Shall interface with the Communication system for
minimum illumination and proper co-ordination of
4.38 CCTV minimum illumination required for capturing CCTV
lighting arrangements required for capturing CCTV
images during day and night conditions on the line.
images during day and night condition on the line.
Shall define and provide mutually agreed Shall provide fire alarm signal to the CCTV system
4.39 CCTV interaction with fire alarm
communication protocol to enable surveillance of the affected areas.
Shall provide fire alarm signal to the PA system

Shall interface with Civil contractor for fire alarm
4.40 PA interaction with Fire Alarm (laying cable up to the PA rack in TER) to alert the
signal
occupants
Shall co-ordinate with communication system for

Shall provide all the telephones in equipment
telephone requirements in E&M technical rooms,
4.41 Telephone rooms and near fire call points in station area,
fire call point in the station area, Provision of
furnish requirements for Power/Data points.
Power/data points
Shall provide details of cables numbers, sizes, Shall supply and provide all primary cables trays,
Cable trays/hangers/ clamps
4.42 weights, routing (origin/destination) and separation cable trough raceways, conduits and necessary
inside stations
from power cables to E&M contractor. provisions as required by Communication System

Package BH-03
until the entry point of each rail systems rooms.

Secondary cable trough/containments/ducts/
raceways etc within the rail system rooms i.e. TER,
UPS(S&T), PSD, GSM & AFC etc. shall be
provided by the respective project partners.
Control Signal and communication standard,

Signalling Equipment To incorporate in design receipt of Control signal
4.43 Location of stopping trains at congestion and
room/OCC/LCP from OCC.
emergency sent to OCC
Brackets /hangers are to be provided on tunnel

wall for laying of optical fibre cable, Leaky Cables,
emergency telephone cables, CCTV cables, GSM,
cables.
Cable tray connectivity is to be provided from S&T
brackets in tunnel to S&T cable trays in the nearest
S&T shaft. Cable tray inside the shaft will be
provide by E&M Contractor.
Telecom Contractor shall coordinate for the
4.44 Tunnel brackets/Trays
Requirements of their equipment’s. Data/power cable tray connectivity to be provided
in Mid shaft at all levels with connectivity from S&T
brackets in tunnel, as per approved drawings.
For cut-outs less than 200mm, fire sealing shall be
done after clearance from S&T.
Permanent power for GSM operator equipment,
E&M to lay the power cable up to the termination
point in GSM room.

Package BH-03
Telecom Contractor Civil Contractor (TVS & ECS Works)
1. Shall develop the design incorporating the 1. Shall supply, design and install suitable
TVS/ECS requirements and share detail design of networking equipment’s i.e., Data cables, servers,
his network if requested by TVS contractor. Routers, switches, Racks, patch panels etc from
TVS/ECS SCADA/BMS Station server for
LAN/WAN connectivity from station to station and
Depot, BCC through Telecom dark fibre. provide
complete IP details to S&T of their network for IP
4.45 Design/Installation Stage
planning
2. Shall provide the space required by TVS
contractor for TVS/ECS SCADA /BMS equipment 2. Shall share the details of net-work equipment to
in TER. be housed in TER for space requirement
3. Shall provide necessary interface between 3. Shall interface for clock system synchronization
TVS/ECS SCADA/BMS equipment and the clock at Operational Control Centre (OCC) / Back up
system at OCC/BCC. Control Centre (BCC).
Telecom Contractor Civil Contractor (Station Finishes Works)
Shall prepare the Finishes works accordingly. Shall

Confirm basic room sizes; floor load and room prepare rooms finishes: False floor, false ceiling
Layout of Equipment and Cable
finish Furnish equipment layouts within the rooms painting, doors etc. Shall prepare holes for cabling
Ducts in Technical Rooms and
4.46 Confirm fire safety provisions Shall provide and duct in dividing wall. Shall prepare Finishes
throughout stations and depot
provisions for communication system and work for concourse, platform, stairs etc. with
area.
equipment location suitable provisions for Communications System
equipment's.
4.47 Equipment fixing Furnish exact sizes, weight and fixing Provisions to be made for fixing.
arrangements, number and location of all CCTV

Package BH-03
cameras, PA loudspeakers, passenger help

points, clock, PIDS etc.
Furnish weight, dimensions, colours and mounting Provision to be made by Finishes Contractors
4.48 Control Equipment Room details of work station/control panels and other according to Communications System
telecoms equipment's. requirements
Furnish and confirm sizes and bending radius of Shall provide for opening and necessary cut-outs
4.49 Cables
cable cables for main cable duct. for cable entry and exit in finishes works.

5 Track Works Contractor Civil Contractor (Station & Tunnel Works)
Shall interface for keeping track materials like

welding machine on deck.
Shall demarcate area for track work like storing
Access to track and storage of
Transportation of track material on UG station in rails, welding of rails, assembly of turnouts.
5.1 materials
interface with Civil Contractor in specified space
Provide storage space and advise access period to
and period so that the construction activities of
transport the track material on UG stations.
designated Contractor are not hampered after
access period.
Provide vertical stirrups/connection (shear

Construction of RCC track plinths and slabs to the
5.2 Track Plinth connector) between viaduct and RCC track
required details and install the track.
plinths/track slab
Construction of drainage system of metro corridor.

5.3 Drainage System Design/Adjust plinth beams accordingly. Furnish details of the drainage systems. Provide
expansion joints.

Package BH-03
Ensure availability of track construction envelope

Clearance of track construction Clear and hand over the track construction
5.4 in interface with Civil Contractor.Maintain the
envelope. envelope as per the track construction program.
drainage system as provided.
Shall prepare a Structure Gauge cut out and verify Provide necessary information and support for
5.5 Verification of Structure Gauge the same in Depot, Depot Approach Track and Structure Gauge verification and participate in
Mainline Track. verification.
Temporary water supplies for Design and construct in interface with Track
5.6 Furnish details of requirement and location
construction of track. Contractor requirement
Shall construct the track according to final design Shall construct the platform according to SOD
5.7 Details of platform levels
alignment and rail level. requirements.
Shall prepare a Structure Gauge cut out and verify Provide necessary information and support for
5.8 Verification of Structure Gauge the same in Depot, Depot Approach Track and Structure Gauge verification and participate in
Mainline Track. verification related to mainline in the station area
Temporary cut-outs for unloading Shall intimate the size of temporary cut-outs at Shall provide temporary cut outs for unloading
5.9
track materials (mainly Rails 18m) station required for unloading track materials. track materials and stacking area nearby.
6 AFC Civil Contractor (Station Civil Works)
Shall provide details of ticket office, gate barrier Shall prepare the Civil works accordingly Shall
lines, ticket issuing machines, excess fare office, provide necessary cut out/openings in the Civil
6.1 Stations technical room equipment etc in stations. structure for installation of AFC gates and
associated cablings
Shall provide exact size, weight and fixing

6.2 Equipment Layout. arrangements of the station equipment. Shall Shall prepare the Civil works accordingly.
provide exact location of gate lines equipment

Package BH-03
(dimensions, measurements, for all equipment,

etc.)
Shall provide and confirm sizes and bending Shall provide for openings and necessary cut-outs
6.3 Cables
radius of cables for main cable duct. for cables entry and exit in civil structure.
6.4 Revenue office and equipment Shall provide provisions for AFC equipment. Shall prepare the Civil works accordingly.

AFC Civil Contractor (Station E&M works)
Shall coordinate with Civil contractor and

Design and Installation of E&M Shall provide the E&M services required as per the
6.6 incorporate the features in accordance with
Service approved scheme.
approved scheme
Shall Interface with Civil Contractor for Fire Safety Shall provide fire alarm signal to the AFC to open
6.7 Alarm for fire
requirements. the gates in case of fire.
Shall Interface with Civil Contractor for 415V 3 Shall provide 240/415V essential/ very essential
6.8 Auxiliary power Supply
phase or 240 V Single phase power requirements power supply to AFC at designated points
Shall coordinate with AFC to connect earthing

system of the AFC equipment to the station
Shall coordinate with the Civil Contractor for earthing system.
6.9 Provision for earthing system. provision of earthing for AFC equipment including
the requirement of clean earth. Shall provide clean earth system, if required for
AFC system in Station Control Room and Ticket
Office & TOM AFC Server Room and other rooms.

Package BH-03
Shall prepare Cross Section Drawings and Station

Electrical & Mechanical drawings, supply and
provide all primary cables trays, cable trough,
raceways necessary provisions as required by
Cable trays I Hangers, cable AFC System until the entry point of each rail
6.10 Shall submit the requirements to Civil Contractor
ducting, cable trough, raceways systems rooms. Secondary cable trough/
containments/ducts/ raceways (at concourse
connecting TOM, EFO, Gates, TVM etc) etc within
the rail system rooms shall be provided by the
respective project partners.
AFC Civil Contractor (Station Finishes Works)
Shall provide provision for ticket office, ticket

6.11 Stations Shall prepare the Finishes works accordingly.
issuing machines, technical room equipment, etc.
Shall provide exact size, weight and fixing

arrangements of the station equipment, floor load, Shall prepare the CSDs and SEMs for Finishes
etc. works accordingly.
Shall provide fixing equipment's requirements; Shall prepare rooms finishes: flooring, false floor,
Shall provide exact location of gate lines etc. Shall prepare holes and/or cable trough for
Equipment Layout and Cable cabling and I or duct;
6.12 equipment (Dimensions, measurements, for each
Ducts.
equipment, for etc.) Shall prepare interface for fixation of equipment on
Shall provide safety installation requirements for the floor
Equipment. Shall provide the necessary cut-outs for cables
Shall provide and confirm sizes and bending entry and exit.
radius of cable duct.

Package BH-03
Confirm fire safety provisions.
Shall provide requirements and provisions for AFC

6.13 Revenue office and equipment Shall prepare the Finishes works accordingly
equipment
Shall supply and install fixed barrier line panels at

Shall provide requirements for fixed barrier line
each barrier· line of stations to separate paid and
fencing.
unpaid area.
6.14 Fixed barrier line panels. Shall provide AFC gate dimensions, Cable
Each fixed barrier line panel shall be of modular
raceways requirement for future additional/removal
design to ensure future addition or removal of AFC
of AFC gates
gates.
Shall provide necessary details and requirements

Excess Fare Office (EFO) Shall provide EFO. Structure located in each
6.15 related to EFO to Finishes Works Contractor and
Structure barrier line as per the requirements of AFC
Co- ordinate with him during installation
Furnish and confirm sizes and bending radius of Shall provide for opening and necessary cut-outs
6.16 Cables
cables for main cable duct for cables entry and exit in finishes works.
PSD/PSG (Platform Screen Gates in Elevated

7 Civil Contractor (Station E&M works)
Stations)
Shall coordinate with Civil contractor and

Design and Installation of E&M Shall provide the E&M services required as per the
7.1 incorporate the features in accordance with
Service approved scheme.
approved scheme
Shall Interface with Civil Contractor for Fire Safety Shall provide fire alarm signal to the PSG if
7.2 Alarm for fire
requirements. required to open the doors in case of fire.
Shall Interface with Civil Contractor for 415V 3 Shall provide 240/415V essential/ very essential
7.3 Auxiliary power Supply
phase or 240 V Single phase power requirements power supply to PSG/PSD at designated points

Package BH-03
Shall coordinate with PSG to connect earthing

Shall coordinate with the Civil Contractor for system of the PSG equipment to the station
7.4 Provision for earthing system. provision of earthing for PSG equipment including earthing system.
the requirement of clean earth. Shall provide clean earth system, if required for
PSG system in PSG room.
Shall prepare Cross Section Drawings and Station

Electrical & Mechanical drawings, supply and
Cable trays I Hangers, cable
7.5 Shall submit the requirements to Civil Contractor provide all primary and secondary cables trays,
ducting, cable trough, raceways
cable trough, raceways necessary provisions as
required by PSG System.
PSD Civil Contractor (TVS/ECS Works)
1. TVS/ECS Contractor Will share Pressure/ Piston

1. PSD Contractor shall Collect TVS/ECS pressure effect on PSD-to-PSD contractor
effect/ Piston Effect on PSD from TVS/ECS
contractor & design PSD structure compatible to 2. TVS /ECS contractor will share the parameter
train speed details to be considered for Full Height / Half
Height PSD/PSG structure design with PSD
2. PSD Contractor shall design Full Height / Half Contractor.
Height PSD/PSG structure with consideration to
7.6 Design/ Installation Stage
TVS/ECS relevant parameter 3. TVS/ECS data will be shared with PSD
Contractor.
3. The PSD system shall be designed to
accommodate all expansion and contraction due 4. TVS/ECS data will be shared with PSD
to thermal fluctuations Contractor.
4. The maximum tunnel air pressure shall be used 5. TVS ECS Contractor shall collect all the details
as the design criteria for all of PSD Glass U factors for heat transmission.

Package BH-03
PSD/electromechanical equipment that operates in

a tunnel environment
5. PSD Contractor shall provide the U value for all
his components to ECS TVS contractor.
8 Lift (VHTS) Contractor Station Contractor (Civil and E&M Works)
Provide E&M Contractor with all details of Design:

electrical loads (normal and EPS) and earthing
requirements. Electrical power and Control Interfaces matching
the requirements of Lifts contractor.
Lay and connect cable from Isolator provided by
E&M to the Lift power panel. Produce Station Building CSD with inputs from
Lifts contractor.
Connect earthing from the Earth MET tapping
point provided by E&M to all the Lift equipment / Construction:
components.
Electrical power and Control Interfaces matching
8.1 Electrical and control requirements To provide MCCB, RCCB and ELCB as per the requirements of Lifts contractor.
requirement of Lifts in panel.
Provide Isolator with three phase power cable with
Provide Shaft lighting, power sockets inside the dual earth near Lifts shaft and termination with
Lift shaft. Isolator.
Coordinate with E&M for timing required to switch Provide dual earthing with MET <1 Ohm in lift shaft
on EPS (Emergency Power Supply) during power as per the requirements given by Lifts contractor.
failure. Based on EPS starting time ARD operation
Provide cable tray / conduit / trunking from Lifts
start timing need to be adjusted.
controller to TER/ SCR/Electrical switch room for
Provide all details of Electrical load for UPS supply data cables.
(such as Light, Fan, Alarm, Intercom, seismic

Package BH-03
sensor, RMS PC etc.,) as mentioned in Provision of Lighting arrangement in Lift Lobby

specification. area.
Terminate the UPS cables in power panel with Provide EPS (Emergency Power Supply) power to
separate RCCB and relays. lift and connect to Isolator.
Provide CAT 6 cable for Lift control to RMS PC in Provide signal phase UPS supply with separate
SCR/CCR. MCB with rated load as per requirement of Lift
Contractor.
Provide all lift operations cabling within Lift shaft.
Provide UPS supply cable inside lift shaft as per
the requirement of Lift contractor.
Provide two number of 6/16A Single Switch Socket
with Single Phase supply for Lift intercom system,
SMS system and RMS PC and accessories in the
SCR/EFO (Customer care Centre).
Produce Station Building CSD with inputs from
Lifts contractor.
Co-ordinate fire safety requirement with firefighting Provide Lift Shaft with Fire protection measures.
systems Lay and connect the fire rated cable as
per compatibility with the station E&M from Control Provide control modules near the lift landings for
module to lift panel. integration of the lift to the fire alarm system of the
station.
8.2 Fire protection requirements Integrate Testing & commissioning to the control
module of Station fire alarm system and operate Provide signal & coordinate with Lift contractor for
the lift accordingly. Testing commissioning with station Fire system.
Coordinate and assist for fixing smoke detector Provide smoke detectors in the lift shaft, machine
inside lift shaft area. area and the landing lobbies.

Package BH-03
Coordinate with E&M for providing Sprinkler Provide Sprinkler connection in the lift roof & Pit as
system in Lift roof & pit and protect Motor with per the requirement.
cover from water splash of sprinkler system.
All Electrical equipment in pit & head room shall be
IP 67 rating.
To provide to BAS lift operating status, faults from

RMS and receive control signal from BAS. To collect data from Lifts RMS, operating status of
lift, faults and equipment condition signals and
Provide CAT-6 cabling for RMS from each lift with
provide the visual indications and audible alarms
ITB/ Switch port (at SCR), RMS system (including accordingly at the BAS monitoring system.
PC, software and other accessories).
Accept inputs from RMS for monitoring in the BAS.
Remote monitoring of lift operating Receive control signals from BAS. Provide inputs
8.3 status and faults by Station BAS in (at BAS) for monitoring of some major points as Give inputs from BAS to RMS for control of Lifts.
SCR per protocol of BAS.
BAS/E&M contractor need to do Testing &
Coordinate for Testing & commissioning of Lift Commissioning with Lift system.
system with BAS.
To ensure that lift operation is not affected by
To ensure that lift operation is not affected by failure of data communication link or shutdown of
failure of data communication link or shut-down of BAS.
BAS.
The Lift Contractor shall provide ITB/Switch port

and connect cabling from Lift to ITB/Switch port in Provide the conduits/tray from the Lift shaft to the
SCR. SCR.
8.4 Cable Containment and Cabling
The Lift Contractor shall connect the contacts with Provide space for Lift ITB/switch port with power
wires and terminate the data cable at the terminals supply in SCR.
in the ITB/Switch port located in SCR.

Package BH-03
Upon actuation by remote switch from the

RMS/BAS for parking on, the Lift shall complete
the last landing or car call, if any, and return to the
designated landing and stop.
Upon actuation by remote switch for non-parking, Station E&M Contractor shall coordinate and
Parking / Non parking for Normal the Lift shall be switched back to normal operation provide necessary fire alarm signals to lift panel.
8.5 activation and deactivation and in Upon receipt of general fire alarm signal the Station Civil/E&M Contractor shall provide
case of Fire/Smoke system should activate the parking on for lift. smoke/multi-sensor detector in Lift lobby and
provide its inputs to main lift control
Send the lift to the alternative floor (a nominated
floor) when a smoke/multi-sensor detector is
activated at the lift lobby (at the primary
designated floor) The primary designated floor will
be Exit floor in stations
The Lift Contractor shall coordinate with the

Station Civil/E&M Contractor to terminate the fire Station Civil/E&M Contractor shall coordinate with
8.6 Fire and power failure signals and power failure signals in Lift Panel. The Lift Lift contractor and provide Control module and
Contractor shall provide the cabling up to the smoke/multi-sensor detector in lift shaft.
Panel from Control module and Smoke detector
Design: Provision of Lift control and operating

parameters on RS-485 based protocol or volt free
Shall coordinate and shall advise exact number of contacts at ITB/switch port located in SCR
8.7 Communication I/O points, types and number of cables/wires for Construction: - To wire the Lift control and
interface. operating parameters on Ethernet / RS-485 based
protocol or volt free contacts at ITB with screened
or non-screened wires.

Package BH-03
Station Civil/E&M/BAS Contractor is also

responsible to interface with lift software for linking
the Lift status information.
Lift Contractor shall install a sleeve on every cable

Station Civil/E&M Contractor shall install fire
entry/penetration in openings in
barrier seal and/or waterproof sealing (when
walls/floors/ceilings/shaft.
penetration is through a fire rated wall/barrier)
The Lift Contractor shall certify the cabling is between cable and sleeve and between sleeve
8.8 Installation of seals in openings completed and cables tested before requesting and opening after each opening is confirmed ready
Station Civil/E&M Contractor to seal opening. The for sealing by Lifts contractor.
Lift Contractor shall certify the cabling is
Any opening larger than the SEM provision shall
completed and cables tested before requesting
be filled by Civil/E&M Contractor.
Station Civil/E&M Contractor to seal opening
Coordinate with Civil/E&M (and COM) contractors Station Civil/E&M Contractor to coordinate with
for requirements. (COM contractor) and with Lift contractor for
8.9 CCTV and PA provisions
(Supply of CCTV/PA shall be by Telecom requirements for installation of CCTV camera and
Contractor) PA speaker.
Define requirements and provide necessary Provide shaft structure including various items like
design details like shaft size, ventilation opening lifting hook/beam at ceiling, trimmer beam cut out,
cut out details, lifting beams/hooks, trimmer beam ventilation cut-out etc. as per approved Drawing.
cut out, water proofing and protection from rain,
Provide white wash of the lift shaft before
8.10 Provision of Lift Shaft structural provision etc. for finalization of drawing
for Civil construction. handover. Mark of FFL at all Landings of elevator
and Joint checking of shaft for handing over to Lift
Carry out Joint measurement with Civil Contractor Contractor.
of all items like well way, openings, loading points,
hoist hook, FFL etc. Provide drainage connection for lift pit.
For G-C Lifts drainage sump in bottom pit with

Package BH-03
The water sensors in the Lift pits shall be provided storm water drain.
by Lift Contractor. The requirement of water sump For C-P Lifts Pipe connectivity to drainage system.
in the Lift pits shall be co-ordinated with the civil
contractor and BAS system. The Lift entrance at the Ground level shall be not
less than 600 mm above foot path level
Coordinate and ensure the drainage sump
Provide Louvers & rain water protection over
provided for all Ground-Concourse Lifts as per the
Ventilation cutout.
requirement.
Provide Sun Shade, Rain water protection &
Coordinate and ensure the provision of Lovers &
prevention of water ingress into the lift shaft.
rain water protection for Ventilation cutout.
Provide water proofing treatment inside pit, shaft
Coordinate and ensure the provision of Sun
roof and shaft to prevent water seepage.
Shade, Rain water protection & prevention of
water ingress into the lift shaft Provide drainage connection on Lift shaft roof to
avoid accumulation of wate
Coordinate and ensure the Provision of water
proofing treatment. Provide Shutter to avoid unauthorized access for
Ground to concourse Lifts.
Coordinate and ensure the Provision of drainage
connection for Lift roof. Provision of ramp with SS handrails at Ground
level.
Coordinate and ensure the Provision Rolling
Shutter for entry exit lifts Coordinate and ensure If required Construct Lift Shaft as per the design
the Provision ramp with SS handrails Co-ordinate with pedestal at the bottom of lift shaft for installing
and Ensure compliance of all relevant items are Lift buffers.
executed and pinpoint deficiencies if any for
corrective actions.
8.11 Finishes and aesthetics Install lift landing sill and sill supports Flooring upto edge of the landing sill.

Package BH-03
Install lift landing architraves, landing fixtures Granite/ Stone cladding all around the Elevator
including call panel, landing indication panel etc landing door as per approved drawing.
Install lift landing control post c/w cable conduit Making good and complete wall finishes around
into lift shaft. cut-outs for landing fixture back boxes.
Provide fire rated sealant between the gaps Tactile flooring upto the elevator as per handicap
around granite cladding and the lift architrave requirements.
Box-out or reserve in floor screed, and make good
screed and floor finishes after landing control post
and cable conduit are installed by Lifts Contractor
To establish datum level and grid reference, which

To enable the Lift contractor to set To collect datum level & grid reference marking
8.12 shall be marked at the landing of each floor level or
out their work near the landing of each floor
elsewhere as agreed
Provide all signage and passenger instructions as

per specifications Designation plate, instruction
plate on landing and car, do not use the lift in case
8.13 Signage of fire and earthquake etc., in SS 304. Provide general signage for Lift.
Signage - graphics for pregnant women, Divyang,
Senior citizen, lift identification, Serving location
etc. in LED display at each landing.
Shall give details of number, size, and locations of Shall provide openings and necessary cutouts for
8.14 Cable openings and cutouts openings, cutouts to be provided and mark these cable entry and exit in civil structure as per
on the drawings. requirement of lift.

Package BH-03
Loading capacity and location of the hooks to be Civil contractor shall provide hooks with adequate
8.15 Hoisting Hooks
provided. capacity and location as per lift requirement.
Installation of lift maintenance Install lift maintenance access panel, making good
Install back box and lift control panel behind the lift
8.16 access panel, finishes and and complete wall finishes around maintenance
maintenance access panel
aesthetics. access panel
Station Civil contractor shall ensure and provide

Lifts to provide delivery route drawings information for clear access path as per Lifts
Access Path & temporary storage
8.17 Lift contractor to co-ordinate with Station Civil requirements Station Civil contractor shall provide
during construction phase
contractor for temporary storage. temporary storage at stations as per Lift contractor
requirements
Method statement for carrying lift

Civil contract to provide requisite space for
equipment on floor & arrangement Submit method statement for moving / carrying /
8.18 movement and stacking Lift equipment in station
of keeping on floor / distribution of stacking of lift material on floor with design.
concourse level & platform level during installation.
load.
Space for Lift RMS (computer), Provide details of number, size, and locations of
Provide space for Lift RMS (computer), SMS
8.19 SMS system & Intercom system in equipment, cutouts to be provided and mark these
system & Intercom system in the SCR/EFO/OCC.
the SCR/EFO/OCC. on the drawings.
Escalator (VHTS) Contractor Station Contractor (Civil and E&M Works)
Provide E&M Contractor with all details of Design: Electrical power and Control Interfaces
electrical loads (normal and EPS) and earthing matching the requirements of Escalator contractor.
9.1 Electrical and control requirements requirements. Produce Station Building CSD with inputs from
Provide lighting, ventilation and power socket in Escalator contractor (and Station Civil/E&M
the escalator control room. Contractor).

Package BH-03
Provide cabling from the Escalator panel to the Construction: Provide three phase power with duly
Isolator and terminate the cables at both ends. terminated on a suitable MCCB/Isolator in the
Pit/enclosure next to escalator controller as
Connect earthing from the Earth MET tapping specified by Escalator contractor.
point provided by E&M to all the Escalator
equipment (Truss, Motor, Controllers etc.,) Provide dual earthing with MET <1 Ohm near
Escalator shaft as per the requirements.
Provide all details of Electrical load for UPS supply
(such as Comb light, Traffic light, Step gap light, Provide EPS power to Escalator as per
PLC, PCB's, Socket, Pit Light, Buzzer, seismic requirements of Escalator contractor via
sensor, Fault display and RMS PC etc.,) as MCB/Isolator
mentioned in specification.
Provide signal phase UPS supply with separate
Terminate the UPS cables in power panel with MCB with rated load as per requirement of
separate RCCB and relays. Escalator Contractor from the Station E&M UPS to
Escalator panel/Isolator.
Provide lighting, ventilation and power socket in
the escalator Pit/ Kiosk. Provide two number of 6/16A Single Switch Socket
with Single Phase supply for SMS system and
Provide and lay cable from the Escalator panel to
RMS PC and accessories in the SCR.
SCR / Electrical Switch Room and terminate in the
RMS PC through switch port/ITB. Provide lighting above the Escalator.
If outside controller provides and lay cable from Provide cable tray / conduit / trunking from
the Control panel to the Escalator pit. escalator panel / Kiosk to SCR/Electrical Switch
Room for Escalator data cable.
Provide all Escalator operations cabling within the
Escalator pit. If outside Controller provide race ways from
Escalator control panel / Kiosk to Escalator pit.
Coordinate with E&M for timing required to switch
EPS (Emergency Power Supply) during power Provide EPS power to Escalator via Isolator
failure.

Package BH-03
Provide data cable from Escalator panel to SCR.

Provide pit lighting, power sockets and ventilation
inside the Escalator pit.
Contractor shall provide an Escalator inter-
communication between the Escalator, main
controller and SCR.
Shall provide interfacing brackets and openings on

escalator for smoke detector and assist & Station Civil/E&M Contractor shall provide
coordinate with E&M Contractor for fixing smoke/multi-sensor detector in upper pit, Middle
Smoke/Multi sensor detector in escalator. truss, lower pit and control panel and provide its
inputs to main escalator control panel and Station
Integrate of fire scenarios in front of or near the fire alarm panel.
escalator landing with station fire detection
system. Integrate fire scenarios in front of or near the
escalator landing with station fire detection system.
Prepare the interface drawing for connection point
9.2 Fire protection requirements between escalator sprinkler system and station fire Connect the Fire hydrant pipe/ plug to Escalator
hydrant system. water sprinkler system with reducer, coupler or
flange etc.
Sprinkler system inside the escalator truss is in
scope of escalator Contractor. Interface point (connection point with a flange &
gate valve) will be provided either top or bottom of
Co-ordinate fire safety requirement with firefighting escalator and arrangement for fire alarm system.
systems.
Station E&M Contractor shall coordinate and
Integrate to the control module of Station fire alarm provide necessary fire alarm signals to Escalator
system and operate the Escalator accordingly as panel.
specified in TS.

Package BH-03
Shall provide interfacing brackets and openings on Provide control modules near the Escalator
escalator bottom soffit/Side Cladding for sprinkler landings for integration of the Escalator in egress
pipes connection. operation to the fire alarm system of the station.
To collect from Escalator contractor the operating

status of escalator, faults and equipment condition
Provide status to BAS of Escalator operating
signals and provide the visual indications and
status, faults from RMS and receive control signal
audible alarms accordingly at the BAS monitoring
from BAS.
panel.
Provide CAT-6 cabling for RMS from each
Remote monitoring of Escalator Accept inputs from RMS (RMS: provided by VHTS
escalator with ITB/ Switch port (at SCR), RMS
9.3 operating status and faults by contractor) and coordinate with Escalator
system (including PC, software and other
Station BAS in SCR contractor for displaying the Escalator operating
accessories).
status on BAS system in the Station Control Room
Receive control signals from BAS. Provide inputs being provided by Station Civil/E&M/BAS
(at BAS) for monitoring of some major points as Contractor.
per protocol of BAS.
Give inputs from BAS to RMS for control of
escalators
Provide cast in conduits/race ways from the pit

The Escalator Contractor shall provide cabling adjacent to escalator controller to other equipment
from Escalator to ITB (Interface Terminal Box) / in the escalator’s pit.
Switch port in SCR.
Provide cable tray from the pit adjacent to the
9.4 Cable Containment and Cabling The Escalator Contractor shall connect the escalator controller to SCR for escalator data
contacts with wires and terminate the data cable at cable.
the terminals in the ITB/Switch located in SCR.
Provide suitable cable containment inside SCR
To review and confirm the Escalator system cable from Lifts ITB/switch port to Escalator ITB/switch
route, provide sizes, weights, bending radius for port as required by the Escalator contractor.

Package BH-03
cable ducts, flexibility of cable and comment on To produce the Station Building CSD and drawings
the CSD drawings subsequently. based on the information provided.
Station Civil/E&M contractor shall coordinate.
The Escalator Contractor shall coordinate with the Station Civil/E&M Contractor shall coordinate with
9.5 Fire and power failure signals Station Civil/E&M Contractor to terminate the fire Escalator contractor and provide Control module
and power failure signals in Escalator Panel and smoke/multi-sensor detector.
Shall provide the required cabling up to the
Escalator panel and SCR.
Design: System to accept Escalator control and

operating parameters on RS-485 based protocol or
volt free contacts from ITB located in SCR.
Construction: Escalator control and operating
Shall coordinate and shall advise exact number of parameters on Ethernet / RS-485 based protocol
9.6 Communication I/O points, types and number of cables/wires for or volt free contacts at Escalator panel with
interface. screened or non-screened wires.
Station Civil/E&M /BAS Contractor is also
responsible to interface with Escalator software for
linking the Escalator status information from
Escalator Panel.
Station Civil/E&M Contractor shall install fire

barrier seal and/or waterproof sealing (when
Escalator Contractor shall install a sleeve on every
penetration is through a fire rated wall/barrier)
9.7 Installation of seals in openings cable entry/penetration in openings in
between cable and sleeve and between sleeve
walls/floors/ceilings/Claddings/ Soffit.
and opening after each opening is confirmed ready
for sealing by Escalator contractor.

Package BH-03
The Escalator Contractor shall certify the cabling is Any opening larger than the SEM provision shall
completed and cables tested before requesting be filled by Station Civil/E&M Contractor.
Station Civil/E&M Contractor to seal opening
To collect the escalator direction status, provide

To provide escalator direction status, provide
Illumination of direction sign of the interlock circuit for connection by the Signage
9.8 potential free contacts at the Escalator Sign
escalator Contractor for illumination of the corresponding
Junction Box
sign.
To provide control operation from the BAS

To collect from BAS stop, start, start override, fault
Escalator remote control BAS workstation and to issue control signals to
9.9 reset and speed selection control signals and
workstation in the SCR. Escalator for the remote stop, start, start override,
perform the corresponding escalator operation.
fault reset and speed selection control function.
Design: Design:
Co-ordinate details of mounting provisions, power Identify escalator locations and sizes of escalators.
supply, electric load and control requirements.
Define mounting and structural provisions for
Define requirements and provide design details to escalator assemblies.
Station Contractor for escalator’s various
Co-ordinate access and delivery space provisions.
requirements.
9.10 Design To provide Station Building SEM drawings,
Furnish sizes for escalator controller enclosures,
pit, support details and well way dimensions. incorporating the requirements provided by
Escalator contractor.
Co-ordinate fire safety requirement with firefighting
systems.
Interface with Station Civil/E&M Contractor for
location of suitable hoisting hooks and drainage
arrangements.

Package BH-03
To review and confirm the escalator requirements

and comment on the Station Building SEM
drawings subsequently.
Construction: Construction:
Provide and install escalator units complete with Provide structure for notches, Top support,
claddings, finishes and operating mechanisms. Intermediate support and Bottom support, Pit /
Cutouts of Escalators as per approved structural /
Provide necessary design details for pit, notches,
architectural drawing as per requirement of
support details, intermediate supports, well way
Escalator Contractor.
dimensions, lifting hook, and control panel kiosk
sizes (If required), cut outs for finalization of Coordinate and fix the notch plate provided by
drawing for civil construction. Escalator contractor in civil structure during
construction.
Provide 5mm galvanized cast-in insert plates for
the notches to incorporate in the civil structure and If outside controller provide cut outs / kiosks with
9.11 Escalator Wellway coordinate with Civil contractor during shaft louvers and doors for escalator control panel near
construction. the top landing of the respective escalators.
Co-ordinate and ensure required civil work is Matching Floor Finishes Level up to edge of upper
executed as per approved drawing and pinpoint and bottom landing floor plates after the same is
deficiencies for remedial action. set in position by the Escalator contractor.
Fill gaps with between the escalator and the Provision for fixing traffic bollards and Cut-outs for
adjacent structure with decking extensions/ anti laying of cables in both landing (if required).
climb devices / fill panels with anti-slide protection
/ child barriers and sealants.
If required coordinate and ensure all cut-outs and
provision for fixing Traffic Bollards.

Package BH-03
Provision of hoisting hooks or holes for erection of

Carry out joint testing inspection of Hook / holes. If escalators on slab/beam above the escalator
no hooks / holes are provided the escalator wellway wherever feasible.
9.12 Hoisting Hook
contractor make arrangements for hoisting
escalator. Close the holes provided with approved material to
prevent falling of foreign objects/ passengers.
Provide Water proofing Treatment inside pits to

prevent water seepage.
The water Sensor need to be provided in the
Escalator pit. The requirement of drain sump in the Provide connection for drainage sump in bottom pit
Escalator pits shall be coordinate with the Civil of Ground-Concourse Escalator with storm water
9.13 Drainage system contractor and interfaced with BAS drain.
The pits shall have gravitational drainage system.
Coordinate and ensure the drainage sump
provided for all Ground-Concourse Escalator The depth of the sump / drain pit should be more
than the depth of Escalator pit for effective
drainage.
Stainless steel / glass hand railing on the sides of

Escalator contractor is required to interface with the escalator shall be provided at the landings to
9.14 Hand Railing the designated contractor for provision of the guide the passenger movement safely. Railing
Handrail railing around the Escalator landings. shall be provided by station Civil / Architect
contractor.
Shall give details of number, size, and locations of

openings, cutouts to be provided and mark these Provide for space / cut-out at Structural Slab Level
Raceways/Conduits/ Sleeves to
on the drawings. SSL for laying raceways / conduits/ sleeves from
9.15 enable cable laying and Cable
escalator control panel to Machine / top pit below
openings and cutouts Co-ordinate and ensure routing of Raceway if FFL if outside controller.
required.

Package BH-03
Shall provide openings and necessary cut-outs for

cable entry and exit in civil structure as per
requirement of escalator.
Mark of FFL at Top support, Intermediate support

Mark and carry out joint measurement of well way
Joint Level Marking / and Bottom support of escalator and Joint
9.16 dimension, openings, notches, kiosks, loading
Measurement checking of well way dimensions for handing over
points, FFL etc. and list out deficiencies if any.
to the Contractor.
Station Civil contractor shall ensure and provide

Plan transportation of escalator components to
information for clear access path as per Escalator
installation location in consultation with civil
requirements for escalator material by cranes /
contractor and provide delivery route drawings.
trailers etc.
Access Path & temporary storage Provide adequate barricading around the escalator
9.17 Provide access to move the escalator to the
during construction phase wellway from the shaft handover to completion of
installation point.
all works.
Station Civil contractor shall provide temporary
Escalator contractor to co-ordinate with Station
storage at stations as per Escalator contactor
Civil contractor for temporary storage.
requirements
Co-ordinate and Ensure compliance of all relevant Sun Shade and Rain water protection & prevention
Sun Shade &Shade & Rain Water
9.18 items are executed as per approved drawings and from water ingress in escalator to be installed in
protection
pinpoint deficiencies if any for corrective actions. open area.
Provide all signage and passenger instructions as

per specifications and specifications and
9.19 Signage coordinate with civil contractor to finalize location Provide general signage for Escalator
of the Commuter instruction board at both
landings.

Package BH-03
Civil contract to provide requisite space for

Method statement for carrying movement and stacking the Escalators in station
Submit method statement for delivery route/ area.
escalator equipment on floor, roof
9.20 moving / carrying / stacking of escalator material
and arrangement of keeping on Civil contractor shall ensure and provide
on floor with design.
floor / distribution of load. information for clear access path as per Escalator
requirements
Space for Escalator RMS (RMS Shall give details of number, size, and locations of
Provide space for Escalator RMS (RMS
9.21 (computer), SMS system in the equipment, cutouts to be provided and mark these
(computer), SMS system in the SCR.
SCR. on the drawings shared by DDC duly signed.
Drainage systems - Drainage Coordination of drainage pipes and equipment at Interface Lead
pipes inside the track bed crossing areas with other conduits (shafts,
Civil Contractor to provide information to track
recesses, turnout areas). work contractor on the location of drainage man
holes in tunnels sections Provision of requirements
Integration of requirements into the track design.
for drainage systems
10.1 Design Stage Provision of drainage design inside the track bed
Check of drainage design
Supply and installation of track system.
Supply and installation of the drainage system
Construction Stage Installation of drainage system inside track based outside the track Implementation & Testing of the
on provided drainage equipment Protection drainage system
Implementation & Testing Stage
measures of drainage pipes during concreting
work.
Cable routes, ducts and troughs - Integration of requirements for cable routes, ducts
Interface Lead
10.2 tunnel sections and troughs.
Provision of requirements for Systems equipment.
Design of cable routes and troughs

Package BH-03
Design Stage Coordination of requirements for cable routes and

ducts with Civil Contractor(s).
Construction Stage Supply and installation of S&T, PST equipment

including containment including cables and cable
trays. Supply and installation of cable routes and
10.3
troughs
Testing and commissioning of S&T, PST
Implementation & Testing Stage equipment
Interface Lead Civil Contractor shall be responsible for the

electrical safety within their scope. In addition,
RS / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors has a
they shall cooperate with the RS / S&T / PST /
Electrical Safety function as supervisor of EMC including electrical
Track Works Contractors to achieve safety for the
safety. RS / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors
whole system
are responsible for the safe system (including
interfaces to third parties). Elaboration and continually updating of subsystem
earthing and bonding concept, EMC control plan,
Elaboration and continually updating of total
10.4 EMC management plan, EMC design activities
report and test report Submit subsystem
EMC management plan, EMC design activities
documents to the RS / S&T / PST / Track Works
report and test and inspection report.
Contractors for approval.
Submission of the EMC related documents to the
Design Stage Respect the system requirements given by the RS
Civil Contractor.
/ S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors Inform the
Check of the EMC related documents of the Civil RS / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors about
Contractor all relevant facts and measures.

Package BH-03
Design of Systems equipment and design of Implementation of isolated structure axis and
interfaces. location insulation Ensure conductive connection
of construction reinforcement and construction
Investigation and definition of interfaces Giving earthing system.
system requirements to Civil Contractor
Interface – Lead
Traction Power Supply
(TPS/TSS) Provision of requirements for PST equipment Integration of requirements for cables routes and
Coordination of requirements for cable routes, ducts
ducts and rooms for TPS/TSS equipment with
10.5 Civil Contractor Design of cables routes and ducts
Design Stage
Supply and installation of PST equipment Supply and installation of cable routes and
Construction Stage
including cable containment and cables. troughs for System equipment
Implementation & Testing Stage
Testing and commissioning of PST equipment
Station Power Supply (SPS/ASS) Interface – Lead The required type of supply and the quality of the
The power supply for the MEP systems at supply shall be defined by the Civil Contractor -
stations, emergency exits, cut & cover, tunnel MEP for stations and trackside areas
Design Stage sections and other required locations shall be Specification of power requirements and type of
10.6 provided by the PST Contractor power AC, DC, voltages, tolerances and back-up
Provision of requirements for PST equipment time for all MEP equipment
Coordination of requirements for cable routes, Integration of requirements for cables routes and
Construction Stage
ducts and rooms for SPS/ASS equipment with ducts. Design of all cable routes and trough for
Civil Contractor PST contractor and MEP equipment

Package BH-03
Incorporate. the power load requirements of MEP. Supply and installation of cable routes and
troughs for System equipment
Supply and installation of PST equipment
including cable containment and cables. Supply and installation of MEP equipment
including cable containments and cables
Testing and commissioning of PST equipment
and interface test Testing and commissioning of MEP equipment
Implementation & Testing Stage and interface test
SCADA- Building Automation Interface - Lead

System (BAS) Interface
RS / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors to
Design of building automation system and
coordinate with Civil Contractor for SCADA
integration of requirements provided by the RS /
interfaces with the building automation system.
S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors
Provision of SCADA interface requirements for
Design Installation of building automation system
10.7 the building automation system and MEP/BAS to
including cable containments and cables for MEP
Civil Contractor.
equipment.
Construction Connection of the building automation system to
Testing and commissioning of building automation
the SCADA system
system and SCADA interface test
Testing and commissioning of SCADA equipment
Implementation & Testing Stage and AS interface test.
Stray current corrosion protection Interface Lead

of structures including related RS / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors has a Civil Contractor shall be responsible for the
equipment function as supervisor of EMC including electrical electrical safety within their scope. In addition,
10.8
safety. RS / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors they shall cooperate with the RS / S&T / PST /
are responsible for the safe system (including Track Works Contractors to achieve safety for the
interfaces to third parties). whole system

Package BH-03
Elaboration and continually updating of total

Design Stage Elaboration and continually updating of subsystem
report and test and inspection report. earthing and bonding concept, EMC control plan,
Submission of the EMC related documents to the report and test report
Civil Contractor.
Submit subsystem documents to the RS / S&T /
Check of the EMC related documents of the Civil PST / Track Works Contractors for approval.
Contractor
Respect the system requirements given by the RS
Design of Systems equipment and design of / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors
interfaces.
Inform the RS / S&T / PST / Track Works
Investigation and definition of interfaces Contractors about all relevant facts and
measures.
Implementation of isolated structure axis and
Provision of requirements to Civil Contractor (e.g.,
location insulation
Stray current calculation).
Ensure conductive connection of construction
reinforcement and construction earthing system.
Provision and installation of sockets I terminals on
Construction Stage
each end of construction section for control
measurements of stray current.
Realization of measures (e.g. design to, withstand
stray currents).

Package BH-03
Electromagnetic Interference
Elaboration and continually updating of subsystem
(EMI) of structures including Interface - Lead earthing and bonding concept, EMC control plan,
related equipment
Elaboration and continually updating of total EMC management plan, EMC design activities
Design Stage earthing and bonding concept, EMC control plan, report and test report
EMC management plan, EMC design activities Submit subsystem documents to the RS / S&T /
report and test and inspection report. PST / Track Works Contractors for approval.
Submission of the EMC related documents to the Respect the system requirements given by the RS
Civil Contractor. / S&T / PST / Track Works Contractors
Check of the EMC related documents of the Civil Inform the RS / S&T / PST / Track Works
10.9
Contractor Contractors about all relevant facts and
Design of Systems equipment and design of measures.
interfaces. Using of EMl-proofed equipment. Ensure
Investigation and definition of interfaces conductive connection of construction
reinforcement and construction earthing system.
Provision and installation of sockets I terminals on
each end of construction section for control
Provision of requirements to Civil Contractor measurements of stray current.
Construction Stage Realization of measures (e.g., to meet emission
limits and immunization level).
Civil Contractor (UG Stations & Tunnels) Civil Contractor (Elevated)

Package BH-03
Interface – Lead Agree survey and alignment with Tunnel /UG Civil
Trough
Agree survey and alignment with elevated Civil Contractor
Contractor Agree survey and alignment with Tunnel /UG Civil
11.1 Design Stage Agree survey and alignment with elevated Civil Contractor
Contractor Provide requirements for ramp installation (space,
Provide requirements for tunnel installation loads etc.,) Connect the ramp drainage to the
Construction Stage
(space, loads etc.,) trough drainage system
Note:
All secondary cables trays, cable trough raceways, conduits etc, for system equipment’s inside each system rooms shall be in the scope of
respective system project partner. Primary cables trays, cable trough raceways, conduits, clamps, hangers(tunnels) etc up to the entry point in
the wall of each system rooms shall be in the scope of E&M system.

BH03 Vol III Employers Requirements

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BH03 Vol III Employers Requirements

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Madhya Pradesh Metro Rail Corporation Limited

Tender Package: BH-03

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 1 of 398

4.2 Progress Reporting .......................................................................................................... 48

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 2 of 398

7.12 Manufacture, Construction and Installation .................................................................. 74

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 3 of 398

11.3 Site Conditions, Maintenance and Clearance.............................................................. 91

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 4 of 398

15.2 Operations and Maintenance Training Objectives .................................................... 109

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 5 of 398

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 6 of 398

33 Communication and Consultation .....................................................................162

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 7 of 398

40.6 Welding ............................................................................................................................ 179

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 8 of 398

40.38 Health and Safety Penalty & Awards .......................................................................... 225

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 9 of 398

APPENDIX III – ENVIRONMENT MANUAL .................................................................253

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 10 of 398

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 11 of 398

25.6 Operations and Maintenance ....................................................................................... 309

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 12 of 398

1 Contractor’s Organisation and Superintendence

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 13 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.1 * Project Manager of the Contractor with 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 20

C1.2(a) ** Dy Project Manager (Station), with experience in 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 15

C1.2(b) * Dy Project Manager (Viaduct & Launching), with 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 15

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 14 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.2(c) * Dy Project Manager (Casting Yard), with 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 15

C1.3 * Planning Manager, with experience in major 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

C1.4** Civil Construction Manager (Viaduct & 2 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

C1.5 Civil Construction Manager (Stations), 2 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 15 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.6** Civil Construction Manager (Casting Yard), 1 B.E. (Civil) 5 10

C1.7 Civil Construction Engineer (Viaduct & 4 BE (Civil) 3 5

C1.8 Civil construction Engineer (Station) having 6 BE (Civil) 3 5

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 16 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.9 Civil construction Engineer having experience in 2 BE (Civil) 3 5

C1.10 ** Interface Manager will manage and document 1 B.E. (Electrical or 5 10

C1.11 ** Planning Engineer having experienced in civils, / 1 B.E (Civil) 3 8

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 17 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.12 * Geotechnical Manager, with experience in 1 M. Tech (Geotech) or 5 10

C1.13 * Plant & Machinery Manager having experience in 1 B.E. (Mechanical) 5 15

C1.14 ** Design Coordinator experienced in civils, / 1 M (Tech) (Structure) 5 10

C1.15 ** Design Architect, experienced in the planning 1 B. Arch. 5 10

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 18 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.16 Architectural Construction Manager, experienced 1 B. Arch. 5 10

C1.17 * QA Manager, experienced in management of 1 B.E. (Civil) 3 10

C1.18 QA Engineer, experienced in management of 2 BE(Civil) 3 5

C1.19* QC Manager, experienced in management of 1 B.E. (Civil) 3 10

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 19 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.20** QC Engineer, experienced in management of 2 B E (Civil) 3 5

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 20 of 398

Category Specialisation Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

C1.20** Environmental Manager, experienced in 1 B.E./B.Tech with Post 5 12

Volume III – Employer’s Requirements Page 21 of 398